Disclaimer

All
Daslanguage
folgende versions of the für
PDF-Dokument following PDF document for
dieses Fahrzeugmodell this sich
bezieht vehicle model
in allen
relate
The solely toversion
Sprachversionen
following vehicles intended
nur aufofdie for sale
theFahrzeuge,
Owner‘s on the
die für
Manual den German allmarket
deutschen
describes Marktand
models, which
bestimmt
series and
correspond
special to German
sind undequipment
die den regulations.
deutschen
of your Vorschriften entsprechen. Bitte
vehicle. Country-specific wenden
language Sie sich an
variations are
Ihren autorisierten
possible. Mercedes-Benz
Please note Servicestützpunkt,
that your vehicle might not be um equipped
ein gedrucktes
withExemplar
all the
Please
describedcontact
für andere your authorised
Fahrzeugmodelle
functions. Mercedes-Benz
und affects
This also Fahrzeugmodelljahre Service
safety-relevant Centreand
zu erhalten.
systems to obtain
functions.
a printed
Please version
contact forauthorised
your other vehicle models and vehicle
Mercedes-Benz model
dealership years.
if you Thislike
would PDF
document
Dieses
to receive aisprinted
the latest
PDF-Dokument version.
stellt
Owner‘s Possible
die Manual
aktuelle variations
Version
for otherdar. to your
Mögliche
vehicle vehicle
Abweichungen
models mayzu
and vehicle not
be taken
Ihrem
model into account
konkreten
years. Fahrzeugaskönnten
Mercedes-Benz constantlysein,
nicht berücksichtigt updates their vehicles to
da Mercedes-Benz
the
seinestate of the art
Fahrzeuge and introduces
ständig dem neuesten changes
Standinderdesign andanpasst,
Technik equipment.sowiePlease
therefore
The onlinenote
Änderungen that this
in Form
Owner‘s und PDF is
Manual document
Ausstattung in no
vornimmt.
the current way
and replaces
Bitte
validbeachten the
version. Itprinted
Sie daher,
is version
dass
possible that
which was affecting
deviations deliveredyour
dieses PDF-Dokument with yourFall
in keinem vehicle.
specific das gedruckte
vehicle could Exemplar ersetzt,
not be taken intodas mit
account
dem
as Fahrzeug ausgeliefert
Mercedes-Benz wurde.
constantly adapts its vehicles according to the latest
technology and makes changes to the form and the equipment.

Please also read the printed Owner‘s Manual, supplementary documents and
the digital Owner‘s Manual in the vehicle.

Copyright
All rights reserved. All texts, images and graphics are subject to copyright
and other laws for the protection of intellectual property. They may not be
copied or changed for any commercial use or for the purpose of being passed
on nor used on other websites.

Internal use only

 Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz R equipment
Before you first drive off, read this Owner's Man‐ R technical features
ual carefully and familiarise yourself with your The equipment in your vehicle may therefore dif‐
vehicle. For your own safety and a longer vehicle fer from that shown in the descriptions and illus‐
life, follow the instructions and warning notices trations.
in this manual. Disregarding them may lead to
damage to the vehicle or personal injury. The following are integral parts of the vehicle:
R Digital Owner's Manual
The equipment or model designation of your
vehicle may vary according to: R Printed Owner's Manual
R model R Service Booklet
R order R Equipment-dependent Supplements
R national version Keep these documents in the vehicle at all
R availability times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all of
the documents on to the new owner.
The illustrations in this manual show a left-hand
drive vehicle. On right-hand drive vehicles, the
layout of components and controls differs
accordingly.
Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating its vehi‐
cles to the state of the art.
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to
introduce changes in the following areas:
2135842504Z102
R design

2135842504Z102
2 Contents

Copyright ...................................................... 28 Using the memory function ........................ 107

At a glance .................................................... 6 Stowage areas ............................................ 108
Cockpit ........................................................... 6 Cup holders ................................................ 123
Warning and indicator lamps ........................ 10 Occupant safety ......................................... 30 Ashtray and cigarette lighter ....................... 125
Overhead control panel ................................ 14 Restraint system ........................................... 30 Sockets ....................................................... 126
Door control panel and seat adjustment ....... 16 Seat belts ..................................................... 32 Wireless charging of the mobile phone
Emergencies and breakdowns ...................... 18 Airbags ......................................................... 36 and connection with the exterior aerial ...... 128
PRE-SAFE® system ....................................... 43 Fitting/removing floor mats ....................... 130
Digital Owner's Manual ............................. 20 Children in the vehicle .................................. 45
Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual .......... 20 Pets in the vehicle ........................................ 63
Light and sight .......................................... 131
Exterior lighting ........................................... 131
General notes ............................................. 21 Opening and closing .................................. 64 Interior lighting ........................................... 138
Protection of the environment ...................... 21 Key ............................................................... 64 Changing bulbs (only for vehicles with
Take-back of end-of-life vehicles ................... 21 Doors ............................................................ 68 halogen headlamps) .................................... 139
Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts ....................... 22 Load compartment ....................................... 73 Windscreen wipers and windscreen
Owner's Manual ........................................... 23 Roller sunblinds ............................................ 79 washer system ............................................ 141
Operating safety ........................................... 23 Side windows ............................................... 79 Mirrors ........................................................ 144
Declaration of Conformity ............................. 24 Sliding sunroof ............................................. 83 Operating the sun visors ............................. 147
Diagnostics connection ................................ 26 Anti-theft protection ..................................... 88 Infrared reflective windscreen .................... 147
Qualified specialist workshop ....................... 26
Vehicle registration ....................................... 27 Seats and stowing ..................................... 90 Climate control ........................................ 149
Correct use of the vehicle ............................. 27 Correct driver's seat position ....................... 90 Overview of climate control systems .......... 149
Implied warranty ........................................... 27 Seats ............................................................ 91 Operating the climate control system ......... 150
QR code for rescue card ............................... 27 Steering wheel ............................................ 104
Vehicle data storage ..................................... 27
 Contents 3

Operation ................................................... 267 Battery (vehicle) ......................................... 396

Driving and parking .................................. 161 Using LINGUATRONIC effectively ............... 269 Tow starting or towing away ....................... 400
Driving ......................................................... 161 Essential commands .................................. 269 Electrical fuses ........................................... 406
DYNAMIC SELECT switch ............................ 168
Manual transmission .................................. 170
Automatic transmission .............................. 171 Multimedia system .................................. 278 Wheels and tyres ..................................... 409
Refuelling .................................................... 175 Overview and operation .............................. 278 Noise or unusual handling characteris‐
Parking ....................................................... 180 System settings .......................................... 286 tics ............................................................. 409
Driving and driving safety systems ............. 188 Navigation .................................................. 294 Regular checking of wheels and tyres ........ 409
Trailer hitch ................................................. 247 Telephone ................................................... 317 Notes on snow chains ................................ 409
Bicycle rack ................................................ 251 Online and Internet functions ..................... 339 Tyre pressure .............................................. 410
Media ......................................................... 347 Wheel change .............................................. 417
Radio .......................................................... 359 Emergency spare wheel .............................. 427
Instrument Display and on-board
TV ............................................................... 362
computer .................................................. 254 Sound ......................................................... 370
Instrument display overview ....................... 254 Technical data .......................................... 429
Overview of the buttons on the steering Notes on technical data .............................. 429
wheel .......................................................... 255 Maintenance and care ............................. 372 On-board electronics .................................. 429
Operating the on-board computer .............. 256 ASSYST PLUS service interval display ......... 372 Vehicle identification plate, VIN and
Displays in the multifunction display .......... 257 Engine compartment .................................. 373 engine number ............................................ 431
Adjusting the instrument lighting ............... 258 Cleaning and care ....................................... 380 Operating fluids .......................................... 433
Menus and submenus ................................ 258 Vehicle data ................................................ 441
Head-up Display ......................................... 265 Trailer hitch ................................................ 442
Breakdown assistance ............................ 388
Emergency .................................................. 388
LINGUATRONIC ......................................... 267 Flat tyre ...................................................... 390
Operating safety ......................................... 267
4 Contents

Display messages and warning/indi‐

cator lamps .............................................. 445
Display messages ....................................... 445
Warning and indicator lamps ...................... 501

Index .......................................................... 518

6 At a glance – Cockpit

Left-hand drive vehicle

 At a glance – Cockpit 7

1 Steering wheel gearshift paddle → 173 G DYNAMIC SELECT switch → 169

2 Combination switch → 133 H PASSENGER AIRBAG indicator lamp → , 41
3 DIRECT SELECT lever → 171 I Control panel for multimedia system → 255
4 Display (multimedia system) → 279 J To adjust the steering wheel → 105
5 Start/Stop button → 162 K Control panel for on-board computer → 255
6 Control panel for multimedia system → 279 L Cruise control lever → 200
7 Climate control systems → 150 M To unlock the bonnet → 374
8 Glove box → 110 N Electric parking brake → 184
9 Hazard warning lights → 134 O Light switch → 131
A Stowage compartment → 109 P Control panel for:
B Controls for the multimedia system → 279 Steering Pilot → 212
C To lower the rear seat head restraints → 97 Active Lane Keeping Assist → 246
D ECO start/stop function → 167 Parking Assist PARKTRONIC → 220
E Parking Pilot → 229 Head-up display → 266
F Setting the vehicle level → 216
8 At a glance – Cockpit

Right-hand drive vehicle

 At a glance – Cockpit 9

1 Display (multimedia system) → 279 C Cruise control lever → 200

2 Steering wheel gearshift paddle → 173 D Hazard warning lights → 134
3 Combination switch → 133 E DYNAMIC SELECT switch → 169
4 DIRECT SELECT lever → 171 F Setting the vehicle level → 216
5 Control panel for: G Parking Pilot → 229
Steering Pilot → 212 H ECO start/stop function → 167
Active Lane Keeping Assist → 246 I To lower the rear seat head restraints → 97
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC → 220 J Controls for the multimedia system → 279
Head-up display → 266 K Stowage compartment → 109
6 Light switch → 131 L Control panel for multimedia system → 279
7 Electric parking brake → 184 M Glove box → 110
8 To unlock the bonnet → 374 N Climate control systems → 150
9 Control panel for multimedia system → 255 N PASSENGER AIRBAG indicator lamp → , 41
A To adjust the steering wheel → 105 P Start/Stop button → 162
B Control panel for on-board computer → 255
10 At a glance – Warning and indicator lamps

Instrument display (standard)

 At a glance – Warning and indicator lamps 11

1 Speedometer → 254 G J Brakes (yellow)

2 ÷ ESP® H ! Electric parking brake (yellow)
3 #! Turn signal light → 133 I 6 Restraint system → 31
4 Ð Steering assistance malfunction J ü Seat belt is not fastened
5 Multifunction display → 257 K j Trailer hitch is not operational or is swivel‐
ling
6 ! ABS malfunction
L T Standing lights → 131
7 ; Engine diagnosis
→ M Fuel level display
8 Rev counter 254
8 Fuel reserve with fuel filler cap location
9 % Diesel engine: preglow indicator
A ! Electric parking brake applied (red) N K Main beam → 133
B J Brakes (red) O L Dipped beam → 131
C # Electrical fault P R Rear fog light → 132
D · Distance warning Q h Tyre pressure monitoring system
E ? Coolant too hot/cold R å ESP® OFF
F Coolant temperature display → 254
12 At a glance – Warning and indicator lamps

Instrument display in the widescreen cockpit

 At a glance – Warning and indicator lamps 13

1 Speedometer → 254 D J Brakes (red)

2 ü Seat belt is not fastened E Fuel level display
3 #! Turn signal light → 133 F 8 Fuel reserve with fuel filler cap location
→ indicator
4 Multifunction display 257
G R Rear fog light → 132
5 Rev counter → 254
H 6 Restraint system → 31
6 å ESP® OFF
I % Diesel engine: preglow
÷ ESP®
J ; Engine diagnosis
7 K Main beam → 133
K J Brakes (yellow)
L Dipped beam → 131
L ! Electric parking brake applied (red)
T Standing lights → 131
M h Tyre pressure monitoring system
8 ? Coolant too hot/cold
N ! ABS malfunction
9 Coolant temperature display → 254
O ! Electric parking brake (yellow)
A · Distance warning
P j Trailer hitch is not operational or is swivel‐
B Ð Steering assistance malfunction ling
C # Electrical fault
14 At a glance – Overhead control panel
 At a glance – Overhead control panel 15

1 Sun visors → 147 7 u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off → 138
2 Breakdown assistance call button (Mercedes me → 328 8 p Switches the right-hand reading lamp → 138
connect) on/off
3 p Switches the left-hand reading lamp → 138 9 MB Info call button (Mercedes me connect) → 328
on/off →
A Spectacles compartment 110
4 | Switches the automatic lighting control → 138
B 3 Opens/closes the panoramic sliding sun‐ → 83
on/off
roof
5 SOS emergency call system (Mercedes-Benz → 329
Opens/closes the roller sunblinds → 83
emergency call system)
→ C Inside rearview mirror → 145
6 c Switches the front interior lighting on/off 138
16 At a glance – Door control panel and seat adjustment
 At a glance – Door control panel and seat adjustment 17

1 Adjusts the seats electrically → 94 C W Opens/closes the rear left side window → 79
2 Switches the seat heater on/off → 100 D W Opens/closes the left side window → 79
3 Switches the seat ventilation on/off → 101 E Opens the door → 68
4 Adjusts the front passenger seat from the driv‐ → 94 F Sets the memory function → 107
er's seat →
G Adjusts the seat fore-and-aft position 93
5 &% Locks/unlocks the vehicle → 69
H Adjusts the seat cushion length → 93
6 Folds the ball neck of the trailer hitch in or out → 248
I Adjusts the 4-way lumbar support → 95
7 Opens/closes the tailgate → 73
J Seat adjustment using the multimedia system → 97
8 Adjusts and folds the outside mirrors out/in → 144
K Adjusts the head restraints → 95
electrically
→ L Adjusts the seat cushion inclination → 93
9 W Opens/closes the right side window 79
→ M Adjusts the seat height → 93
A W Opens/closes the rear right side window 79
N Adjusts the seat backrest inclination → 93
B Child safety lock for the rear side windows → 63
18 At a glance – Emergencies and breakdowns
 At a glance – Emergencies and breakdowns 19

What to do in the event of an accident 9 Fire extinguisher → 389

1 QR code for accessing the rescue card → 27 A Fuel filler flap with instruction labels for tyre → 175
→ pressure, fuel type and QR code for accessing
2 Safety vests 388 the rescue card
3 Button for the SOS emergency call system and → 329 →
B Tow-starting and towing away 401
breakdown assistance
C Warning triangle → 388
4 Checking and topping up operating fluids → 433
D Tyre-change tool kit → 421
5 Tow-starting and towing away → 401
E TIREFIT kit → 392
6 Flat tyre → 390
F First-aid kit (soft sided) → 389
7 Starting assistance → 398
8 Hazard warning lights → 134
20 Digital Owner's Manual

Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual For safety reasons, the Digital Owner's Manual is
deactivated while driving.
Multimedia system:
, Vehicle . Õ Owner's Manual
The Digital Owner's Manual contains the follow‐
ing menu items:
R Search: allows you to search precisely for
keywords.
R Quick start: provides you with important
information so that you can start using your
vehicle immediately.
R Tips: provides tips on how to use your vehicle 1 Picture
in certain situations. 2 Menu
R Highlights: shows you vehicle highlights 3 Navigation window
using pictures and animations.
# Select a menu item. R Bookmarks: provides you with a list of all the Some sections of the Digital Owner's Manual,
bookmarks you have stored yourself. such as warning notes, can be made visible by
In addition, you can also call up the Owner's highlighting and pressing them.
Manual within a main function (e.g. via Informa- % The Owner's Manual can also be found in the
tion on phone). Mercedes-Benz Guides App in all common
The Digital Owner's Manual describes the func‐ App Stores.
tion and operation of:
R the vehicle
R the multimedia system
 General notes 21

Protection of the environment # Always have service work carried out at Take-back of end-of-life vehicles
a qualified specialist workshop.
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental EU countries only:
damage due to operating conditions and Personal driving style: Mercedes-Benz will take back your end-of-life
personal driving style vehicle for environment-friendly disposal in
# Do not depress the accelerator pedal
accordance with the European Union (EU) End-
The pollutant emission of your vehicle is when starting the engine. of-Life Vehicles Directive.
directly related to the way you operate your # Do not warm up the engine while the
A network of vehicle take-back points and dis‐
vehicle. vehicle is stationary. mantlers has been established for you to return
You can help to protect the environment by # Drive carefully and maintain a suitable your vehicle. You can leave it at any of these
operating your vehicle in an environmentally- distance from the vehicle in front. points free of charge. This makes an important
responsible manner. Please observe the fol‐ # Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration contribution to closing the recycling circle and
lowing recommendations on operating condi‐ and braking. conserving resources.
tions and personal driving style. # Change gear in good time and use each For further information about the recycling and
Operating conditions: gear only up to Ô of its maximum disposal of end-of-life vehicles, and the take-
# Make sure that the tyre pressure is cor‐ engine speed. back conditions, please visit the national
rect. # Switch off the engine in stationary traf‐
Mercedes-Benz website for your country.
# Do not carry any unnecessary weight fic.
(e.g. roof luggage racks once you no # Keep an eye on the vehicle's fuel con‐
longer need them). sumption.
# Adhere to the service intervals.
A regularly serviced vehicle will contrib‐
ute to environmental protection.
22 General notes

Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts R Door sills specifically approved for your vehicle model for
their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite
R Seats ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage caused by the non-use of recon‐ R Cockpit unable to assess other parts. Mercedes-Benz
ditioned components. R Instrument cluster therefore accepts no responsibility for the use of
such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles, even if
Daimler AG offers recycled reconditioned R Centre console
they have been officially approved or independ‐
components and parts with the same quality # Do not install accessories such as audio ently approved by a testing centre.
as new parts. The same entitlement from the systems in these areas. Certain parts are only officially approved for
implied warranty is valid as for new parts. installation or modification if they comply with
# Do not carry out repairs or welding.
# Use recycled reconditioned compo‐ legal requirements. All Mercedes-Benz Genuine‐
nents and parts from Daimler AG.
# Have accessories retrofitted at a quali‐
fied specialist workshop. Parts meet the approval requirements. The use
of non-approved parts may invalidate the vehi‐
* NOTE Impairment of the operating effi‐ You could jeopardise the operating safety of your cle's general operating permit.
ciency of the restraint systems from vehicle if you use parts, tyres and wheels as well This is the case in the following situations:
installing accessories or from repairs or as accessories relevant to safety which have not R A change of the vehicle type from that for
welding been approved by Mercedes-Benz. This could which the vehicle's general operating permit
Airbags and seat belt tensioners, as well as lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant systems, was granted.
control units and sensors for the restraint e.g. the brake system. Only use Mercedes-Benz
R If other road users could be endangered.
systems, may be installed in the following GenuineParts or parts of equal quality. Only use
tyres, wheels and accessory parts that have R If the exhaust gas or noise levels are
areas of your vehicle: adversely affected.
been specifically approved for your vehicle
R Doors model. Always specify the vehicle identification number
R Door pillars Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts and conver‐ (VIN) (→ page 431) when ordering Mercedes-
sion parts and accessory parts that have been Benz GenuineParts.
 General notes 23

Owner's Manual Operating safety # Remove trapped plants or other flam‐

This Owner's Manual describes all models and mable material, in particular.
all standard and optional equipment available for & WARNING Risk of accident due to mal‐ # If there is damage, consult a qualified
your vehicle at the time of this Owner's Manual functions or system failures specialist workshop immediately.
going to press. Country-specific differences are If you do not have the prescribed service/
possible. Note that your vehicle may not be fit‐ maintenance work or any required repairs & WARNING Risk of accident or injury due
ted with all features described. This is also the carried out, this could result in malfunctions to incorrect modifications on electronic
case for systems and functions relevant to or system failures. component parts
safety. Therefore, the equipment on your vehicle # Always have the prescribed service/
may differ from that in the descriptions and illus‐ Modification to electronic components, their
maintenance work as well any required software or wiring could impair their function
trations. repairs carried out at a qualified spe‐
The original purchase contract documentation and/or the function of other networked com‐
cialist workshop. ponent parts. In particular, systems relevant
for your vehicle contains a list of all of the sys‐
tems in your vehicle. to safety could also be affected.
& WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable As a result, these may no longer function
Should you have any questions concerning materials on hot parts of the exhaust
equipment and operation, please consult a properly and/or jeopardise the operating
system safety of the vehicle.
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or # Never tamper with the wiring and elec‐
The Owner's Manual and Service Booklet are twigs may ignite if they come into contact
important documents and should be kept in the tronic component parts or their soft‐
with hot parts of the exhaust system. ware.
vehicle.
# When driving on unpaved roads or off- # You should have all work on electrical
road, regularly check the vehicle under‐ and electronic components carried out
side. at a qualified specialist workshop.
24 General notes

If you modify the on-board electronics, the gen‐ the underbody panelling. If these materials Wireless vehicle components
eral operating permit is rendered invalid. come into contact with hot parts on the The following information applies to all compo‐
exhaust system, they may catch fire. nents of the vehicle and the information systems
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle
# Have the vehicle checked and repaired and communication devices integrated into the
Damage to the vehicle may occur in the fol‐ immediately at a qualified specialist vehicle which receive and/or transmit radio
lowing cases: workshop. waves:
R The vehicle becomes grounded, e.g. on a or The components of this vehicle that receive
high kerb or an unpaved road. # If driving safety is impaired while con‐ and/or transmit radio waves are compliant with
R The vehicle is driven too fast over an tinuing your journey, pull over and stop the basic requirements and all other relevant
obstacle, e.g. a kerb, speed bump or pot‐ the vehicle immediately, paying atten‐ conditions of Directive 1999/5/EC. You can
hole. tion to road and traffic conditions, and obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz
contact a qualified specialist workshop. Service Centre.
R A heavy object strikes the underbody or
parts of the chassis.
Jack
In situations such as this, the body, the Declaration of Conformity
underbody, chassis parts, wheels or tyres Copy and translation of the original declaration
could be damaged without the damage being Electromagnetic compatibility of conformity:
visible. Components damaged in this way The electromagnetic compatibility of the vehicle EC declaration of conformity
can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an components has been checked and certified 1.
accident, no longer withstand the strain they according to the currently valid version of Regu‐
are designed to. lation ECE-R 10. The signatory, as a representative
If the underbody panelling is damaged, flam‐ Manufacturer:
mable materials such as leaves, grass or BRANO a.s.
twigs can gather between the underbody and 74741 Hradec nad Moravicí, Opavská 1000,
 General notes 25

Czech Republic Reference data of the harmonised standards or TIREFIT kit

ID No.: 64-387-5933 specifications
Copy and translation of the original declaration
VAT Reg. No.: CZ64-387-5933 A) ISO 4063, EN ISO 14341-A, DBL 7382.20, of conformity:
MBN 10435, AS 2693
declares, as our sole responsibility, that the EC declaration of conformity
product: B) ISO 4063, ISO 14341-A, DBL 7392.10, MBN
In accordance with EC directive 2006/42/EC
10435
2. a) We hereby declare that the product
C) DBL 7392.10, DBL 8230.10
Description: Product designation: Daimler electric air pump
The technical documentation of the product is
Jack stored at the manufacturer's plant. Representa‐ Model designation: 0851ve, DT/UW 200046
Type, number: tive for the compilation of the technical docu‐ MB part no.: A 000 583 8200
A) A 164 580 02 18, A 166 580 01 18 mentation: Director of the Technical Department complies with the following relevant regulations:
Brano a.s.
B) A 240 580 00 18 2004/108/EC
4.
C) A 639 580 02 18 Applied harmonised standards, in particular:
Hradec nad Moravicí
Manufacture year: 2015 DIN EN 55014-1
City
Fulfils all relevant conditions DIN EN 55014-2:2009-06
5.
Directive No. 2006/42/EC Manufacturer: Dunlop Tech GmbH
05.05.2015
b) Address: Birkenhainerstrasse 77, 63450 Hanau,
Date Germany
Description and purpose of use:
Signed by Authorised representative: IMS dept.
The jack is only intended for raising the specified
vehicle in accordance with the operating instruc‐ Director of Quality Date: June 2015
tions affixed to the jack.
Signature: IMS-AM, IMS-AE-L
3.
26 General notes

Diagnostics connection This jeopardises the operating and road Connecting equipment to the diagnostics con‐
safety of the vehicle. nection can lead to emissions monitoring infor‐
The diagnostics connection is only intended for mation being reset, for example. This may lead
the connection of diagnostic devices at a quali‐ # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of
fied specialist workshop. so that they cannot get into the driver's the next emissions inspection during the main
footwell. inspection.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to con‐ # Always fit the floor mats securely and
necting devices to the diagnostics con‐ as prescribed in order to ensure that
nection there is always sufficient room for the Qualified specialist workshop
If you connect equipment to a diagnostics pedals. A qualified specialist workshop has the neces‐
connection in the vehicle, it may affect the # Do not use loose floor mats and do not sary special skills, tools and qualifications to
operation of vehicle systems. place floor mats on top of one another. correctly carry out any necessary work on your
As a result, the operating safety of the vehi‐ vehicle. This particularly applies to work relevant
cle could be affected. to safety.
* NOTE Battery discharging from using
# Only connect equipment to a diagnos‐ devices connected to the diagnostics Always have the following work carried out on
tics connection in the vehicle which is connection your vehicle at a qualified specialist workshop:
approved for your vehicle by Mercedes- Using devices at the diagnostics connection R Work relevant to safety
Benz. drains the battery. R Service and maintenance work
# Check the charge level of the battery. R Repair work
& WARNING Risk of accident due to
# If the charge level is low, charge the R Modifications, installations and conversions
objects in the driver's footwell
battery, e.g. by driving a considerable R Work on electronic component parts
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede distance.
pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. Mercedes‑Benz recommends a Mercedes‑Benz
service centre.
 General notes 27

Vehicle registration Correct use of the vehicle # Follow the instructions in this manual
Mercedes-Benz may ask its service centres to If you remove any warning stickers, you or others on proper operation of your vehicle as
carry out technical inspections on certain vehi‐ could fail to recognise certain dangers. Leave well as on possible vehicle damage.
cles. The quality or safety of the vehicle is warning stickers in position.
improved as a result of the inspection. Observe the following information when driving
Mercedes-Benz can only inform you about vehi‐ your vehicle: QR code for rescue card
cle checks if Mercedes-Benz has your registra‐ R the safety notes in this manual
The QR code is secured in the fuel filler flap and
tion data. on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event
R the vehicle technical data of an accident, rescue services can use the QR
It is possible that your vehicle has not yet been
registered in your name in the following cases: R traffic rules and regulations code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card
R laws and safety standards pertaining to for your vehicle. The current rescue card con‐
R If your vehicle was not purchased at an tains the most important information about your
authorised specialist dealer. motor vehicles
vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the routing of the
R If your vehicle has not yet been examined at electric lines.
a Mercedes-Benz service centre. Implied warranty Further information can be obtained at http://
It is advisable to register your vehicle with a www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle arising
Mercedes-Benz service centre.
from culpable violation of these operat‐
Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible ing instructions. Vehicle data storage
about any change in address or vehicle owner‐
ship. You can do this at a Mercedes-Benz service Damage to the vehicle can arise from culpa‐ Data acquisition
centre, for example. ble violation of these operating instructions. A wide range of electronic components in your
This damage is not covered either by the vehicle contain data memories.
Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the
New or Used-Vehicle Warranty.
28 General notes

These data memories temporarily or perma‐ This data is of an exclusively technical nature After a fault has been rectified, the information
nently store technical information about: and can be used to: is deleted from the fault memory or is continu‐
R the vehicle's operating state R assist in detecting and rectifying faults and ally overwritten.
R events defects When operating the vehicle, situations are con‐
R analyse vehicle functions, e.g. after an acci‐ ceivable in which this technical data, in connec‐
R faults
dent tion with other information (if necessary, after
In general, the technical information documents consultation with an authorised expert), could be
R optimise vehicle functions
the state of a component part, a module, a sys‐ traced to a person.
tem or the surroundings. The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's Examples include:
These include, for example: movements. R accident reports
R operating conditions of system components, When your vehicle is serviced, technical informa‐ R damage to the vehicle
e.g. fluid levels tion can be read from the event data memory
and fault data memory. R witness statements
R the vehicle's status messages and those of
its individual components, e.g. number of Services include, for example: Further additional functions that have been con‐
wheel revolutions/speed, deceleration, lat‐ R repair services tractually agreed upon with the customer allow
eral acceleration, accelerator pedal position certain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehi‐
R service processes
cle as well. The additional functions include, for
R malfunctions and defects in important sys‐ R warranty events example, vehicle location in case of an emer‐
tem components, e.g. lights, brakes gency.
R vehicle reactions and operating conditions in The vehicle is read out by employees of the
special driving situations, e.g. airbag deploy‐ service network (including the manufacturer)
ment, intervention of stability control sys‐ using special diagnostic devices. You can obtain Copyright
tems more information there, if required.
Information on free and open source software
R ambient conditions, e.g. outside temperature licences for your vehicle's software can be found
 General notes 29

on the data storage medium in your vehicle

document wallet and on the Internet together
with updates:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource
30 Occupant safety

Restraint system In order for the restraint system to provide pro‐ Reduced restraint system protection
tection, each vehicle occupant must:
Protection by the restraint system & WARNING Risk of injury or death from
R Have their seat belt fastened correctly.
The restraint system includes the following: R Sit in an almost upright seat position with
modifications to the restraint system
R Seat belt system their back against the seat backrest. The restraint system can no longer function
R Airbags R Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if pos‐ correctly after alterations have been made.
R Child restraint system sible. The restraint system may then not protect
R Child seat securing system R Always be secured in an additional restraint the vehicle occupants as intended by failing
system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles in an accident or triggering unexpectedly, for
In the event of an accident, the restraint system if they are under 1.50 m tall. example
can: # Never alter the parts of the restraint
R Reduce the risk of vehicle occupants coming
However, no system available today can com‐ system.
into contact with parts of the vehicle interior. pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities in every
# Never tamper with the wiring or any
accident situation. In particular, the seat belt
R Reduce the forces to which the vehicle occu‐ and airbag generally do not protect against electronic component parts or their
pants are subjected. objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. software.
A seat belt can only provide the best level of pro‐ It is also not possible to completely rule out the
risk of injury caused by the airbag deploying. If it is necessary to modify the vehicle to accom‐
tection if it is worn correctly. Depending on the modate a person with disabilities, contact a
detected accident situation, seat belt tensioners qualified specialist workshop.
and/or airbags supplement the protection
offered by a correctly worn seat belt. Seat belt Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use
tensioners and/or airbags are not deployed in seat belts which have been approved specifically
every accident. for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
 Occupant safety 31

Restraint system functionality may affect the seat belt tensioner or airbag, take place in good time at the start of the colli‐
for example. sion.
When the ignition is switched on, a system self-
test is performed, during which the 6 # Have the restraint system checked and Factors which can only be seen and measured
restraint system warning lamp lights up. It goes repaired immediately at a qualified spe‐ after a collision has occurred cannot play a deci‐
out no later than a few seconds after the vehicle cialist workshop. sive role in airbag deployment, nor do they pro‐
is started. The components of the restraint sys‐ vide an indication of airbag deployment.
tem are then functional. The vehicle may be deformed significantly with‐
Function of the restraint system in an acci‐ out an airbag being deployed. This is the case if
dent only parts which are relatively easily deformed
Restraint system malfunction
How the restraint system works is determined by are affected and the rate of vehicle deceleration
R The 6 restraint system warning lamp the severity of the impact detected and the type is not high. Conversely, an airbag may be
does not light up when the ignition is of accident anticipated: deployed even though the vehicle suffers only
switched on. minor deformation. If very rigid vehicle parts
R Frontal impact such as longitudinal members are hit, for exam‐
R The 6 restraint system warning lamp
lights up continuously or repeatedly during a R Rear impact ple, this may result in sufficiently high levels of
journey. R Side impact vehicle deceleration.
R Rollover
& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury
due to a malfunction in the restraint sys‐ The activation thresholds for the components of
tem the restraint system are determined based on
the evaluation of the sensor values measured at
If the restraint system is malfunctioning, various points in the vehicle. This process is pre-
restraint system components may be trig‐ emptive in nature. The triggering/deployment of
gered unintentionally or might not be trig‐ the components of the restraint system should
gered at all in the event of an accident. This
32 Occupant safety

The components of the restraint system can the journey, that the status of the front breathing difficulties to persons suffering
be activated or deployed independently of passenger airbag is correct (→ page 41). from asthma or other pulmonary conditions.
each other: Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle
& WARNING Rick of burns from hot airbag immediately or open the window in order to
Component Detected deploy‐
ment situation components prevent breathing difficulties.
The airbag parts are hot after an airbag has
Seat belt tensioners Frontal impact, rear been deployed.
impact, side impact, Seat belts
# Do not touch the airbag parts.
rollover Protection provided by the seat belt
# Have a deployed airbag replaced at a
Driver's airbag, front Frontal impact qualified specialist workshop as soon Always fasten your seat belt correctly before
passenger airbag as possible. starting a journey. A seat belt can only provide
the best level of protection if it is worn correctly.
Knee airbag Frontal impact
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
Side impact airbag Side impact vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
after an accident. Take this into account, partic‐ incorrectly fastened seat belt
Window airbag Side impact, rollover, ularly if a seat belt tensioner was triggered or an If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it can‐
frontal impact airbag was deployed. not perform its intended protective function.
PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side impact If the seat belt tensioners are triggered or an air‐ In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt
Side bag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and a can also cause injuries, for example, in the
small amount of powder may also be released: event of an accident or when braking or
The front passenger airbag can only be deployed R The bang will not generally affect your hear‐ changing direction suddenly.
in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ing.
indicator lamp is off. If the front passenger seat R In general, the powder released is not haz‐
is occupied, make sure, both before and during ardous to health but may cause short-term
 Occupant safety 33

# Always ensure that all vehicle occu‐ dren to travel sitting on the lap of another # Adjust the seat properly before begin‐
pants have their seat belts fastened vehicle occupant. ning your journey.
correctly and are sitting properly. R Never secure objects with a seat belt if the # Always ensure that the seat backrest is
seat belt is also being used by one of the in an almost vertical position and that
R The seat belt must: vehicle's occupants. Always observe the the shoulder section of your seat belt is
- Not be twisted and must fit tightly and instructions for loading the vehicle when routed across the centre of your shoul‐
snugly across your body. securing objects, luggage or loads der.
(→ page 108).
- Be routed across the centre of your
shoulder and as low down across your If children are travelling in the vehicle, be sure to & WARNING Risk of injury or death when
hips as possible. observe the instructions and safety notes on additional restraint systems are not used
R The shoulder section of the seat belt should "Children in the vehicle" (→ page 45). for persons with a smaller build
not touch your neck nor be routed under Persons under 1.50 m tall cannot wear the
your arm or behind your back. Reduced protection seat belt correctly without a suitable addi‐
R Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter tional restraint system.
coat. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it can‐
R Push the lap belt down as far as possible incorrect seat position not perform its intended protective function.
across your hips and pull tight with the shoul‐ The seat belt does not offer the intended In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt
der section of the belt. Never route the lap level of protection if you have not moved the can also cause injuries, for example, in the
belt across your abdomen. seat backrest to an almost vertical position. event of an accident or when braking or
Never route the seat belt across sharp, poin‐ changing direction suddenly.
R When braking or in the event of an accident,
ted, abrasive or fragile objects. you could slide underneath the seat belt and # Always secure persons under 1.50 m

R Only one person should use each seat belt at sustain abdominal or neck injuries, for exam‐ tall in a suitable restraint system.
any one time. Never allow babies and chil‐ ple.
34 Occupant safety

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to R If the seat belt buckle is damaged or Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use
blocked seat belt buckle or seat belt extremely dirty seat belts which have been approved specifically
anchorage for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
R If the seat belt tensioners, seat belt
Objects next to the front seat that block the anchorages or seat belt retractors have & WARNING Risk of injury or death from
seat belt buckle or the moving seat belt been modified deployed pyrotechnic seat belt tension‐
anchorage on the front seat impair the func‐ Seat belts may be damaged in an accident, ers
tion of the seat belt tensioners. although the damage may not be visible, e.g. Pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners that have
The seat belt tensioners may not function as due to splinters of glass. been deployed are no longer operational and
intended and the seat belt may no longer Modified or damaged seat belts may tear or are unable to perform their intended protec‐
provide the intended protection. fail, e.g. in an accident. tive function.
# Before starting the journey, make sure # Therefore, have deployed pyrotechnic
Modified seat belt tensioners could acciden‐
that there are no objects around the tally trigger or fail to function as intended. seat belt tensioners immediately
seat belt buckle or between the front replaced at a qualified specialist work‐
# Never modify the seat belts, seat belt
seat and door. shop.
tensioners, seat belt anchorages or seat
belt retractors.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
# Make sure that the seat belts are
damaged or modified seat belts vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop
undamaged, not worn and clean. after an accident.
Seat belts cannot provide protection in the # Always have the seat belts checked
following situations: immediately after an accident at a
R If the seat belts are damaged, modified, qualified specialist workshop.
extremely dirty, bleached or dyed
 Occupant safety 35

* NOTE Damage caused by trapping the Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: If the front seat belt
seat belt is not pulled tight across your body, the seat belt
adjustment may automatically apply a certain
If an unused seat belt is not fully retracted, it tightening force. Do not hold the seat belt tightly
may become trapped in the door or in the while it is adjusting. You can activate and deacti‐
seat mechanism. vate the seat belt adjustment function using the
# Always ensure that an unused seat belt multimedia system.
is fully retracted.
* NOTE Deployment of the seat belt ten‐
sioner when the front passenger seat is
Fastening and adjusting seat belts unoccupied
If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, the If the seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat
seat belt retractor locks. The seat belt strap can‐ belt buckle of the front passenger seat and
not be pulled out any further. the front passenger seat is unoccupied, the
seat belt tensioner may deploy in the event
# Always engage seat belt tongue 2 of the of an accident.
seat belt into seat belt buckle 1 of the cor‐ # Only one person should use each seat
responding seat. belt at any one time.
# Press and hold the seat belt outlet release
and slide the seat belt outlet into the desired Releasing the seat belts
position.
# Let go of the belt outlet release and ensure # Press the release button in the seat belt
that the seat belt outlet locks in position. buckle and guide the seat belt back with the
seat belt tongue.
36 Occupant safety

Activating or deactivating seat belt adjust‐ Airbags

ment via the multimedia system
Overview of airbags
Multimedia system:
, Vehicle . î Vehicle settings . Belt

adjustment
# Activate O or deactivate ª the function.

Seat belt warning for the driver and front

passenger
The rear seat belt status display informs you
The ü seat belt warning lamp in the Instru‐ which rear seat belt is not fastened.
ment Display is a reminder that all vehicle occu‐ You can immediately dismiss the rear seat belt
pants must wear their seat belts correctly. status display using the back button on the left- 1 Knee airbag
In addition, an acoustic warning tone may sound. hand side of the steering wheel (→ page 256). 2 Driver's airbag
As soon as the driver and front passenger fasten 3 Front passenger airbag
their seat belts, the seat belt warning goes out. 4 Window airbag
5 Side impact airbag
Rear seat belt status display
The installation location of an airbag is identified
The rear seat belt status display is only available by the AIRBAG symbol.
for certain countries.
 Occupant safety 37

When activated, an airbag can provide addi‐ * NOTE Important points to remember if & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
tional protection for the respective vehicle the front passenger seat is unoccupied incorrect seat position
occupant.
In an accident, the components of the If you deviate from the correct seat position,
AIRBAG Potential protection for the airbag cannot perform its intended pro‐
restraint system may deploy unnecessarily
… tective function and deployment may even
on the front passenger side if:
Knee airbag Thigh, knee and lower leg R There are heavy objects on the front cause further injuries.
passenger seat. To avoid hazardous situations, always make
Driver's airbag, Head and ribcage sure that all vehicle occupants:
front passenger R The seat belt tongue is engaged in the
seat belt buckle of the front passenger R Have their seat belt fastened correctly,
airbag
seat and the front passenger seat is including pregnant women.
Window airbag Head unoccupied. R Are seated properly and keep as far away
Side impact air‐ Ribcage, also pelvis for # Stow objects in a suitable place. as possible from the airbags.
bag front seat occupants R Observe the following information.
# Only one person should use each seat
belt at any one time. # Always make sure that there are no
The front passenger airbag can only be deployed
in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF objects between the airbag and vehicle
indicator lamp is off. If the front passenger seat occupant.
Protection by the airbags
is occupied, make sure, both before and during
the journey, that the status of the front Depending on the accident situation, an airbag To avoid risks resulting from the deployment of
passenger airbag is correct (→ page 41). may supplement the protection offered by a cor‐ the airbag:
rectly fastened seat belt. R Before starting your journey, adjust your seat
correctly; the driver's seat and front
passenger seat should be moved as far back
as possible.
38 Occupant safety

When doing so, always observe the informa‐ Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent an Reduced airbag protection
tion on the correct driver's seat position airbag from functioning correctly. Therefore
(→ page 90). always ensure that: & WARNING Risk of injury from modifica‐
R Only hold the steering wheel by the steering R There are no people, animals or objects tions to the airbag cover
wheel rim. This allows the airbag to be fully between the vehicle occupants and an air‐ If you modify an airbag cover or affix objects
deployed. bag. such as stickers to it, the airbag can no lon‐
R Always lean against the seat backrest when R There are no objects between the seat, door ger function correctly.
the vehicle is in motion. Do not lean forwards and door pillar (B-pillar). # Never modify an airbag cover and do
or against the door or side window. You may R There are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, not affix objects to it.
otherwise be in the deployment area of the hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks.
airbags. The installation location of an airbag is identified
R There are no accessories, such as cup hold‐
R Always keep your feet on the floor. Do not ers, attached to the vehicle within the by the AIRBAG symbol (→ page 36).
put your feet on the cockpit, for example. deployment area of an airbag, e.g. on doors,
Your feet may otherwise be in the deploy‐ side windows or side panelling. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
ment area of the airbag. the use of unsuitable seat covers
R There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile
R If children are travelling in the vehicle, objects in the pockets of your clothing. Store Unsuitable seat covers can obstruct or pre‐
observe the additional notes (→ page 45). such objects in a suitable place. vent the deployment of the airbags integra‐
R Always stow and secure objects correctly. ted into the seats.
Consequently, the airbags cannot protect
vehicle occupants as they are designed to
do. In addition, the operation of the auto‐
matic front passenger airbag shutoff could
be restricted.
 Occupant safety 39

# You should only use seat covers that & WARNING Risk of injury due to deployed R Always observe the child restraint system
have been approved for the correspond‐ airbag manufacturer's installation instructions.
ing seats by Mercedes-Benz. R Never place objects under or behind the
A deployed airbag no longer offers any pro‐ child restraint system, e.g. cushions.
tection and cannot provide the intended pro‐
& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc‐ tective function in the event of an accident. R Fully retract the seat cushion length adjust‐
tions of the sensors in the door panelling ment.
# Have the vehicle towed to a qualified
Sensors to control the airbags are located in specialist workshop in order to have the R The entire base of the child restraint system
the doors. Modifications or work not per‐ deployed airbag replaced. must always rest on the sitting surface of the
formed correctly to the doors or door panel‐ front passenger seat.
ling, as well as damaged doors, can lead to Have deployed airbags replaced immediately. R The backrest of the forward-facing child
the function of the sensors being impaired. restraint system must, as far as possible, be
The airbags might therefore not function Status of the front passenger airbags resting on the seat backrest of the front
properly any more. passenger seat.
Consequently, the airbags cannot protect Points to remember when the front R The child restraint system must not touch the
vehicle occupants as they are designed to passenger seat is occupied roof or be put under strain by the head
do. The automatic front passenger airbag shutoff is restraints. Adjust the seat backrest inclina‐
able to detect whether the front passenger seat tion and the head restraint setting accord‐
# Never modify the doors or parts of the
is occupied by a person or a child restraint sys‐ ingly.
doors. tem. The front passenger airbag is enabled or
# Always have work on the doors or door disabled accordingly.
panelling carried out at a qualified spe‐ When installing a child restraint system on the
cialist workshop. front passenger seat:
R Ensure that the child restraint system is posi‐
tioned correctly (→ page 52).
40 Occupant safety

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to A person in the front passenger seat must: A person in the front passenger seat could
objects between the sitting surface and R Have their seat belt fastened correctly. then, for example, come into contact with
the child restraint system R Sit in an almost upright seat position with the vehicle interior, especially if the person is
their back against the seat backrest. sitting too close to the cockpit.
Objects between the sitting surface and the
child restraint system could affect the func‐ R Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if pos‐ If the front passenger seat is occupied,
tion of the automatic front passenger airbag sible. always ensure that:
shutoff. R The classification of the person in the
Otherwise, the front passenger airbag may be front passenger seat is correct and the
This could result in the front passenger air‐ deactivated by mistake, for example because the
bag not functioning as intended during an front passenger airbag is enabled or disa‐
front passenger: bled in accordance with the person in the
accident.
R Transfers their weight by supporting them‐ front passenger seat.
# Do not place any objects between the
selves on a vehicle armrest. R The front passenger seat has been moved
sitting surface and the child restraint
R Sits in such a way that their weight is raised as far back as possible.
system.
from the sitting surface. R The person is seated correctly.
# The entire base of the child restraint
system must always rest on the sitting & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to # Ensure, both before and during the jour‐
surface of the front passenger seat. deactivated front passenger airbag ney, that the status of the front
# The backrest of the forward-facing child passenger airbag is correct.
If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
restraint system must, as far as possi‐
lamp is lit, the front passenger airbag is disa‐
ble, be resting on the seat backrest of
bled. It will not be deployed in the event of
the front passenger seat.
an accident and cannot perform its intended
# Always comply with the child restraint protective function.
system manufacturer's installation
instructions.
 Occupant safety 41

PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp The status of the front passenger airbag is then Status display
displayed: If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure,
System self-test both before and during the journey, that the sta‐
R PASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for
60 seconds, subsequently both indicator tus of the front passenger airbag is correct for
lamps are off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and the prevailing situation.
OFF): the front passenger airbag is able to After installing a rearward-facing child
deploy in the event of an accident. restraint system on the front passenger
R PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up continu‐ seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF must be lit con‐
ously: the front passenger airbag is disabled. tinuously.
It will then not be deployed in the event of an
accident. & WARNING Risk of injury or death caused
by using a rearward-facing child restraint
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is system when the front passenger airbag
off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator is enabled
lamp shows the status of the front passenger
airbag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator If you secure a child in a rearward-facing
lamp may be lit continuously or be off. child restraint system on the front passenger
seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi‐
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp cator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag
and the 6 restraint system warning lamp can deploy in the event of an accident.
When the ignition is switched on, a system self- light up simultaneously, the front passenger seat
test is performed during which the two may not be used. Also in this case, do not install The child could be struck by the airbag.
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator a child restraint system on the front passenger Always make sure that the front passenger
lamps light up simultaneously. seat. Have the automatic front passenger airbag airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG
shutoff checked and repaired immediately at a OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
qualified specialist workshop.
42 Occupant safety

When installing a child restraint system on the & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to the seat belt outlet and the front
front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe‐ incorrect positioning of the forward- passenger seat accordingly.
cific information (→ page 39). facing child restraint system # Always observe the child restraint sys‐
Depending on the child restraint system and the tem manufacturer's installation instruc‐
stature of the child, the PASSENGER AIR BAG If you secure a child in a forward-facing child
restraint system on the front passenger seat tions.
OFF indicator lamp may be off. In this case, do
not install the rearward-facing child restraint and you position the front passenger seat too
close to the cockpit, in the event of an acci‐ When installing a child restraint system on the
system on the front passenger seat. front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe‐
dent, the child could:
Instead, install the rearward-facing child cific information (→ page 39).
R Come into contact with the vehicle inte‐
restraint system on a suitable rear seat. If a person is sitting in the front passenger
rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi‐
After installing a forward-facing child cator lamp is lit, for example. seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit con‐
restraint system on the front passenger tinuously or be off, depending on the person's
R Be struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER
seat: depending on the child restraint system stature. Always observe the following informa‐
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. tion.
and the stature of the child, PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF may be lit continuously or be off. # Always move the front passenger seat If the front passenger seat is occupied by:
Always observe the following information. as far back as possible and fully retract R An adult or a person with a build correspond‐
the seat cushion length adjustment. ing to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR
Always make sure that the shoulder belt BAG OFF indicator lamp must be off. This
strap is correctly routed from the seat indicates that the front passenger airbag is
belt outlet on the vehicle to the shoul‐ enabled.
der belt guide on the child restraint sys‐
tem. The shoulder belt strap must be If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
routed forwards and downwards from lamp is lit continuously, an adult or person
the seat belt outlet. If necessary, adjust with a build corresponding to that of an adult
 Occupant safety 43

should not use the front passenger seat. not perform its intended protective function, PRE-SAFE® system
Instead, they should use a rear seat. e.g. when a person is seated in the front
Information on PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory
R A person with a smaller build (e.g. a teenager passenger seat.
occupant protection)
or small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF That person could, for example, come into
indicator lamp either lights up and remains lit contact with the vehicle interior, especially if PRE-SAFE® is able to detect certain critical driv‐
depending on the result of the classification the person is sitting too close to the cockpit. ing situations and implement pre-emptive meas‐
or, alternatively, goes out. ures to protect the vehicle occupants.
If the front passenger seat is occupied,
- PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF is off: move the always ensure that: PRE-SAFE® can implement the following meas‐
front passenger seat as far back as possi‐ ures independently of each other:
R The classification of the person in the
ble or a person with a smaller build
front passenger seat is correct and the R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat
should use a rear seat.
front passenger airbag is enabled or disa‐ and front passenger seat.
- If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator bled in accordance with the person in the R Closing the side windows.
lamp is lit continuously: a person with a front passenger seat.
smaller build should not use the front R Vehicles with sliding sunroof: Close the
R The person is seated properly with a cor‐ sliding sunroof.
passenger seat.
rectly fastened seat belt.
R Vehicles with memory function: Moving
& WARNING Risk of injury or death when R The front passenger seat has been moved the front passenger seat to a more favoura‐
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator as far back as possible. ble seat position.
lamp is lit R Vehicles with multicontour seat: Increas‐
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator Further related subjects: ing the air pressure in the seat side bolsters
lamp remains lit after the system self-test, R Child restraint system on the front passenger
of the seat backrest.
the front passenger airbag is disabled. It will seat (→ page 50).
R PRE-SAFE® Sound: Provided that the multi‐
not be deployed in the event of an accident. R Suitable positioning of the child restraint sys‐
media system is switched on, generates a
In this case, the front passenger airbag can‐ tem (→ page 52).
44 Occupant safety

brief noise signal to stimulate the innate pro‐ Information on PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipa‐ or
tective mechanism of a person's hearing. tory occupant protection plus) - When the vehicle is towing a trailer and
PRE-SAFE® PLUS can detect certain impacts, there is a risk of a rear impact.
* NOTE Damage caused by objects in the
footwell or behind the seat particularly an imminent rear impact, and take R The brakes are not applied:
pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle - Whilst driving.
The automatic adjustment of the seat posi‐ occupants. These measures cannot necessarily
tion may result in damage to the seat and/or or
prevent an imminent impact.
the object. - When entering or exiting a parking space
PRE-SAFE® PLUS can implement the following using Parking Pilot.
# Stow objects in a suitable place.
measures independently of each other:
R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat
and front passenger seat. Information on PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side
Reversing the PRE-SAFE® measures
If an accident does not occur, the pre-emp‐ If an imminent side impact is detected, PRE-
If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive tive measures that were taken are reversed . SAFE® Impulse Side can pre-emptively move the
measures that were taken are reversed. You front-seat vehicle occupant's upper body
R Activating the rear hazard warning lights at a
will need to perform certain settings your‐ towards the centre of the vehicle. It does this by
self. higher flashing frequency.
rapidly inflating an air cushion in the outer seat
R Increasing brake pressure when the vehicle
# If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced, side bolster of the seat backrest on the side on
move the seat backrest back slightly. is stationary. This brake application is cancel‐ which the impact is anticipated. This increases
The locking mechanism releases. led automatically when the vehicle pulls the distance between the door and the vehicle
away. occupant.
PRE-SAFE® PLUS system limitations If PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side has been deployed or
R No measures are implemented: is faulty, the display message PRE-SAFE impulse
- If the vehicle is reversing.
 Occupant safety 45

side inoperative See Owner's Manual is dis‐ # When leaving the vehicle, always take Children could suffer burns on these parts,
played (→ page 446). the key with you and lock the vehicle. particularly on metallic parts of the child
This also applies to mobile phones if the restraint system.
"Digital Car Key in the smartphone" # Always make sure that the child
Children in the vehicle
function is activated via the Mercedes restraint system is not exposed to
Notes on the safe transportation of children connect me web app. direct sunlight.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury # Protect it with a blanket, for example.
& WARNING This poses an increased risk
due to children left unattended in the # If the child restraint system has been
of death due to heat stroke or exposure
vehicle exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to
to cold in the vehicle
If you leave children unattended in the vehi‐ cool before securing a child into it.
If persons – particularly children – ‑ experi‐ # Never leave children unattended in the
cle, they may be able to set the vehicle in
ence prolonged exposure to extremely high vehicle.
motion, for example by:
or low temperatures, this poses a risk of
R Releasing the parking brake. injury or even fatal injury. To improve protection for children younger than
R Shifting the automatic transmission out # Never leave anyone – particularly chil‐ 12 years old and under 1.50 m in height,
of park position j or shifting the manual dren – unattended in the vehicle. Mercedes-Benz recommends you observe the
transmission into neutral. following notes:
R Starting the engine. & WARNING Risk of burns when the child R Only secure children using a child restraint
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip‐ seat is exposed to direct sunlight system which is suitable and recommended
ment. for Mercedes-Benz vehicles, as well as appro‐
If the child restraint system is exposed to
priate to the height, age and weight of the
# Never leave children and animals unat‐ direct sunlight or heat, parts could heat up.
child. Be sure to observe the instructions for
tended in the vehicle. correct use of the child restraint system.
46 Occupant safety

R Always install a child restraint system on a # Always comply with the manufacturer's The child restraint system could be flung
rear seat if possible. installation instructions for the child around and hit vehicle occupants. This poses
R Only use the following securing systems for restraint system and its correct use. an increased risk of injury or even death!
child restraint systems: # Make sure that the entire base of the # Always install child restraint systems
- the seat belt system child restraint system always rests on correctly, even when not in use.
- the ISOFIX or i-Size mounting bracket the sitting surface of the seat. # Always comply with the child restraint

- the Top Tether anchorages # Never place objects under or behind system manufacturer's installation
the child restraint system, e.g. cush‐ instructions.
R The manufacturer's installation instructions ions.
for the child restraint system.
# Always use child restraint systems with & WARNING Risk of injury or death caused
R The warning labels in the vehicle interior and the original cover designed for them. by the use of damaged child restraint
on the child restraint system.
# Always replace damaged covers with systems
& WARNING Risk of injury or death caused genuine covers. Child restraint systems or their retaining sys‐
by incorrect installation of the child tems that have been subjected to a load in
restraint system & WARNING Risk of accident caused by an accident may then not be able to perform
incorrectly installed child restraint sys‐ their intended protective function.
If the child restraint system is incorrectly
installed on a suitable seating position, it tems The child cannot be restrained in the event of
cannot perform its intended protective func‐ If the child restraint system is not correctly an accident, heavy braking or a sudden
tion. installed or secured, it could release in the change of direction.
The child cannot be restrained in the event of event of an accident, sudden braking or a # Always replace child restraint systems

an accident, heavy braking or a sudden sudden change in direction. immediately that have been damaged or
change of direction. involved in an accident.
 Occupant safety 47

# Have the securing systems for the child R Information on the correct use of the seat # Also secure the child restraint system
restraint systems checked at a qualified belt (→ page 35). with the Top Tether belt, if available.
specialist workshop before installing a
child restraint system again. ISOFIX and i-Size child seat securing systems When fitting a child restraint system, be sure to
observe the manufacturer's installation instruc‐
% Use Mercedes-Benz care products recom‐ Information on the ISOFIX and i-Size child tions and the instructions for correct use of the
mended by Mercedes-Benz to clean child seat securing systems child restraint system.
restraint systems. Further information can ISOFIX and i-Size are standardised securing sys‐
be obtained at a qualified specialist work‐ & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury if
the child secured weighs more than the tems for special restraint systems. ISOFIX child
shop. restraint systems are approved in accordance
permissible weight for the ISOFIX or
The following notes must be observed: i‑Size child restraint system with ECE R44, i‑Size child restraint systems are
R When installing a child restraint system on approved in accordance with ECE R129.
the front passenger seat, the information on ISOFIX child restraint systems or i-Size child Only child restraint systems that have been
installing a child restraint system on the front restraint systems do not offer sufficient pro‐ approved in accordance with ECE R44 may be
passenger seat (→ page 50). tection for children weighing more than attached to ISOFIX mounting brackets. ISOFIX
22 kg, who are secured using the seat belt child restraint systems which have been
R Notes on attaching suitable child restraint integrated in the child restraint system.
systems (→ page 52). approved in accordance with ECE R-44 and
For example. the child may not be restrained i‑Size child restraint systems which have been
R Notes on recommended child restraint sys‐ correctly in the event of an accident. approved in accordance with ECE-R129, can be
tems (→ page 59). attached to i‑Size mounting brackets.
# If the child weighs more than 22 kg,
R Instructions and safety notes on the auto‐ only use ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint
matic front passenger airbag shutoff systems with which the child is secured
(→ page 39). with the vehicle seat belt.
R Safety notes on the seat belt (→ page 32).
48 Occupant safety

Fitting ISOFIX and i-Size child seat securing tions and the instructions for correct use of the
systems child restraint system.
Before every trip, make sure that the ISOFIX
& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury if child restraint system or the i-Size child restraint
the child secured weighs more than the system is engaged correctly in both ISOFIX or
permissible weight for the ISOFIX or i‑Size mounting brackets.
i‑Size child restraint system
ISOFIX child restraint systems or i-Size child
restraint systems do not offer sufficient pro‐
tection for children weighing more than
22 kg, who are secured using the seat belt
integrated in the child restraint system.
For example. the child may not be restrained
correctly in the event of an accident.
# If the child weighs more than 22 kg,
1 Symbol for fitting an ISOFIX child restraint only use ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint
system systems with which the child is secured
2 Symbol for fitting an i-Size child restraint with the vehicle seat belt.
system # Also secure the child restraint system
with the Top Tether belt, if available.

When fitting a child restraint system, be sure to

observe the manufacturer's installation instruc‐ 1 ISOFIX mounting brackets
2 i-Size mounting brackets
 Occupant safety 49

* NOTE Damage to the seat belt for the Securing Top Tether between the child restraint system secured with
centre seat ISOFIX or i-Size and the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the The child restraint system must be equipped
When fitting a child restraint system, the seat rear seat backrests are not locked after with a Top Tether belt.
belt for the centre seat could be damaged. fitting Top Tether belts
# Make sure that the seat belt is not trap‐
If the rear seat backrests are not locked, they
ped. could fold forwards in the event of an acci‐
dent, heavy braking or sudden changes of
# Remove each cover for ISOFIX mounting direction.
brackets 1 or i‑Size mounting brackets 2.
# Attach the ISOFIX child restraint system to As a result, child restraint systems cannot
both ISOFIX mounting brackets 1 or i‑Size perform their intended protective function.
mounting brackets 2. Rear seat backrests that are not locked can
also cause additional injuries, e.g. in the
or event of an accident.
# Attach the i‑Size child restraint system to # Always lock rear seat backrests after
both i‑Size mounting brackets 2. fitting Top Tether belts.
# After removing the child seat, replace each # Observe the lock verification indicator.
cover for ISOFIX mounting brackets 1 or
i‑Size mounting brackets 2. If the seat backrest is not engaged and locked,
this will be shown in the multifunction display in
the instrument cluster.
The risk of injury can be reduced by Top Tether
as Top Tether provides an additional connection
50 Occupant safety

# Hook Top Tether hook 6 of Top Tether belt always observe the information on the automatic
5 without twisting into Top Tether anchor‐ front passenger airbag shutoff (→ page 39).
age 4. By doing this, you can avoid risks caused by:
# Tension Top Tether belt 5. Always comply R A child restraint system that is not detected
with the child restraint system manufactur‐ by the automatic front passenger airbag
er's installation instructions when doing so. shutoff.
# If necessary, move head restraint 1 down‐ R The unintentionally disabled front passenger
wards Adjusting the rear seat head airbag.
restraints(→ page 97). Make sure that you do
R Incorrect positioning of the child restraint
not interfere with the correct routing of Top
# If necessary, move head restraint 1 Tether belt 5. system.
upwards Adjusting the rear seat head
restraints(→ page 97).
Child restraint systems on the front
# Fit the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system passenger seat
with Top Tether. Always comply with the child
restraint system manufacturer's installation Notes on child restraint systems on the front
instructions when doing so. passenger seat
# Route Top Tether belt 5 under head Accident statistics show that children secured in
restraint 1 between the two head restraint the rear seats are safer than children secured in
bars. the front seats. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz
strongly advises that you install a child restraint
# Guide Top Tether belt 5 downwards system on a rear seat.
between combined luggage cover and net 3 Warning notice on the front-passenger sun
and backrest 2. If it is absolutely necessary to install a child visor:
restraint system on the front passenger seat,
 Occupant safety 51

& WARNING Risk of injury or death caused Vehicles without the automatic front The following notes must be observed:
by using a rearward-facing child restraint passenger airbag shutoff R On forward-facing and rearward-facing child
system when the front passenger airbag Vehicles without automatic front passenger air‐ restraint systems on the front passenger seat
is enabled bag shutoff have a special sticker affixed to the (→ page 51).
side of the cockpit on the front passenger side.
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing R On attaching suitable child restraint systems
child restraint system on the front passenger (→ page 52).
seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi‐ Forward-facing and rearward-facing child
cator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag restraint systems on the front passenger
can deploy in the event of an accident. seat
The child could be struck by the airbag. When using a rearward-facing child restraint sys‐
Always make sure that the front passenger tem on the front passenger seat, the front
airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG passenger airbag must always be disabled. This
OFF indicator lamp must be lit. is only the case if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp is lit continuously (→ page 41).
NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a When using a child restraint system on the front
seat protected by an ACTIVE FRONT AIRBAG in passenger seat, it is essential to observe the fol‐
front of it; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the lowing:
CHILD can occur. R Move the front passenger seat as far back as
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp possible.
goes out, the front passenger airbag is enabled. R Set the seat backrest to an almost vertical
Be sure to observe the notes on the safe trans‐ Never install a rearward-facing child restraint position.
portation of children (→ page 45). system on the front passenger seat:
R Retract the seat cushion length as far as pos‐
sible.
52 Occupant safety

R The entire base of the child restraint system Always comply with the manufacturer's installa‐
must always rest on the sitting surface of the tion and operating instructions for the child
front passenger seat. restraint system used, and the notes on fitting
R The backrest of the forward-facing child suitable child restraint systems (→ page 52).
restraint system must, as far as possible, be
resting on the seat backrest of the front Suitability of the seats for child restraint sys‐
passenger seat. The child restraint system tems
must not touch the roof or be put under
strain by the head restraints. Notes on attaching suitable child restraint
systems
R If necessary, adjust the angle of the seat
backrest and the head restraint position Only child restraint systems with the following
accordingly. ECE standards are permitted for use in the vehi‐
cle:
R Move the seat cushion inclination to the
highest, most vertical position. R ECE R44

R Always make sure that the shoulder belt R ECE-R129 (i-Size child restraint systems)
strap is correctly routed from the seat belt Examples of approval labels on child restraint Label for child restraint systems in accord‐
outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt systems: ance with ECE R-44
guide on the child restraint system. The
shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards
and downwards from the seat belt outlet.
R If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and
the front passenger seat accordingly.
R Never place objects, e.g. a cushion, under or
behind the child restraint system.
 Occupant safety 53

Semi-universal child restraint systems are indi‐ R For certain child restraint systems in weight
cated by the text "semi-universal" on the categories II or III, there might be restrictions
approval label. They can only be used if the vehi‐ in the maximum size setting, e.g. due to pos‐
cle and the seat are listed in the child restraint sible contact with the roof.
system manufacturer's vehicle model list. R Make sure that the child's feet do not touch
Suitability of the seats for attaching belt- the front seat. If necessary, move the front
secured child restraint systems seat forward slightly.
Observe the following information: R The child restraint system must not touch the
roof or be put under strain by the head
R When using a baby car seat of the cate‐
restraints. Adjust the head restraints accord‐
gory 0/0+ and a rearward-facing child ingly.
restraint system on a rear seat: adjust the
driver's and front passenger seat such that R Observe the manufacturer's installation
the seat does not touch the child restraint instructions for the child restraint system.
system. Legend for the table:
R When using a forward-facing child
Label for child restraint systems in accord‐ X Not suitable for children in this weight
restraint system of category I: remove the category.
ance with ECE R-129 head restraint from the respective seat, if
ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint systems of the fol‐ possible. In addition, the seat backrest of the U Suitable for child restraint systems of
lowing “Universal“ category can be used, in child restraint system must, as far as possi‐ the "Universal" category in this weight
accordance with the tables on suitability of seats ble, lie flat against the backrest of the vehicle category.
for the attachment of child restraint systems, on seat.
seats marked U, UF, IUF or i-U. R When you remove the child restraint system,
fit the head restraint immediately and adjust
all the head restraints again correctly.
54 Occupant safety

UF Suitable for forward-facing child L Suitable for semi-universal child tems", or if the vehicle and the seat are
restraint systems of the "Universal" cat‐ restraint systems according to the table listed in the child restraint system man‐
egory in this weight category. in "Recommended child restraint sys‐ ufacturer's vehicle model list.

Front passenger seat:

Weight categories Front passenger airbag ena‐ Front passenger airbag disabled1
bled
Category 0: up to 10 kg X U, L
Category 0+: up to 13 kg X U, L
Category I: 9 to 18 kg UF, L U, L
Category II: 15 to 25 kg UF, L U, L
Category III: 22 to 36 kg UF, L U, L
1 The vehicle is equipped with an automatic front passenger airbag shutoff. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
 Occupant safety 55

Rear seats:

Weight categories Left, right Middle1

Category 0: up to 10 kg U, L U, L
Category 0+: up to 13 kg U, L U, L
Category I: 9 to 18 kg U, L U, L
Category II: 15 to 25 kg U, L U
Category III: 22 to 36 kg U, L U
1 Child restraint systems with a supporting bracket are not suitable for this seat.

Suitability of the seats for attaching ISOFIX R When using a forward-facing child R For certain child restraint systems in weight
child restraint systems restraint system of category I: remove the categories II or III, there might be restrictions
Observe the following information: head restraint from the respective seat if in the maximum size setting, e.g. due to pos‐
possible and position the seat backrest of sible contact with the roof.
R When using a baby car seat of cate‐
the child restraint system as flat as possible R Make sure that the child's feet do not touch
gory 0/0+ and a rearward-facing child against the seat backrest of the vehicle seat.
restraint system of category I on a rear the front seat. If necessary, move the front
seat: adjust the driver's and front passenger R When you remove the child restraint system seat forward slightly.
seat such that the seat does not touch the you must install the head restraint again R The child restraint system must not touch the
child restraint system. immediately and adjust all of the head roof or be put under strain by the head
restraints correctly.
56 Occupant safety

restraints. Adjust the head restraints accord‐ Legend for the table: IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint sys‐
ingly. X Not suitable for an ISOFIX child tems according to the table in "Over‐
R Observe the manufacturer's installation restraint system in this weight category view of the recommended child
instructions for the child restraint system. and/or size category. restraint systems", or if the vehicle and
the seat are listed in the child restraint
IUF Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child system manufacturer's vehicle model
restraint systems of the"Universal" cat‐ list.
egory in this weight category.

Weight categories Size category Equipment Rear seat

Left, right
Carry cot F ISO/L1 X
G ISO/L2 X
Category 0: up to 10 kg and approx. 6 months E ISO/R1 IL
Category 0+: up to 13 kg and approx. 15 months E ISO/R1 IL
D ISO/R2 IL
C ISO/R3 IL1
 Occupant safety 57

Weight categories Size category Equipment Rear seat

Left, right
Category I: 9 to 18 kg and between approx. 9 months and 4 years D ISO/R2 IL
C ISO/R3 IL1
B ISO/F2 IUF
B1 ISO/F2X IUF
A ISO/F3 IUF
1When using a child restraint system of the size category (ISO/R3), move the front seat to the highest position and move the seat backrest to an
upright position. Make sure that the seat backrest of the front seat does not rest against the child restraint system.

Suitability of the seats for attaching i‑Size tion, the seat backrest of the child restraint R Observe the manufacturer's installation
child restraint systems system must, as far as possible, lie flat instructions for the child restraint system.
Observe the following information: against the backrest of the vehicle seat.
Legend for the table:
R When using a rearward-facing child R When you remove the child restraint system
you must install the head restraint again X Not suitable for an i-Size child restraint
restraint system: adjust the front seat so system in the "Universal" category.
that it does not touch the child restraint sys‐ immediately and adjust all the head
tem. restraints correctly. i‑U Suitable for forward-facing and rear‐
R When using a forward-facing child R Make sure that the child's feet do not touch ward-facing i-Size child restraint sys‐
restraint system: remove the head restraint the front seat. If necessary, move the front tems in the "Universal" category.
from the respective seat, if possible. In addi‐ seat forward slightly.
58 Occupant safety

Front passenger seat Left rear seat Centre rear seat Right rear seat
i‑Size child restraint system X i‑U X i‑U

Suitability of the folding bench seat for the Legend for the table: tems", or if the vehicle and the seat are
attachment of child restraint systems X listed in the child restraint system man‐
Not suitable for children in this weight
Do not, under any circumstances, use a rear‐ category. ufacturer's vehicle model list.
ward-facing child seat on the folding bench seat
(third row of seats). L Suitable for semi-universal child
restraint systems according to the table
in "Recommended child restraint sys‐

Folding bench seat (third row of seats):

Weight categories Left, right

Category 0: up to 10 kg X
Category 0+: up to 13 kg X
Category I: 9 to 18 kg L1
Category II: 15 to 25 kg L2
Category III: 22 to 36 kg X
 Occupant safety 59

Weight categories Left, right

1 Only use the approved child seat MB Duo plus.
2 Only use the approved child seats KIDFIX or KIDFIX XP for children up to the age of approx. 6 years and not taller than 1.15 m.

Overview of recommended child restraint systems

Recommended child restraint systems for attaching with the vehicle seat belt

Weight categories Manufacturer Type Approval number Order number

(E1 ...) (A 000 ...) colour
code 9H95
Category 0: Britax Römer BABY SAFE plus II 04 301 146 970 20 00
up to 10 kg 970 36 00
up to approximately 6 months
Category 0+: Britax Römer BABY SAFE plus II 04 301 146 970 20 00
up to 13 kg 970 36 00
up to approximately 15 months
60 Occupant safety

Weight categories Manufacturer Type Approval number Order number

(E1 ...) (A 000 ...) colour
code 9H95
Category I: Britax Römer DUO plus 04 301 133 970 16 00
9 to 18 kg 970 37 00
between approximately 9 months and 4 years
Category II/III: Britax Römer KIDFIX 04 301 198 970 19 00
15 to 36 kg 970 38 00
between approximately 4 and 12 years Britax Römer KIDFIX XP 04 301 304 970 61 00
 Occupant safety 61

Recommended "Universal" and "Semi-Universal" category ISOFIX child restraint systems

Weight categories Size category Manufacturer Type Approval number Order number (col‐
(E1 ...) our code: 9H95)
Category 0+: E Britax Römer BABY SAFE plus 04 301 146 B6 6 86 8224
up to 13 kg
up to approximately
15 months
Category I: B1 Britax Römer DUO plus 04 301 133 A 000 970 16 00
9 to 18 kg A 000 970 37 00

% You can obtain further information on the Child safety locks & WARNING Risk of accident and injury
correct child restraint system at any due to children left unattended in the
Activating/deactivating the child safety lock
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. vehicle
for the rear doors
If you leave children unattended in the vehi‐
cle, they may be able to set the vehicle in
motion, for example by:
R Releasing the parking brake.
62 Occupant safety

R Shifting the automatic transmission out # Never leave anyone – particularly chil‐ "Digital Car Key in the smartphone"
of park position j or shifting the manual dren – unattended in the vehicle. function is activated via the Mercedes
transmission into neutral. connect me web app.
R Starting the engine. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to children left unattended in the Child safety locks are available for the rear doors
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip‐ and for the rear side windows.
vehicle
ment. The child safety lock on the rear doors secures
# Never leave children and animals unat‐ If children are travelling in the vehicle, they each door separately. The doors can no longer
tended in the vehicle. could: be opened from the inside.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take
R Open doors, thereby endangering other
the key with you and lock the vehicle. persons or road users.
This also applies to mobile phones if the R Get out of the vehicle and be hit by
"Digital Car Key in the smartphone" oncoming traffic.
function is activated via the Mercedes R Operate vehicle equipment and become
connect me web app. trapped, for example.
# Always activate the child safety locks
& WARNING This poses an increased risk
installed if children are travelling in the
of death due to heat stroke or exposure vehicle.
to cold in the vehicle
# Never leave children unattended in the
If persons – particularly children – ‑ experi‐ vehicle.
ence prolonged exposure to extremely high
or low temperatures, this poses a risk of
# When leaving the vehicle, always take
injury or even fatal injury. the key with you and lock the vehicle.
This also applies to mobile phones if the
 Occupant safety 63

# Press the lever in direction 1 (activate) or # To activate/deactivate: press button 2. Thereby an animal may:
2 (deactivate). Opening/closing the side window in the rear R activate vehicle equipment and become
# Make sure that the child safety locks are is possible: trapped, for example
working properly. R With indicator lamp 1 lit: via the switch R switch systems on or off and endanger
Activating/deactivating the child safety lock on the driver's door. other road users
for the rear side windows R With indicator lamp 1 off: via the switch
on the corresponding rear door or driv‐ Unsecured animals may be thrown around in
er's door. the vehicle in the event of an accident or
sudden steering and braking manoeuvres
% Vehicles with folding bench seat: The and injure vehicle occupants in the process.
switch for opening the tailgate which is loca‐ # Never leave animals in the vehicle unat‐
ted on the right-hand wheel arch when
tended.
viewed in the direction of travel is also
secured. # Always correctly secure animals while
driving, e.g. using a suitable animal car‐
rier.
Pets in the vehicle

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury

due to animals left unsecured or unat‐
tended in the vehicle
If you leave animals in the vehicle unatten‐
ded or unsecured, they could possibly press
down buttons or switches.
64 Opening and closing

Key # Never leave children or animals unat‐

Overview of key functions tended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take
& WARNING ‑ There is a risk of accident the key with you and lock the vehicle.
and injury if you leave children unatten‐ # Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of
ded in the vehicle children.
If children are left unattended in the vehicle,
they could: * NOTE Damage to the key caused by
R open doors, thereby endangering other magnetic fields
persons or road users. # Keep the key away from strong mag‐ 1 Locks
R get out of the vehicle and be hit by netic fields. 2 Battery check lamp
oncoming traffic. 3 Unlocks
R operate vehicle equipment. 4 Opens/closes the tailgate
Moreover, the children could also set the The key locks and unlocks the following compo‐
vehicle in motion by, for example: nents:
R releasing the parking brake R The doors
R shifting the automatic transmission out of R The tailgate
park position P j or shifting manual R The fuel filler flap
transmission into idle position.
R starting the engine.
If you do not open the vehicle within approx‐
imately 40 seconds after unlocking:
R The vehicle is locked again.
 Opening and closing 65

R Anti-theft protection is reactivated. # To switch between settings: press the

% and & buttons simultaneously for
Do not keep the key together with electronic approximately six seconds until the battery
devices or metal objects. This can affect the check lamp flashes twice.
key's functionality.
If the unlocking function for the driver's door
% If battery check lamp 2 does not light up and fuel filler flap has been selected:
after pressing the % or & button, the
battery is discharged. R Pressing the % button a second time cen‐
trally unlocks the vehicle.
R Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: If you touch
Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking
verification signal # To prime: press button 1 for approximately the inner surface of the door handle on the
one second. driver's door, only the driver's door and fuel
Multimedia system: filler flap are unlocked.
A visual and audible alarm is triggered.
, Vehicle . î Vehicle set-
# To deactivate: briefly press button 1 again.
tings . Acoustic lock Reducing the energy consumption of the key
or
# Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
# Press the start/stop button on the cockpit If you do not intend to use the vehicle for an
(the key is inside the vehicle). extended period of time, you can deactivate the
Priming/deactivating the panic alarm following functions on the key.
Changing the unlocking settings R KEYLESS-GO starting function
Requirements:
R Ignition switched off. R KEYLESS-GO
Possible unlocking functions of the key:
R Central unlocking
R Unlocking the driver's door and fuel filler flap
66 Opening and closing

# To deactivate: press the & button on the # Pull out emergency key 2 until it engages in # If batteries are swallowed, seek medical
key twice in rapid succession. the intermediate position. attention immediately.
The battery check lamp of the key flashes
twice briefly and lights up once. % You can use the intermediate position of
emergency key 2 to attach the key to a key + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
# To activate: press any button on the key.
ring. damage due to improper disposal of bat‐
% When the vehicle is started with the key in # Press release knob 1 again and fully teries
the stowage compartment of the centre con‐ remove emergency key 2.
sole (→ page 163), the key functions are # To insert: press release knob 1.
automatically activated.
# Insert emergency key 2 to the intermediate
Batteries contain pollutants. It is
position or fully until it engages.
Inserting/removing the emergency key illegal to dispose of them with the household
rubbish.
Replacing the key battery #

& DANGER Serious damage to health

caused by swallowing batteries Dispose of batteries in an
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive sub‐ environmentally responsible manner.
stances. Swallowing batteries may cause Take discharged batteries to a qualified
serious damage to health. specialist workshop or to a collection
point for used batteries.
There is a risk of fatal injury.
# Keep batteries out of the reach of chil‐ Requirements:
# To remove: press release knob 1. dren. You require a CR 2032 3 V cell battery.
Emergency key 2 is pushed out slightly.
 Opening and closing 67

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the # Press release button 2 down fully and
battery replaced at a qualified specialist work‐ remove cover 1.
shop. # Remove battery compartment 3 and take
# Remove the emergency key (→ page 66). out the discharged battery.
# Insert the new battery into battery compart‐
ment 3. Observe the positive pole marking
in the battery compartment and on the bat‐
tery.
# Push in battery compartment 3.
# Replace cover 1 so that it engages.

Problems with the key

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

You can no longer lock or unlock the Possible causes:
vehicle. R The key battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
R There is interference from a powerful radio signal source.
R The key is faulty.
68 Opening and closing

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Check the battery using the battery check lamp and replace if necessary .

# Use the emergency key to lock or unlock the vehicle .

# Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You have lost a key. # Have the key deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.
# If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

Doors # Never leave persons unattended in the Unlocking and opening the doors from the
vehicle, particularly children, elderly inside
Notes on the additional door lock
persons or persons in need of help. United Kingdom only: observe the notes on the
The additional door lock is only available for # If there are persons in the vehicle, do additional door lock (→ page 68).
vehicles for the United Kingdom. not activate the additional door lock.
& WARNING Risk of injury to persons
The additional door lock is automatically activa‐
inside the vehicle when the additional ted:
door lock is activated
R After locking the vehicle with the key.
If the additional door lock is activated, the
R After locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO.
doors can no longer be opened from the
inside. If the additional door lock is activated, the doors
If there are persons in the vehicle, they can cannot be opened from the inside.
no longer leave the vehicle, e.g. in hazardous You can deactivate the additional door lock by
situations. deactivating the interior protection (→ page 89).
 Opening and closing 69

Locking/unlocking the vehicle centrally from R If you have locked the vehicle using KEY‐
the inside LESS-GO.

Unlocking/locking the vehicle via a mobile

phone
Requirements:
R Vehicle with the "Digital Car Key in the
smartphone" function.
R The "Digital Car Key in the smartphone" func‐
tion is activated via the Mercedes me con‐
nect web app: https://www.mercedes.me.
R Suitable mobile phone with NFC aerial (Near
Field Communication) and Secure Element.
R Sufficient charge level of the mobile phone.
# Pull door handle 2. On some mobile phones, the function is also
Locking pin 1 pops up when the door is available when the battery is discharged.
unlocked.
# To unlock: press button 1. If the vehicle has been parked for longer than
# To lock: press button 2. two weeks, the NFC aerial in the door handle is
deactivated. Pull the door handle to activate the
This does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap. NFC aerial again.
The vehicle is not unlocked: % You can check the suitability of your mobile
R If you have locked the vehicle using the key. phone by entering the phone number at
https://www.mercedes.me.
70 Opening and closing

Information about suitable mobile phones # Touch the door handle on the driver's door in
can be obtained from your Mercedes-Benz the area where NFC aerial 1 is located with
Service Centre or on the Internet at http:// the part of the mobile phone where the NFC
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect. aerial is located.
% The function is only available in combination The vehicle is locked or unlocked alternately.
with Mercedes me connect and only in cer‐ If you lose your mobile phone, deactivate the
tain countries. "Digital Car Key in the smartphone" service in
% Protective cases around the mobile phone Mercedes me connect at https://
can impair the functionality. www.mercedes.me.
% Mercedes-Benz recommends that you carry
the emergency key in case of function
restrictions.

Locking and unlocking the vehicle with KEY‐

LESS-GO
# To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner sur‐
Requirements: face of the door handle.
R The key must be outside the vehicle. # To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface
R The distance between the key and the vehicle 1 or 2.
must not exceed 1 m. # Convenience closing: touch recessed sen‐
R The driver's door and the door at which the sor surface 2 for an extended period.
door handle is used must both be closed. % For further information on convenience clos‐
ing (→ page 81).
 Opening and closing 71

If you open the tailgate from outside it is auto‐

matically unlocked.
Problems with KEYLESS-GO

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

You can no longer lock or unlock the Possible causes:
vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. R KEYLESS-GO has been deactivated .
R The key battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
R There is interference from a powerful radio signal source.
R The key is faulty.

# Activate KEYLESS-GO .
# Check the battery using the battery check lamp and replace if necessary .
# Use the emergency key to lock or unlock the vehicle .
# Have the vehicle and key checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Switching the automatic locking feature

on/off
The vehicle is locked automatically when the
ignition is switched on and the wheels are turn‐
ing faster than walking pace.
72 Opening and closing

R On a roller dynamometer.

Unlocking/locking the driver's door using

the emergency key element
% If you wish to lock the vehicle entirely using
the emergency key, first press the button for
locking from the inside while the driver's
door is open. Then proceed to lock the driv‐
er's door using the emergency key element.

# To deactivate: press and hold button 1 for # Insert the emergency key into opening 1 in
approximately five seconds until an acoustic the cover.
signal sounds. # Pull and hold the door handle.
# To activate: press and hold button 2 for # Pull the cover on the emergency key as
approximately five seconds until an acoustic straight as possible away from the vehicle
signal sounds. until it releases.
Danger of being locked out when the function is # Release the door handle.
activated:
R If the vehicle is being tow started/pushed.
 Opening and closing 73

# Carefully press the cover onto the lock cylin‐ To open the tailgate, the following options are
der until it engages and is seated firmly. available:
# Press and hold the p button on the key.

Load compartment # If the tailgate is unlocked, pull the tailgate

Opening the tailgate handle and release it again immediately.

# With the tailgate stopped in an intermediate

& WARNING Risk of exhaust gas poisoning position, pull the tailgate upwards. Release it
as soon as it begins to open.
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tail‐
gate is open when the engine is running,
especially if the vehicle is in motion.
# Always switch off the engine before
opening the tailgate.
# To unlock: turn the emergency key anti- # Never drive with the tailgate open.
clockwise to position 1.
# To lock: turn the emergency key clockwise to * NOTE Damage to the tailgate caused by
position 1. obstacles above the vehicle
% Right-hand drive vehicles: turn the emer‐ The tailgate swings rearwards and upwards
gency key in the opposite direction in each when it is opened.
case. # Make sure that there is sufficient space
behind and above the tailgate.
74 Opening and closing

# Pull remote opening switch 1 for the tail‐ If the tailgate has been locked from the outside, # Always store objects in such a way that
gate. or the child safety lock has been activated, the they cannot be flung around.
# Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: move tailgate cannot be unlocked with button 1.
# Before the journey, secure objects, lug‐
your foot below the bumper (→ page 76). The tailgate is equipped with an automatic gage or loads against slipping or tipping
obstacle detection function. If a solid object over.
blocks or restricts the tailgate when automati‐
cally opening, this process is stopped. The auto‐
matic obstacle detection function is only an aid. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
It is not a substitute for your attentiveness when during automatic closing of the tailgate
opening the tailgate. Parts of the body could become trapped dur‐
ing automatic closing of the tailgate. More‐
Closing the tailgate over, people, e.g. children, may be standing
in the closing area or may enter the closing
& WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured area during the closing process.
items in the vehicle # Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity
of the closing area during the closing
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured process.
or not secured sufficiently, they could slip,
tip over or be flung around and thereby hit Use one of the following options to stop the
vehicle occupants. closing process:
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the R press the p button on the key.
# Vehicles with folding bench seat: pull but‐ event of sudden braking or a sudden change R press or pull the remote operating switch
ton 1 for the tailgate twice. in direction. on the driver's door.
The tailgate is unlocked.
 Opening and closing 75

R press the closing or locking button on the

tailgate.
R Pull the tailgate handle.

Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: it is also

possible to stop the closing process by moving
your foot in a kicking motion under the rear
bumper.
To close the tailgate, the following options are
available:
# Pull the tailgate downwards slightly. Release
it as soon as it begins to close.
# Press and hold the p button on the key
(with the key in the vicinity of the vehicle).
# Press closing button 1 on the tailgate. # Press remote operating switch 1 for the
# Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: press locking tailgate.
button 2 in the tailgate. # Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: move
If a key is detected outside the vehicle, the your foot below the bumper (→ page 76).
tailgate closes and the vehicle is locked.
Automatic reversing function for the tailgate
The tailgate is equipped with automatic obstacle
detection with reversing function. If a solid
object blocks or restricts the tailgate when auto‐
matically closing, the tailgate automatically
76 Opening and closing

opens again slightly. The automatic obstacle R press the closing or locking button on the performing a kicking movement under the rear
detection with reversing function is only an aid. tailgate, or bumper.
It is not a substitute for your attentiveness when The kicking movement triggers the opening or
closing the tailgate. R Pull the tailgate handle.
closing process alternately.
# When closing, make sure that no body parts
Observe the notes when opening (→ page 73)
are in the closing area. HANDS-FREE ACCESS function and closing (→ page 74) the tailgate.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped % Two warning tones sound when the tailgate
despite reversing function is opening or closing.
The reversing function does not react: & WARNING Risk of burns caused by a hot
R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers. exhaust system
R over the last 8 mm of the closing path. The vehicle exhaust system can become very
hot. If you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you
In these situations in particular, the reversing could burn yourself by touching the exhaust
function cannot prevent someone being trap‐ system.
ped.
# Always ensure that you only make a
# When closing, make sure that no body
kicking movement within the detection
parts are in the closing area. range of the sensors.
If someone is trapped:
R press the p button on the key, or * NOTE Vehicle damage due to uninten‐
R press or pull the remote operating switch tional opening of the tailgate
on the driver's door, or With HANDS-FREE ACCESS you can open, close R when using an automatic car wash
or stop the closing process of the tailgate by
 Opening and closing 77

R when using a high pressure cleaner The tailgate can open or close unintentionally in
the following situations:
# Deactivate KEYLESS-GO or make sure R If persons' arms or legs move in the sensor
that the key located is at least 3 m detection range, e.g. when polishing the vehi‐
away from the vehicle in such situa‐ cle, sitting on the edge of the luggage com‐
tions. partment, or picking up objects.
When making the kicking movement, make sure R If objects are guided behind or placed behind
that you are standing firmly on the ground you the vehicle, e.g. charging cables, tensioning
could otherwise lose your balance, e.g. on ice. straps or luggage.
Requirements: R When working on the trailer coupling, trailers
1 Sensor detection range or rear bicycle racks.
R The key is behind the vehicle.
If several consecutive kicking movements are Deactivate KEYLESS-GO (→ page 65) or do not
R Stand at least 30 cm away from the vehicle
not successful, wait ten seconds. carry the key about your person in such situa‐
while performing the kicking movement.
System limitations tions.
R Do not come into contact with the bumper
while making the kicking movement. The system may be impaired or may not function
R Do not carry out the kicking movement too if: Limiting the opening angle of the tailgate
slowly. R The area around the sensor is dirty, e.g. due Activating the opening angle limiter
R The kicking movement must be towards the to road salt or snow. You can limit the opening angle of the tailgate in
vehicle and back. R The kicking movement is made using a pros‐ the top half of its opening range, to approx‐
thetic leg. imately 20 cm before the end position.
# Stop the opening procedure of the tailgate at
the desired position.
78 Opening and closing

# Press and hold the closing button in the tail‐ Emergency release of the tailgate from the
gate until you hear a short acoustic signal. inside (vehicles with a folding bench seat)
The opening angle limiter is activated. The
tailgate then stops in the stored position
when opened.
To open the tailgate fully, pull the handle on the
outside of the tailgate again after it has stopped
automatically.
Deactivating the opening angle limiter
# Press and hold the closing button on the tail‐
gate until two short tones sound.

Unlocking the tailgate with the emergency

key
# Fold the rear seat backrest forwards.
# Insert emergency key element 2 into open‐
ing 1 in the trim and push it in.
# Remove the combined luggage cover and net The tailgate is unlocked.
(→ page 116). # Press the cover down in the direction of
arrow 1 and pull in the direction of arrow
2 and remove it.
# Pull the emergency release lever in the direc‐
tion of arrow 3.
The tailgate is unlocked.
 Opening and closing 79

Roller sunblinds Side windows

Extending the rear side window roller sun‐ Opening/closing the side windows
blinds
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
* NOTE Damage to the inertia reel due to when opening a side window
it snapping back When you open a side window, parts of the
If suddenly snapped back, the inertia reel body could be drawn in or become trapped
may be damaged. between the side window and window frame.
# Always move the roller sun blind man‐ # When opening, make sure that nobody
ually. is touching the side window.
# Do not drive with the roller sun blind # If someone is trapped, release the but‐
hooked in and one or more side win‐ ton immediately or pull it in order to
dows open at the same time. close the side window again.

# Pull the roller sunblind out by tab 1 and & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
hook it onto brackets 2 at the top of the when closing a side window
window. When closing a side window, body parts
could be trapped in the closing area in the
process.
# When closing, make sure that no body
parts are in the closing area.
80 Opening and closing

# If someone is trapped, release the but‐ Automatic reversing function for the side
ton immediately or press the button in windows
order to reopen the side window. If an object blocks a side window during the
closing process, the side window opens again
automatically. The automatic reversing function
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped is only an aid and is not a substitute for your
when children operate the side windows attentiveness.
Children could become trapped if they oper‐ # When closing, make sure that no body parts
ate the side windows, particularly when unat‐ are in the closing area.
tended.
# Activate the override feature for the & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
rear side windows. despite there being reversing protection
# When leaving the vehicle, always take
on the side window
the key with you and lock the vehicle. The reversing function does not react:
# Never leave children unattended in the R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small
vehicle. 1 To close fingers
2 To open R over the last 4 mm of the closing path
R during resetting
The buttons in the driver's door take prece‐
dence. R when closing the side window again man‐
# To start automatic operation: press/pull ually immediately after automatic revers‐
the W button beyond the pressure point. ing
# To interrupt automatic operation: press or
pull the W button again.
 Opening and closing 81

This means that the reversing function can‐ # Press and hold the % button on the key. Closing side windows from the outside (con‐
not prevent someone from becoming trapped The following functions are performed: venience closing)
in these situations. R The vehicle is unlocked.
& WARNING Risk of entrapment caused by
# When closing, make sure that no body
R The side windows are opened. inadvertent convenience closing
parts are in the closing area.
R The sliding sunroof is opened. When the convenience closing feature is
# If someone becomes trapped, press the
R The panoramic sliding sunroof is opened. operating, parts of the body could become
W button to open the side window
again. R The seat ventilation of the driver's seat is trapped in the closing area of the side win‐
switched on. dow and the sliding sunroof.
# Observe the complete closing proce‐
Ventilating the vehicle before starting a jour‐ If the roller sunblinds of the panoramic sliding dure when using convenience closing.
ney (convenience opening) sunroof are closed, the roller sunblinds are # When closing, make sure that no body
opened first. parts are in the closing area.
& WARNING Risk of entrapment when # To continue the opening procedure: press
opening a side window the % button again. # Press and hold the & button on the key.
When opening a side window, parts of the # To interrupt convenience opening: release The following functions are performed:
body could be drawn in or become trapped the % button. R The vehicle is locked.
between the side window and window frame.
R The side windows are closed.
# When opening, make sure that nobody
is touching the side window. R The sliding sunroof is closed.

# Release the button immediately if R The panoramic sliding sunroof is closed.

somebody becomes trapped. # To close the roller sunblinds: press the
& button again.
82 Opening and closing

# To interrupt convenience closing: release % Convenience closing can also be operated

the & button. with KEYLESS-GO (→ page 70).

Problems with the side windows

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

A side window cannot be closed and # Check to see if any objects are in the window guide.
you cannot see the cause.
& WARNING Risk of entrapment if reversing protection is not activated
If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window closes
with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active.
Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process.
# Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.

# To stop the closing process, release the button or press the button again to reopen the side win‐
dow.

If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly:

# Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding button again until the side window has
closed, and hold the button for an additional second.
The side window is closed with increased force.

If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly:
 Opening and closing 83

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Repeat the previous step.
The side window is closed without the automatic reversing function.

Sliding sunroof # Press the button in any direction during & WARNING Risk of entrapment while
Opening/closing the sliding sunroof the automatic opening/closing process. opening and closing the roller sunblinds
The opening/closing process is stop‐
% The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the ped. When opening or closing, make sure that no
panoramic sliding sunroof. body parts become trapped between the
roller sunblind and frame or sliding sunroof.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped & WARNING Risk of entrapment if the slid‐ # When opening or closing, make sure
while opening and closing the sliding ing sunroof is operated by children that no body parts are in the sweep of
sunroof Children operating the sliding sunroof could the roller sunblind.
During opening and closing, parts of the get caught in the moving parts, particularly if # Release the switch immediately if

body could get caught in the sweep of the unattended. somebody becomes trapped.
sliding sunroof. # Never leave children unattended in the or
# When opening or closing, make sure
vehicle. # Press the switch in any direction during
that no body parts are in the sweep. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the automatic opening/closing process.
# Release the button immediately if the key with you and lock the vehicle. The opening/closing process is stop‐
somebody becomes trapped. ped.
or
84 Opening and closing

* NOTE Malfunction caused by snow and R The roller sunblind can only be operated
ice when the panoramic sliding sunroof is
closed.
Snow and ice may lead to a malfunction of
the sliding sunroof. # To start automatic operation: press/pull
the 3 button beyond the pressure point.
# Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free
# To interrupt automatic operation: press/
of snow and ice.
pull the 3 button again.
* NOTE Damage caused by protruding Restrictions:
objects R The panoramic sliding sunroof cannot be
opened if a roof rack is fitted. The panoramic
Objects that protrude from the sliding sun‐ sliding sunroof closes again automatically
roof may damage the sealing strips. when it encounters resistance.
# Do not allow anything to protrude from
the sliding sunroof. Automatic reversing function of the sliding
sunroof
1 To raise If there is an object obstructing the sliding sun‐
2 To open roof during the closing process, the sliding sun‐
3 To close/lower roof opens again automatically. The automatic
reversing function is only an aid and is not a sub‐
Use the 3 button to operate the panoramic stitute for your attentiveness.
sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind. # When closing, make sure that no body parts
R The panoramic sliding sunroof can only be are in the closing area.
opened when the roller sunblind is open.
 Opening and closing 85

& WARNING Risk of entrapment even with Automatic reversing function of the roller or
the reversing feature active sunblind
If there is an object obstructing the roller sun‐
# Press the button in any direction during
The reversing function does not react: blind during the closing process, the roller sun‐ the automatic closing process.
blind opens again automatically. The automatic The closing process is stopped.
R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small
fingers reversing function is only an aid and is not a sub‐
R during the last 4 mm of the closing path
stitute for your attentiveness. Automatic features of the sliding sunroof
# When opening or closing the roller sunblind,
R during resetting % The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the
make sure that no body parts are in the
R when closing the sliding sunroof again sweep. panoramic sliding sunroof.
manually immediately after automatic By pushing or pulling the 3 button you can
reversing & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped interrupt the automatic functions: "Rain closing
This means that the reversing feature cannot despite the reversing function being function when driving " and "Automatic lowering
prevent someone being trapped in these sit‐ active feature".
uations. In particular, the reversing function does not Automatic closing when the vehicle is sta‐
# When closing, make sure that no body react to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small tionary
parts are in the closing area. fingers. R If it starts to rain (detected by the rain sensor
# Release the switch immediately if This means that the reversing function can‐ on the windscreen)
somebody becomes trapped. not prevent entrapment in these situations. R At extreme outside temperatures
or # When opening or closing the roller sun‐ R After six hours
# Press the switch in any direction during blind, make sure that no body parts are R If there is a malfunction in the power supply
the automatic closing process. in the sweep.
The closing process is stopped. # Release the button immediately if The rear of the sliding sunroof is then raised.
somebody becomes trapped.
86 Opening and closing

Rain closing function when driving & WARNING Risk of entrapment by auto‐ # If somebody becomes trapped, immedi‐
Vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof: if matic lowering of the sliding sunroof ately pull back the sliding sunroof
it starts to rain, the raised sliding sunroof is switch.
automatically lowered while the vehicle is in At high speeds the raised sliding sunroof The sliding sunroof lifts during opening.
motion. automatically lowers slightly at the rear.
Automatic lowering feature This could trap you or other persons.
# Make sure that nobody reaches into the Problems with the sliding sunroof
Vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof: if
the sliding sunroof is raised at the rear, the slid‐ sweep of the sliding sunroof whilst the % The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the
ing sunroof is automatically lowered slightly at vehicle is in motion. panoramic sliding sunroof.
higher speeds. At low speeds it is raised again
automatically.

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The sliding sunroof cannot be closed & WARNING Risk of entrapment by closing the sliding sunroof again
and you cannot see the cause.
If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding sunroof
closes with increased or maximum force.
The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the
process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
# Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
# Release the switch immediately if somebody becomes trapped.

or
 Opening and closing 87

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Press the switch in any direction during the automatic closing process.
The closing process is stopped.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly:
# Immediately after automatic reversing, pull and hold the 3 button down again to the point of resist‐
ance until the sliding sunroof is closed.
The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again and reopens again slightly:

# Repeat the previous step.
The sliding sunroof is closed again with increased force.
Vehicles without a panoramic slid‐ # Raise the sliding sunroof fully at the rear.
ing sunroof: the sliding sunroof does # Press the 3 button for another second.
not operate smoothly.
# Use automatic operation to fully raise and then close the sliding sunroof.
Vehicles with a panoramic sliding # Pull the 3 button down repeatedly to the point of resistance until the sliding sunroof is fully closed.
sunroof: the sliding sunroof or the # Pull the 3 button for another second.
roller sunblind does not operate
smoothly.
# Pull and hold the 3 button down until the roller sunblind is completely closed.
# Pull the 3 button for another second.
# Use automatic operation to fully open and then close the sliding sunroof.
88 Opening and closing

Anti-theft protection The ATA system is primed automatically after R After pressing the start/stop button with the
approximately 10 seconds: key inside the vehicle.
Immobiliser
R After locking the vehicle with the key. R After unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-
The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from R After locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. GO.
being started without the correct key.
% When the Mercedes‑Benz emergency call
The immobiliser is automatically activated when system is active and the alarm stays on for
the ignition is switched off and deactivated when more than 30 seconds, a message is auto‐
the ignition is switched on. matically sent to the Customer Assistance
Centre (→ page 330).
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Deactivating the ATA (anti-theft alarm sys‐
Function of the ATA system (anti-theft alarm tem) alarm
system) # Press the %, & or p button on the

If the ATA system is primed, a visual and audible key.

alarm is triggered in the following situations: or
R A door is opened. # Press the start/stop button (the SmartKey is

R The tailgate is opened. inside the vehicle).

R The bonnet is opened. Stopping the alarm using KEYLESS-GO
R Interior protection is triggered. (→ page 89) # Grasp the outside door handle (with the key
R Tow-away protection is triggered. When the ATA system is primed, indicator lamp outside the vehicle).
(→ page 89) 1 flashes.
The ATA system is automatically deactivated:
R After unlocking the vehicle with the key.
 Opening and closing 89

Tow-away protection Priming/deactivating tow-away protection Interior protection is automatically deactivated:

An audible and visual alarm is triggered if your Multimedia system: R After pressing the % or p button on
vehicle's angle of inclination is altered while tow- , Vehicle . î Vehicle settings . Tow- the key
away protection is primed. away protection R After pressing the start/stop button with the
Tow-away protection is automatically primed key inside the vehicle.
# Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
after about 60 seconds: R After unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-
R After locking the vehicle with the key. GO.
Interior protection R When using HANDS-FREE ACCESS.
R After locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO.
When interior protection is primed, a visual and
Tow-away protection is only primed when the fol‐ audible alarm is triggered if movement is detec‐ The following situations can lead to a false
lowing components are closed: ted in the vehicle interior. alarm:
R Doors R By moveable objects such as mascots in the
Interior protection is primed automatically after
R Tailgate approximately 10 seconds: vehicle interior.
R When the side window is open.
R After locking the vehicle with the key.
Tow-away protection is automatically deactiva‐ R When the sliding sunroof is open.
ted: R After locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO.
R When the panoramic sliding sunroof is open.
R After pressing the % or p button on Interior protection is only primed when the fol‐
the key lowing components are closed:
R After pressing the start/stop button with the Priming/deactivating interior protection
R Doors
key inside the vehicle. Multimedia system:
R Tailgate
R After unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS- , Vehicle . î Vehicle settings . Inte-
GO. rior motion sensor
R When using HANDS-FREE ACCESS. # Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
90 Seats and stowing

Correct driver's seat position R your legs are not entirely stretched and you
can depress the pedals properly
& WARNING Risk of injury through adjust‐ R the back of your head is supported at eye
ing vehicle settings while the vehicle is in level by the centre of the head restraint
motion R you can hold the steering wheel with your
You could lose control of the vehicle in the arms slightly bent
following situations: R you can move your legs freely
R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head R you can see all the displays in the instrument
restraints, the steering wheel or the mir‐ cluster clearly
ror while the vehicle is in motion R you should have a good overview of traffic
R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐ conditions
cle is in motion R the seat belt is pulled snugly against the
# Before starting the engine: adjust the body and must be routed across the centre
driver's seat, the head restraints, the of your shoulder and across your hips in the
steering wheel or the mirror and fasten Observe the following when adjusting steering pelvic area
your seat belt. wheel 1, seat belt 2 and driver's seat 3:
R you are as far away from the driver's airbag
as possible
R you are sitting in a normal upright position
R your thighs are slightly supported by the seat
cushion
 Seats and stowing 91

Seats & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped & WARNING Risk of injury through adjust‐
Adjusting the front seat manually and elec‐ when adjusting the seats ing vehicle settings while the vehicle is in
trically (without Seat Comfort Package) When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle motion
occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the You could lose control of the vehicle in the
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if seat guide rail. following situations:
the seats are adjusted by children # Make sure when adjusting a seat that R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head
Children could become trapped if they adjust no one has any body parts in the sweep restraints, the steering wheel or the mir‐
the seats, particularly when unattended. of the seat. ror while the vehicle is in motion
# When leaving the vehicle, always take R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐
the key with you and lock the vehicle. Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Chil‐ cle is in motion
This also applies to mobile phones if the dren in the vehicle".
"Digital Car Key in the smartphone" # Before starting the engine: adjust the
function is activated via the Mercedes & WARNING Risk of accident due to the driver's seat, the head restraints, the
connect me web App. driver's seat not being engaged steering wheel or the mirror and fasten
your seat belt.
# Never leave children unattended in the If the driver's seat is not engaged, it could
vehicle. move unexpectedly while the vehicle is in
motion. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if
The seats can be adjusted when the ignition is This could cause you to lose control of the the seat height is adjusted carelessly
switched off. vehicle. If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you
# Always make sure that the driver's seat or other vehicle occupants could be trapped
is engaged before starting the vehicle. and thereby injured.
92 Seats and stowing

Children in particular could accidentally Do not interchange the head restraints of the routed across the centre of your shoul‐
press the electrical seat adjustment buttons front and rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot der.
and become trapped. adjust the height and angle of the head
restraints correctly.
# While moving the seats, make sure that * NOTE Damage to the seats when moving
hands or other body parts do not get Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so the seats back
under the lever assembly of the seat that it is as close as possible to the back of your
adjustment system. head. The seats may be damaged by objects when
moving the seats back.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to an incor‐ # When moving the seats back, make
& WARNING Risk of injury due to head rect seat position
restraints which are not fitted or are sure that there are no objects in the
adjusted incorrectly The seat belt does not offer the intended footwell or under or behind the seats.
level of protection if you have not moved the
If head restraints are not fitted or are adjus‐ seat backrest to an almost vertical position.
ted incorrectly, they cannot provide protec‐
tion as intended. When braking or in the event of an accident,
you could slide underneath the seat belt and
There is an increased risk of injury in the sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for exam‐
head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an ple. This poses an increased risk of injury or
accident or when braking. even fatal injury.
# Always drive with the head restraints
# Adjust the seat correctly before starting
fitted. the journey.
# Before driving off, make sure for every
# Always ensure that the seat backrest is
vehicle occupant that the centre of the in an almost vertical position and that
head restraint supports the back of the the shoulder section of your seat belt is
head at about eye level.
 Seats and stowing 93

Adjusting the front seat manually and elec‐ # To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position:
trically (with Seat Comfort Package) lift lever 4 and slide the seat forwards or
backwards.
# Make sure that the seat is engaged.
# To adjust the seat cushion length: lift lever
5 and slide the front section of the seat
cushion forwards or backwards.

1 Seat backrest inclination

2 Seat height
3 Seat fore-and-aft position 1 Seat backrest inclination
# To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position: 2 Seat height
lift lever 3 and slide the seat into the 3 Seat cushion inclination
desired position. 4 Seat fore-and-aft position
# Make sure that the seat is engaged. 5 Seat cushion length
94 Seats and stowing

Adjusting the seats electrically # Save the settings with the memory function
(→ page 107).

Adjusting the front passenger seat from the

driver's seat
Requirement:
R Power supply switched on

This function is only available on vehicles with an

electrically adjustable front passenger seat.

You can call up the following functions for the

front passenger seat:
1 Head restraint height R Seat adjustment
2 Seat backrest inclination
R Seat heater
3 Seat height
R Seat ventilation
4 Seat cushion length
5 Seat cushion inclination R Memory function
6 Seat fore-and-aft position
 Seats and stowing 95

# Press button 1 repeatedly until the indica‐ Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support Head restraints
tor lamp in the button lights up.
Adjusting the front seat head restraints man‐
The front passenger seat is selected.
ually
# Adjust the front passenger seat using the
buttons in the door control panel on the driv‐ & WARNING Risk of injury through adjust‐
er's side. ing vehicle settings while the vehicle is in
motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the
following situations:
R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraints, the steering wheel or the mir‐
ror while the vehicle is in motion
R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐
cle is in motion
# Before starting the engine: adjust the
driver's seat, the head restraints, the
1 To raise steering wheel or the mirror and fasten
2 To soften your seat belt.
3 To lower
4 To harden
# Using buttons 1 to 4, adjust the contour
of the backrest individually to suit your back.
96 Seats and stowing

& WARNING Risk of injury due to head # To move backwards: press release knob 2
restraints which are not fitted or are and push the head restraint backwards.
adjusted incorrectly Adjusting the front seat luxury head
If head restraints are not fitted or are adjus‐ restraints
ted incorrectly, they cannot provide protec‐
tion as intended.
There is an increased risk of injury in the
head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an
accident or when braking.
# Always drive with the head restraints
fitted.
# Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the centre of the
head restraint supports the back of the
head at about eye level. # To raise: pull the head restraint up.
Do not interchange the head restraints of the # To lower: press release knob 1 in the direc‐
front and rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot tion of the arrow and push the head restraint
adjust the height and angle of the head down.
restraints correctly. Adjusting the gap between the head # To adjust the side bolsters of the head
Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so restraint and the back of your head: restraint: pull or push right or left-hand side
that it is as close as possible to the back of your # To move forwards: pull the head restraint bolster 2.
head. forwards.
 Seats and stowing 97

Adjusting the gap between the head # Press button 1. # Release the rear seat backrest and fold it
restraint and the back of your head: slightly forwards.
Adjusting the rear seat head restraints
# To move forwards: pull the head restraint # To remove: pull the head restraint up to the
forwards. stop.
# To move backwards: press release knob 1 # Push release knob 1 in the direction of the
and push the head restraint backwards. arrow and pull out the head restraint.
Lowering the rear seat head restraints from # To fit: insert the head restraint so that the
the front notches on the bar are on the left when
viewed in the direction of travel.
# Push the head restraint down until it
engages.
# Fold the rear seat backrest back until it
engages.

Configuring seat settings

Multimedia system:
, Vehicle . a Seats
# To raise: pull the head restraint up.
# Select Driver's seat or Front-passenger area.
# To lower: press release knob 1 in the direc‐
tion of the arrow and push the head restraint Adjusting the backrest side bolsters
down. # Select Side bolsters.
Only the outer head restraints can be removed.
# Select the setting.
98 Seats and stowing

Adjusting the seat contour in the lumbar Adjusting the dynamic multicontour seat # Select Driver's seat or Front-passenger area.
region of the seat backrest Select Dynamic seat.
Multimedia system: #
# Select Lumbar.
, Vehicle . a Seats # Select setting: Off, Level 1 or Level 2.
# Adjust the air cushion.
The dynamic lateral cornering support can be
# Save the settings with the memory function adjusted using this function.
(→ page 107).
Overview of massage and workout programs
The following massage programs can be selected:

Massage program for the front seats Function

Hot Relaxing Massage for back Relaxing massage program starting in the pelvic area. Warm pressure points can be felt, full back massage,
stretching the pelvic area. Ending with gentle stroking motions.
Hot Relaxing Massage for shoulders Relaxing massage program starting in the shoulder area. Warm pressure points can be felt, full twin-wave
back massage, stretching the shoulder area. Ending with gentle stroking motions.
Activating Massage Activating back massage with increasing twin-waves and then soothing movements.
Classic Massage Massage with increasing twin-waves and soothing movements.
 Seats and stowing 99

Massage program for the front seats Function

Wave Massage Relaxing and activating massage program, starting on your back and continuing in the cushion. Subse‐
quent stroking motions across the entire spinal column.
Mobilising Massage Mobilisation of the spinal column and upper body using pressure points in the lumbar and back. You can
increase the mobilisation effect by relaxing into the pressure points. This process helps to improve your
posture.

Active Workout programs ing your abdomen and back muscles during a ing also helps to improve blood flow in your mus‐
The Active Workout programs require your active traffic jam, for example, by tensing and releasing cles. Press against a pressure point as soon as
cooperation and are a convenient way of exercis‐ the specific muscle groups. Tensing and releas‐ you feel it.

The following Active Workout programs can be selected:

Workout program Function

Active Workout backrest To stimulate the muscles in your abdomen and back: press against the pressure points in the backrest.
Keep the pressure under your feet even. Continue to breathe normally; do not hold your breath.
When the pressure in the seat backrest recedes, stop pressing against it and relax briefly.
Active Workout cushion To stimulate the muscles in your lower back: press against the pressure points in the seat cushion. Keep
the pressure under your feet even. Continue to breathe normally; do not hold your breath.
When the pressure in the seat cushion recedes, stop pressing against it and relax briefly.
100 Seats and stowing

Selecting the massage programme for the Switching the seat heater on/off
front seats
& WARNING Risk of burns due to repeat‐
Multimedia system:
edly switching on the seat heater
, Vehicle . a Seats
Repeatedly switching on the seat heater can
# Select Driver's seat or Front-passenger area.
cause the seat cushion and seat backrest
# Select Massage. padding to become very hot.
# Select a massage programme. The health of persons with limited tempera‐
The massage programme runs for approx‐ ture sensitivity or a limited ability to react to
imately 9 to 15 minutes, depending on the excessively high temperatures may be affec‐
setting. ted or they may even suffer burn-like injuries.
# To set the massage intensity: switch High # Do not repeatedly switch on the seat
intensity on O or off ª. heater.

Resetting seat and massage settings # To switch on/increase the level: press but‐
Multimedia system: ton 1 repeatedly until the desired heating
, Vehicle . a Seats . Reset level is set.
# Select Yes or No.
Depending on the heating level, up to three
indicator lamps light up.
Depending on whether the settings for the driver # To switch off/reduce the level: press but‐
or front passenger seat are selected, only the ton 1 repeatedly until all the indicator
selected seat can be reset. lamps go out.
 Seats and stowing 101

% The seat heater automatically switches down Folding bench seat in the load compartment
from the three heating levels after certain
Notes on the folding bench seat
periods of time: 8, 10 and 20 minutes until
the seat heater is switched off. & WARNING Risk of injury when the seat
backrest is not upright and locked in
Setting the panel heating position
Multimedia system: If the seat backrests of the rear bench seat
, Vehicle . î Vehicle set- are not locked in the upright position, the
tings . Panel heating seat backrest of the folding bench seat may
fold down while driving.
When the seat heater is switched on, the armr‐
ests in the vehicle as well as the centre console In this case, the seat belts may not perform
can be heated using this function. their intended protective function.
# Make sure that the seat backrests of
Setting options
the rear bench seat are locked in the
# Select Front and rear, Front only, Rear only
upright position.
or Off. # To switch on/increase the level/
decrease the level: press button 1 repeat‐ Observe the notes on "Seat belts" (→ page 35),
edly until the desired ventilation level is set. "Head restraints" (→ page 95) and "Children in
Switching the seat ventilation on/off Depending on the ventilation level, up to the vehicle" (→ page 45).
Requirement: three indicator lamps light up.
The folding bench seat is only approved for use
R power supply switched on # To switch off: press button 1 repeatedly with child seats designed for children up to six
until all the indicator lamps go out. years old (→ page 58).
102 Seats and stowing

A switch to open the tailgate from the folding

bench seat is located on the wheel arch, on the
right-hand side when viewed in the direction of
travel.
You can obtain information on child restraint
systems on the folding bench seat from any
Mercedes-Benz service centre.
The folding bench seat may only be used when
the combined luggage cover and net is installed.
Folding out the folding bench seat
Requirements:
R The seat backrests of the rear bench seat are
locked in the upright position.
R The handle of the combined luggage cover
and net has been moved up and, to improve # Pull release handle 1 and fold the seat
the rear view, the upper part of the plate has backrest of the folding bench seat upwards.
been folded down. # Hook the seat belts into retainers 3.
# Secure the seat belt buckles in the back of
the seat backrest.
# Pull release 2 and fold the seat cushion of
the folding bench seat into the seat position.
 Seats and stowing 103

# Push down the seat cushion until the seat

backrest engages fully.
# Fold the head restraints upwards.
Fitting and removing the seat cushion
You must remove the seat cushion on the folding
bench seat beforehand if you wish to lift the load
compartment floor in the event of a flat tyre, for
example.

# To remove: fold seat cushion 2 vertically

upwards and remove it from seat cushion
guide 1.
# To fit: push seat cushion 2 into seat cush‐
ion guide 1 from the rear 3.
# Fold seat cushion 2 back into its starting
position 4 until it engages.
104 Seats and stowing

Folding back the folding bench seat * NOTE Damage to the folding bench seat
# Press release knob 3 and fold the head
when folding back restraints down.
# Press release knob 4 and push the head
The folding bench seat may be damaged restraints all the way in.
when it is folded back.
# Fold back seat backrest 2 of the folding
# Fully insert the head restraints into the
bench seat into its starting position.
guides.
# Make sure that the seat belt buckles
engages in their guides. Steering wheel
Adjusting the steering wheel manually

& WARNING Risk of injury through adjust‐

ing vehicle settings while the vehicle is in
motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the
following situations:
# Pull the seat cushion upwards by tab 1 and R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head
fold it back into its starting position until it restraints, the steering wheel or the mir‐
engages. ror while the vehicle is in motion
R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐
cle is in motion
 Seats and stowing 105

# Before starting the engine: adjust the Adjusting the steering wheel electrically
driver's seat, the head restraints, the The steering wheel can be adjusted when the
steering wheel or the mirror and fasten ignition is switched off.
your seat belt.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment for chil‐

dren when adjusting the steering wheel
Children could injure themselves if they
adjust the steering wheel.
# Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle.
This also applies to mobile phones if the
"Digital Car Key in the smartphone" # To unlock the steering column: push
function is activated via the Mercedes release lever 1 down completely.
connect me web app.
# Adjust height 2 and distance to steering
wheel 3.
# To lock the steering column: push release 1 Adjusts the distance to the steering wheel
lever 1 up as far as it will go. 2 Adjusts the height
# Check and make sure that the steering col‐ # Save the settings with the memory function.
umn is locked by moving the steering wheel.
106 Seats and stowing

Switching the steering wheel heater on/off Easy entry and exit feature that no one has any body parts in the
How the easy entry and exit feature operates sweep of the steering wheel.
# Move the adjustment lever of the steer‐
& WARNING Risk of accident when pulling ing wheel if there is a risk of becoming
away during the adjustment process of trapped by the steering wheel.
the easy exit feature The adjustment process is stopped.
‑ If you pull away while the easy entry and # Never leave children unattended in the
exit feature is making adjustments, you could vehicle.
lose control of the vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take
# Always wait until the adjustment proc‐ the key with you and lock the vehicle.
ess is complete before pulling away. This also applies to mobile phones if the
"Digital Car Key in the smartphone"
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped function is activated via the Mercedes
while adjusting the easy entry and exit connect me web App.
feature
The easy entry and exit feature makes getting in
When the easy entry and exit feature adjusts and out of your vehicle easier.
1 To switch on the steering wheel, you and other vehicle If the easy entry and exit feature is active, the
2 To switch off occupants – particularly children – could steering wheel will move upwards in the follow‐
3 Indicator lamp become trapped. ing situations:
# During the adjustment process of the
R you switch the ignition off
easy entry and exit feature, make sure
R you open the driver's door when the ignition
is switched on
 Seats and stowing 107

The steering wheel moves back to the last drive Using the memory function # If somebody becomes trapped, immedi‐
position in the following cases: ately release the memory function posi‐
R you switch the ignition on when the driver's & WARNING Risk of an accident if memory tion button.
door is closed function is used while driving The adjustment process is stopped.
R you close the driver's door when the ignition If you use the memory function on the driv‐
is switched on er's side while driving, you could lose control & WARNING Risk of entrapment if the
of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments memory function is activated by children
The last drive position of the steering wheel is
stored: being made. Children could become trapped if they acti‐
# Only use the memory function on the vate the memory function, particularly when
R when you switch off the ignition
driver's side when the vehicle is station‐ unattended.
R using the last setting stored using the mem‐ ary. # Never leave children unattended in the
ory function
vehicle.
If you press one of the memory function position & WARNING Risk of entrapment when set‐ # When leaving the vehicle, always take
buttons, the adjustment process is stopped. ting the seat with the memory function the key with you and lock the vehicle.
The crash-responsive exit aid only functions If you use the memory function to set the This also applies to mobile phones if the
when the easy entry and exit feature is active. seat or the steering wheel, you and other "Digital Car Key in the smartphone"
vehicle occupants, especially children, could function is activated via the Mercedes
Setting the easy entry and exit feature
be entrapped. – – connect me web app.
Multimedia system:
, Vehicle . î Vehicle set- # During the setting procedure of the
The memory function can be used when the igni‐
tings . Easy Entry/Exit memory function, ensure that no body
tion is switched off.
parts are in the sweep of the seat or
# Activate O or deactivate ª the function. Seat comfort positions for up to three people
the steering wheel.
can be stored and called up using the memory
function.
108 Seats and stowing

The following systems can be set using the # To save: set the seat, the steering wheel, the # Never drive with the tailgate open.
memory function: Head-up Display and the outside mirror to
R Seat, backrest and head restraint the desired position.
& WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured
R Steering wheel # Press the memory button M together with items in the vehicle
one of the storage position buttons 1, 2 or 3.
R Outside mirrors If objects, luggage or loads are not secured
An acknowledgement tone sounds. The set‐
R Head-up Display tings are stored. or not secured sufficiently, they could slip,
tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit
# To call up: press and hold button 1, 2 or 3
vehicle occupants.
until all the seat comfort systems are in the
stored position. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
Stowage areas # Always stow objects in such a way that
Notes on loading the vehicle they cannot be thrown around.
# Before the journey, secure objects, lug‐
& WARNING Risk of exhaust gas poisoning gage or loads against slipping or tipping
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust over.
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tail‐ & WARNING Risk of injury due to objects
gate is open when the engine is running, being stowed incorrectly
especially if the vehicle is in motion.
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed
# Always switch off the engine before
incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown
opening the tailgate. around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi‐
 Seats and stowing 109

tion, cup holders, open stowage spaces and # Always be particularly careful around Interior stowage compartments
mobile phone brackets cannot always retain the tailpipe and the tailpipe trim. Overview of the front stowage compart‐
all objects they contain. # Allow the vehicle parts to cool down ments
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the before you touch them. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle
event of sudden braking or a sudden change (→ page 108).
in direction. The handling characteristics of your vehicle are
# Always stow objects so that they can‐ dependent on the distribution of the load within
not be thrown around in such situa‐ the vehicle. You should bear the following in
tions. mind when loading the vehicle:
# Always make sure that objects do not R never exceed the maximum permissible
protrude from stowage spaces, luggage gross mass or the permissible axle loads for
nets or stowage nets. the vehicle (including occupants).
# Close the lockable stowage spaces R the load must not protrude above the upper
before starting a journey. edge of the seat backrests.
# Stow and secure objects that are heavy, R when transporting objects in the load com‐
hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or partment, the combined luggage cover and 1 Stowage compartment in the doors
too large in the load compartment. net must always be installed (load compart‐ 2 Stowage/telephone compartment in the
ment cover and safety net). armrest with multimedia connections and
R always place the load behind unoccupied stowage compartment, e.g. for an MP3
& WARNING Risk of burns from tailpipes
and tailpipe trim seats if possible. player
R secure the load using the tie-down eyes and
The tailpipe and tailpipe trim can become distribute the load evenly.
very hot. If you come into contact with these
parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself.
110 Seats and stowing

3 Stowage compartment in the front centre # Turn the emergency key a quarter turn clock‐
console with a USB port (depending on the wise 2 (to lock) or anti-clockwise 1 (to
vehicle's equipment) unlock).
4 Glove box Opening the spectacles compartment
Locking/unlocking the glove box Observe the notes on loading the vehicle
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (→ page 108).
(→ page 108).

# To open: press release catch 1 and swing

the cover of the armrest upwards.
# To open: press button 1.
Opening the stowage compartment in the
rear armrest
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle
(→ page 108).
 Seats and stowing 111

Through-loading feature in the rear bench If the seat backrest is not engaged and locked,
seat this will be shown in the multifunction display in
the instrument cluster.
Folding the rear seat backrest forwards
The centre and outer seat backrests can be fol‐
& WARNING Risk of injury if the rear ded forwards separately.
bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest The right outer seat backrest can only be folded
are not engaged forwards together with the centre seat backrest.
If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat The outer seat backrests are electrically
backrest are not engaged they could fold for‐ unlocked with the release handles in either the
wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the load compartment or beside the seat backrests.
event of an accident. # Fully insert the rear seat backrest head
R If this is the case, the vehicle occupant restraints.
would be forced into the seat belt by the
rear bench seat/rear seat or by the seat
backrest. The seat belt cannot protect as
intended and could result in additional
injury.
R Objects or loads in the boot/load com‐
partment cannot be restrained by the
seat backrest.
# Make sure that the seat backrest and
the rear bench seat/rear seat are
engaged before every trip.
112 Seats and stowing

Folding the rear seat backrest back

* NOTE Damage to the seat belt

The seat belt could become trapped and thus
damaged when folding back the seat back‐
rest.
# Make sure that the seat belt is not trap‐
ped when folding back the seat back‐
rest.

If the seat backrest is not engaged and locked,

this will be shown in the multifunction display in
the instrument cluster.
# Move the driver's or front passenger seat for‐
wards, if necessary.
# Left and right and seat backrests: press # Centre seat backrest: pull seat backrest 2
right or left button 1. release 3 forwards.
The corresponding seat backrest folds for‐ # Fold seat backrest 2 forwards.
wards.
 Seats and stowing 113

Locking the centre rear seat backrest # Fold the centre and left seat backrest for‐
Lock the centre seat backrest if you want to wards.
secure the load compartment from unauthorised # To lock: slide catch 1 upwards.
access. The centre seat backrest can then only The release mechanism of the centre seat
be folded forwards together with the left seat backrest is locked.
backrest.
# To unlock: slide catch 1 downwards.
Both seat backrests must be engaged and joined
together. Adjusting the angle of the rear seat backr‐
ests (cargo position)
To enlarge the load compartment, you can adjust
the seat backrests so that they are 10 degrees
steeper (cargo position).

# Fold corresponding seat backrest 1 back

until it engages.
Left and right seat backrests: if the seat
backrest is not correctly engaged, this will be
shown in the multifunction display in the
instrument cluster.
Centre seat backrest: if the seat backrest is
not correctly engaged, red lock verification
indicator 2 will be visible.
114 Seats and stowing

Securing the ski/snowboard bag in the load A maximum of four pairs of skis or two snow‐
compartment boards may be transported in the ski/snow‐
board bag.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to using the
through-load ski bag incorrectly
The through-load ski bag in conjunction with
the lashing straps cannot restrain any
objects other than skis.
Vehicle occupants could be struck in the
event of sudden braking or an accident in the
following cases:
R If you transport other heavy or sharp-
edged objects in the through-load ski bag
R If you do not secure the through-load ski
bag with the lashing straps
# Fold the seat backrest forwards
(→ page 111). # Only store skis in the through-load ski
# Move bar 1 in the direction of the arrow. bag.
# Push seat backrest 2 back to bar 1 until # Always secure the through-load ski bag # Fold the centre rear seat backrest forwards.
the backrest engages. with the lashing straps so that it cannot
move around. # Slide the bag between the outer seat backr‐
ests into the rear.
# Undo zip 2, place the skis or snowboards
inside the bag and close it.
 Seats and stowing 115

# Pull tensioning strap tight by the loose end in # Secure objects, luggage or loads Extending/retracting the load compartment
order to secure the skis or snowboards against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by cover
inside the ski/snowboard bag. using lashing material, even if you are
# Attach lashing strap 1 onto hook 3 in a using the load compartment cover.
crosswise pattern with the fastener facing
upwards in tie-down eye 4. * NOTE Damage to the load compartment
cover when loading the vehicle
Load compartment cover with safety net The load compartment cover may be dam‐
(combined luggage cover and net) aged when loading the vehicle.
Notes on the load compartment cover # Do not place any objects above the
lower edge of the side windows or on
& WARNING Risk of injury due to poorly the load compartment cover.
secured objects # To extend: pull load compartment cover 1
The load compartment cover and the safety net back by grab handle 2 and clip it into the
On its own, the load compartment cover can‐ brackets on the left and right.
not secure or restrain heavy objects, items of form the combined luggage cover and net.
luggage and heavy loads. When the load compartment cover is clipped in, The load compartment cover raises automati‐
You could be hit by an unsecured load during no objects in the load compartment should cally when the tailgate is opened and lowers
sudden changes in direction, braking or in obstruct the downwards movement of the cover again when the tailgate is closed.
the event of an accident. There is an when the tailgate is closed. The load compart‐ # To retract: unhook load compartment cover
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. ment cover will otherwise be raised again auto‐ 1 from the brackets on the left and right
matically. and guide it forwards by grab handle 2 until
# Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown around. it is fully retracted.
116 Seats and stowing

The contour plate of the extended load compart‐ # To install: slide the combined luggage cover
ment cover can be used in three positions: and net into right-hand bracket 4 up to the
R folded up by 45° (loading position) stop.
R horizontal position (driving position) # Place the combined luggage cover and net
into the left-hand bracket and slide it into
R folded down and locked in place (rattle-free
catch 1 until the combined luggage cover
position when driving) and net engages audibly.
Installing/removing the combined luggage Red lock verification indicator 3 must no
cover and net longer be visible.
Requirements: Attaching the combined luggage cover and
R Remove from the load compartment or from net to the rear seat backrest
the left-hand rear door if the seat backrests
are folded forwards. * NOTE Damage to the combined luggage
R The load compartment cover and safety net
cover and net when attaching it to the
are retracted. seat backrest
# To remove: press button 2. When the combined luggage cover and net is
# Fold the combined luggage cover and net attached to the seat backrest, it may be
backwards with the seat backrest folded up. damaged when the seat backrest is folded
# First, detach the combined luggage cover back.
and net from left-hand catch 1 and then # Do not fold the seat backrests back.
remove it from right-hand bracket 4.
Requirement:
R The seat backrests are folded forwards.
 Seats and stowing 117

Attaching the safety net

& WARNING Risk of injury due to poorly

secured objects
On its own, the safety net cannot secure or
restrain heavy objects, items of luggage and
heavy loads.
You could be hit by an unsecured load during
sudden changes in direction, braking or in
the event of an accident. There is an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
# Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown around.
# Secure objects, luggage or loads
against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by
# Insert combined luggage cover and net 2 using lashing material, even if you are # Safety net without load compartment
into both guides 1 and push it up to the using the safety net. enlargement: pull the safety net back from
stop in the direction of the arrow. the rear bench seat by tab 1.
To disassemble the combined luggage cover and For safety reasons, always use a safety net when # Hook the safety net first on the left, then on
net, follow the instructions in reverse order. transporting a load. the right into eyelets 2.
Damaged safety nets can no longer fulfil their
protective functions and must be replaced. Visit
a qualified specialist workshop.
118 Seats and stowing

Overview of the tie-down eyes Overview of bag hooks

& WARNING Risk of injury when using bag

hooks with heavy objects
The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects
or items of luggage.
Objects or items of luggage could be thrown
around and thereby hit vehicle occupants
when braking or abruptly changing direc‐
tions.
# Only hang light objects on the bag
hooks.
# Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile
objects on the bag hooks.
# Safety net with load compartment The bag hook can bear a maximum load of 3 kg.
enlargement: guide the safety net up by tab Do not use it to secure a load.
1 and hook it into eyelets 2. 1 Tie-down eyes
Related topic:
Loading guidelines (→ page 108).
 Seats and stowing 119

EASY-PACK load-securing kit

Notes on the EASY-PACK load-securing kit
The EASY-PACK load-securing kit allows you to
use your load compartment for a variety of pur‐
poses. The components are located under the
load compartment floor.

1 Bag hook 1 Bag containing the brackets and luggage

holder
Related topic:
2 Telescopic rod
Loading guidelines (→ page 108).
120 Seats and stowing

Inserting the brackets into the load rail # If necessary, fold tie-down eye 2 upwards.
Tensioning the luggage holder
Requirements:
R The luggage holder is used to secure loads
against the side wall of the load compart‐
ment to prevent them from moving around.
R Only secure loads with a maximum weight of
7 kg and which are small enough for the lug‐
gage holder to tightly and properly secure
them.

# To install: insert two brackets 5 into the

left or right load rail.
# Insert bracket 1 into the centre of load rail
5. # Press release knob 1 of luggage holder 2
and pull the strap out slightly.
# Press release knob 3 and slide bracket 1
into the desired position in load rail 5. # Insert luggage holder 2 into brackets 5
and, while doing so, press release knob 3
# Let go of release knob 3. and slide the luggage holder downwards until
# Press locking button 4. it engages.
Bracket 1 is locked in load rail 5.
 Seats and stowing 121

# Press release knob 1 of the luggage holder # Make sure that locking button 4 on brack‐
and pull the strap out in the direction of the ets 2 is pressed.
arrow. Brackets 2 are secured in place on the load
# Place the load between the strap and the rail.
load compartment side wall. # To remove: press release knob 3 on
# Using one hand, press release knob 1 of respective bracket 2 and remove telescopic
the luggage holder. rod 1 by pulling it upwards and out.
# With your other hand, let the strap go slowly
until the load is secured. Opening the stowage space under the load
# Make sure that locking button 4 on brack‐ compartment floor
ets 5 is pressed.
Brackets 5 are secured in place on the load & WARNING Risk of injury due to an open
rail. load compartment floor
# To remove: press release knob 3 on If you drive when the load compartment floor
respective bracket 5 and remove luggage is open, objects could be thrown around and
# To install: insert one bracket 2 into both thereby strike vehicle occupants. There is a
holder 2 by pulling upwards and out.
the left and right load rails and slide it to the risk of injury, particularly in the event of sud‐
Tensioning the telescopic rod desired position. den braking or a sudden change in direction.
Requirement: # Insert telescopic rod 1 into brackets 2. # Always close the load compartment
The telescopic rod is used to secure loads # When doing so, press release knob 3 and floor before a journey.
against the rear seats to prevent them from slide telescopic rod 1 down until it
moving around. engages.
122 Seats and stowing

# To close: unhook the hook from the rain Requirements:

trough and fasten it to the bracket on the R Only use roof racks tested and approved by
underside of the load compartment floor. Mercedes-Benz.
# Fold the load compartment floor downwards R Make sure that you can raise the sliding sun‐
and then press handle 1 down until it roof fully and open the tailgate fully once the
engages. roof rack is fitted.
R The panoramic sliding sunroof cannot be
Attaching the roof rack opened if a roof rack is fitted. The panoramic
sliding sunroof closes again automatically
& WARNING Risk of injury by exceeding when it encounters resistance.
the maximum roof load # Secure the roof rack to the roof railing.
When you load the roof, the vehicle centre of # Observe the manufacturer's installation
gravity rises and the driving characteristics instructions.
change.
# To open: holding the ribbing, press handle If you exceed the maximum roof load, the
1 downwards. driving characteristics, as well as the steer‐
ing and braking, will be greatly impaired.
# Lift the load compartment floor upwards by # Never exceed the maximum roof load
handle 1.
and adjust your driving style.
# Fold out the hook on the strap on the under‐
side of the load compartment floor and hook You will find information on the maximum roof
it into the rain trough. load in the "Technical data" section.
 Seats and stowing 123

Cup holders Fitting/removing the cup holder in the

centre console (manual transmission)
Fitting or removing the cup holder in the
centre console & WARNING ‑ Risk of accident or injury
when using the cup holder while the
& WARNING ‑ Risk of accident or injury
vehicle is in motion
when using the cup holder while the
vehicle is in motion The cup holder cannot hold a container
secure while the vehicle is in motion.
The cup holder cannot hold a container
secure while the vehicle is in motion. If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is in
motion, the container may be flung around
If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is in and liquids could be spilled. The vehicle
motion, the container may be flung around occupants may come into contact with the
and liquids could be spilled. The vehicle liquid and if it is hot, they could be scalded.
occupants may come into contact with the You could be distracted from traffic condi‐
liquid and if it is hot, they could be scalded. tions and you may lose control of the vehicle.
You could be distracted from traffic condi‐
tions and you may lose control of the vehicle. # To remove: slide catch 2 forwards and pull # Only use the cup holder when the vehi‐
out cup holder 1. cle is stationary.
# Only use the cup holder when the vehi‐
# To fit: insert cup holder 1 and slide back # Only use the cup holder for containers
cle is stationary.
catch 2. of the right size.
# Only use the cup holder for containers
% The rubber mat of the cup holder can be # Always close the container, particularly
of the right size.
removed for cleaning, e.g. using clean, luke‐ if the liquid is hot.
# Always close the container, particularly
warm water.
if the liquid is hot.
124 Seats and stowing

Opening the cup holder in the rear armrest

* NOTE Damage to the cup holder

When the rear armrest is folded back the cup
holder could become damaged.
# Only fold the rear armrest back when
the cup holder is closed.

# To remove: slide both cup holder sections # To fit: insert the cup holder at the front and
1 inwards until they release. then slide it until it reaches edge 3.
# Slide the cup holder forwards and remove The wedge of the upper section of the cup
cup holder 2. holder must face upwards.
# Slide upper cup holder sections 1 outwards
until both right and left sides 2 engage.
% The rubber mat of the cup holder can be
removed for cleaning, e.g. using clean, luke‐
warm water.
 Seats and stowing 125

# To open: press on cup holder 1 or 2. Using the rear ashtray

# To fold in or out: place or remove a con‐
tainer from cup holder 1 or 2.

Ashtray and cigarette lighter

Using the ashtray in the front centre console

* NOTE Damage to the stowage compart‐

ment under the ashtray
# To open: push the cover of the ashtray
The stowage compartment under the ashtray upwards on right 2 or left side.
is not heat resistant and could be damaged if # To open: pull cover 2 out by its top handle
you rest lit cigarettes on it. # To remove the insert: push insert 1 for‐ edge.
wards slightly and pull it upwards and out.
# Ensure that the ashtray is fully engaged. # To remove the insert: push ribbing 3 from
# To refit the insert: press insert 1 into the the left side and pull insert 1 upwards and
holder until it engages. out.
# To fit the insert: fit insert 1 from above
and press down into the holder until it
engages.
126 Seats and stowing

Using the cigarette lighter

& WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury from

the hot cigarette lighter
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot
heating element or the socket of the ciga‐
rette lighter.
In addition, flammable materials may ignite
if:
R you drop the hot cigarette lighter # Press in cigarette lighter 1. # Lift up cover 1 of the socket and insert the
R a child holds the hot cigarette lighter to The cigarette lighter will pop out automati‐ plug of the device.
objects, for example cally when the heating element is red-hot.
# Always hold the cigarette lighter by the Using the rear 12 V socket
knob. Sockets Requirement:
# Always make sure that the cigarette 12 V socket in the front centre console only connect devices up to a maximum of 180
lighter is out of reach of children. Watt (15 A)
Requirements:
# Never leave children unattended in the
R Only connect devices up to a maximum of
vehicle.
180 Watt (15 A)
R if you have connected a device to the 12 V
socket, leave the cover of the stowage com‐
partment open
 Seats and stowing 127

socket is pulled out of the trim or is damaged Requirements:

or wet. R Only connect devices with a suitable plug
which conforms to the standards specific to
# Use only connecting cables that are dry
the country you are in.
and free of damage.
R Only connect devices up to a maximum of
# When the ignition is switched off, make
150 watts.
sure that the 230 V power socket is dry.
R Do not use multiple socket outlets.
# Immediately have the 230 V power
socket checked or replaced at a quali‐
fied specialised workshop if it is dam‐
# Briefly press the trim of cover 2. aged or has been pulled out of the trim.
# Lift out cover 1 of the socket and insert the # Never plug the connecting cable into a

plug of the device. 230 V power socket that is damaged or

has been pulled out of the trim.
Using the 230 V socket in the rear compart‐
ment & DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to incor‐
rect handling of the socket
& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to dam‐ You could receive an electric shock:
aged connecting cables or sockets R if you reach into the socket.
When a suitable device is connected, the R if you insert unsuitable devices or objects
230 V power socket will be carrying a high into the socket.
voltage. You could receive an electric shock
if the connecting cable or the 230 V power # Only connect suitable devices to the
socket. # Open flap 3.
128 Seats and stowing

# Insert the plug of the device into 230 V Wireless charging of the mobile phone and
socket 1. connection with the exterior aerial
When the on-board electrical system voltage
is sufficient, indicator lamp 2 lights up. Notes on wireless charging of the mobile
phone

Using the 12 V socket in the load compart‐ & WARNING Risk of injury due to objects
ment being stowed incorrectly
Requirement: If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed
Only connect devices up to a maximum of 180 incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown
Watt (15 A) around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi‐
tion, cup holders, open stowage spaces and
mobile phone receptacles cannot always
retain all objects they contain.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
# Lift up cover 1 of the socket and insert the in direction.
plug of the device. # Always stow objects so that they can‐
not be thrown around in such situa‐
tions.
# Always make sure that objects do not
protrude from stowage spaces, luggage
nets or stowage nets.
 Seats and stowing 129

# Close the lockable stowage spaces * NOTE Damage to objects caused by R The charging function and wireless connec‐
before starting a journey. placing them in the mobile phone stow‐ tion of the mobile phone to the vehicle's
age compartment exterior aerial are only available if the ignition
# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, is switched on.
pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky If you place objects in the mobile phone
objects in the boot/load compartment. R Small mobile phones may not be able to be
stowage compartment, these may be dam‐ charged in every position of the mobile
aged by electromagnetic fields. phone stowage compartment.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.
# Do not place credit cards, storage
R Large mobile phones which do not rest flat in
& WARNING Risk of fire from placing media or other objects sensitive to the mobile phone stowage compartment may
objects in the mobile phone stowage electromagnetic fields in the mobile not be able to be charged or connected with
compartment phone stowage compartment. the vehicle's exterior aerial.
If you place objects in the mobile phone R The mobile phone may heat up during the
stowage compartment, they may heat up * NOTE Damage to the mobile phone charging process. The mobile phone can be
excessively and even catch fire. stowage compartment caused by liquids cooled in the mobile phone stowage com‐
# Do not place additional objects, espe‐ If liquid is spilled in the mobile phone stow‐ partment when the air conditioning system is
cially those mode of metal, in the age compartment, the mobile phone stowage switched on. The cooling output in the
mobile phone stowage compartment. compartment may be damaged. mobile phone stowage compartment is high‐
# Do not spill liquids into the mobile
est when the controller in the glove box is
closed.
phone stowage compartment.

R Depending on the vehicle equipment, the Wireless charging of the mobile phone
mobile phone is connected to the vehicle's
exterior aerial via the charging module. Requirements:
R Your mobile phone must be suitable for wire‐
less charging (Qi-compatible mobile phone).
130 Seats and stowing

You can find a list of Qi-compatible mobile mobile phone reacts and from the charging # Do not use loose floor mats and do not
phones online at: symbol in the multimedia system display. place floor mats on top of one another.
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect Malfunctions during the charging process are
R To ensure more efficient charging and con‐ shown in the multimedia system display.
nection with the vehicle's exterior aerial, % To clean, mat 1 can be removed.
remove the protective cover from the mobile
phone.
Fitting/removing floor mats
R If possible, use the mat when charging.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to
objects in the driver's footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede
pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
This jeopardises the operating and road
safety of the vehicle.
# Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
so that they cannot get into the driver's
footwell.
# Always fit the floor mats securely and
# To fit: press studs 1 onto holders 2.
# Place the mobile phone as close to the
centre of mat 1 as possible with the display as prescribed in order to ensure that # To remove: pull the floor mat off the holders
facing upwards. there is always sufficient room for the 2.
The mobile phone is charged automatically, pedals.
as is apparent from the way in which the
 Light and sight 131

Exterior lighting Lighting systems and your responsibility Light switch

Changing the lights when driving abroad The various lighting systems of the vehicle are Operating the light switch
only aids. The driver of the vehicle is responsible
Vehicles with halogen or static LED head‐ for correct vehicle illumination in accordance
lamps: It is not necessary to change the head‐ with the prevailing light and visibility conditions,
lamps. The legal requirements are also met in legal requirements and traffic situation.
countries where people drive on the other side
of the road.
Vehicles with Intelligent Light System: Before
crossing the border into countries where they
drive on the other side, it is necessary to set the
headlamps to symmetrical dipped beam
(→ page 137).
After changing the headlamps:
R Oncoming traffic is not dazzled.
R The edge of the road is not illuminated as far
or as high.
R The "motorway mode" and "enhanced fog
light functions" are not available.
# 1 W Left-hand parking lights
# 2 X Right-hand parking lights
The headlamps must be reset to asymmetrical
dipped beam after returning from abroad.
# 3 T Standing lights and licence plate
lighting
132 Light and sight

# 4 Ã Automatic driving lights (preferred The exterior lighting (except standing and park‐ Activating/deactivating the rear fog light
light switch position) ing lights) switches off automatically when the
driver's door is opened. Requirement
# 5 L Dipped beam/main beam The light switch is in the L or à position.
# 6 R Switches the rear fog light on or off Automatic driving lights # Press button R.
The standing lights, dipped beam and daytime
When dipped beam is activated, the indicator running lights are switched on automatically Please observe the country-specific laws on the
lamp for the standing lights is deactivated and depending on the ignition status, whether the use of rear fog lamps.
replaced by the dipped beam indicator lamp. engine is running and on the light conditions.
Always park your vehicle safely and in a well-lit Adjusting the headlamp range (halogen
area, in accordance with the relevant legal stipu‐ & WARNING Risk of accident when the headlamps without active suspension)
lations. The headlamp range adjuster allows you to
dipped beam is switched off in poor visi‐
adjust the cone of light from the headlamps in
bility
* NOTE Battery discharging by operating relation to the vehicle's load condition.
When the light switch is set to Ã, the
the standing lights
dipped beam may not be switched on auto‐
Operating the standing lights over a period of matically if there is fog, snow or other causes
hours puts a strain on the battery. of poor visibility such as spray.
# Where possible, switch on the # In such cases, turn the light switch to
right X or left W parking light. L.

In the case of severe battery discharging, the The automatic driving lights are only an aid. You
standing lights or parking lights are automati‐ are responsible for vehicle lighting.
cally switched off to facilitate a future engine
start.
 Light and sight 133

# Turn the headlamp range adjuster to the 3 Headlamp flashing

position which corresponds to the load con‐ 4 Turn signal light, left
dition of your vehicle.
# Pull or push the combination switch in the
relevant direction following the arrow.
Operating the light combination switch
Switching on the main beam manually
# Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Plus: Turn the light switch to the L posi‐
tion.
R Press the combination switch beyond the
pressure point in the direction of
arrow 1.
When the main beam is activated, the indicator
lamp for dipped beam is deactivated and
replaced by the indicator lamp for the main
+1 Lowers the cone of light of the headlamps beam.
when the load compartment is heavily # To switch off the main beam: move the
laden and when using the maximum per‐ combination switch back to its starting posi‐
missible rear axle load to the full tion.
g Normal position # To indicate briefly: press the combination
- 1 Raises the cone of light of the headlamps switch briefly up to the pressure point in the
when all seats are occupied 1 Main beam direction of arrow 2 or 4.
2 Turn signal light, right The corresponding turn signal light flashes
three times.
134 Light and sight

# To indicate for a duration: press the combi‐ The hazard warning light switches on automati‐ R City lighting (→ page 136)
nation switch beyond the pressure point in cally if:
the direction of arrow 2 or 4. The system is only active when it is dark.
R The airbag has been deployed.
R The vehicle brakes sharply from a speed of
Active headlamps function
Activating/deactivating the hazard warning more than 70 km/h to a standstill.
light
The hazard warning light switches off automati‐
cally when the vehicle reaches a speed exceed‐
ing 10 km/h following maximum full-stop brak‐
ing.

Adaptive functions, MULTIBEAM LED

Function of the Intelligent Light System
The MULTIBEAM LED headlamps adapt to the
driving and weather situation and provide exten‐ Functions of the active headlamps function:
ded functions for improving the illumination of R The headlamps follow the steering move‐
the road. ments.
The system comprises the following functions: R Relevant areas are better illuminated while
R Active headlamps function (→ page 134) driving.
R Cornering light (→ page 135) R Vehicles with Lane Keeping Assist, Driv‐
R Motorway mode (→ page 135) ing Assistance Package, Driving Assis‐
# Press button 1. tance Plus Package or Traffic Sign Assist:
R Enhanced fog light function (→ page 135)
the active headlamps function evaluates the
R Adverse weather light (→ page 136)
 Light and sight 135

course of the lane in which you are driving The function is active:
and adjusts the light in advance. R At speeds below 40 km/h when the turn sig‐
The function is active when the dipped beam is nal light is switched on or the steering wheel
switched on. is turned.
R At speeds between 40 km/h and 70 km/h
Cornering light function when the steering wheel is turned.
Roundabout and intersection function: the
cornering light is activated on both sides through
an evaluation of the current GPS position of the
vehicle. It remains active until after the vehicle The function is active if a motorway journey is
has left the roundabout or the intersection. detected by:
Motorway mode R The vehicle's speed.
The motorway mode increases the range and R The multifunction camera.
brightness of the cone of light enabling better R The GPS.
visibility.
Cornering light improves the illumination of the The function is not active:
roadway over a wide angle in the direction you R At speeds below 80 km/h.
are turning, enabling better visibility in tight
bends, for example. It can only be activated Enhanced fog light function
when the dipped beam is switched on. The enhanced fog light function reduces self-
dazzling by the driver and improves the illumina‐
tion of the edge of the carriageway.
136 Light and sight

City lighting Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus

City lighting improves the illumination of road‐
Function of Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
sides within built-up areas using a broader distri‐
bution of light. & WARNING Risk of accident despite
The function is active: Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
R At lower speeds.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus does not rec‐
R In illuminated parts of built-up areas. ognise the following road users:
Switching the Intelligent Light System R Road users without lights, e.g. pedes‐
on/off trians
The function is active: R Road users with poor lighting, e.g.
Requirement:
R At speeds below 70 km/h when the rear fog cyclists
The light switch is in the à position.
light is switched on. R Road users whose lighting is obstructed,
Multimedia system:
The function is not active: e.g. by a barrier
, Vehicle . ÷ Light settings . Intell.
R At speeds above 100 km/h after activation. Light System In very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assist
R When the rear fog light is switched off.
Plus may not recognise road users who do
# Switch the function on O or off ª.
have lights, or may recognise them too late.
Adverse weather light In this, or in similar situations, the automatic
The adverse weather light reduces reflections in main beam will not be deactivated or will be
rainy conditions by dimming individual LEDs in activated despite the presence of other road
the headlamps. This reduces the glare for the users.
driver and other road users.
# Always observe the traffic carefully and
switch off the main beam in good time.
 Light and sight 137

them. The vehicle in front is illuminated by the Detection may be restricted if:
dipped beam. R Visibility is impaired, for example in fog,
At speeds above 30 km/h: heavy rain or snow.
R If no other road users are detected, the main R There is dirt on the sensors or if the sensors
beam is automatically switched on. are covered over.
R If other road users are detected, the partial Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
main beam is automatically switched on. on/off
# To switch on: turn the light switch to
At speeds below 25 km/h or when there is suffi‐
cient street lighting: the à position.
R The partial main beam switches off automati‐ # Switch on the main beam using the combina‐

cally. tion switch.

When the main beam is switched on auto‐
R The main beam switches off automatically.
matically in the dark, the _ indicator
At speeds above approx. 50 km/h: lamp in the multifunction display comes on.
The headlamp range of the dipped beam is # To switch off: switch off the main beam
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus switches auto‐ R
matically between: regulated automatically based on the dis‐ using the combination switch.
R Dipped beam
tance to other road users.
R Partial main beam The system's optical sensor is located behind Setting the dipped beam
R Main beam
the windscreen near the overhead control panel. Multimedia system:
System limitations , Vehicle . ÷ Light set-
The partial main beam uses the main beam to
shine past other road users rather than dazzling Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cannot take into tings . Dipped-beams
account road, weather or traffic conditions. # Select Left-side traffic or Right-side traffic.
138 Light and sight

Setting the surround lighting Interior lighting # 5 p Switches the front right-hand read‐
ing lamp on/off
Requirement: Adjusting the interior lighting
The light switch is in the à position. Control panel in the grab handle (rear)
Front overhead control panel
Multimedia system:
, Vehicle . ÷ Light settings . Loca-

tor lighting
Exterior switch-off delay time: the exterior
lighting is switched on for a short time after the
vehicle is switched off.
# Set the switch-off delay time.

Locator lighting: if a switch-off delay time is

set, the exterior lighting remains lit for 30 sec‐
onds after the vehicle is unlocked. When you # 1 p Switches the reading lamp on/off
start the vehicle, the locator lighting is switched # 1 p Switches the front left-hand reading
off and automatic driving lights are activated. lamp on/off
Adjusting the ambient lighting
# 2 | Switches the automatic interior
lighting control on/off Multimedia system:
, Vehicle . ÷ Light settings . Ambi-
# 3 c Switches the front interior lighting
on/off ent light
# 4 u Switches the rear interior lighting Setting the colour
on/off
# Select Colour.
 Light and sight 139

# Set the colour. When replacing a bulb, you could burn your‐
Setting the brightness for zones self on these component parts.
# Select Entire vehicle, Front, Rear or Display. # Allow the component parts to cool
down before replacing the bulbs.
# Set the brightness value.

R Do not use a bulb if it has been dropped or if

Setting the interior lighting switch-off delay its glass tube has been scratched. The bulb
time may otherwise explode.
Multimedia system: R Do not touch the glass tube with your bare
, Vehicle . ÷ Light settings
hands.
. Int.
light delay shut-off R Protect bulbs from moisture and do not allow
bulbs to come into contact with liquids.
# Set the switch-off delay time.

Overview of light source types

Changing bulbs (only for vehicles with halo‐
The following bulbs can be replaced. Halogen headlamps
gen headlamps)
1 Turn signal light: PY 21 W
Notes on changing bulbs
2 Main beam: H7 55 W
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐ 3 Dipped beam: H7 55 W
ponent parts whilst replacing a bulb
Bulbs, lamps and plug connectors can
become very hot during operation.
140 Light and sight

Changing the front bulbs (vehicles with halo‐ # Removal (left-hand side of the vehicle): R Turn signal light: bulb, type PY 21 W.
gen headlamps) using a screwdriver, turn rotating catches 1 R The lighting system is switched off.
clockwise as far as they will go.
Fitting/removing the cover on the front R The cover in the front wheel arch has been
Cover 2 is released.
wheel arch removed.
# Removal (right-hand side of the vehicle):
Requirements: using a screwdriver, turn rotating catches 1 R The engine bonnet is open.
R The lighting system is switched off. anti-clockwise as far as they will go.
R The appropriate front wheel is turned Cover 2 is released.
inwards. # Remove cover 2.
# To fit: insert cover 2 into the wheel arch
liner.
R Left-hand side of the vehicle: using a
screwdriver, turn rotating catches 1
anti-clockwise as far as they will go.
R Right-hand side of the vehicle: using a
screwdriver, turn rotating catches 1
clockwise as far as they will go.
Cover 2 is locked.
Replacing bulbs in the halogen headlamp
Requirements:
R Main beam/dipped beam: bulb, type 1 Dipped beam
H7 55 W. 2 Main beam/turn signal light
 Light and sight 141

# Turn the relevant housing cover anti-clock‐ Windscreen wipers and windscreen washer # 3 Å Intermittent wiping, frequent
wise and remove it. system # 4 ° Continuous wiping, slow
# Main beam/dipped beam: turn the socket Switching the windscreen wipers on/off # 5 ¯ Continuous wiping, fast
anti-clockwise and remove it.
# Turn signal light: turn the socket anti-clock‐ Switching the rear window windscreen wip‐
wise, unlock and remove it. ers on/off
# Pull the bulb out of the socket.
# Insert the new bulb into the socket so that
the entire base of the bulb is resting on the
bottom of the socket.
# Insert socket and turn it clockwise.
# Press on the housing cover and turn it clock‐
wise.
# Replace the cover in the front wheel arch.

# 1 í Single wipe/î wiping with

washer fluid
# 1 g Windscreen wipers off
# 2 Ä Intermittent wiping, normal # 1 è Switch
142 Light and sight

# 1 b Wipes with washer fluid # As soon as the wiper arms are vertical rela‐ tion of arrow 1 away from the wiper arm to
# 2 I Switches on intermittent wiping tive to the engine bonnet, switch off the igni‐ the stop.
tion. # Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3
# 3 0 Switches off intermittent wiping
# Fold the wiper arm away from the wind‐ until it engages in the removal position.
# 4 b Wipes with washer fluid screen.
Removing the wiper blades
Replacing the windscreen wiper blades

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if

the windscreen wipers are switched on
while wiper blades are being replaced
If the windscreen wipers begin to move while
you are changing the wiper blades, you can
be trapped by the wiper arm.
# Always switch off the windscreen wip‐
ers and ignition before changing the
wiper blades.

Moving the wiper arms to a vertical position

# Set the windscreen wipers to the ° slow
continuous wiping position on the combina‐ # Remove the wiper blade in the direction of
tion switch. arrow 4 away from the wiper arm.
# Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the
other hand, turn the wiper blade in the direc‐
 Light and sight 143

Fitting the wiper blades Maintenance display

# Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3

until it engages in the locking position.
# Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper # Remove protective film 1 of the mainte‐
arm in the direction of arrow 1. # Make sure that the wiper blade sits correctly. nance display on the tip of the newly fitted
# Fold the wiper arm back onto the wind‐ wiper blade.
screen.
If the colour of the maintenance display changes
from black to yellow, the wiper blades should be
replaced.
144 Light and sight

% The duration of the colour change varies # Fold wiper arm 4 away from the rear win‐ # Position new wiper blade 1 with recess 6
depending on the usage conditions. dow. on lug 5.
# Press both release clips 2. # Fold wiper blade 1 in the direction of arrow
Replacing the rear window wiper blades # Fold wiper blade 1 in the direction of arrow 3 onto the wiper arm until retaining clips
3 away from wiper arm 4. 2 engage in bracket 4.
Removing the wiper blade
# Remove wiper blade 1 in the direction of # Make sure that wiper blade 1 sits correctly.
arrow 5. # Fold the wiper arm back onto the rear win‐
dow.
Fitting the wiper blades

Mirrors
Operating the outside mirrors

& WARNING Risk of injury through adjust‐

ing vehicle settings while the vehicle is in
motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the
following situations:
R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraints, the steering wheel or the mir‐
ror while the vehicle is in motion
# Switch the ignition off. R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐
cle is in motion
 Light and sight 145

# Before starting the engine: adjust the # Use button 2 to set the position of the mir‐
driver's seat, the head restraints, the ror you have selected.
steering wheel or the mirror and fasten An outside mirror which has been pushed out of
your seat belt. position can be engaged in position again in the
following manner:
# Vehicles without electrically folding out‐
& WARNING Risk of accident due to mis‐
judgement of distances when using the side mirrors: manually move the outside
outside mirror mirror into the correct position.
# Vehicles with electrically folding outside
The outside mirrors reflect objects on a
mirrors: press and hold button 1.
smaller scale. The objects in view are in fact
closer than they appear. You will hear a click and the mirror audibly
engage in position. The mirror is set into the
As a result, you may misjudge the distance correct position.
between you and the road user driving
behind you, e.g. when changing lanes.
Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors
# Therefore, always look over your shoul‐
# To fold in or out: briefly press button 1.
der in order to ensure that you are & WARNING Risk of burns and poisoning
aware of the actual distance between % If the battery has been disconnected or com‐
pletely discharged, the outside mirrors must due to the anti-dazzle mirror electrolyte
you and the road users driving behind
you. be reset. Only then will the automatic mirror Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an
folding function work properly. automatic anti-dazzle mirror breaks.
# To adjust: select the required mirror using The electrolyte is harmful and causes irrita‐
button 3 or 4. tion. It must not come into contact with your
146 Light and sight

skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or dazzle mode if light from a headlamp hits the R if you shift the transmission to another trans‐
be swallowed. inside rearview mirror. mission position
# If you come into contact with electro‐ System limitations R when driving faster than 15 km/h
lyte, observe the following: The mirrors do not go into anti-dazzle mode in R if you press the button for the outside mirror
R Rinse the electrolyte from your skin the following situations: on the driver's side
and seek medical attention immedi‐ R the engine is switched off
ately. Saving the parking position of the passenger
R reverse gear is engaged
R If electrolyte comes into contact outside mirror
R interior lighting is switched on
with your eyes, rinse them thor‐
oughly with clean water and seek Requirement:
medical attention immediately. Parking position of the passenger outside Reverse gear must not be engaged when storing
R If the electrolyte is swallowed, mirror using the memory button.
immediately rinse your mouth out The parking position makes parking easier.
thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting.
Seek medical attention immediately. The passenger outside mirror tilts downwards
and shows the rear wheel on the front passenger
R Immediately change out of clothing side if:
which has come into contact with
R the parking position is stored
electrolyte.
R the passenger mirror is selected
R If an allergic reaction occurs, seek
medical attention immediately. R reverse gear is engaged

The outside mirrors and inside rearview mirrors The passenger outside mirror moves back to its
on the driver's side automatically go into anti- original position in the following situations:
 Light and sight 147

% No more than three seconds may pass # Glare from the front: fold sun visor 1
between pressing memory button M and down.
button 1. The mirror setting process is can‐ # Glare from the side: swing sun visor 1 to
celled after three seconds. the side.
# Slide sun visor 1 horizontally as required.
Activating/deactivating the automatic mirror # Fold down additional sun visor 2.
folding function
Multimedia system:
, Vehicle . î Vehicle set-
Infrared reflective windscreen
tings . Auto. fold-in mirrors
# Activate O or deactivate ª the function.

Operating the sun visors

# To store using the memory button: select
the passenger outside mirror using button
2.
# Move the passenger outside mirror into the
desired parking position using button 1. The infrared reflective windscreen is coated and
# Press memory button M. prevents an excessive build-up of heat in the
# Confirm immediately using button 1 to vehicle interior.
store the setting. The coating shields the vehicle interior against
radio waves up into the gigahertz range.
148 Light and sight

Radio-controlled equipment, such as toll sys‐

tems, can only be mounted on areas of the wind‐
screen which are permeable to radio waves 1.
Areas permeable to radio waves 1 are best visi‐
ble from outside the vehicle when the wind‐
screen is illuminated using an external light
source.
 Climate control 149

Overview of climate control systems Vehicles with a stationary heater: ! to

Notes on climate control switch the residual heat on/off
(→ page 152)
In order for the air conditioning system, the 7 To switch the rear window heater on/off
monitoring of the level of pollution and the filter‐ 8 0 To activate or deactivate synchronisa‐
ing of the air function correctly, an interior air fil‐ tion (→ page 152)
ter must always be used. Make sure that the fil‐
ter is installed correctly and the filter housing in Vehicles with a stationary heater: & to
the engine compartment is closed correctly switch the stationary heater on/off
using the cover and always tightly sealed when (→ page 154)
in operation. Use filters recommended and 9 To switch air-recirculation mode on/off
approved by Mercedes-Benz. Always have (→ page 152)
service work carried out at a qualified specialist A To switch the A/C function on/off
workshop. (→ page 151)
B To set the front passenger side temperature
THERMATIC control panel overview
1 To set the driver's side temperature
THERMOTRONIC control panel overview
The indicator lamps in the buttons indicate that 2 To set the air distribution
the current function is activated. 3 To set the airflow or switch off climate con‐ The indicator lamps in the buttons indicate that
trol the current function is activated.
4 To set climate control to automatic mode
(→ page 151)
5 To demist the windscreen
6 To call up the air conditioning menu of the
multimedia system
150 Climate control

To switch the residual heat on/off Rear operating unit

(→ page 152)
7 To switch the rear window heater on/off
8 ¿ To switch the A/C function on/off
(→ page 151)
Vehicles with a stationary heater: & to
switch the stationary heater on/off
(→ page 154)
9 To switch air-recirculation mode on/off
(→ page 152)
A To set the front passenger side air distribu‐
tion 1 To set the temperature
B To set the front passenger side temperature 2 Display
3 To set the airflow
1 To set the driver's side temperature
2 To set the driver's side air distribution Operating the climate control system
3 To set the airflow or switch off climate con‐ Switching climate control on/off
trol # To switch on: set the airflow to level 1 or
4 To set climate control to automatic mode
higher using the H button.
(→ page 151)
5 To demist the windscreen # To switch off: set the airflow to level 0 using
6 To call up the air conditioning menu of the the H button.
multimedia system
 Climate control 151

% When the climate control is switched off, the # Switch the function on O or off ª. Setting the climate style
windows can mist up faster. Only switch off
the climate control briefly. Requirements:
Setting climate control to automatic mode R THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control is

In automatic mode, the set temperature is con‐ fitted.

Activating/deactivating the A/C function via R The à button has been pressed.
the control panel trolled and maintained at a constant level by the
air supply. Multimedia system:
The A/C function cools, heats and dehumidifies # Press the à button.
, Vehicle . b Climate control . Cli-
the interior air in the vehicle.
# To switch to manual mode: press the H mate mode
# Press button ¿.
or _ button. # Select FOCUS, MEDIUM or DIFFUSE.
Deactivate the A/C function only briefly other‐
wise the windows can mist up more quickly. Climate style
Air distribution settings
Condensation may drip from the underside of
Climate style function
the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This is The symbols in the display indicate which vents
not a sign that there is a malfunction. In automatic mode you can select the following the airflow is being directed through:
climate style settings for the driver's and front R ¯ demister vents
passenger areas:
Activating/deactivating the A/C function R P centre and side air vents
R FOCUS: high airflow, slightly cooler setting
using the multimedia system R O footwell vents
R MEDIUM: medium airflow, standard setting
Multimedia system: R S centre, side and footwell vents
, Vehicle . b Climate control . A/C
R DIFFUSE: low airflow, slightly warmer and
draught-free setting R a defroster and footwell vents
The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidifies R _ all vents
the vehicle's interior air.
R b defroster, middle and side air vents
152 Climate control

R W automatic air distribution Activating/deactivating the climate control Switching air-recirculation mode on/off
synchronisation function using the multime‐
dia system
# Press the g button.
Activating/deactivating the climate control The interior air will be recirculated.
synchronisation function via the control Multimedia system:
panel , Vehicle . b Climate con-
Air-recirculation mode is switched off automati‐
cally.
Climate control can be set centrally using the trol . SYNC
% If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the
synchronisation function. The temperature and Climate control can be set centrally using the windows may mist up more quickly. Switch
air distribution setting for the driver's side is synchronisation function. The temperature set‐ on air-recirculation mode only briefly.
adopted automatically for the front passenger ting is automatically adopted for all climate
side. zones.
# Press button 0.
Switching residual heat on/off
# Switch the function on O or off ª.

The synchronisation function is deactivated if Requirement

the settings for one of the other climate zones Demisting the windows The vehicle must be switched off.
are changed. Using the residual heat of the engine, it is possi‐
Windows misted up on the inside ble to continue heating or ventilating the front
# Press the à button. compartment of the vehicle, depending on the
# If the windows continue to mist up: press the
set temperature, for approximately 30 minutes.
¬ button. # To switch on: press the ! button.

Windows misted up on the outside Residual heat is switched off automatically.

# Switch on the windscreen wipers.

# Press the à button.

 Climate control 153

Activating and deactivating ionisation # To set the intensity: select High, Medium, + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
Multimedia system: Low or Off. damage due to improper disposal of full
, Vehicle . b Climate control . Ioni- Inserting or removing the flacon of the fra‐ flacons
sation grance system
Ionisation cleans and refreshes the interior air of & WARNING Risk of injury from liquid per‐
the vehicle. The ionisation of the interior air is fume
odourless. Full flacons must not be disposed
If children open the flacon, they could drink of with household waste.
# Switch the function on O or off ª.
the liquid perfume or it could come into con‐ #
tact with their eyes.
Fragrance system # Consult a doctor immediately if liquid
perfume has been drunk. Full flacons must be taken to
Setting the fragrance system a harmful substance collection point.
# If liquid perfume comes into contact
Requirements:
R Automatic climate control is activated.
with your eyes or skin, rinse your eyes
with clean water.
R The glove box is closed.
# If symptoms continue, consult a doctor.
Multimedia system:
, Vehicle . b Climate control . Air

freshener
The fragrance system distributes a pleasant fra‐
grance throughout the vehicle interior from a fla‐
con located in the glove box.
154 Climate control

Dispose of the genuine Mercedes-Benz interior Stationary heater/ventilation

perfume flacon when it is empty and do not refill
Function of the stationary heater/stationary
it.
ventilation
Refillable flacon R The air in the vehicle interior is heated or
# Unscrew the cap of the empty flacon. ventilated to the set temperature.
# Fill the flacon with a maximum of 15 ml.
R The air in the vehicle interior cannot be
cooled down to temperatures below the out‐
# Screw the cap back on to the flacon.
side temperature.
Always refill the empty refillable flacon with the R If the outside temperature changes, ventila‐
same perfume. Observe the separate informa‐ tion mode automatically switches to heating
tion sheet attached to the flacon. mode or from heating mode to ventilation
mode.
Information on the windscreen heater The stationary heater and the exhaust gas outlet
The windscreen heater is switched on automati‐ are situated at the right-hand front wheel.
1 Cap cally: Switching the stationary heater/stationary
2 Flacon R if the ¬ button is activated ventilation on/off via the control panel
# To insert: slide the flacon into the holder as After the vehicle is started the windscreen & DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poi‐
far as it will go. heater is switched on automatically as needed. sonous exhaust gases
# To remove: pull out the flacon. If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventila‐
If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benz interior tion is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases
perfumes, observe the manufacturers' safety such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehi‐
notices on the perfume packaging.
 Climate control 155

cle. This is the case in enclosed spaces or if R the exhaust gas itself
the vehicle gets stuck in snow, for example.
# When the stationary heater is switched
# Always switch the stationary heater off
on, make sure that:
in enclosed spaces without an air R hot vehicle parts do not come into
extraction systems, e.g. in garages. contact with flammable materials
# Keep the tailpipe and the area around
R the exhaust gas can flow out of the
the vehicle free from snow when the tailpipe unhindered
engine or the stationary heater are run‐
R the exhaust gas does not come into
ning.
contact with flammable materials
# Open a window on the windward side of
the vehicle to ensure an adequate sup‐
ply of fresh air. * NOTE Battery discharge caused by sta‐
tionary heater or stationary ventilation
operation
& WARNING Risk of fire due to hot station‐
ary heater components Operating the stationary heater or stationary
ventilation drains the battery. # Set the desired temperature using the w
When the stationary heater is switched on, button.
# After heating or ventilating the vehicle
parts of the vehicle can become very hot, # Press button 1.
e.g. the exhaust system. twice, drive for a longer period of time.
The red or blue indicator lamp in button 1
Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or Requirement: lights up or goes out.
twigs may ignite if they come into contact The fuel tank is filled to at least reserve fuel Indicator lamp colours:
with: level. R blue: stationary ventilation is switched on
R hot parts of the exhaust system
R red: stationary heater is activated
156 Climate control

R yellow: departure time is preselected # Press the u and ^ buttons simultane‐

ously.
The stationary heater/stationary ventilation The Î symbol in the remote control display
switches off automatically after 50 minutes. flashes.
Setting the stationary heater/stationary ven‐ # Press the , and . buttons to set the
tilation using the multimedia system desired departure time.
Multimedia system: # Press the u and ^ buttons simultane‐
, Vehicle . b Climate control . Aux-
ously.
iliary heating The new departure time is stored.
You can pre-set three departure times for auto‐
matic activation of the stationary heater. Up to three departure times can be stored.
# To activate the departure time: select the
# Select an option.
desired departure time and press and hold
Setting the stationary heater/stationary ven‐ the u button.
tilation via remote control The Í symbol, the departure time and,
# To activate immediately: press and hold depending on the selected departure time,
Requirement:
the u button. the letter A, B or C appear in the display.
The fuel tank is filled to at least reserve fuel
level. # To set the departure time: briefly press # To deactivate the departure time: select

the u button. the desired departure time and press and

hold the ^ button.
# Press the , or . button repeatedly
OFF appears in the display.
until the time to be changed appears in the
display. # To check the status of the stationary
heater: briefly press the u button.
 Climate control 157

# To deactivate immediately: press and hold Further possible displays: + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
the ^ button. R Time: activated departure time. damage due to improper disposal of bat‐
Remote control displays (stationary heater/ R Zero minutes: the running time for the sta‐ teries
stationary ventilation) tionary heater is increased, as the engine has
not yet reached operating temperature when
it is started.
R OFF: the stationary heater/stationary venti‐ Batteries contain toxic and corro‐
lation is switched off. sive substances.
#
Replacing the remote control battery (sta‐
tionary heater)
Take discharged batteries to a
& DANGER Serious damage to health qualified specialist workshop or to a
caused by swallowing batteries collection point for used batteries.
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive sub‐
1 Stationary ventilation switched on stances. Swallowing batteries may cause Requirement:
2 Stationary heater switched on serious damage to health. A CR2450 lithium battery is required when
3 Selected departure time There is a risk of fatal injury. changing the battery.
4 Remaining time for the stationary heater/ # Keep batteries out of the reach of chil‐
stationary ventilation (in minutes) dren.
5 Stationary heater/stationary ventilation
# If batteries are swallowed, seek medical
active
attention immediately.
6 Departure time activated
7 Signal strength
158 Climate control

# Press a pointed object into recess 1.

# Slide battery cover 2 backwards in the
direction of the arrow.
# Insert new battery 3 with the lettering
facing upwards.
# Slide battery cover 2 in the opposite direc‐
tion to the arrow onto the remote control
until it engages.

Problems with the remote control for the stationary heater/stationary ventilation
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
FAIL ¨ The signal transmission between the transmitter and the vehicle is faulty.
# Change your position in relation to the vehicle, moving closer if necessary.
FAIL The starter battery is not sufficiently charged.
# Charge the starter battery.
The fuel tank content is below the reserve fuel level.
# Refuel at the nearest filling station.
FAIL ¯ The stationary heater is faulty.
# Have the stationary heater checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
 Climate control 159

Air vents Adjusting the rear air vents

Adjusting the front air vents

& WARNING ‑ Risk of burns/frostbite due

to not maintaining a sufficient distance
to the air vents
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air
vents.
This could result in burns or frostbite in the
immediate vicinity of the air vents. # To open or close: turn controller 2 to the
# Always ensure that all vehicle occu‐ left or right as far as it will go.
# To open or close: turn controller 2 to the
pants maintain a sufficient distance to # To adjust the air direction: hold air vent 1 left or right as far as it will go.
the air vents. in the centre and move it up or down or to
# If necessary, redirect the airflow to the left or right.
# To adjust the air direction: hold rear air
vent 1 in the centre and move it up or down
another area of the vehicle interior.
or to the left or right.
Opening/closing the air vent in the glove box

* NOTE Damage to temperature-sensitive

objects in the glove box
Temperature-sensitive objects stored in the
glove box may be damaged by the air vent
located inside the glove compartment.
160 Climate control

# Close the air vent when you heat the

vehicle.
# At high outside temperatures, open the
air vent and switch on the A/C func‐
tion.

Requirement:
Automatic climate control is activated.

1 Air vent controller

2 Air vent
# To open or close: turn controller 1 to the
left or right.
 Driving and parking 161

Driving # Never leave children and animals unat‐ & WARNING Risk of fire caused by flam‐
Switching on the power supply or ignition tended in the vehicle. mable material on the exhaust system
using the start/stop button # When leaving the vehicle, always take Flammable materials brought in by either ani‐
the key with you and lock the vehicle. mals or environmental influences may ignite
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury This also applies to mobile phones if the if they come into contact with hot parts of
due to children left unattended in the "Digital Car Key in the smartphone" the engine or exhaust system.
vehicle function is activated via the Mercedes
# Therefore, check regularly that there
connect me web App.
If children are left unattended in the vehicle, are no flammable materials in the
they could: # Keep the keys out of the reach of chil‐ engine compartment or on the exhaust
dren. This also applies to mobile system.
R Open doors, thereby endangering other
phones if the "Digital Car Key in the
persons or road users. smartphone" function is activated via Requirements:
R Get out of the vehicle and be hit by the Mercedes connect me web App. R The key is located in the vehicle and the key
oncoming traffic. battery is not discharged.
R Operate vehicle equipment. & WARNING Risk of exhaust gas poisoning R Or if the "Digital Car Key in the smartphone"
Moreover, children could also set the vehicle Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust function is activated via the Mercedes me
in motion by, for example: gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling connect web App: the mobile phone is loca‐
R Releasing the parking brake. these exhaust gases causes poisoning. ted in the vehicle.
R Shifting the automatic transmission out # Never leave the engine running in an

of park position j or shifting manual enclosed space without sufficient venti‐

transmission into idle position. lation.
R Starting the engine.
162 Driving and parking

# To switch on the ignition: press button 1 # Vehicles with automatic transmission:

twice. Shift the transmission to position j or i.
The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster # Depress the brake pedal and push button 1
light up. once.
The ignition is switched off again if one of the # If the vehicle does not start: switch off non-
following conditions is met: essential consumers and press button 1
R You do not start the vehicle within once.
15 minutes. # If the vehicle still does not start: start the
R You press button 1 once. vehicle in emergency operation mode.
Starting a vehicle with a mobile phone (NFC)
Starting the vehicle
Requirements:
Starting the vehicle with the start/stop but‐ R The vehicle is equipped with the "Digital Car
ton Key in the smartphone" function.
Requirements: R The "Digital Car Key in the smartphone" func‐
# To switch on the power supply: press but‐ R The key is located in the vehicle and the key tion is activated via the Mercedes me con‐
ton 1 once. battery is not discharged. nect web app: http://www.mercedes.me.
You can now activate the windscreen wipers,
R Or if the "Digital Car Key in the smartphone" R Suitable mobile phone with NFC aerial (Near
for example.
function is activated via the Mercedes me Field Communication) and Secure Element.
The power supply is switched off again if the fol‐ connect web App: the mobile phone is loca‐ R Sufficient charge level of the mobile phone.
lowing conditions are met: ted in the vehicle. On some mobile phones, the function is also
R The driver's door is open.
# Vehicles with manual transmission: available when the battery is discharged.
R You press button 1 twice. Depress the clutch pedal.
 Driving and parking 163

% You can check the suitability of your mobile # Make sure that there is a valid vehicle key in display message appears in the multifunction
phone by entering the phone number at the vehicle. display.
http://www.mercedes.me. # Place the mobile phone in stowage space 1
Information about suitable mobile phones so that the NFC aerial areas touch each
can be obtained from your Mercedes-Benz other.
service centre or at http://www.mercedes-
# Depress the brake pedal and start the vehicle
benz.com/connect.
using the start/stop button.
% The function is only available in combination
with Mercedes me connect and only in cer‐ % The key is not needed for any further starts.
tain countries. Any further starts
% Protective cases around the mobile phone # Place the mobile phone in stowage space 1
can impair the functionality. so that the NFC aerial areas touch each
Starting the vehicle for the first time after other, and leave it there while driving. # Make sure that marked space 2 is empty.
activating the function # Depress the brake pedal and start the vehicle # Remove key 1 from the key ring.
using the start/stop button. # Place key 1 in marked space 2.
If you lose your mobile phone, deactivate the The vehicle will start after a short while.
"Digital Car Key in the smartphone" service in If you remove key 1 from marked space 2
Mercedes me connect at https:// the engine continues running. For further
www.mercedes.me. vehicle starts however, key 1 must be loca‐
Starting the vehicle in emergency operation ted in marked space 2 during the entire
mode journey.
If the vehicle cannot be started, the Place the # Have key 1 checked at a qualified specialist
key in the marked space See Owner's Manual workshop.
164 Driving and parking

If the vehicle does not start: R only increase the engine speed gradually and Driving tips
# Leave key 1 in marked space 2. accelerate the vehicle to full speed after
1,500 km. & WARNING Risk of accident due to
# Depress the brake pedal and start the vehicle
objects in the driver's footwell
using the start/stop button. This also applies when the engine or parts of the
% You can also switch on the power supply or drivetrain have been replaced. Objects in the driver's footwell may impede
the ignition with the start/stop button. Please also observe the following running-in pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
notes: This jeopardises the operating and road
R In certain driving and driving safety systems, safety of the vehicle.
Running-in notes
the sensors adjust automatically while a cer‐ # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
To preserve the engine during the first 1,500 km: tain distance is being driven after the vehicle so that they cannot get into the driver's
R drive at varying road speeds and engine has been delivered or after repairs. Full sys‐ footwell.
speeds. tem effectiveness is not achieved until the # Ensure floor mats and carpets cannot
R drive in drive program C or E. end of this teach-in process. slip and provide sufficient room for the
R change gear before the rev counter needle is R Brake linings, brake discs and tyres that are pedals.
Ô of the way to the red area of the rev coun‐ either new or have been replaced only ach‐ # Do not lay multiple floor mats or car‐
ter. ieve optimum braking effect and grip after pets on top of one another.
several hundred kilometres of driving. Com‐
R do not shift down a gear manually in order to pensate for the reduced braking effect by
brake. applying greater force to the brake pedal.
R avoid overstraining the vehicle, e.g. driving at
full throttle.
R vehicles with automatic transmission: do
not depress the accelerator pedal past the
pressure point (kickdown).
 Driving and parking 165

& WARNING Risk of accident due to # Do not switch off the ignition while driv‐ & DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to poi‐
unsuitable footwear ing. sonous exhaust gases
Operating the pedals may be impaired by If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventila‐
wearing unsuitable footwear, e.g.: & WARNING Risk of exhaust gas poisoning tion is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases
R platform shoes Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehi‐
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling cle. This is the case, for example, if the vehi‐
R high-heeled shoes
these exhaust gases causes poisoning. cle is stuck in snow.
R slippers # When the engine or the stationary
# Never leave the engine running in an
# Always wear suitable footwear when enclosed space without sufficient venti‐ heater are running, keep the tailpipe
driving so that you can operate the ped‐ lation. and the area around the vehicle clear of
als safely. snow.
# Open a window on the side of the vehi‐
& WARNING Risk of skidding and of an
& WARNING Risk of accident if the ignition accident due to shifting down on slippery cle facing the wind to ensure an ade‐
is switched off while driving road surfaces quate supply of fresh air.
If you switch off the ignition while driving, If you shift down on slippery road surfaces to
functions relevant to safety are restricted or & WARNING Risk of accident due to the
increase the engine braking effect, the drive
no longer available. This may effect, for wheels may lose traction. brake system overheating
example, the power steering system and the # Do not shift down on slippery road sur‐ If you leave your foot on the brake pedal
brake force boosting. faces to increase the engine braking when driving, the brake system may over‐
You will then need to use considerably more effect. heat.
force to steer and brake. This increases the braking distance and the
brake system may even fail.
166 Driving and parking

# Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. * NOTE Damage to the catalytic converter R carefully depress the brake pedal at the end
due to non-combusted fuel of the journey and when starting the next
# Do not depress the brake pedal and the journey.
accelerator pedal at the same time The engine is not running smoothly and is
while driving. misfiring.
ECO start/stop function
Non-combusted fuel may get into the cata‐
* NOTE Causing wear to the brake linings lytic converter. Operation of the ECO start/stop function
by permanently depressing the brake # Only depress the accelerator pedal The engine is switched off automatically:
pedal
slightly. R Vehicles with manual transmission: If you
# Do not permanently depress the brake # Have the cause rectified immediately at brake the vehicle, shift into neutral i when
pedal while driving. a qualified specialist workshop. travelling at a low speed and then release the
# To use braking effect of the engine, clutch pedal.
shift to a lower gear in good time. Limited braking effect on salt-treated roads: R Vehicles with automatic transmission: If
R due to salt build-up on the brake discs and you brake the vehicle to a standstill in trans‐
* NOTE Damage to the drivetrain and brake lining, the braking distance can mission position h or i.
engine when pulling away increase considerably or result in braking R If all vehicle conditions for an automatic
only on one side. engine stop are met.
# Do not warm up the engine when sta‐
tionary. Pull away immediately. R maintain a much greater distance to the vehi‐
The è symbol appears in the multifunction
cle in front.
# Avoid high engine speeds and full throt‐ display when the vehicle is stationary. If not all
tle until the engine has reached its To prevent salt build-up: the vehicle conditions are met, the ç symbol
operating temperature. R brake occasionally while paying attention to appears in the multifunction display.
# Do not allow the wheels to spin. the traffic conditions.
 Driving and parking 167

The engine is restarted automatically if: If the engine was switched off by the ECO start/ Switching the ECO start/stop function
R Vehicles with manual transmission: You stop function and you leave the vehicle, a warn‐ off/on
depress the clutch pedal. ing tone sounds. The Vehicle is operational
Switch off the ignition before exiting display
R Vehicles with manual transmission: You
message also appears in the multifunction dis‐
engage reverse gear k. play.
R Vehicles with automatic transmission: In
If you do not switch off the ignition, the ignition
transmission position h, you release the is automatically switched off after one minute.
brake pedal when the HOLD function is not
active.
R Vehicles with automatic transmission:
You shift out of transmission position j.
R Vehicles with automatic transmission:
You shift into transmission position h or
k.
R You depress the accelerator pedal.
R All vehicles except
E 220 d 4MATIC All‑Terrain: You switch to # Press button 1.
drive program S+ If indicator lamp 2 lights up, the ECO start/
R E 220 d 4MATIC All‑Terrain: You switch to stop function is switched on.
drive program All‑Terrain. % Depending on the model, the button may
R You change the vehicle level. also be located at a different position in the
R An automatic engine start is necessary. centre console.
168 Driving and parking

ECO display R 2 Gentle deceleration and rolling DYNAMIC SELECT switch

The ECO display summarises the driving style R 3 Consistent speed Function of the DYNAMIC SELECT switch
from the start of the journey to its completion The inner segment is grey and the outer seg‐
and assists you in achieving the most economi‐ Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to change
ment empties: between the following drive programs:
cal driving style.
R 1 Sporty acceleration R I (Individual): individual settings
You can influence consumption if you:
R 2 Heavy braking R All vehicles except
R drive with particular care
R 3 Fluctuations in speed E 220 d 4MATIC All‑Terrain: S+ (Sport
R drive the vehicle in drive program E
Plus): particularly sporty driving style
R observe the gearshift recommendations You have driven economically when:
R S (Sport): sporty driving style
R the three outer segments are completely fil‐
led simultaneously. R C (Comfort): comfortable and economical
driving style
R the ECO display border lights up.
R E (Economy): particularly economical driving
The additional range achieved as a result of your style
driving style in comparison to a driver with a R E 220 d 4MATIC All‑Terrain: All‑Terrain: the
very sporty driving style is shown under Bonus
drive program for all surfaces
from start. The range displayed does not indicate
a fixed reduction in consumption. Depending on the drive program selected, the
following vehicle characteristics will change:
R Drive system
The inner segment lights up green and the outer
segment fills up:
- Engine and transmission management
R 1 Moderate acceleration
- ESP®
- Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
 Driving and parking 169

R Suspension Operating the DYNAMIC SELECT switch Configuring drive program I

R Steering Multimedia system:
R Availability of the ECO start/stop function , Vehicle . e DYNAMIC

% Time until the next vehicle start: SELECT . Individual

R Less than four hours: the last selected # Select the individual setting.

drive program is active.

R More than four hours: drive program C is Displaying vehicle data
active. Multimedia system:
, Vehicle . e DYNAMIC SELECT

# Select Vehicle data.

Displaying engine data

Multimedia system:
, Vehicle . e DYNAMIC SELECT
# Press DYNAMIC SELECT switch 1 forwards
# Select Engine data.
or backwards.
The drive program selected appears in the % The values for engine output and engine tor‐
multifunction display. que may deviate from the nominal values.
Items that can influence this are, for exam‐
ple:
R engine speed
170 Driving and parking

R sea level Gearshift recommendation

R fuel grade The gearshift recommendations assist you in
R outside temperature adopting an economical driving style.

Manual transmission
Operating the gearshift lever

* NOTE Damage to the engine and trans‐

mission by shifting to a gear that is too
low
# When changing between gears 5 and
6 push the gearshift lever to the right.
# Do not shift down at high speeds. # If gearshift recommendation message 1 is
shown in the multifunction display, shift to
k Reverse gear the recommended gear.
* NOTE Damage to the transmission by 1 - 6 Forward gears
shifting to reverse gear k while the
i Neutral
vehicle is in motion
# Only shift into reverse gear k when
# Depress the clutch pedal and shift the gear‐
the vehicle is stationary. shift lever into the required position.
 Driving and parking 171

Automatic transmission # Never leave children and animals unat‐ pedal firmly and do not accelerate at
DIRECT SELECT lever tended in the vehicle. the same time.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take
Function of the DIRECT SELECT lever
the key with you and lock the vehicle. * NOTE Damage to the automatic trans‐
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury This also applies to mobile phones if the mission caused by changing the trans‐
"Digital Car Key in the smartphone" mission position during the journey
due to children left unattended in the function is activated via the Mercedes
vehicle me connect web app. # Only change the transmission position
If children are left unattended in the vehicle, when the vehicle is stationary.
# Keep the keys out of the reach of chil‐
they could: dren. This also applies to mobile Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to shift the trans‐
R Open doors, thereby endangering other phones if the "Digital Car Key in the mission position. The current transmission posi‐
persons or road users. smartphone" function is activated via tion is displayed in the multifunction display.
R Get out of the vehicle and be hit by the Mercedes me connect web app.
oncoming traffic.
R Operate vehicle equipment. & WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐
rect gearshifting
Moreover, children could also set the vehicle
in motion by, for example: If the engine speed is higher than the idle
speed and you engage the transmission posi‐
R Releasing the parking brake.
tion h or k, the vehicle may accelerate
R Shifting the transmission out of park sharply.
position j. # If you engage the transmission position
R Starting the engine. h or k always depress the brake
172 Driving and parking

Engaging reverse gear R % If you leave the key in the vehicle and then
# Depress the brake pedal and push the exit the vehicle, the automatic transmission
DIRECT SELECT lever up past the first point remains in neutral i
of resistance.
The transmission position display shows k Engaging park position P
in the multifunction display.
Shifting to neutral N
# Depress the brake pedal and push the
DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first
point of resistance.
Transmission position display i is shown in
the multifunction display.
Releasing the brake pedal will allow you to move
the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it away.

j Park position If you want the automatic transmission to

remain in neutral N even if the ignition is
k Reverse gear switched off:
i Neutral # Start the vehicle.
h Drive position
# Depress the brake pedal and shift to neutral
i. # Press button 1.
# Release the brake pedal.
Transmission position display j is shown in
the multifunction display.
# Switch the ignition off.
 Driving and parking 173

Park position j is engaged automatically if one Manual gearshifting # To activate: pull steering wheel gearshift
of the following conditions is met: paddle 1 or 2.
R If you switch the engine off with the trans‐ & WARNING Risk of skidding and of an Manual gearshifting is activated for a short
mission in position h or k. accident due to shifting down on slippery time. The current gear is displayed in the
road surfaces multifunction display.
R If you open the driver's door when the vehi‐
If you shift down on slippery road surfaces to # To shift up: pull steering wheel gearshift
cle is stationary or when driving at a very low
speed and the transmission is in position h increase the engine braking effect, the drive paddle 2.
or k. wheels may lose traction. # To shift down: pull steering wheel gearshift
# Do not shift down on slippery road sur‐ paddle 1.
Engaging drive position D
# Depress the brake pedal and push the
faces to increase the engine braking # To deactivate: pull steering wheel gearshift

DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first effect. paddle 2 and hold it in place.
point of resistance. The transmission position
The transmission position display shows h h appears in the multifunction display.
in the multifunction display. % If you select the Manual drive setting in
When the automatic transmission is in transmis‐ drive program I, manual gearshifting is per‐
sion position h, it shifts the gears automati‐ manently activated.
cally. This is determined by:
R The selected drive program Gearshift recommendation
R The position of the accelerator pedal The gearshift recommendations assist you in
R The road speed adopting an economical driving style.
174 Driving and parking

# Ease off the accelerator pedal once the (engine management) when in drive program
desired speed is reached. I.
Glide mode is deactivated again if one of the
Glide mode function conditions is no longer met.
Glide mode helps you to reduce fuel consump‐ Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package,
tion. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or Active Brake
Assist: Glide mode is also deactivated depend‐
Glide mode is characterised by the following: ing on the traffic situation and the vehicle then
R The combustion engine is disconnected from switches to overrun mode. This further reduces
the drivetrain. fuel consumption.
# If gearshift recommendation message 1 is R The engine speed corresponds to the idle
shown in the multifunction display, shift to Glide mode can also be prevented by the follow‐
speed. ing parameters:
the recommended gear.
Glide mode is activated if the following condi‐ R Gradient

Using kickdown tions are met: R Temperature

R Drive program E is selected. R Height
# Maximum acceleration: depress the accel‐
erator pedal beyond the pressure point. R The speed is within a suitable range. R Speed
R The course of the road is suitable, e.g. no R Obstacle detection
During kickdown, you cannot shift gears using steep uphill or downhill gradients. R Operating condition of the engine
the steering wheel gearshift paddles. The auto‐ R You are no longer depressing the accelerator
matic transmission shifts up to the next gear or brake pedal.
when the maximum engine speed is reached to
protect the engine from overrevving. % Glide mode can also be activated if you have
selected the "Eco" setting for the drive
 Driving and parking 175

Refuelling # Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with & WARNING Risk of fire from fuel mixture
Refuelling the vehicle soap and water.
Vehicles with a diesel engine:
# If fuel comes into contact with your
& WARNING ‑ Risk of fire or explosion eyes, immediately rinse them thor‐ If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flash
oughly with clean water. Seek medical point of the fuel mixture is lower than that of
caused by fuel pure diesel fuel.
attention immediately.
Fuels are highly inflammable. While the engine is running, component
# You must avoid fire, naked flames, cre‐
# If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten‐
tion immediately. Do not induce vomit‐ parts in the exhaust system may overheat
ating sparks and smoking. ing. without warning.
# Before refuelling, switch off the engine # Never refuel using petrol.
# Change immediately out of clothing that
and auxiliary heating if your vehicle is has come into contact with fuel. # Never mix petrol with diesel fuel.
equipped with auxiliary heating.
& WARNING Risk of fire and explosion due * NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel
& WARNING Risk of injury from fuel
to electrostatic charge Fuel that does not conform to the required
Fuels are poisonous and harmful to your Electrostatic charge can cause sparks and quality can lead to increased wear as well as
health thereby ignite fuel vapours. damage to the engine and exhaust system.
# Do not swallow fuel or let it come into
# Touch the metal vehicle body before # Only use the fuel recommended.
contact with skin, eyes or clothing. opening the fuel filler cap or touching
# Do not inhale fuel vapour. the pump nozzle. * NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel
# Keep children away from fuel.
This discharges any electrostatic charge that Vehicles with a petrol engine:
If you or other people come into contact with may have built up.
fuel, observe the following:
176 Driving and parking

Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could * NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel * NOTE Do not use diesel to refuel vehi‐
result in damage to the fuel system, the cles with a petrol engine.
engine and the emission control system. Vehicles with a diesel engine:
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could # Do not switch on the ignition if you
# Only refuel using premium-grade unlea‐
result in damage to the fuel system, the accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.
ded fuel that conforms to EN 228, or an Otherwise, fuel can enter the fuel sys‐
equivalent specification. engine and the emission control system.
tem. Even small amounts of the wrong
# Only refuel using diesel fuel that con‐
fuel could result in damage to the fuel
Fuel of this specification may contain up to forms to European standard EN 590, or system and the engine. Notify a quali‐
10 % ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use an equivalent specification. fied specialist workshop and have the
with E10 fuel. # Vehicles with diesel particulate fil‐ fuel tank and fuel lines drained com‐
Do not refuel using: ters: in countries outside the EU, only pletely.
R Diesel use low-sulphur Euro diesel with a sul‐
phur content of under 50 ppm. * NOTE Do not use petrol to refuel vehi‐
R E85, E100
Do not use the following: cles with a diesel engine.
R Petrol containing methanol (M15, M30,
M85, M100) R Petrol # Do not switch on the ignition if you
R Petrol with additives containing metal R Marine diesel accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.
R Heating oil Otherwise, fuel can enter the fuel sys‐
If you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel: tem. Even small amounts of the wrong
R Bio-diesel
# Do not switch the ignition on. fuel could result in damage to the fuel
R Vegetable oil system and the engine. The repair costs
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
R Paraffin are high. Notify a qualified specialist
R Kerosene workshop and have the fuel tank and
fuel lines drained completely.
 Driving and parking 177

* NOTE Do not overfill the fuel tank, other‐ Refuelling # Turn the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise and
wise the fuel system may be damaged. remove it.
# Insert the fuel filler cap into holder 2.
# Only fill the fuel tank until the pump
# Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel
nozzle switches off.
pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and
refuel.
* NOTE Do not overfill the fuel tank, other‐
# Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle
wise fuel may spay out when you remove
the pump nozzle. switches off.
% Vehicles with a diesel engine: the filler
# Only fill the fuel tank until the pump neck is designed for refuelling at diesel fill‐
nozzle switches off. ing pumps.
Requirement: % Vehicles with a diesel engine: when the
The vehicle must be unlocked. fuel tank is completely empty, refuel with at
least 5 litres of diesel.
% Do not get into the vehicle again during the
refuelling process. Otherwise, electrostatic
charge could build up again.
1 Fuel filler flap
Observe the notes on operating fluids
2 Bracket for the fuel filler cap
(→ page 433).
3 Tyre pressure table
4 QR code for rescue card
5 Fuel type
# Press fuel filler flap 1.
178 Driving and parking

AdBlue® (diesel engine vehicles only) exhaust gas aftertreatment to function properly, Topping up AdBlue®
only use AdBlue® in accordance with ISO 22241.
Notes on AdBlue® * NOTE Engine damage due to AdBlue® in
AdBlue® is characterised by the following:
the fuel
* NOTE When you open the AdBlue® tank, R non-toxic
small amounts of ammonia vapour may R colourless and odourless
# AdBlue® must not be used to fill the
escape. fuel tank.
R non-flammable
# Only fill the AdBlue® tank in well-venti‐ # Only use AdBlue® to fill the AdBlue®
lated areas. AdBlue® may be topped up by fast service at a tank.
qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-
# Do not let AdBlue® come into contact Benz Service Centre.
# Do not overfill the AdBlue® tank.
with skin, eyes or clothes.
AdBlue® is available at many filling stations from
# Keep AdBlue® away from children. * NOTE Contamination of the vehicle inte‐
AdBlue® filling pumps.
rior due to AdBlue® leakage
Alternatively, AdBlue® is available at qualified
* NOTE Do not ingest AdBlue®. specialist workshops, e.g. Mercedes-Benz # After topping up, carefully close the
Service Centres, and at many filling stations in AdBlue® refill container.
If AdBlue® is swallowed:
AdBlue® refill canisters or AdBlue® refill bottles. # Avoid carrying AdBlue® refill containers
# Immediately rinse out your mouth thor‐
% Ensure the connection between the refill permanently in the vehicle.
oughly.
container and vehicle filler neck does not
# Drink plenty of water.
drip.
# Seek medical attention immediately.

AdBlue® is a fluid urea solution for exhaust gas

aftertreatment of diesel engines. In order for the
 Driving and parking 179

Requirements: Opening the AdBlue® filler cap Preparing the AdBlue® refill canister
The following announcements appear in order in
the multifunction display when the AdBlue® tank
requires refuelling:
R Refill AdBlue See Owner's Manual. The
AdBlue® reservoir is down to the reserve
level.
R Refill AdBlue No start in XXX mi. You can still
drive the vehicle over the distance shown.
Top up AdBlue® as soon as possible.
R Refill AdBlue Start not possible. The vehicle
can no longer be started.
# Screw on the fastener of AdBlue® refill canis‐
ter 2.
The vehicle must be unlocked. # Screw disposable hose 1 onto the opening
of AdBlue® refill canister 2 until finger-tight.

# Press fuel filler flap 1.

# Turn AdBlue® filler cap 2 anti-clockwise and
remove it.
180 Driving and parking

Topping up AdBlue® # Start the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury
The display message in the instrument clus‐ due to children left unattended in the
ter goes out. vehicle
% Avoid storing AdBlue® refill containers per‐
If you leave children unattended in the vehi‐
manently in the vehicle. cle, they may be able to set the vehicle in
motion, for example by:
Parking R Releasing the parking brake.
Switching off the vehicle with the start/stop R Shifting the automatic transmission out
button of park position j or shifting the manual
transmission into neutral.
& WARNING Risk of fire caused by hot R Starting the engine.
# Screw disposable hose 1 onto the filler exhaust system parts
neck of the vehicle until finger-tight. In addition, they may operate vehicle equip‐
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or ment.
# Lift up and tip AdBlue® refill canister 2.
twigs may ignite if they come into contact
The filling process stops when the AdBlue® with hot parts of the exhaust system or # Never leave children and animals unat‐
tank is completely full. exhaust gas flow. tended in the vehicle.
AdBlue® refill canister 2 can be removed # When leaving the vehicle, always take
# Park the vehicle so that no flammable
when it has been only partially emptied. material can come into contact with hot the key with you and lock the vehicle.
# Unscrew and close disposable hose 1 and vehicle components. This also applies to mobile phones if the
"Digital Car Key in the smartphone"
AdBlue® refill canister 2 in reverse order. # In particular, do not park on dry grass‐
function is activated via the Mercedes
# After topping up the AdBlue® tank, switch on land or harvested grain fields. connect me web app.
the ignition for at least 60 seconds.
 Driving and parking 181

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle or the driv‐

# Vehicles with manual transmission: & WARNING Risk of injury and entrapment
etrain caused by the vehicle rolling away Engage first 1 or reverse gear k. when opening the garage door using the
# Apply the electric parking brake. garage door opener
# Always properly secure the vehicle
# Press button 1 once.
against rolling away. When you operate or program the garage
% When you switch off the vehicle, you can still door with the integrated garage door opener,
operate the side windows and the panoramic persons in the range of movement of the
sliding sunroof for five minutes. garage door can become trapped or struck
by the garage door.
Garage door opener # When using the integrated garage door
opener, always make sure that nobody
Programming buttons for the garage door is within the sweep of the garage door.
opener
Prior to programming a garage door opener, park
& WARNING Risk of exhaust gas poisoning the vehicle outside the garage and switch off the
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust engine.
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases causes poisoning.
# Never leave the engine running in an
enclosed space without sufficient venti‐
lation.
# On uphill or downhill inclines, turn the front
wheels towards the kerb.
182 Driving and parking

# Point remote control 5 at a distance of R The vehicle as well as persons and objects,
1 cm to 8 cm towards buttons 1, 2 or 3. are located outside the sweep of the garage
# Press and hold button 6 of remote control door.
5 until:
R Indicator lamp 4 lights up green contin‐
uously. Programming is complete.
R Indicator lamp 4 flashes green. Pro‐
gramming was successful. Additionally,
synchronisation of the rolling code with
the garage door system must also take
place.
# If indicator lamp 4 does not light up or flash
green: repeat the procedure.
# Release all of the buttons.

% The remote control for the garage door drive

# Press and hold button 1, 2 or 3 that you is not included in the scope of delivery of the
wish to program. garage door opener.
Indicator lamp 4 flashes yellow.
Synchronising the rolling code
% It can take up to 20 seconds before the indi‐ # Press the programming button on the door
cator lamp flashes yellow. Requirements: drive unit.
# Release the previously pressed button. R The garage door system uses a rolling code. Initiate the next step within approximately
Indicator lamp 4 continues to flash yellow. R The vehicle must be within range of the 30 seconds.
garage door or exterior gate drive.
 Driving and parking 183

# Press previously programmed button 1, 2 the inside rearview mirror. You should test Opening or closing the garage door
or 3 repeatedly, until the door closes. every position for at least 25 seconds before
When the door closes, programming is com‐ trying another position. Requirement:
pleted. The corresponding button is programmed to
# Hold remote control 5 at the same angles
operate the garage door.
% Please also read the operating instructions at various distances in front of the inside
for the garage door drive. rearview mirror. You should test every posi‐
tion for at least 25 seconds before trying
Troubleshooting when programming the another position.
remote control
# Note that some remote controls transmit
only for a limited period, press button 6 on
remote control 5 again before transmission
ends.
# Align the aerial line of the garage door
opener unit with the remote control.
% Support and additional information on pro‐
gramming:
R On the HomeLink® Hotline on (0) 08000
466 354 65 or +49 (0) 6838 907-277.
# Check if the transmitter frequency of remote R On the Internet at http://
control 5 is supported. www.homelink.com. # Press and hold buttons 1, 2 or 3 until
# Replace the batteries in remote control 5. the garage door opens or closes.
# Hold remote control 5 at various angles at # If indicator lamp 4 flashes yellow after
a distance between 1 cm to 8 cm in front of approximately 20 seconds: press and hold
184 Driving and parking

the previously pressed button again until the Radio equipment approval numbers for the R Switzerland: CE
garage door opens or closes. garage door opener R South Africa: TA-2015/1386
R Egypt: TAC.2511151293.WIR
Clearing the garage door opener memory R Turkey: not required
R Andorra: CE
R United Arab Emirates: ER41849/15
R Australia: R-NZ
R United States: NZLMUAHL5
R Barbados: MED1578
R Chile: 2488/DFRS20576/F-74
Electric parking brake
R European Union: CE
Automatically applying the electric parking
R Gibraltar: CE
brake
R Iceland: CE
R Jordan: TRC/LPD/2015/299 & WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to children left unattended in the
R Canada: 4112A-MUAHL5
vehicle
R Kuwait: CE
If you leave children unattended in the vehi‐
R Liechtenstein: CE cle, they may be able to set the vehicle in
R Mexico: RCPGEMU15-0448 motion, for example by:
R Monaco: CE R Releasing the parking brake.
# Press and hold buttons 1 and 3. R New Zealand: R-NZ R Shifting the automatic transmission out
Indicator lamp 4 lights up yellow. of park position j or shifting the manual
R Norway: CE
# If indicator lamp 4 flashes green: release transmission into neutral.
buttons 1 and 3. R Russian Federation: not required
R Starting the engine.
R Saudi Arabia: TA 10525
 Driving and parking 185

In addition, they may operate vehicle equip‐ When the electric parking brake is applied, R Parking Pilot is keeping the vehicle station‐
ment. the ! indicator lamp lights up in the instru‐ ary.
ment cluster.
# Never leave children and animals unat‐ This is only the case if one of the following con‐
tended in the vehicle. The electric parking brake is not automatically ditions is also fulfilled:
applied if the engine is switched off by the ECO
# When leaving the vehicle, always take R The engine is switched off.
start/stop function.
the key with you and lock the vehicle. R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the
This also applies to mobile phones if the Vehicles with automatic transmission:
seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the
"Digital Car Key in the smartphone" The electric parking brake is applied if the trans‐ driver's door is opened.
function is activated via the Mercedes mission is in position j and one of the follow‐
R There is a system malfunction.
connect me web app. ing conditions is fulfilled:
R The power supply is insufficient.
R The engine is switched off.
Vehicles with manual transmission: R The vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period.
R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the
The electric parking brake is applied while the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the When the electric parking brake is applied,
vehicle is being kept stationary by the HOLD driver's door is opened.
function if one of the following conditions are the ! indicator lamp lights up in the instru‐
fulfilled: % To prevent application: pull the handle of the ment cluster.
R The engine is switched off. electric parking brake. The electric parking brake is not automatically
In the following situations, the electric parking applied if the engine is switched off by the ECO
R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the start/stop function.
seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the brake is also engaged:
driver's door is opened. R The Distance Pilot DISTRONIC brings the Releasing the electric parking brake auto‐
R There is a system malfunction. vehicle to a standstill. matically
R The HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta‐
Vehicles with manual transmission:
R The power supply is insufficient.
tionary.
R The vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period.
186 Driving and parking

The electric parking brake is released when the R If the transmission is in position k, the boot Applying or releasing the electric parking
following conditions are fulfilled: lid must be closed. brake manually
R The driver's door is closed. If the seat belt tongue is not inserted into the
R The engine is running. seat belt buckle of the driver's seat, the follow‐
R A gear has been selected, you release the ing conditions must be fulfilled:
clutch pedal and depress the accelerator R The driver's door is closed.
pedal. R You move the transmission out of transmis‐
R When the reverse gear k is selected, the sion position j or you have previously
boot lid must be closed. driven faster than 3 km/h.
If the electric parking brake is released, R If the transmission is in position k, the boot
the ! indicator lamp in the instrument clus‐ lid must be closed.
ter goes out. If the electric parking brake is released,
Vehicles with automatic transmission: the ! indicator lamp in the instrument clus‐
The electric parking brake is released when the ter goes out.
following conditions are fulfilled:
R The engine is running.
R The seat belt tongue is inserted into the seat
# To apply: push handle 1.
belt buckle of the driver's seat. The ! indicator lamp appears in the
instrument cluster.
R The transmission is in position h or k and
you depress the accelerator pedal or you # To release: switch on the ignition.
shift from transmission position j to h or
k.
 Driving and parking 187

# Pull handle 1. Standby mode The starter battery must be charged in the fol‐
The ! indicator lamp in the instrument lowing situations:
Standby mode function
cluster goes out. R the vehicle's period out of use must be
Standby mode is characterised by the following: extended.
Emergency braking
R the vehicle can be parked over a long period
# Press and hold handle 1. R a message appears in the multimedia system
of time without losing power. display explaining that the battery charge is
When the vehicle has been braked to a R the vehicle battery is preserved.
standstill: insufficient for standby mode.
R the maximum period out of use is displayed
R The electric parking brake is applied. % Standby mode is automatically deactivated
in the multimedia system display. when the ignition is switched on.
R The ! indicator lamp appears in the
R functions such as interior protection or tow-
instrument cluster. Activating or deactivating standby mode
away protection are not available.
Multimedia system:
R the connection to online services is interrup‐
Parking up the vehicle ted. , Vehicle . î Vehicle set-

R If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer tings . Standby mode
If the following conditions are fulfilled, standby
than four weeks, damage may occur to the # Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
mode can be activated or deactivated using the
battery. multimedia system: When you activate the function, a prompt
R If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer appears.
R the engine is switched off.
than six weeks, it may suffer damage as a # Select Yes.
R the ignition is switched on. Standby mode is activated.
result of lack of use.
R Information on parking up your vehicle can Exceeding the vehicle's displayed period out of
be obtained at a qualified specialist work‐ use may cause inconvenience, i.e. it cannot be
shop. guaranteed that the starter battery will reliably
start the engine.
188 Driving and parking

Driving and driving safety systems associated damage, which may not be visible, to R EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)
the bumpers or radiator grille, have the function (→ page 193)
Driving systems and your responsibility of the radar sensors checked at a qualified spe‐ R ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Your vehicle is equipped with driving systems cialist workshop. The driver assistance system (→ page 189)
which assist you in driving, parking and manoeu‐ may no longer work properly.
vring the vehicle. The driving systems are aids R DRIVE PILOT (→ page 209)
and do not relieve you of your responsibility. Pay Overview of driving systems and driving R HOLD function (→ page 212)
attention to the traffic conditions at all times safety systems R Steering Pilot (→ page 209)
and intervene when necessary. Be aware of the
limitations regarding the safe use of these sys‐ In this section, you will find information about R Limiter (→ page 199)
tems. the following driving systems and driving safety R Parking Pilot (→ page 227)
systems: R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (→ page 218)
Function of the radar sensors R 360° Camera (→ page 224) R Reversing camera (→ page 221)
R ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) R Cruise control (→ page 199)
Some driving and driving safety systems use
(→ page 189)
radar sensors to monitor the area in front of, R Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist
behind or next to the vehicle (depending on the R Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (→ page 202) (→ page 242)
vehicle's equipment). R Adaptive brake lights (→ page 199) R Traffic Sign Assist (→ page 239)
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the radar R AIR BODY CONTROL (→ page 214)
sensors are integrated behind the bumpers R Active Brake Assist (→ page 194)
and/or behind the radiator grille. Keep these
parts free of dirt, ice and slush . The sensors R Active Lane Keeping Assist (→ page 244)
must not be covered, for example by bicycle R ATTENTION ASSIST (→ page 238)
racks, overhanging loads or radar-reflecting R BAS (Brake Assist System) (→ page 189)
stickers. Following an impact and in the event of
R DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL (→ page 214)
 Driving and parking 189

Functions of ABS (anti-lock braking system) Function of BAS (Brake Assist System) Functions of ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro‐
ABS regulates the brake pressure in critical driv‐ gram)
& WARNING Risk of an accident caused by
ing situations:
a malfunction in BAS (Brake Assist Sys‐ & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is
R During braking, the wheels are prevented tem) malfunctioning
from blocking, e.g. due to maximum full-stop
braking or insufficient traction of the tyres. If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry
may increase in an emergency braking situa‐ out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other
R Vehicle steerability while braking is ensured.
tion. driving safety systems are switched off.
R ABS is active from speeds of approx. # Depress the brake pedal with full force # Drive on carefully.
8 km/h. in emergency braking situations. ABS
# Have ESP® checked at a qualified spe‐
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a prevents the wheels from locking.
cialist workshop.
pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake
pedal can be an indication of hazardous road BAS supports your emergency braking situation
conditions and can serve as a reminder to take with additional brake force. & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is
extra care while driving. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS is deactivated
activated: If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® cannot carry
System limits
ABS may be impaired or may not function if a R BAS automatically boosts the brake pres‐ out vehicle stabilisation.
malfunction has occurred and the yellow ! sure. # ESP® should only be deactivated in the
ABS warning lamp lights up continuously in the R BAS can shorten the braking distance. following situations.
instrument cluster after the engine is started. R ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
ESP® monitors and improves driving stability and
The brakes will function as usual once you traction, particularly in the following situations:
release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.
R When pulling away on wet or slippery roads.
190 Driving and parking

R When braking. R ETS/4ETS traction control is still active. If the ESP® ÷ warning lamp lights up continu‐
R Vehicles with trailer hitch: In trailer opera‐ % Even when ESP® is deactivated, you are still ously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction.
tion from speeds of 65 km/h, if the vehicle/ assisted by ESP® when braking. Observe any information which may be displayed
trailer combination begins to sway from side in the instrument cluster:
to side. ESP® is intervening if the ESP® ÷ warning
R Warning and indicator lamps (→ page 501)
R In strong sidewinds when you are driving lamp flashes in the instrument cluster:
R Display messages (→ page 445)
faster than 80 km/h. R Do not deactivate ESP®.
R Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
ESP® can stabilise the vehicle by intervening in ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP®.
the following ways: is necessary.
R Adapt your driving style to suit the current ETS/4ETS can improve the vehicle's traction by
R One or more wheels are braked.
road and weather conditions. intervening in the following ways:
R The engine output is adapted according to
R The drive wheels are braked individually if
the situation. Deactivate ESP® in the following situations to
they spin.
improve traction:
ESP® is deactivated if the ESP® OFF å warn‐ R More drive torque is transferred to the wheel
R When using snow chains.
ing lamp lights up continuously in the instrument or wheels with traction.
cluster: R In deep snow.
R On sand or gravel.
Influence of drive programs on ESP®
R Driving stability will no longer be improved.
The drive programs enable ESP® to adapt to dif‐
R Vehicles with trailer hitch: Stabilisation of % Spinning the wheels results in a cutting ferent weather and road conditions as well as
the vehicle/trailer combination is no longer action which provides better grip. the driver's preferred driving style. You can
active. select the drive programs using the DYNAMIC
ESP® is deactivated if the å ESP® OFF warn‐
R Crosswind Assist is no longer active. ing lamp lights up continuously in the instrument SELECT switch.
R The drive wheels could spin. cluster.
 Driving and parking 191

ESP® characteristics per drive program

Drive program ESP® mode Characteristics

C (Comfort) ESP® Comfort These drive programs provide the ideal balance
E (Economy) between traction and stability.
Select drive program E or C in difficult road con‐
ditions, such as in snow or ice, or when the road
is wet from rain.
S (Sport) ESP® Sport This drive program continues to offer stability
but with a sporty setup which allows the enthu‐
siastic driver a more active driving style.
Only select drive program S in good road condi‐
tions, for example on dry road surfaces and
clear stretches of road.
192 Driving and parking

Drive program ESP® mode Characteristics

All vehicles except All-Terrain vehicles: S+ ESP® Sport Plus The vehicle's own understeering and oversteer‐
(Sport Plus) ing characteristics are accentuated. This allows
a more active driving style to be adopted.
Only select drive program S+ in good road con‐
ditions, for example on dry road surfaces and
clear stretches of road.
All-Terrain vehicles: All-Terrain ESP® All-Terrain This drive program offers a traction-orientated
setting. It functions in the speed range of up to
approx. 30 km/h and provides maximum trac‐
tion. This drive program provides maximum trac‐
tion particularly on unpaved, very uneven surfa‐
ces and easily negotiable off-road terrain.
Select the drive program All-Terrain when driv‐
ing on unpaved tracks in easily negotiable off-
road terrain or very uneven surfaces.
 Driving and parking 193

Activating/deactivating ESP® (Electronic Sta‐ R The vehicle is stabilised by means of individ‐ R Slight swaying is reduced by means of a tar‐
bility Program) ual brake application on one side. geted, individual brake application on one
side.
Multimedia system:
, Vehicle . k Assistance . ESP Functions of ESP® trailer stabilisation R In the event of intense swaying, the engine
output is also reduced and all wheels are
# Activate O or deactivate ª the function. braked.
& WARNING Risk of accident in poor road
ESP® is deactivated if the ESP® OFF å warn‐ and weather conditions ESP® trailer stabilisation may be impaired or
ing lamp lights up continuously in the instrument In poor road and weather conditions, the may not function if:
cluster. trailer stabilisation cannot prevent lurching of R The trailer is not connected correctly or is
Observe the information on warning lamps and the vehicle/trailer combination. Trailers with not detected properly by the vehicle.
display messages which may be shown in the a high centre of gravity may tip over before
instrument cluster. ESP® detects this.
Function of EBD (Electronic Brake force Dis‐
# Always adapt your driving style to suit tribution)
Functions of ESP® Crosswind Assist the current road and weather condi‐
tions. EBD is characterised by the following:
ESP® Crosswind Assist detects sudden gusts of R Monitoring and regulating the brake pressure
side wind and helps the driver to keep the vehi‐ When driving with a trailer, ESP® can stabilise on the rear wheels.
cle in the lane: your vehicle if the trailer begins to sway from R Improved driving stability when braking,
R ESP® Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle side to side: especially on bends.
speeds between 80 km/h and 200 km/h R ESP® trailer stabilisation is active above
when driving straight ahead or cornering speeds of 65 km/h.
slightly.
194 Driving and parking

Function of Active Brake Assist If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situa‐ # Always pay careful attention to the traf‐
tion or apply the brake during autonomous brak‐ fic situation; do not rely on Active Brake
Active Brake Assist consists of: ing, situation-dependent braking assistance Assist alone.
R Distance warning function occurs. This increases the brake pressure up to
maximum full-stop braking if necessary.
# Be ready to brake and take evasive
R Autonomous braking function
action if necessary.
R Situation-dependent braking assistance If the autonomous braking function or the situa‐
R Vehicles with the Driving Assistance
tion-dependent braking assistance is triggered, Also observe the system limits of Active Brake
package: Evasive Steering Assist additional preventive measures for occupant Assist.
protection (PRE-SAFE®) may also be initiated, if
Active Brake Assist can help you to minimise the the vehicle is equipped with these. The individual subfunctions are available in
risk of a collision with vehicles or pedestrians or the following speed ranges:
to reduce the effects of such a collision. & WARNING Risk of an accident caused by Distance warning function
If Active Brake Assist has detected a risk of colli‐ limited detection performance of Active The distance warning function issues a warning
sion, you will be warned visually and acousti‐ Brake Assist at speeds:
cally. Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly R From approximately 30 km/h, if over several
If you do not react to the visual or acoustic warn‐ identify objects and complex traffic situa‐ seconds the distance maintained to the vehi‐
ing, autonomous braking can be initiated in criti‐ tions. cle travelling in front is insufficient for the
cal situations. In such cases, Active Brake Assist might: driven speed. The distance warning lamp
In especially critical situations, Active Brake then lights up in the instrument cluster ·.
R give an unnecessary warning or brake the
Assist can initiate autonomous braking directly. R From approximately 7 km/h, if your vehicle
vehicle
In this case, the visual and acoustic warning is critically close to a vehicle or pedestrian.
R not give a warning or not brake the vehi‐ An intermittent warning tone sounds and the
occurs simultaneously with the braking applica‐
cle. distance warning lamp lights up in the instru‐
tion.
ment cluster ·.
 Driving and parking 195

Brake immediately or take evasive action, provi‐

ded it is safe to do so.

The distance warning function can aid you in the following situations with an intermittent warning tone and a warning lamp:

Vehicles travelling in Stationary vehicles Crossing vehicles Crossing pedestrians Stationary pedes‐
front trians
Vehicles without Driv‐ up to approx. up to approx. 80 km/h no reaction up to approx. 60 km/h no reaction
ing Assistance pack‐ 250 km/h
age
Vehicles with Driving up to approx. up to approx. up to approx. 70 km/h up to approx. 70 km/h up to approx. 70 km/h
Assistance package 250 km/h 100 km/h
196 Driving and parking

Autonomous braking function

The autonomous braking function may intervene at speeds starting from approximately 7 km/h in the following situations:

Vehicles travelling in Stationary vehicles Crossing vehicles Crossing pedestrians Stationary pedes‐
front trians
Vehicles without Driv‐ up to approx. up to approx. 50 km/h no reaction up to approx. 60 km/h no reaction
ing Assistance pack‐ 200 km/h
age
Vehicles with Driving up to approx. up to approx. up to approx. 70 km/h up to approx. 70 km/h up to approx. 70 km/h
Assistance package 250 km/h 100 km/h

Situation-dependent braking assistance

Situation-dependent braking assistance may intervene at speeds starting from approximately 7 km/h in the following situations:

Vehicles travelling in Stationary vehicles Crossing vehicles Crossing pedestrians Stationary pedes‐
front trians
Vehicles without Driv‐ up to approx. up to approx. 80 km/h no reaction up to approx. 60 km/h no reaction
ing Assistance pack‐ 250 km/h
age
Vehicles with Driving up to approx. up to approx. up to approx. 70 km/h up to approx. 70 km/h up to approx. 70 km/h
Assistance package 250 km/h 100 km/h
 Driving and parking 197

Cancelling a brake application of Active R Can be activated by an abrupt steering move‐ # Always pay careful attention to the traf‐
Brake Assist ment during a swerving manoeuvre. fic situation; do not rely on Evasive
You can cancel a brake application of Active R Can assist during swerving and straightening Steering Assist alone.
Brake Assist at any time by: of the vehicle. # Be ready to brake and take evasive
R Depressing the accelerator pedal fully. R Can react from a speed of approximately action, if necessary.
R Releasing the brake pedal. 20 km/h up to a speed of approximately # Prevent the assistance by actively steer‐
70 km/h. ing in non-critical driving situations.
Active Brake Assist cancels the intervention R You can prevent the assistance at any time
when at least one of the following conditions is # Drive at an appropriate speed if pedes‐
by active steering. trians are close to the path of your vehi‐
fulfilled:
cle.
R You manoeuvre to avoid the obstacle. & WARNING Risk of an accident despite
R There is no longer a risk of collision. Evasive Steering Assist Also observe the system limits of Evasive Steer‐
R An obstacle is no longer detected in front of Evasive Steering Assist cannot always clearly ing Assist.
your vehicle. identify objects and complex traffic situa‐ System limits
tions.
Evasive Steering Assist Active Brake Assist may be impaired or may not
In addition, the steering support of Evasive function in the following situations:
Evasive Steering Assist has the following charac‐ Steering Assist is generally not sufficient to
teristics: avoid a collision. R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is
R Can detect stationary or crossing pedes‐ glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying
In such cases Evasive Steering Assist can: light conditions.
trians.
R give an unnecessary warning or provide
R Can assist the driver with additional steering R If the sensors are dirty, misted up, damaged
assistance or covered.
assistance if it detects a swerving manoeu‐
R not give a warning or not provide assis‐
vre.
tance
198 Driving and parking

R If the sensors malfunction due to other radar Setting Active Brake Assist # Select Active Brake Assist Warning/brake
source interference, for example strong radar application: late: your selection is retained
reflections in multi-storey car parks. Multimedia system:
when the vehicle is next started.
, Vehicle . k Assistance . Active
R If a loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre # Select Active Brake Assist Warning/brake
has been detected and displayed. Brake Assist
application: off:
Vehicles without Driving Assistance pack‐ Vehicles without Driving Assistance pack‐
The system may not react correctly: age: The settings can be made after starting the age: The distance warning function and the
R In complex traffic stations where objects vehicle. autonomous braking function are deactiva‐
cannot always be clearly identified. Vehicles with Driving Assistance package: ted. When the vehicle is next started, the
R To pedestrians or vehicles if they move The settings can be made when the ignition is middle setting is automatically selected.
quickly into the sensor detection range. switched on. Vehicles with Driving Assistance pack‐
R To pedestrians who are hidden by other % It is recommended that you always leave age: The distance warning function and the
objects. Active Brake Assist switched on. autonomous braking function are deactiva‐
R If the typical outline of a pedestrian cannot The moment of warning or intervention can be ted. Evasive Steering Assist is unavailable.
be distinguished from the background. adjusted as follows: When the ignition is next started, the middle
setting is selected automatically and Evasive
R If a pedestrian is not recognised as such, e.g. # Select Active Brake Assist Warning/brake
Steering Assist is available.
due to special clothing or other objects. application: early: your selection is retained
when the vehicle is next started. % When Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the
R On bends with a tight radius.
æ symbol appears in the assistance
# Select Active Brake Assist Warning/brake
graphic in the multifunction display.
application: medium: your selection is
retained when the vehicle is next started.
 Driving and parking 199

Function of Adaptive Brake Lights The vehicle is braked considerably when moving into account road, weather or traffic conditions.
faster than 50 km/h: Cruise control is only an aid. You are responsible
Adaptive Brake Lights warn following traffic in an
R Brake Assist System (BAS) and Active Brake for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehi‐
emergency braking situation:
Assist support you during braking. cle speed, for braking in good time and for stay‐
R by flashing brake lamps ing in lane.
R Brake Assist activates the Adaptive Brake
R by activating the hazard warning lights
Lights. System limitations
Adaptive Brake Lights have the following charac‐ R The brake lamps flash rapidly. Cruise control may be unable to maintain the
teristics: stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored
R If you brake sharply at a speed above
speed is resumed when the gradient evens out.
Cruise control and limiter
50 km/h, or if braking is assisted by BAS or Do not use cruise control in the following situa‐
Active Brake Assist, the brake lamps flash Function of cruise control tions:
rapidly. This provides traffic travelling behind Cruise control accelerates and brakes the vehi‐ R in traffic situations which require frequent
you with an even more noticeable warning. cle automatically in order to maintain a previ‐ changes of speed, e.g. in heavy traffic, on
R If you brake sharply to a standstill from a ously stored speed. winding roads
speed above 70 km/h, the hazard warning If you accelerate to overtake, for example, the R on slippery roads. Accelerating can cause
lights are activated automatically once the stored speed is not deleted. If you remove your the drive wheels to lose traction and the
vehicle is stationary. The brake lamps light foot from the accelerator pedal after overtaking, vehicle could then skid
up again constantly when you depress the cruise control will resume speed regulation back
R when visibility is poor
brake pedal. The hazard warning lights to the stored speed.
switch off automatically when you drive You can operate cruise control with the cruise Function of the limiter
faster than 10 km/h. You can also switch off control lever. The limiter restricts the speed of the vehicle. To
the hazard warning lights using the hazard reduce the speed swiftly to the set speed, the
If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise con‐
warning button. limiter applies the brakes automatically.
trol can neither reduce the risk of an accident
nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take
200 Driving and parking

You can limit the speed as follows: After completion of kickdown, the variable lim‐ note of this when driving a laden vehicle. By
R Variable: for speed limits, e.g. in built-up iter is activated again in the following situations: doing so, you will make use of the braking effect
areas. R if the driven speed drops below the stored of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake
speed. system and prevents the brakes from overheat‐
R Permanent: for long-term speed restrictions,
ing and wearing too quickly.
e.g. when driving with winter tyres fitted. R if the stored speed is called up.
R if you store a new speed. Requirements:
If you fail to adapt your driving style, the limiter
can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor Cruise control
Operating cruise control or the variable lim‐
override the laws of physics. It cannot take into iter R Cruise control is selected.
account road, weather or traffic conditions. The R ESP® must be switched on, but not interven‐
limiter is only an aid. You are responsible for the & WARNING Risk of accident due to ing.
distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle unknown stored speed
speed, for braking in good time and for staying R The driving speed must be at least 20 km/h.
in lane. If you call up the stored speed and this is
lower than your current speed, the vehicle Variable Limiter
You can operate the variable limiter with the decelerates. R The vehicle has been started.
cruise control lever. You can store any road
If you do not know the stored speed, the R The variable limiter is selected.
speed above 20 km/h. You can also perform
settings while the vehicle is stationary if the vehicle could decelerate unexpectedly.
vehicle has been started. # Take into account the traffic situation
before calling up the stored speed.
Kickdown
# If the stored speed is not known, store
If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
pressure point (kickdown), the limiter is the desired speed again.
switched to passive mode. The Limiter passive
message appears in the multifunction display. Change into a lower gear in good time on long
and steep downhill gradients. Take particular
 Driving and parking 201

# To call up last speed stored 4. # Press and hold the lever: stored speed is
# To deactivate cruise control or variable lim‐ increased 5 or reduced
iter 2. 6 in 1 km/h increments.
or
# Press the lever beyond the pressure point:
stored speed is increased 5 or reduced
6 by 10 km/h.
or
# Press and hold the lever beyond the pressure
point: stored speed is increased 5 or
reduced 6 in 10 km/h increments.
If cruise control or the variable limiter has been
deactivated, the current speed is stored with 5
or 6.
% Vehicles with manual transmission: if the
# To switch between cruise control and varia‐ engine speed is very low, cruise control or
ble limiter 1. the limiter is deactivated. When the engine
R LIM indicator lamp 3 off: cruise control
speed approaches the maximum engine
is selected. speed, or neutral is engaged or the clutch
# Press the lever briefly: stored speed is
R LIM indicator lamp 3 on: the variable increased 5 or reduced 6 by 1 km/h. pedal is depressed for longer than six sec‐
limiter is selected. onds, cruise control is deactivated.
or
# To store current speed 4 (once after start‐
ing the vehicle).
or
202 Driving and parking

% On vehicles with a segment display in the Shortly before the set speed is reached, it R Assists you in maintaining the distance from
speedometer, the segments extending from appears in the multifunction display. When you the vehicle in front and can bring your vehi‐
the current stored speed to the end of the confirm the message with %, display mes‐ cle to a standstill if necessary.
scale light up. If you have activated the per‐ sages no longer appear until you switch off the R Brakes your vehicle with up to 50 % of the
manent limiter and a speed is stored, the vehicle. The speed will only be displayed again maximum possible braking power. If greater
segments extending up to the stored speed once the vehicle has been restarted. deceleration performance is required, a vis‐
light up. The permanent limiter does not switch to pas‐ ual and acoustic warning is given and you
% If you perform a kickdown, the variable lim‐ sive mode even during kickdown and the driven must then intervene yourself.
iter is switched to passive mode. The varia‐ speed remains below the set speed. R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack‐
ble limiter is operational again once the age, Parking Pilot and COMAND Online:
speed drops below the stored speed. Setting the speed limit for winter tyres
Multimedia system: When driving in stop-start traffic, the driver is
% If you brake, deactivate ESP® or if ESP® , Vehicle . î Vehicle settings . Win-
supported by an extended, automatic restart
intervenes, cruise control is deactivated. The in traffic jams.
variable limiter is not deactivated. ter tyres limit
R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack‐
When you switch off the vehicle, the last # Select the speed or deactivate the function.
age: Responds in urban speed ranges to sta‐
speed stored is cleared. tionary vehicles (except bicycles, motorcy‐
Permanent limiter Distance Pilot DISTRONIC cles and pedestrians) if conditions are suffi‐
If you wish to limit the speed permanently to a cient to enable detection.
Function of Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
specific value (e.g. for driving on winter tyres), If you fail to adapt your driving style, Distance
you can set this speed with the permanent lim‐ Distance Pilot DISTRONIC:
Pilot DISTRONIC can neither reduce the risk of
iter. R Maintains the set speed and accelerates or an accident nor override the laws of physics.
You do this by limiting the speed to a value decelerates the vehicle if the distance from Distance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot take into
between 160 km/h and 240 km/h in the multi‐ the vehicle in front permits. account road, weather or traffic conditions. Dis‐
media system (→ page 202). tance Pilot DISTRONIC is only an aid. You are
 Driving and parking 203

responsible for the distance to the vehicle in Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Pack‐ R If the driven speed drops below the stored
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time age: In conjunction with navigation systems, Dis‐ speed.
and for staying in lane. tance Pilot DISTRONIC prevents prohibited over‐ R If the traffic situation in the overtaking lane
If all activation conditions are met, you can acti‐ taking on the right at speeds over 80 km/h in permits a safe lane change.
vate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC during a journey right-hand traffic and overtaking on the left in
or while stationary. When Distance Pilot left-hand traffic on motorways and high-speed Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package
DISTRONIC is activated, a speed is stored which major roads. and Traffic Sign Assist: Distance Pilot
the driver can increase or reduce at any time. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC uses information from DISTRONIC also has the Speed Limit Pilot func‐
The speed can be adjusted between 20 km/h the navigation system to respond to certain traf‐ tion. This function can be configured in the mul‐
and 200 km/h. fic situations: timedia system. If a change in the speed limit is
detected and Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activa‐
Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Pack‐ R Roundabouts ted, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC assumes this new
age: The speed can be adjusted between R T junctions speed.
20 km/h and 210 km/h.
R Motorway exits The driven speed is adapted when the vehicle is
Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package, level with the traffic signs. In the case of signs
R Tollbooth
Parking Pilot and COMAND Online: Up to 30 indicating entry into an urban area, the speed is
seconds after stopping, the vehicle automatically Even if the vehicle in front leaves the detection adapted beforehand. The speed limit display in
follows the vehicle ahead without the interven‐ range in these situations, Distance Pilot the Instrument Display is always updated when
tion of the driver. This is only possible if the vehi‐ DISTRONIC temporarily maintains the current the vehicle is level with the traffic sign.
cle is travelling on a motorway or a high-speed driving speed and does not accelerate.
major road. If an obstacle is detected in front of If the Distance Pilot DISTRONIC has been put
If you activate the turn signal indicator to change into passive mode by pressing the accelerator
the vehicle during the driving-off procedure, a lanes, the vehicle will accelerate more briskly to
takeover warning is given. Acceleration is pedal, only speed limits which are higher than
the set speed under the following conditions: the set speed are adopted.
reduced, the driver is given a visual and acoustic
warning and must stop the vehicle before reach‐ R Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated.
ing the obstacle or take evasive action. R If the driving speed is higher than 70 km/h.
204 Driving and parking

Pulling the cruise control lever will set the dis‐ The system may be impaired or may not function Tips
played speed limit as the speed, provided that: in the following situations: Pay particular attention in the following traffic
R The Speed Limit Pilot has been activated in R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is situations. In such situations, brake if necessary.
the multimedia system and glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is then deactivated:
R Distance Pilot DISTRONIC has been activa‐ light conditions. R When cornering, entering and exiting a bend.
ted. R If the windscreen in the area of the camera is R When not driving in the centre of the lane.
dirty, misted up, damaged or covered.
If no speed limit is displayed when the lever is R When other vehicles are changing lane.
operated, the speed set by the driver is adopted. R If the radar sensors are dirty or covered.
R If there are narrow vehicles.
Drive program Do not use Distance Pilot DISTRONIC in the fol‐ R If there are obstacles and stationary vehi‐
The DYNAMIC SELECT switch allows you to lowing situations: cles.
change the driving style of Distance Pilot R In road and traffic conditions which do not R If there are crossing vehicles, pedestrians,
DISTRONIC. Depending on which drive program allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. motorcyclists or cyclists.
is selected, the driving characteristics can be in heavy traffic or on winding roads.
geared towards fuel economy, comfort or R On slippery roads. Braking or accelerating
dynamic performance (→ page 168). can cause the drive wheels to lose traction
System limits and the vehicle could then skid.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is active in the R When there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
0 km/h to 200 km/h speed range. heavy rain or snow.
Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Pack‐ R In multi-storey car parks or at toll stations.
age: Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is active in the R On roads with steep uphill or downhill gradi‐
0 km/h to 210 km/h speed range. ents.
 Driving and parking 205

Display of Distance Pilot DISTRONIC in the the ç symbol is displayed cyclically when the
assistance graphic and in the speedometer vehicle is ready to pull away.
Vehicles with Speed Limit Pilot: If a speed
limit is automatically adopted, this is shown as
the stored speed with the ê symbol.
Operating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC

& WARNING Risk of accident if detection

function of Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is
impaired
1 Speed of vehicle ahead
2 Stored speed The Distance Pilot DISTRONIC does not
react:
1 Vehicle ahead Displays in the multifunction display R to people or animals
2 Distance indicator When activating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or
when changing the stored speed, the new stored R to stationary obstacles on the road, e.g.
3 Set specified distance
speed is shown for around five seconds in the stopped or parked vehicles (vehicles with‐
4 Own vehicle out the Driving Assistance Package)
ç multifunction display 70 km/h.
R to stationary obstacles on the road, e.g.
When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is active, the set
stored speed is displayed next to the ç sym‐ stopped or parked vehicles, if conditions
bol. When distance control is active, the symbol are not sufficient to enable detection
is shown in green. (vehicles with the Driving Assistance
Package)
Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Pack‐
R to oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic
age: On motorways or high-speed major roads
206 Driving and parking

As a result, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may & WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf‐ R If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactiva‐
neither give warnings nor intervene in such ficient deceleration by Distance Pilot ted with the cruise control lever, e.g. by a
situations. DISTRONIC vehicle occupant or from outside the
# Always carefully observe the traffic con‐ vehicle.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC brakes your vehi‐
ditions and be ready to brake at all cle with up to 50% of the maximum possible R If the electrics in the engine compart‐
times. braking power. If this deceleration is not suf‐ ment, the battery or the fuses are tam‐
ficient, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC alerts you pered with.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to limi‐ with a visual and acoustic warning. R If the battery is disconnected.
ted detectability of road users and traffic # Apply the brakes yourself in these situa‐ R If the vehicle is accelerated, e.g. by a
situations tions and try to take evasive action. vehicle occupant.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot always # Always deactivate Distance Pilot
clearly identify other road users and complex & WARNING Risk of accident due to Dis‐ DISTRONIC and secure the vehicle to
traffic situations. tance Pilot DISTRONIC still being activa‐ prevent it from rolling away before you
In these conditions, Distance Pilot ted when you leave the driver's seat leave the driver's seat.
DISTRONIC may: If you leave the driver's seat while the vehicle
R give an unnecessary warning and then is being braked by Distance Pilot DISTRONIC & WARNING Risk of accident due to
brake the vehicle only, it can roll away in the following situa‐ unknown stored speed
R neither give a warning nor intervene tions:
If you call up the stored speed and this is
R accelerate or brake unexpectedly R If there is a malfunction in the system or
lower than your current speed, the vehicle
in the power supply. decelerates.
# Continue driving with care and be ready
to brake, particularly if Distance Pilot If you do not know the stored speed, the
DISTRONIC warns you. vehicle could decelerate unexpectedly.
 Driving and parking 207

# Take into account the traffic situation Always carefully observe the traffic condi‐ Requirements:
before calling up the stored speed. tions and be ready to brake at all times. R The vehicle has been started.

# If the stored speed is not known, store R The electric parking brake is released.
the desired speed again. & WARNING Risk of accident due to Dis‐ R Parking Pilot is not being used to park the
tance Pilot DISTRONIC pulling away auto‐ vehicle or to exit from a parking space.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to unex‐ matically R ESP® is activated, but is not intervening.
pected acceleration by Distance Pilot If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC performs an R The transmission is in position h.
DISTRONIC automatic driving-off procedure, the vehicle R The driver's door, front passenger door and
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC no longer may accelerate unexpectedly.
the rear doors are closed.
detects a vehicle in front, it may unexpect‐ Where necessary, brake the vehicle yourself R The engine bonnet is closed.
edly accelerate to the speed stored. and take evasive action.
R This speed may be too high for a filter
lane or a slip road. & WARNING Risk of accident due to Speed
R If driving in the right lane, this speed may Limit Pilot adapting the vehicle's speed
be so high that you pass vehicles driving The speed adopted by the Speed Limit Pilot
on the left (in countries where traffic may be too high or incorrect in some individ‐
drives on the right). ual cases, such as:
R If driving in the left lane, this speed may R in the wet or in fog
be so high that you pass vehicles driving
R when towing a trailer
on the right (in countries where traffic
drives on the left). Ensure that the driven speed complies with
traffic regulations.
208 Driving and parking

# To call up stored speed 3.

# Or On vehicles with Driving Assistance
Package and Traffic Sign Assist: If Speed
Limit Pilot in the multimedia system and Dis‐
tance Pilot DISTRONIC are activated, the dis‐
played speed limit is adopted, if available 3.
# To deactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC 2.

# If the LIM indicator lamp is lit: to select Dis‐ # To reduce 6 or increase 7 the specified
tance Pilot DISTRONIC 1. distance from the vehicle in front.
# Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Pulling away with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
# To store current speed 3. Requirement
Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the A speed has been previously stored.
vehicle in front, but only up to the stored
# Remove your foot from the brake pedal.
speed.
# Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
or # To increase 4 or reduce 5 the speed. you 3.
 Driving and parking 209

or Collision warning R Speed Limit Pilot (→ page 202)

# Accelerate briefly. If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is unable to suffi‐
Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed ciently decelerate the vehicle in order to prevent Steering Pilot
to that of the vehicle in front. If no vehicle is it from approaching the vehicle in front, you will
detected in front, your vehicle accelerates to be warned visually and acoustically. An intermit‐ Function of Steering Pilot
the set speed. tent warning tone will then sound and the dis‐ Steering Pilot is only available for vehicles
tance warning lamp will light up in the instru‐ with the Driving Assistance Package.
Adopting the speed limit as the stored speed ment cluster. R Steering Pilot is operational at speeds up to
Requirements: # Brake immediately in order to increase the 210 km/h and helps you to stay in the centre
R Speed Limit Pilot is activated in the multime‐ distance from the vehicle in front. of the lane by means of moderate steering
dia system (→ page 241). or interventions.
R Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated. # Take evasive action provided it is safe to do R It uses as a reference the vehicle in front or
R The system detects a traffic sign indicating a so. the lane markings, depending on the driven
speed limit. speed.
R Steering Pilot requires you as the driver, to
# Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards Function of DRIVE PILOT
you 3. keep your hands on the steering wheel at all
The DRIVE PILOT function is available only times so that you are able to intervene at any
The displayed speed limit is adopted as the
on vehicles with the Driving Assistance time to correct the course of the vehicle and
stored speed. Your vehicle adapts its speed
package. keep it in lane.
to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to
the stored speed. If Speed Limit Pilot is acti‐ DRIVE PILOT includes the following driving and R Steering Pilot can be overridden at any time
vated, any detected changes in the speed driving safety systems: by steering the vehicle yourself.
limit are adopted by the system. R Steering Pilot with Active Lane Change Assist R If the system detects that there are no lane
(→ page 209) markings, it uses the vehicle ahead as a ref‐
R Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (→ page 202) erence up to a speed of 130 km/h.
210 Driving and parking

R When the system is actively steering, the R If the windscreen is dirty, misted up, dam‐ R When towing a trailer.
è symbol is shown in green in the multi‐ aged or covered, for instance by a sticker, in R If you actively change lane without switching
function display. the vicinity of the camera. on the turn signal indicator.
Steering Pilot system limits R If no, or several, unclear lane markings are R If you switch on the turn signal indicator and
Steering Pilot has a limited steering torque for present for one lane, e.g. in a construction the conditions for activating Active Lane
lateral guidance. In some cases, the steering area. Change Assist are not fulfilled.
intervention is not sufficient to keep the vehicle R If the lane markings are worn away, dark or
in the lane. covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow. Notes on Steering Pilot
Steering Pilot is only an aid. You are responsible
If detection of lane markings and vehicles ahead R If the distance to the vehicle in front is too for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehi‐
is impaired, Steering Pilot switches to passive small and the lane markings thus cannot be cle speed, for braking in good time and for stay‐
mode. The system provides no support in this detected. ing in lane. Before changing lanes, make sure
case. During the transition from the active to R If the lane markings change quickly, e.g. that the neighbouring lane is free (shoulder
passive status, the è symbol is shown as lanes branch off, cross one another or view).
enlarged and flashes yellow. Once the system is merge.
passive the è symbol is shown as grey in the Active Lane Change Assist
multifunction display. R If the road is narrow and winding.
% The availability of the following function is
The system may be impaired or may not function R If there are highly variable shade conditions country-dependent.
in the following situations: on the road.
Steering Pilot remains active even if the turn sig‐
R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi‐
R If there are obstacles such as traffic guid‐ nal indicator is switched on. Steering Pilot then
cient illumination of the road, or due to snow, ance posts on the lane or projecting out into assists the driver when changing lanes by apply‐
rain, fog or spray. the lane. ing steering torques to initiate the lane change.
R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, The system does not provide assistance in the
direct sunlight or reflection from other vehi‐ following conditions:
cles (e.g. if the road surface is wet). R On very sharp bends.
 Driving and parking 211

Assistance when changing lanes is provided if all message to remind you to take control of the
the following conditions are met: vehicle.
R You are driving on a motorway or high-speed The warning message does not appear or disap‐
multi-lane major road with multiple lanes in pears if one of the following conditions are met:
the direction of travel. R The driver steers the vehicle.
R The neighbouring lane is free and separated R The driver presses a steering wheel button or
by a broken lane marking. operates Touch Control.
R The driven speed is between 80 km/h and
180 km/h. Active Emergency Stop Assist
If the driver continues to ignore the acoustic
R The turn signal indicator is switched on for Steering and contact detection warning, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC reduces the
longer than two seconds. Steering Pilot requires you as the driver, to keep speed. If the driver still does not respond, the
If the system is impaired, Active Lane Change your hands on the steering wheel at all times so vehicle is decelerated in stages to a standstill.
Assist may be interrupted. If an interruption that you are able to intervene at any time to cor‐ The driver can cancel the deceleration at any
occurs, display 1 appears in the multifunction rect the course of the vehicle and keep it in lane. time by performing one of the following actions:
display along with a warning tone prompting you The driver must expect a change from active to
passive mode or vice versa at any time. R Steering
to take control of the vehicle.
If you are not steering yourself or if you take R Braking or accelerating
your hands off the steering wheel for a pro‐ R Pressing a steering wheel button or operat‐
longed period of time, the system will, depend‐ ing Touch Control
ing on the situation, first alert you with a visual R Activating or deactivating Steering Pilot or
warning. 1 appears in the multifunction display. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
If you are still not steering the vehicle yourself or
if you have not taken hold of the steering wheel, The driver must be ready to take control of the
a warning tone sounds in addition to the warning vehicle at any time.
212 Driving and parking

Activating Steering Pilot Information on Hill Start Assist System limits

The incline must not be greater than 30%.
Requirements: Hill Start Assist holds the vehicle when pulling
R ESP® must be switched on, but not interven‐ away on a hill under the following conditions: Activating/deactivating the HOLD function
ing. R Vehicles with automatic transmission:
R Distance Pilot DISTRONIC must be activated. The transmission is in position h or k. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to the
HOLD function being active when you
R The electric parking brake is released.
leave the vehicle
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury If you leave the vehicle while only the HOLD
caused by the vehicle rolling away function is braking the vehicle, the vehicle
can roll away in the following situations:
After a short time, Hill Start Assist no longer
holds the vehicle and it can roll away. R If there is a malfunction in the system or

# Therefore, swiftly move your foot from

in the power supply.
the brake pedal to the accelerator R If the HOLD function is deactivated by
pedal. Never attempt to leave the vehi‐ depressing the accelerator pedal or the
cle if it is being held by Hill Start Assist. brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
R If the electrics in the engine compart‐
ment, the battery or the fuses are tam‐
HOLD function pered with.
HOLD function R If the battery is disconnected.
The HOLD function holds the vehicle at a stand‐
still without requiring you to depress the brake
# Always deactivate the HOLD function
# If indicator lamp 1 is off: press button 2. and secure the vehicle against rolling
pedal, such as when pulling away on steep
slopes. away before leaving the vehicle.
 Driving and parking 213

* NOTE Damage from automatic braking Activating the HOLD function In the following situations, the vehicle is held by
# Depress the brake pedal and after a short the transmission position j or by the electric
If Active Brake Assist, Distance Pilot time depress further until the ë display parking brake:
DISTRONIC or the HOLD function is activa‐ appears in the multifunction display. R When the seat belt is unfastened and the
ted, the vehicle brakes automatically in cer‐ driver's door is opened.
# Release the brake pedal.
tain situations.
R When the engine is switched off.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate Deactivating the HOLD function
these systems in the following or similar sit‐ # Depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. R When there is a malfunction in the system or
uations: if the power supply is insufficient.
or
# During towing # Depress the brake pedal until the ë dis‐ Vehicles with manual transmission:
# In a car wash play disappears from the multifunction dis‐ The Brake immediately message may also
play. appear in the multifunction display:
Requirements: The HOLD function is deactivated in the follow‐ # Immediately depress the brake pedal firmly
R The vehicle is stationary. ing situations: until the warning message disappears.
R The driver's door is closed or the seat belt on R If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC has been activa‐ The HOLD function is deactivated.
the driver's side is fastened. ted.
R The engine is running or has been automati‐ A horn sounds at regular intervals if you turn off
R Vehicles with automatic transmission: the engine, remove your seat belt and open the
cally switched off by the ECO start/stop When transmission position j is selected.
function. driver's door while the HOLD function is activa‐
R When the vehicle is secured with the electric ted. If you attempt to lock the vehicle, the horn
R The electric parking brake is released. tone becomes louder. The vehicle cannot be
parking brake.
R Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is not activated. locked until you have deactivated the HOLD
R Vehicles with automatic transmission: function.
The transmission is in position h, k or i.
214 Driving and parking

% Once you have switched off the engine, you R The drive program selected reduce fuel consumption. The option of manually
cannot restart the engine until you have R Vehicle load adjusting the vehicle level is also available.
deactivated the HOLD function. AIR BODY CONTROL comprises:
The drive program can be adjusted using the
DYNAMIC SELECT switch. R Air suspension with variable spring rate
DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL R Automatic level control system
DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL has the following AIR BODY CONTROL R Speed-dependent lowering to reduce fuel
characteristics: consumption
R Variable damping characteristics
AIR BODY CONTROL function
R Manual level adjustment
AIR BODY CONTROL is an air suspension system
R Continual adjustment of the damping forces with variable damping for improved driving com‐ R ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System with
The damping characteristics adapt to the current fort. The all-round level control system ensures constant damping force adjustment)
operating and driving situation. the best possible suspension and constant R DYNAMIC SELECT switch and level button
ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle.
The damping is tuned individually for each wheel When driving at speed, the vehicle is lowered
and is affected by the following factors: automatically to improve driving safety and to
R The road surface conditions
 Driving and parking 215

Available suspension settings

Drive program Characteristics

C R Comfortable suspension tuning
(Comfort) R Normal level
R When driving at speeds above 125 km/h, the vehicle is lowered by 15 mm
R When driving at speeds below 80 km/h, the vehicle is raised again by 15 mm
E R Comfortable suspension tuning
(Economy) R The vehicle is lowered by 15 mm compared to the normal level
R The vehicle is not lowered any further if you are travelling at higher speeds
S R Firmer suspension tuning
(Sport) R The vehicle is lowered by 15 mm compared to the normal level
R The vehicle is not lowered any further if you are travelling at higher speeds
216 Driving and parking

Drive program Characteristics

All vehicles except All-Terrain R Even firmer suspension tuning
vehicles: S+ R The vehicle is lowered by 15 mm compared to the normal level
(Sport Plus) R The vehicle is not lowered any further if you are travelling at higher speeds
All-Terrain vehicles: AT R Suspension tuning for easily negotiable offroad terrain
(All-Terrain) R The vehicle is raised by 20 mm compared to the normal level
R When driving at speeds above 35 km/h, the vehicle is lowered by 20 mm
R When driving at speeds below 20 km/h, the vehicle is raised again

Setting the vehicle level # Always select as low a vehicle level as # Make sure no one is underneath the
possible and adapt your driving style vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of
& WARNING Risk of accident because accordingly. the wheel arches when you lower the
vehicle level is too high vehicle.
If you drive at a higher vehicle level, the driv‐ & WARNING Risk of entrapment from vehi‐
ing characteristics may be impaired due to cle lowering & WARNING Risk of entrapment from vehi‐
the higher vehicle centre of gravity. cle lowering
When lowering the vehicle, other people
The vehicle may tip over more quickly on a could become trapped if their limbs are Vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL or
bend, for example. between the vehicle body and the tyres or level control system: When you unload lug‐
underneath the vehicle. gage or leave the vehicle, the vehicle first
 Driving and parking 217

rises slightly and then returns to the set level Raising the vehicle Your selection is saved.
shortly afterwards. % In drive program All-Terrain, The vehicle
You or anyone else in the vicinity of the cannot be raised further by using button 1.
wheel arches or the underbody could thus The vehicle is lowered again in the following sit‐
become trapped. uations:
The vehicle can also be lowered after being R All vehicles except All-Terrain vehicles:
locked. When driving faster than 100 km/h.
# When leaving the vehicle, make sure R All vehicles except All-Terrain vehicles:
that nobody is in the vicinity of the When driving between 80 km/h and
wheel arches or the underbody. 100 km/h for approximately three minutes.
R All-Terrain vehicles: When driving faster
Requirements: than 35 km/h.
R The vehicle's engine must be switched on.
R After selecting a drive program using the
R All vehicles except All-Terrain vehicles:
DYNAMIC SELECT switch.
The vehicle must not be moving faster than
60 km/h. The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the last
R All-Terrain vehicles: The vehicle must not be # Press button 1. active drive program.
moving faster than 35 km/h. Indicator lamp 2 lights up. Lowering the vehicle
All vehicles except All-Terrain vehicles: # Press button 1.
The vehicle is raised by 25 mm compared to Indicator lamp 2 goes out. The vehicle is
the normal level. adjusted to the height of the last active drive
All-Terrain vehicles: The vehicle is raised by program.
20 mm compared to the normal level.
218 Driving and parking

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and

parking in/exiting parking spaces.
Functions of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
In the standard setting, an intermittent warning
tone sounds from a distance of approximately
0.3 m to an obstacle. A continuous tone sounds
from a distance of approximately 0.2 m. You can
set the warning tone in the multimedia system
so that it will sound earlier at a greater distance
of approximately 1.0 m (→ page 220).
If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated,
Parking Pilot is unavailable. Vehicles with Parking Pilot and reversing cam‐
era
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display in the
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic multimedia system
parking assistance system with ultrasound. It If Parking Pilot is deactivated and an obstacle is
monitors the area around your vehicle using six detected in the path of the vehicle, a pop-up win‐
sensors 1 in the front bumper and six sensors dow for Parking Assist PARKTRONIC 1 appears
in the rear bumper. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC in the multimedia system at speeds up to
indicates visually and audibly the distance approximately 10 km/h.
between your vehicle and an object.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is
not a substitute for your attention to the sur‐
roundings. The responsibility for safe manoeu‐
vring and parking remains with you. Make sure Vehicles with Parking Pilot and 360° Camera
that there are no persons, animals or objects in
 Driving and parking 219

System limitations the sensors in the front and rear bumper must
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not necessa‐ detect the object while you are driving past it.
rily take into account the following obstacles: During the parking procedure or manoeuvring,
R Obstacles below the detection range, e.g. objects are detected as the vehicle drives past.
persons, animals or objects. If you steer in the direction of a detected obsta‐
cle and there is a risk of a lateral collision, a
R Obstacles above the detection range, e.g.
warning is issued. The lateral segments light up
overhanging loads, overhangs or loading orange or red, depending on the distance to the
ramps of lorries. obstacle.
The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and slush.
Otherwise, they may not function correctly. Colour Lateral distance in cm 1 Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only opera‐
Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to tional in the front and rear
scratch or damage them. Red < 30
2 Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational
Vehicles with trailer hitch: Parking Assist Orange 30 - 60 and can also warn the driver about obstacles
PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear zone at the side of the vehicle
when you establish an electrical connection In order for lateral front or rear segments to be 3 Obstacle detected at the front right (orange)
between your vehicle and a trailer. displayed, the vehicle must first travel a distance and rear (red)
of at least half of the vehicle length. Once the
Passive side impact protection vehicle has travelled the length of the vehicle, all When you switch off the ignition, the stored
Passive side impact protection is an additional of the lateral front and rear segments can be dis‐ obstacles are deleted. After the engine is restar‐
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC function which played. ted, obstacles must be detected again, before a
warns the driver about obstacles at the side of new warning can be issued.
the vehicle. A warning is issued when obstacles
are detected between the front and rear detec‐
tion range. In order for an object to be detected,
220 Driving and parking

System limitations Adjusting the warning tones of Parking

The system limitations for Parking Assist Assist PARKTRONIC
PARKTRONIC apply for passive side impact pro‐ Multimedia system:
tection. , Vehicle . k Assistance . Cam. &
Objects placed next to the vehicle, or pedes‐ Parking Pilot . Set warning tone
trians who approach the side of the vehicle will
not be detected. Adjusting the volume of the warning tones
# Select Warning tone volume.
Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC
# Adjust the value.

* NOTE Risk of an accident from objects Adjusting the pitch of the warning tones
at close range
# Select Warning tone pitch.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect # Adjust the value.
certain objects at close range.
# When parking the vehicle, pay particular Specifying the starting point for the warning
attention to any objects which are tones
# Press button 2. You can specify whether the Parking Assist
above or below the sensors, e.g. flower‐
pots or drawbars. The vehicle or other % Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the PARKTRONIC warning tones should commence
objects could otherwise be damaged. button may also be located in the centre when the vehicle is further away from an obsta‐
console. cle.
If indicator lamp 1 is not lit, Parking Assist % Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically # Select Warn early.
PARKTRONIC is active. If the indicator lamp is lit activated when the vehicle is started. # Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
or the é symbol appears in the multifunction
display, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not
active.
 Driving and parking 221

Activating/deactivating audio fadeout Reversing camera you to orientate yourself and to avoid obstacles
You can specify whether the volume of a media when reversing.
Function of the reversing camera
source in the multimedia system is to be The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not a
reduced when Parking Assist PARKTRONIC gives substitute for your attention to the surroundings.
an audible warning. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and
# Select Audio fadeout during warning tones. parking remains with you. Make sure that, when
# Activate O or deactivate ª the function. parking or manoeuvring, there are no persons,
animals or other objects in the manoeuvring
area.
You can select from the following views:
R Normal view
R Wide-angle view
R Trailer view

The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a

mirror image, as in the inside rearview mirror.
System limitations
If you have activated the function in the multime‐ The reversing camera will not function or will
dia system, the image from reversing camera 1 only partially function in the following situations:
is displayed in the multimedia system when R If the boot lid or tailgate is open.
reverse gear is selected. Dynamic guide lines R If there is heavy rain, snow or fog.
show the path the vehicle will take with the
R If the light conditions are poor, e.g. at night.
steering wheel in its current position. This helps
222 Driving and parking

R If the camera lens is obstructed, dirty or mis‐

ted up. Observe the notes on cleaning the
reversing camera (→ page 383).
R If the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this
case, have the camera position and setting
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
The field of vision and other functions of the
reversing camera may be restricted due to addi‐
tional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g.
licence plate bracket or bicycle rack).
Normal view 5 Yellow guide line at a distance of approx‐
Vehicles without Parking Pilot 1 Yellow guide line at a distance of approx‐ imately 1.0 m from the rear area
The following camera views are available in the imately 4.0 m from the rear area 6 Vehicle centre axis (locating aid)
multimedia system: 2 White guide line without turning the steering 7 Bumper
wheel, vehicle width including the outside 8 Red guide line at a distance of approximately
mirrors (static) 0.3 m from the rear area
3 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (surface area
driven over) depending on the current steer‐
ing wheel angle (dynamic)
4 Yellow lane marking the course the tyres will
take at the current steering wheel angle
(dynamic)
 Driving and parking 223

2 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 3 Red guide line at a distance of approximately
0.3 m to the ball head of the trailer hitch 0.3 m from the rear area
3 Ball head of the trailer hitch 4 Yellow warning display of Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC: obstacles are at a distance of
Vehicles with Parking Pilot between approximately 0.6 m and 1.0 m
The following camera views are available in the
5 Red warning display of Parking Assist
multimedia system:
PARKTRONIC: obstacles are very close
(approximately 0.3 m or less)
6 Orange warning display of Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC: obstacles are a medium dis‐
Wide-angle view tance away (between approximately 0.3 m
and 0.6 m)
% If the entire system fails, the inner segments
of the warning display are shown in red. The
indicator lamp on the PARKTRONIC button
lights up and the é symbol appears in
the multifunction display.
Normal view If the system fails in the rear:
1 Yellow lane marking the course the tyres will R the rear segments are shown in red when
take at the current steering wheel angle reversing.
(dynamic) R the rear segments are hidden when driv‐
Trailer view 2 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (surface area ing forwards.
1 Yellow guide line, locating aid driven over) depending on the current steer‐
ing wheel angle (dynamic)
224 Driving and parking

When Parking Pilot is active, the lanes are The 360° Camera is only an aid. It is not a sub‐
displayed in green. stitute for your attention to the surroundings.
If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated, The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and
the warning display fades out. parking remains with you. Make sure that there
are no persons, animals or objects in the
manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and park‐
ing in parking spaces.
The system evaluates images from the following
cameras:
R Reversing camera
Trailer view R Front camera
1 Yellow guide line, locating aid
R Two side cameras in the outside mirrors
2 Red guide line at a distance of approximately
0.3 m to the ball head of the trailer hitch Views of the 360° Camera
Wide-angle view 3 Ball head of the trailer hitch You can select from different views:

360° Camera
Function of the 360° Camera
The 360° Camera is a system that consists of
four cameras. The cameras cover the immediate
vehicle surroundings. The system assists you,
e.g. when parking or at exits with reduced visibil‐
ity.
 Driving and parking 225

Top view When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational

and no object is detected, the segments of the
warning display are shown in grey.
% If the entire system fails, the inner segments
of the warning display are shown in red. The
indicator lamp on the PARKTRONIC button
lights up and the é symbol appears in
the multifunction display.
If the system fails at the rear:
R the rear segments are shown in red when
1 Wide-angle view, front reversing.
2 Top view with image from the front camera R the rear segments are hidden when driv‐
1 Lane indicating the route the vehicle will
3 Top view with images from the side cameras ing forwards.
take with the steering wheel in its current
in the outside mirrors position If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated,
4 Wide-angle view, rear 2 Yellow warning display of Parking Assist the warning display fades out.
5 Top view with image from the reversing cam‐ PARKTRONIC: obstacles at a distance of
era approximately 1.0 m or less
6 Top view with trailer view 3 Your vehicle from above
If the distance to the object lessens, the colour
of the warning display changes 2. From a dis‐
tance of approximately 0.6 m the warning dis‐
play is shown in orange. From a distance of
approximately 0.3 m the warning display is
shown in red.
226 Driving and parking

Guide lines The guide lines in the multimedia system dis‐ On vehicles with height-adjustable suspension or
play show the distances to your vehicle. The if the vehicle is carrying a heavy load, leaving the
distances only apply to road level. In trailer standard height can result in inaccuracies in the
mode, the guide lines are shown at the level guide lines and in the display of the generated
of the trailer hitch. images, depending on technical conditions.
System limitations The field of vision and other functions of the
camera system may be restricted due to addi‐
The 360° Camera will not function or will only tional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g.
partially function in the following situations: licence plate bracket, bicycle rack).
R If the doors are open.
See the notes on cleaning the 360° Camera
R The side mirrors are folded in. (→ page 383).
1 Yellow lane marking the course the tyres will R If the boot lid or tailgate is open.
Selecting a view for the 360° Camera
take at the current steering wheel angle R If there is heavy rain, snow or fog. The Auto reversing camera function is selected
(dynamic) R If the light conditions are poor, e.g. at night. in the multimedia system.
2 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur‐ R If the camera lens is obstructed, dirty or mis‐ # Engage reverse gear.
face) depending on the current steering ted up. # In the multimedia system, select the desired
wheel angle (dynamic)
R If the vehicle components in which the cam‐ view.
3 Red guide line at a distance of approximately
eras are fitted are damaged. In this event, Switching reversing camera automatic mode
0.3 m from the rear area
have the camera position and setting on/off
4 Mark at a distance of approx. 1.0 m checked at a qualified specialist workshop. The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not a
% When Parking Pilot is active, the lanes are Do not use the 360° Camera under such circum‐ substitute for your attention to the surroundings.
displayed in green. stances. You could otherwise injure others or The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and
collide with objects when parking the vehicle. parking remains with you. Make sure that no
 Driving and parking 227

persons, animals or objects etc. are in the # Navigate downwards twice. The parking space and, if necessary, the parking
manoeuvring range. Pay attention to your sur‐ The Favourites menu appears. direction can be selected as desired. Parking
roundings and be ready to brake at all times. # Select New favourite. Pilot calculates a suitable vehicle path and
Multimedia system: assists you in the parking and exiting procedure.
# Select Vehicle.
, Vehicle . k Assistance . Parking Vehicles with automatic transmission: Park‐
# Select Camera. ing Pilot changes gear, accelerates, brakes and
Pilot . Auto reversing camera
steers the vehicle.
# Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
Parking Pilot Vehicles with manual transmission: Parking
Opening the camera cover of the reversing Function of Parking Pilot Pilot supports you by intervening actively in the
camera Parking Pilot is an electronic parking assistance steering.
Multimedia system: system which uses ultrasound and is automati‐ % The active brake application and automatic
, Vehicle . k Assistance . Parking cally activated during forward travel. The system gear change is only available on vehicles
Pilot is operational at speeds of up to approximately with automatic transmission.
# Select Open camera cover. 35 km/h. When all the conditions are fulfilled, Parking Pilot is only an aid. It is not a substitute
the c symbol appears in the multifunction for your attention to the surroundings. The
% The camera cover closes automatically after display and the system automatically searches
some time or after an ignition cycle. responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking
for and measures parking spaces on both sides remains with you. Make sure that no persons,
Assigning the camera as a favourite of the vehicle parallel and perpendicular to the animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring
You can call up the camera view directly in the direction of travel. If Parking Pilot is activated, range.
multimedia system by assigning it as a favourite. suitable parking spaces are displayed in the mul‐
timedia system. The ë symbol appears in the Parking Pilot is cancelled if, among other things,
# Press the ò button on the touchpad or one of the following actions is carried out:
multifunction display. The arrows show which
controller. side of the road free parking spaces are located. R You switch off Parking Assist PARKTRONIC.
The main functions are displayed.
R You switch off Parking Pilot.
228 Driving and parking

R You begin steering. & WARNING Risk of accident due to Do not use Parking Pilot, for example, in the fol‐
R You apply the parking brake. objects located above or below the lowing situations:
R Vehicles with automatic transmission: detection range of Parking Pilot R In extreme weather conditions such as ice or
You engage j. packed snow or in heavy rain.
If there are objects above or below the
detection range, the following situations may R If you are transporting a load that protrudes
R ESP® intervenes.
arise: beyond the vehicle.
Parking Pilot system limits R If the parking space is on a steep downhill or
R Parking Pilot may steer too early.
Objects located above or below the detection uphill gradient.
range of Parking Pilot are not detected when the R Vehicles with automatic transmis‐
sion: The vehicle may not stop in front of R If you have installed snow chains.
parking space is being measured. These are also
not taken into account when the parking these objects. Parking Pilot may also display parking spaces
manoeuvre is calculated, e.g. overhanging loads, that are not suitable for parking, e.g.:
This could cause a collision.
overhangs or loading ramps of lorries or the R Parking spaces where parking is prohibited.
boundaries of the parking space. In some cir‐ # In these situations, do not use Parking

cumstances, Parking Pilot may therefore guide Pilot. R Parking spaces on unsuitable surfaces.
you into the parking space prematurely. Parking Pilot will not assist you with parking
Snowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking
space being measured inaccurately. Parking spaces at right angles to the direction of travel
spaces that are partially occupied by trailer in the following situations:
drawbars might not be identified as such or be R If two parking spaces are located immedi‐
measured incorrectly. Only use Parking Pilot on ately next to each other.
level, high-grip ground. R If the parking space is directly next to a low
obstacle such as a low kerb.
 Driving and parking 229

Parking Pilot will not assist you with parking

spaces parallel or at right angles to the direction
of travel in the following situations:
R If the parking space is on a kerb.
R If the parking space is bordered by an obsta‐
cle, e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer.
Parking with Parking Pilot
% Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the
button may also be located at a different
position in the centre console. # If you have driven past a suitable parking
space: bring the vehicle to a standstill.
# Select desired parking space 4.
# Where necessary, select the parking direc‐
tion: forwards or reverse.
# Press button 1. Vehicle path 3 is shown, depending on the
The Parking Pilot view appears on the display selected parking space and parking direc‐
of the multimedia system. Area 2 displays tion.
detected parking spaces 4 and vehicle path # Confirm the selected parking space.
3.
% Vehicle path 3 shown on the multimedia
system display may differ from the actual
vehicle path.
230 Driving and parking

& WARNING Risk of accident due to vehi‐ before. Depending on the message or as Exiting a parking space with Parking Pilot
cle swinging out while parking or pulling required, engage forward or reverse gear.
Requirement:
out of a parking space You can only exit a parking space with Parking
On completion of the parking procedure, the
While parking or pulling out of a parking Parking Pilot finished, take control of the vehi- Pilot if you have previously parked the vehicle
space, the vehicle swings out and can drive cle. display message appears. Further manoeu‐ with Parking Pilot.
onto areas of the oncoming lane. vring may still be necessary. Please note that you are responsible for the vehi‐
This could cause you to collide with objects # After completion of the parking procedure, cle and surroundings during the entire parking
or other road users. safeguard the vehicle against rolling away. procedure.
# Pay attention to objects and other road When required by legal requirements or local # Start the vehicle.

users. conditions: turn the wheels towards the kerb.

# Where necessary, stop the vehicle or % Vehicles with automatic transmission:
cancel the parking procedure with Park‐ You can stop the vehicle and change the
ing Pilot. transmission position during the parking pro‐
cedure. The system then calculates a new
# If, for example, the Engage reverse gear mes‐ vehicle path. The parking procedure can
sage appears in the display of the multimedia then be continued. If no new vehicle path is
system: select the corresponding transmis‐ available, the transmission position will be
sion position. changed again. If the vehicle has not yet
Vehicles with automatic transmission: reached the parking space, the parking pro‐
The vehicle drives into the selected parking cedure will be cancelled, should a gear be
space. changed.
# Vehicles with manual transmission: Stop
as soon as Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
sounds the continuous warning tone, if not
 Driving and parking 231

# Pay attention to objects and other road

users.
# Where necessary, stop the vehicle or
cancel the parking procedure with Park‐
ing Pilot.
# If, for example, the Engage forward gear mes‐
sage appears in the display of the multimedia
system: select the corresponding transmis‐
sion position.
% The vehicle path shown on the multimedia Vehicles with automatic transmission:
system display may differ from the actual The vehicle exits of the parking space.
vehicle path. # Vehicles with manual transmission: Stop
# Confirm to start the exiting process. as soon as Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
sounds the continuous warning tone, if not
# Press button 1. & WARNING Risk of accident due to vehi‐ before. Depending on the message or as
The Parking Pilot view appears on the display cle swinging out while parking or pulling required, engage forward or reverse gear.
of the multimedia system. out of a parking space
As soon as the Parking Pilot finished, take con-
# If the vehicle has been parked at right angles While parking or pulling out of a parking trol of the vehicle. message appears in the dis‐
to the direction of travel: in area 2, select space, the vehicle swings out and can drive play of the multimedia system, you must acceler‐
direction of travel 3. onto areas of the oncoming lane. ate, brake, steer and change gears yourself
This could cause you to collide with objects again.
or other road users.
232 Driving and parking

Function of Remote Parking Pilot The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and R Parking in a garage (exploration mode).
% Remote Parking Pilot is an additional func‐ parking remains with you. Make sure that no R Exiting a garage (exploration mode).
tion of Parking Pilot. Comply with local traf‐ persons, animals or objects etc. are in the
fic laws and regulations when using Remote manoeuvring range. If technical problems arise during a parking
Parking Pilot on public roads. For the Remote Parking Pilot function, you manoeuvre (e.g. the permitted downhill gradient
require a mobile phone and the current Remote is exceeded), the following actions are per‐
Remote Parking Pilot supports the parking formed automatically:
manoeuvre while you are outside your vehicle. Parking Pilot app.
R The parking manoeuvre is cancelled.
Once you have selected a suitable parking The following operating systems are supported:
space, you then exit the vehicle and guide it into R The vehicle is brought to a standstill.
R Android™
the parking space using a suitable mobile phone. R Transmission position j is engaged.
R Apple® iOS
Remote Parking Pilot accelerates, brakes, steers R The vehicle is switched off.
the vehicle and changes gear. You can cancel the If the connection between the vehicle and the
parking manoeuvre at any time using your mobile phone is interrupted while a parking If the parking manoeuvre is cancelled, a corre‐
mobile phone. manoeuvre is being performed, the manoeuvre sponding message is displayed on the mobile
You can also use your mobile phone to move can be continued if the connection is re-estab‐ phone. You can then take over and manoeuvre
your vehicle backwards and forwards in the lished within about two minutes. the vehicle into the parking space yourself. Alter‐
straight-ahead position (exploration mode). This natively, you can move the vehicle back to its
The following scenarios are supported:
is useful, for example, if a garage is so narrow original position, if necessary.
R Parking in a parking space parallel to the
that it is difficult or impossible to get in and out Whilst the vehicle is being parked with Parking
of the vehicle after it has been parked. Parking direction of travel.
Pilot, you can interrupt the process to take con‐
Pilot automatically performs any minor steering R Parking in a parking space at right angles to trol of the vehicle with Remote Parking Pilot and
corrections that are required. the direction of travel. manoeuvre it into its final position.
Remote Parking Pilot is only an aid. It is not a R Exiting a parking space at right angles to the
substitute for your attention to the surroundings. direction of travel (exploration mode)
 Driving and parking 233

You can find further information in the operating Remote Parking Pilot is cancelled if, among Operating Remote Parking Pilot
instructions for the Remote Parking Pilot app other things, one of the following actions is car‐
http://www.mercedes.me. ried out: & WARNING Risk of accident due to
R You switch off Parking Pilot. objects located above or below the
System limitations detection range of Parking Pilot
Snowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking R You press a button on the key.
space being measured inaccurately or, in certain R ESP® intervenes.
If there are objects above or below the
cases, to connection problems with the mobile detection range, the following situations may
phone. Parking spaces that are partially occu‐ During the parking manoeuvre, you must not arise:
pied by trailer drawbars might not be identified stand more than approx. 3.0 m away from the R Parking Pilot may steer too early.
as such or be measured incorrectly. Only use vehicle. Otherwise, the procedure will be inter‐ R The vehicle may not stop in front of these
Parking Pilot on level, high-grip ground. The rupted and a corresponding message will be dis‐ objects.
parking space must be at least 0.60 m wider played on the mobile phone. If you move closer
than the vehicle without the outside mirrors. to the vehicle, you will be able to continue the This could cause a collision.
Do not use Remote Parking Pilot, for example, in procedure. # In these situations, do not use Parking
the following situations: Further information on cancelling the function Pilot.
R In extreme weather conditions such as ice or can be found in the operating instructions for
packed snow or in heavy rain. the Remote Parking Pilot app. Objects located above or below the detection
range of Parking Pilot are not detected when the
R If you are transporting a load that protrudes
parking space is being measured. These are also
beyond the vehicle. not taken into account when the parking
R If you have installed snow chains. manoeuvre is calculated, e.g. overhanging loads,
R If the parking space is on a downhill or uphill overhangs or loading ramps of lorries or the
incline. boundaries of the parking space. In some cir‐
cumstances, Parking Pilot may therefore guide
you into the parking space prematurely.
234 Driving and parking

& WARNING Danger due to insufficient Keep in mind that the system limits must be Parking
view of the vehicle surroundings observed at all times. If necessary, cancel the
parking manoeuvre.
If the vehicle is being parked with Remote Please note that you can only use Remote Park‐
Parking Pilot, the view of the vehicle's sur‐ ing Pilot if you have a valid driving licence.
roundings may be limited.
No persons or pets are permitted to remain in
# When you park the vehicle with Remote
the vehicle during the parking manoeuvre.
Parking Pilot, observe the following
points, for example: Always make sure that other road users can
R Make sure that you have the best access their vehicles.
view possible of the vehicle and the % Keep the key with you during the parking
vehicle's surroundings. manoeuvre. You can cancel the parking
R Make sure that no persons, animals manoeuvre and bring the vehicle to a stand‐
or objects are in the path of your still by pressing a button on the key.
vehicle. Requirement:
R Make sure that you maintain a suita‐ R The mobile phone and Parking Pilot are con‐
ble distance to the vehicle and that nected (→ page 236)
neither you nor other road users # Press button 1.
could be endangered. The Parking Pilot view appears on the display
R Be aware of the vehicle's surround‐ of the multimedia system. Area 2 displays
ings at all times and identify possi‐ detected parking spaces 4 and vehicle path
ble dangers. 3.
R If necessary, cancel the parking
process.
 Driving and parking 235

% Vehicle path 3 shown on the multimedia # Park the vehicle in the parking space using # Start the Remote Parking Pilot app.
system display may differ from the actual your mobile phone. # Park the vehicle in the parking space using
vehicle path. # After completion of the parking procedure, your mobile phone.
safeguard the vehicle against rolling away. # After completion of the parking procedure,
When required by legal requirements or local safeguard the vehicle against rolling away.
conditions: turn the wheels towards the kerb. When required by legal requirements or local
% On completion of the parking manoeuvre, conditions: turn the wheels towards the kerb.
the vehicle is automatically locked. % On completion of the parking manoeuvre,
% You can find further information in the oper‐ the vehicle is automatically locked.
ating instructions for the Remote Parking % You can find further information in the oper‐
Pilot app http://www.mercedes.me. ating instructions for the Remote Parking
Taking over a parking manoeuvre of Parking Pilot app http://www.mercedes.me.
Pilot Parking with exploration mode
# If you have driven past a suitable parking
space: bring the vehicle to a standstill. # Park the vehicle with Parking Pilot

Area 2 is activated. (→ page 229).

# When the vehicle is in the desired position,
# Select transmission position j.
select transmission position j.
# Select the desired parking space in area 2 Parking Pilot is ended and Remote Parking
and confirm. Pilot is activated.
# Exit the vehicle. # Exit the vehicle.
# Ensure that all vehicle doors, windows and # Ensure that all vehicle doors, windows and
the boot lid or the tailgate are closed. the boot lid or the tailgate are closed.
# Start the Remote Parking Pilot app.
236 Driving and parking

# Bring the vehicle to a standstill. Exiting a parking space with exploration # Start the Remote Parking Pilot app and
Area 2 is activated. mode search for the vehicle name.
# To activate Remote Parking Pilot, select # Unlock the vehicle. A connection prompt is displayed.
transmission position j. # Start the Remote Parking Pilot app within # Enter the PIN.
# Select your own vehicle 3 and confirm. one minute. De-authorising a mobile phone
# Exit the vehicle. # Using the mobile phone, drive the vehicle for‐ # Select ¥ Options .
# Ensure that all vehicle doors, windows and wards or backwards to the desired position.
# Select the mobile phone.
the boot lid or the tailgate are closed. % The outside mirrors are not automatically fol‐
# Select De-authorise.
# Start the Remote Parking Pilot app. ded out after exiting a parking space.
# Select Yes.
# Using the mobile phone, drive the vehicle for‐ Authorising and de-authorising a mobile The mobile phone is deleted from the list of
wards or backwards to the desired position. phone for Remote Parking Pilot devices.
Multimedia system:
The parking manoeuvre requires a minimum , Vehicle . k Assistance . Parking Drive Away Assist
parking space size. If clearances get smaller dur‐
ing the parking manoeuvre, e.g. if the vehicle is Pilot . Remote Parking Pilot % Drive Away Assist is only available for vehi‐
being driven into a garage, a message will cles with automatic transmission.
Authorising a new mobile phone
appear on the mobile phone. You will need to In order to be able to use the Remote Parking Drive Away Assist can reduce the severity of an
confirm the reduced clearances. Pilot function, you must authorise your mobile impact when pulling away. If an obstacle is
% On completion of the parking manoeuvre, phone. You can authorise up to six mobile detected in the direction of travel, the vehicle's
the vehicle is automatically locked. phones. speed is briefly reduced to approx. 2 km/h. If a
critical situation is detected, a symbol appears
% You can find further information in the oper‐ # Select Devices:.
on the camera image of the multimedia system.
ating instructions for the Remote Parking # Select Connect new device.
Pilot app http://www.mercedes.me. Remote Parking Pilot is ready to connect.
 Driving and parking 237

& WARNING Risk of accident caused by A risk of a collision may arise in the following sit‐ reversing out of a parking space. If a critical sit‐
limited detection performance of Drive uations, for example: uation is detected, a warning symbol appears on
Away Assist R If the driver mixes up the accelerator and the camera image of the multimedia system. If
brake pedals. the driver does not respond to the warning, the
Drive Away Assist cannot always clearly iden‐ vehicle's brakes can be applied automatically. To
tify objects and traffic situations. R If the wrong gear is selected.
do this, the function uses the radar sensors in
In such cases, Drive Away Assist might: The Drive Away Assist function is active under the bumper. The area adjacent to the vehicle is
R Warn you without reason and limit the the following conditions: continually monitored.
vehicle speed. R If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated. If the radar sensors are obstructed by vehicles
R Not warn you or not limit the vehicle R Every time the gear is changed to k or h
or other objects, detection is not possible.
speed. when the vehicle is at a standstill. The Cross Traffic Alert function is active under
R If the detected obstacle is less than approx.
the following conditions:
# Always pay careful attention to the traf‐
1.0 m away. R If Blind Spot Assist is activated.
fic situation; do not rely on Drive Away
Assist alone. R If the manoeuvring assistance function is R If the vehicle is reversing at walking pace.
# Be prepared to brake or swerve if nec‐ activated in the multimedia system. R If the manoeuvring assistance function is
essary. activated in the multimedia system.
Drive Away Assist is unavailable on inclines and
when driving with a trailer. Cross Traffic Alert is unavailable on inclines and
Drive Away Assist is only an aid. It is not a sub‐ when driving with a trailer.
stitute for your attention to the surroundings. Cross Traffic Alert
The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and % Also read the instructions on Blind Spot
parking remains with you. Make sure that no Assist (→ page 242).
persons, animals or objects etc. are in the
manoeuvring range. Vehicles with Blind Spot Assist: Drivers can
also be warned of any crossing traffic when
238 Driving and parking

Activating/deactivating manoeuvring assis‐ R Sensitive: higher system sensitivity. The You can have the following status information for
tance driver is warned earlier and the attention ATTENTION ASSIST displayed in the assistance
Multimedia system: level detected by ATTENTION ASSIST is adap‐ menu of the on-board computer:
, Vehicle . k Assistance . Parking ted accordingly. R The length of the journey since the last
Pilot . Manoeuvring assist. If drowsiness or increasing lapses in concentra‐ break.
# Switch the function on O or off ª. tion are detected, the ATTENTION ASSIST: Take R The attention level determined by ATTENTION
a break! warning appears in the Instrument Dis‐ ASSIST.
play. You can acknowledge the message and
ATTENTION ASSIST if ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the
take a break where necessary. If you do not take
a break and ATTENTION ASSIST continues to attention level and cannot issue a warning, the
Function of ATTENTION ASSIST
detect increasing lapses in concentration, you System suspended message appears.
ATTENTION ASSIST assists you on long, monoto‐
nous journeys, e.g. on motorways and trunk will be warned again after a minimum of If a warning is given in the Instrument Display,
roads. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects indicators 15 minutes. the multimedia system offers to search for a rest
of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration area. You can select a rest area and start naviga‐
on the part of the driver, it suggests taking a tion to this rest area. This function can be activa‐
break. ted and deactivated in the multimedia system.
ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It cannot If ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the é
always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration symbol appears in the assistance graphic in the
until too late. The system is not a substitute for a Instrument Display when the engine is running.
well-rested and attentive driver. On long jour‐ ATTENTION ASSIST is activated automatically
neys, take regular breaks in good time that allow when the engine is re-started. The last selected
for adequate recuperation. sensitivity level remains stored.
You can choose between two settings.
R Standard: normal system sensitivity
 Driving and parking 239

System limitations R If you unfasten your seat belt and open the Traffic Sign Assist
ATTENTION ASSIST is active in the 60 km/h to driver's door (e.g. change drivers or take a
Function of Traffic Sign Assist
200 km/h speed range. break).
The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is Activating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST
restricted, and warnings may be delayed or not Multimedia system:
occur at all in the following situations: , Vehicle . k Assistance . ATTEN-
R If you have been driving for less than 30
TION ASSIST
minutes.
R If the road condition is poor (uneven road Selection options
surface or potholes). # Select Standard, Sensitive or Off.

R If there is a strong side wind.

R If you adopt a sporty driving style (high cor‐
nering speeds or high rates of acceleration).
R If the Steering Pilot function of Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC is active.
R If the time has been set incorrectly.
R In active driving situations, if you change
lanes and vary your speed frequently. Traffic Sign Assist detects traffic signs with mul‐
tifunction camera 1 and assists you by display‐
The ATTENTION ASSIST tiredness or alertness ing detected speed limits and overtaking restric‐
assessment is deleted and restarted when con‐ tions in the instrument cluster. If the system
tinuing the journey in the following situations: detects that you are driving onto a section of
R If you switch off the engine. road in the wrong direction, it triggers a warning.
240 Driving and parking

The camera also detects traffic signs with a Display in the Instrument Display R When a village or town boundary is passed
restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. in which is stored in the digital map.
wet conditions).
Warning when the maximum permissible
speed is exceeded
The system can warn you if you unintentionally
exceed the maximum permissible speed. To do
this, you can specify in the multimedia system
by how much the maximum permissible speed
can be exceeded before a warning is issued. You
can specify whether the warning is to be just a
visual warning or an acoustic one as well.
1 Permissible speed
2 Permissible speed when there is a restriction Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all coun‐
3 Additional sign with restriction tries. If it is unavailable, display 1 is shown in
the speedometer.
% The illustration shows the Instrument Display
Warning when approaching pedestrian cross‐
in the Widescreen Cockpit
ings
Since Traffic Sign Assist also uses the data Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package:
stored in the navigation system, it can update The system can warn you if you approach a
the display in the following situations without pedestrian crossing with your vehicle. A mes‐
detecting traffic signs: sage appears in the instrument cluster.
R When the vehicle changes roads, e.g. motor‐
way exit or slip road.
 Driving and parking 241

R If the windscreen in the area of the multi‐ % If the Speed Limit Pilot has been activated,
function camera is dirty, or if the camera is the detected traffic signs are automatically
misted up, damaged or covered. displayed in the instrument cluster.
R If the traffic signs are hard to detect, e.g. due Displays in the instrument cluster
to dirt or snow, or because they are covered Detected traffic signs are displayed in the instru‐
or because of insufficient lighting. ment cluster.
R If the information in the navigation system's # Select Display in inst. cluster.
digital map is incorrect or out-of-date.
# Activate or deactivate the function.
R If the signs are ambiguous, e.g. traffic signs
on construction sites or in adjacent lanes. Activating or deactivating the warning when
The warning occurs if appropriate traffic signs or a speed limit is exceeded
road markings are recognised and pedestrians Setting Traffic Sign Assist The point at which a warning is given once a
are present in the danger zone. Multimedia system: speed is exceeded (warning threshold) can be
, Vehicle . k Assistance . Traffic set according to individual preferences.
System limitations
The system may be impaired or may not function Sign Assist # Select Speed limit warning.

in the following situations: Speed Limit Pilot for Distance Pilot # Select Visual & audible, Visual or None.
R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi‐ DISTRONIC
Setting a speed
cient illumination of the road, if there are Speed limitation is set automatically if
highly variable shade conditions or in rain, DISTRONIC is activated. # Select Warning threshold.
snow, fog or spray. # Select Speed Limit Pilot. # Set the desired speed.

R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, # Activate or deactivate the function.
direct sunlight or reflections from other vehi‐
cles.
242 Driving and parking

Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot & WARNING Risk of accident despite Blind R If narrow vehicles are within the monitoring
Assist Spot Assist range, e.g. bicycles.
Function of Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles Warnings may be issued in error when driving
Blind Spot Assist approaching and overtaking you at a greatly close to crash barriers or similar solid lane bor‐
Blind Spot Assist uses two lateral, rear-facing different speed. ders. Warnings may be interrupted when driving
radar sensors to monitor the area up to 40 m alongside long vehicles, for example lorries, for a
behind your vehicle and 3 m directly next to your As a result, Blind Spot Assist cannot warn prolonged time.
vehicle. drivers in this situation.
Blind Spot Assist is not operational when reverse
# Always pay careful attention to the traf‐
If a vehicle is detected at speeds above approx‐ gear is engaged.
imately 12 km/h and this vehicle subsequently fic situation and maintain a safe dis‐
enters the monitoring range directly next to your tance at the side of the vehicle. Brake application of Active Blind Spot Assist
vehicle, the warning lamp in the outside mirror If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a side
lights up red. Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist impact in the monitoring range, a course-cor‐
are only aids. They may fail to detect some vehi‐ recting brake application is carried out. This is
If a vehicle is detected close to your vehicle in cles and are no substitute for attentive driving. designed to help you avoid a collision.
the lateral monitoring range and you switch on Always ensure that there is sufficient distance to
the turn signal indicator in the corresponding The course-correcting brake application is availa‐
the side for other road users and obstacles. ble in the speed range between approximately
direction, a warning tone sounds once. The red
warning lamp in the outside mirror flashes. If the System limitations 30 km/h and 200 km/h.
turn signal indicator remains on, all other detec‐ The detection capability of Blind Spot Assist can
ted vehicles are indicated only by the flashing of & WARNING Risk of accident despite
be restricted in the following situations: brake application of Active Blind Spot
the red warning lamp. R If the sensors are dirty or covered. Assist
If you overtake a vehicle quickly, no warning is R When there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
given. A course-correcting brake application cannot
heavy rain, snow or spray. always prevent a collision.
 Driving and parking 243

# Always steer, brake or accelerate your‐ System limitations

self, especially if Active Blind Spot Either a course-correcting brake application
Assist warns you or makes a course- appropriate to the driving situation, or none at
correcting brake application. all, may occur in the following situations:
# Always maintain a safe distance at the R There are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash
sides. barriers, on both sides of your vehicle.
R A vehicle approaches too closely on the side.
& WARNING Risk of accident despite R You have adopted a sporty driving style with
Active Blind Spot Assist high cornering speeds.
Blind Spot Assist does not react to the fol‐ If a course-correcting brake application occurs, R You clearly brake or accelerate.
lowing: the red warning lamp flashes in the outside mir‐ R A driving safety system intervenes, such as
R Overtaking vehicles closely on the side, ror and a warning tone sounds. In addition, a dis‐
ESP® or Active Brake Assist.
placing them in the blind spot area play 1 indicating the danger of a side collision
appears in the multifunction display. R ESP® is deactivated.
R Vehicles approaching and overtaking you
In rare cases, the system may make an inappro‐ R A loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre is
at a very different speed
priate brake application. This brake application detected.
As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may nei‐ may be interrupted at any time if you steer R When driving with a trailer, the electrical con‐
ther give warnings nor intervene in such sit‐ slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate. nection to the trailer hitch has been correctly
uations. established.
# Always pay careful attention to the traf‐
fic situation and maintain a safe dis‐
tance at the side of the vehicle.
244 Driving and parking

Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist and a course-correcting brake application guides
Active Blind Spot Assist you back into your lane.
Function of Active Lane Keeping Assist
Multimedia system: You are warned by vibration pulses in the steer‐
, Vehicle . k Assistance . Blind ing wheel in the following circumstances:
Spot Assist R Active Lane Keeping Assist detects lane
# Activate O or deactivate ª the function. markings.
R A front wheel passes over the lane markings.

You will also be guided back into your lane by

means of a course-correcting brake application
if the following conditions are met:
R Active Lane Keeping Assist detects lane
markings on both sides.
R A front wheel drives over a solid lane mark‐
ing.
Whether a warning is issued and when this
occurs also depends on the selected sensitivity
setting (standard or adaptive).
Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in
front of your vehicle by means of multifunction If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active Lane
camera 1. It serves to protect you against unin‐ Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an
tentionally leaving your lane. You will be warned accident nor override the laws of physics. It can‐
by means of a vibration in the steering wheel not take into account road, weather or traffic
conditions. Active Lane Keeping Assist is only an
aid. You are responsible for the distance to the
 Driving and parking 245

vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in R You have adopted a sporty driving style with
good time and for staying in lane. high cornering speeds or high rates of accel‐
Vehicles with Lane Tracking package: If the eration.
lane markings are solid lines and you do not R ESP® is deactivated.
react to the warning, a lane-correcting brake R When driving with a trailer, the electrical con‐
application can bring the vehicle back into the nection to the trailer has been correctly
original lane. established.
Vehicles with Driving Assistance package or R If a loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre
Driving Assistance Plus package: If you do not has been detected and displayed.
react to the warning, a lane-correcting brake
application can bring the vehicle back into the If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, dis‐ The system may be impaired or may not function
original lane. In the case of a broken lane mark‐ play 1 appears in the multifunction display. in the following situations:
ing being detected, a brake application will only System limits R There is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient
be made if a vehicle has been detected in the illumination of the road, highly variable shade
adjacent lane. Oncoming vehicles, overtaking No lane-correcting brake application occurs in
the following situations: conditions, or due to rain, snow, fog or heavy
vehicles and vehicles in adjacent lanes can be spray.
detected. R You clearly and actively steer, brake or accel‐
R There is glare, e.g. from the sun, reflections
The brake application is available in the speed erate.
or oncoming traffic.
range between 60 km/h and 200 km/h. R You have switched on the turn signal indica‐
R There is dirt on the windscreen in the vicinity
tor.
of the multifunction camera or the camera is
R A driving safety system intervenes, such as misted up, damaged or obscured.
ESP®, Active Brake Assist or Active Blind R No or several, unclear lane markings are
Spot Assist.
present for one lane, e.g. in a construction
area.
246 Driving and parking

R The lane markings are worn, dark or covered. # Always steer, brake or accelerate your‐ In such cases, Lane Keeping Assist can:
R The distance to the vehicle in front is too self, especially if Active Lane Keeping R give an unnecessary warning
small and the lane markings thus cannot be Assist warns you or makes a lane-cor‐
R not give a warning
detected. recting brake application.
R The lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes # Always pay particular attention to the
branch off, cross one another or merge. & WARNING Risk of accident despite inter‐ traffic situation and keep within the
R The road is very narrow and winding. vention of Active Lane Keeping Assist lane, especially if Active Lane Keeping
Assist alerts you.
Vehicles with Driving Assistance package or Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect
Driving Assistance Plus package: Active Lane traffic conditions or road users. In very rare Requirement:
Keeping Assist uses radar sensors to monitor cases, the system may make an inappropri‐ The driving speed is at least 60 km/h.
several areas around the vehicle. If the radar ate brake application, e.g. after intentionally
sensors in the rear bumper are dirty or covered driving over a solid lane marking.
with snow, the system may be impaired or may The brake application can be interrupted at
not function. If an obstacle in the lane in which any time if you steer slightly in the opposite
you are driving has been detected, no lane-cor‐ direction.
recting brake application occurs. # Always make sure that there is suffi‐

Activating Active Lane Keeping Assist cient distance to the side for other traf‐
fic or obstacles.
& WARNING Risk of accident despite
Active Lane Keeping Assist warning & WARNING Risk of accident despite Lane
A lane-correcting brake application cannot Keeping Assist
always bring the vehicle back into the origi‐ Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly
nal lane. detect lane markings.
 Driving and parking 247

In both the standard and adaptive settings, no Trailer hitch

warning vibration occurs in the following situa‐
tions: Notes on trailer operation
R You have switched on the turn signal indica‐ Observe the following notes on the tongue
tor. weight:
R A driving safety system intervenes, such as R use a tongue weight as close as possible to
ABS, BAS or ESP®. the maximum tongue weight
R do not use a tongue weight that exceeds or
In the adaptive setting, there will also be no falls below the permissible tongue weight
warning vibration in the following situations:
R The vehicle is accelerated or braked consid‐ Do not exceed the following values:
erably. R permissible towing capacity
R You steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an R the permissible rear axle load of the towing
obstacle or change lane quickly. vehicle
R You cut the corner on a sharp bend. R the permissible gross mass of the towing
# Press button 2. vehicle
If indicator lamp 1 lights up, Lane Keeping Setting the sensitivity of Active Lane Keep‐
ing Assist R the permissible gross mass of the trailer
Assist is activated. When lane markings are
detected, the lines in the assistance graphic Multimedia system: R the maximum permissible speed of the trailer
are shown in white. , Vehicle . k Assistance . Act.
Make sure of the following before starting a jour‐
Lane Keep. Assist ney:
Sensitivity of Active Lane Keeping Assist
With the standard or adaptive setting, you can Selection options R the tyre pressure on the rear axle of the tow‐
influence when the warning vibration of Lane # Select Adaptive or Standard. ing vehicle is set for a maximum load
Keeping Assist takes place. R the headlamps are adjusted correctly
248 Driving and parking

Extending/retracting the ball neck fully elec‐ Requirements: # Pull switch 2.

trically Make sure of the following before retracting the Indicator lamp 1 flashes and the Trailer
ball neck fully electrically: coupling extending… display message
& WARNING Risk of accident due to the appears in the multifunction display.
R trailer cables or adapter plugs have been
ball neck not being engaged The ball neck extends fully electrically.
removed
If the ball neck is not engaged, the trailer R the range of movement is clear Wait until the ball neck has locked in place.
may come loose. The ball neck is securely locked into place
# Make sure that the ball neck securely Extending/retracting the ball neck fully elec‐
once indicator lamp 1 goes out.
engages and locks into place. trically
If the ball neck is not securely locked in
place, the Check trailer hitch lock display
* NOTE Damage to the fully-electric trailer message appears in the multifunction dis‐
hitch play.
The fully-electric trailer hitch could be
mechanically damaged by applying additional
pressure when the ball neck is being exten‐
ded or retracted.
# Do not make the ball neck extend/
retract faster by applying additional
pressure.
 Driving and parking 249

If the ball neck is not securely locked in place, # The doors or tailgate are not opened or
the Check trailer hitch lock display message closed.
appears in the multifunction display.
# Do not initiate the level control system
Observe any information which may be displayed and do not operate the DYNAMIC
in the instrument cluster: SELECT switch.
R warning and indicator lamps (→ page 501) # The vehicle is not locked or unlocked.
R display messages (→ page 445)
Requirements:
R Before coupling up the trailer, the ball neck
Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer
must extend fully electrically, securely
engage and lock into place.
& WARNING Risk of injury from the vehicle
level being changed R All-Terrain vehicles: couple the trailer in the
Comfort drive program. (→ page 169)
Vehicles with level control system: the vehi‐
R All-Terrain vehicles: ensure the vehicle is on
cle level may be changed unintentionally, e.g.
by other persons. If this happens when you a normal level.
# Pull switch 2 again.
Indicator lamp 1 flashes and the Trailer are coupling up or uncoupling a trailer, you Trailers with a 7-pin plug can be connected to
coupling extending… display message could become trapped. In addition, other the vehicle:
appears in the multifunction display. people could become trapped if their limbs
R adapter plug
are between the vehicle body and the tyres
The ball neck retracts fully electrically. R adapter cable
or underneath the vehicle.
Wait until the ball neck has locked in place. When coupling up or uncoupling a trailer,
The ball neck is securely locked into place once make sure that:
indicator lamp 1 goes out.
250 Driving and parking

In order for the trailer to be recognised by the # Remove the protective covering from the ball # Make sure that cable is always slack for ease
vehicle: head and store it in a safe place. of movement when cornering.
R the electrical connection must be set up cor‐ # Position the trailer on a level surface behind # Check the trailer lighting system. Push the
rectly the vehicle and couple it up to the vehicle. combination switch upwards/downwards
R the trailer lighting system must be in working and check whether the corresponding turn
order signal light on the trailer is flashing.
A display message may appear in the multifunc‐
The operation of the following systems depends tion display even if the trailer has been connec‐
on the trailer being connected correctly: ted correctly:
R ESP®
R LEDs have been installed on the trailer light‐
R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC ing system
R Parking Pilot R the current has fallen below the trailer light‐
R Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist ing system's minimum current (50 mA)
R Active Lane Keeping Assist % Accessories can be connected to the perma‐
# Open the socket cover. nent power supply and the power supply that
Coupling up a trailer is switched on via the ignition lock with max‐
# Insert the plug connector with lug 1 into
groove 3 on the socket. imum power consumptions of 180 W.
* NOTE Damage to the battery due to full
discharge # Turn bayonet coupling 2 clockwise to the
stop.
Charging the trailer battery using the power
supply of the trailer can damage the battery.
# Let the cover engage.
# Do not use the power supply to charge
# Secure the cable to the trailer with cable ties
the trailer battery. (if you are using an adapter cable).
 Driving and parking 251

Uncoupling a trailer the wheel arches when you disconnect Bicycle rack
the trailer cable.
& WARNING Risk of being crushed and & WARNING Risk of an accident when
becoming trapped when uncoupling a using the bicycle rack incorrectly
trailer * NOTE Damage to the rear bumper from
installing adapter cables or adapter plugs The bicycle rack may become detached from
When uncoupling a trailer with an engaged the vehicle in the following cases:
inertia-activated brake, your hand may The following parts could be damaged when
retracting the ball neck fully electrically: R the permissible load capacity of the
become trapped between the vehicle and the
trailer drawbar. R bumper
trailer hitch is exceeded.
# Do not uncouple trailers with an
R the bicycle rack is used incorrectly.
R adapter cable
engaged overrun brake. R the bicycle rack is secured to the ball
R adapter plug
neck beneath the ball head.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped # Always remove the adapter cable or
adapter plug before retracting the ball Observe the following for your own safety
when disconnecting the trailer cable and that of other road users:
neck fully electrically.
Vehicles with level control system: the R always adhere to the permissible load
vehicle lowers when the trailer cable is dis‐ # Safeguard the trailer against rolling away. capacity of the trailer hitch.
connected. # Disconnect the electrical connection R only use the bicycle rack to transport
This could result in you or other people between the vehicle and the trailer. bicycles.
becoming trapped if your or their limbs are # Uncouple the trailer. R always mount the bicycle rack properly by
between the vehicle body and the tyres or attaching to the ball head and the ball
underneath the vehicle. # Place the protective cover on the ball head.
neck guide pin, if possible.
# Make sure nobody is underneath the
vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of
252 Driving and parking

R when transporting four bicycles, always R when mounted on ball head 1 and guide pin
use bicycle racks which have additional 2, the maximum load capacity is 100 kg.
support on the ball neck guide pin. Up to four bicycles can be transported.
R only use bicycle racks approved by The load capacity is calculated from the weight
Mercedes-Benz. of the bicycle rack and the bicycle rack load.
R always observe the bicycle rack operating For bicycles weighing a total of between 75 kg
instructions. and 100 kg only use bicycle racks with addi‐
tional support on guide pin 2.
* NOTE Damage to or cracks on the trailer The vehicle's handling characteristics change
hitch due to unsuitable bicycle racks or when a bicycle rack is fitted. The vehicle:
bicycle racks being used incorrectly R is heavier

# Only use bicycle racks approved by R is restricted in its acceleration and gradeabil‐
Mercedes-Benz. ity
R has an increased braking distance
Trailer hitch (example with additional guide pins)
This can impair the vehicle's handling character‐
Depending on the design, up to four bicycles can istics. Adapt your driving style accordingly. Drive
be transported on the bicycle rack: carefully and maintain a safe distance.
R when mounted by attaching to ball head 1, When using a bicycle rack, set the tyre pressure
the maximum load capacity is 75 kg. Up to for maximum load on the rear axle of the vehicle.
three bicycles can be transported. Further information on the tyre pressure can be
found in the tyre pressure table (→ page 411).
 Driving and parking 253

Notes on loads impaired. In addition, the wind resistance and Observe the following information when
The larger the distance between the load's load on the trailer hitch increase. loading the bicycle rack:
centre of gravity and the ball head, the greater Number Total Max. dis‐ Max. dis‐
the load on the trailer hitch. of bicy‐ weight tance 1 tance 2
Observe the following notes: cles of bicy‐
R mount heavy bicycles as close to the vehicle cle rack
as possible. and load
R always distribute the load on the bicycle rack 3 Up to 420 mm 300 mm
as evenly as possible across the vehicle's 75 kg
longitudinal axis.
41 Up to 420 mm 400 mm
Mercedes-Benz recommends removing all 90 kg1
detachable parts from the bicycles, e.g. baskets, Distribution of the load on the bicycle rack
child seats or batteries, before loading them 41 Up to 420 mm 400 mm
1 Vertical distance between the centre of grav‐
onto the bicycle rack. This improves the wind 100 kg1
resistance and centre of gravity of the bicycle ity and ball head
rack. 2 Horizontal distance between centre of grav‐
ity and ball head
Always secure the bicycles to prevent them from
moving around and check they are secured at 3 Centre of gravity located on the vehicle's
regular intervals. centre axis
Do not use tarpaulins or other covers. The han‐
dling characteristics and rear view may be

1 When transporting four bicycles or with a total weight between 75 kg and 100 kg, always use bicycle racks with additional support on the trailer hitch guide pin.
254 Instrument Display and on-board computer

Instrument display overview Instrument display (standard) Instrument display in the widescreen cockpit

& WARNING Risk of accident due to an

instrument display malfunction
If the instrument display has failed or mal‐
functioned, you may not recognise function
restrictions applying to safety relevant sys‐
tems.
The operating safety of your vehicle may be
impaired.
# Drive on carefully.
1 Speedometer 1 Speedometer
# Have the vehicle checked immediately
at a qualified specialist workshop. 2 Multifunction display 2 Multifunction display
3 Rev counter 3 Rev counter
If the operating safety of your vehicle is 4 Coolant temperature display 4 Coolant temperature display
impaired, park the vehicle safely as soon as pos‐ 5 Fuel level and fuel filler flap location indica‐ 5 Fuel level and fuel filler flap location indica‐
sible. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. tor tor
The segments in speedometer 1 indicate the
system status for the following:
R Cruise control (→ page 199)
R Limiter (→ page 199)
R Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (→ page 202)
 Instrument Display and on-board computer 255

Vehicles with Traffic Sign Assist and wide‐ contact with hot gases or other escaping Overview of the buttons on the steering
screen cockpit: detected instructions and traf‐ operating fluids. wheel
fic signs appear in the speedometer
# Before opening the bonnet, allow the
(→ page 239).
engine to cool down.
* NOTE Engine damage due to excessively # In the event of a fire in the engine com‐
high engine speeds partment, keep the engine bonnet
closed and call the fire service.
The engine will be damaged if you drive with
the engine in the overrevving range.
# Do not drive with the engine in the over‐
revving range.

The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the

engine when the red band in rev counter 3 1 Button group:
(overrevving range) is reached. % Main menu and back button (on-board
computer)
During normal operating conditions, coolant
temperature display 4 may rise to 120 °C. 8 Switches sound off/on
W Increases the volume
& WARNING Danger of burns when open‐ X Decreases the volume
ing the bonnet 2 Touch Control (on-board computer)
If you open the engine bonnet when the 3 Touch Control (multimedia system)
engine has overheated or during a fire in the 4 Button group:
engine compartment, you could come into % Main menu and back button (multime‐
dia system)
256 Instrument Display and on-board computer

ó LINGUATRONIC or Voice Control Sys‐ You must observe the legal requirements for the R Radio
tem country in which you are currently driving when R Media
6 Makes/accepts a call operating the on-board computer.
R Telephone
~ Rejects/ends a call % The on-board computer displays appear in
the multifunction display (→ page 257). R Vehicles with an instrument display in
the widescreen cockpit: Content
Operating the on-board computer R HUD
R Vehicles with an instrument display in
& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐ the widescreen cockpit: Design
mation systems and communications
equipment The menus can be called up from the menu bar
in the multifunction display.
If you operate information and communica‐
tions equipment integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you will be distracted from the
traffic situation. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
The on-board computer is operated using Touch
# Only operate this equipment when the
Control 2 and back button 1 on the left-hand
traffic situation permits. side of the steering wheel.
# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
The following menus are available:
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
R Service
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary. R Assistance
R Trip # To call up the menu bar: press the back
button on the left.
R Navigation
 Instrument Display and on-board computer 257

# To scroll in the menu bar: swipe to the left Displays in the multifunction display é Parking Assist PARKTRONIC deactivated
or right on the left-hand Touch Control. ¯ Cruise control (→ page 199)
# To call up the menu or confirm the selec‐ È Limiter (→ page 199)
tion: press the left-hand Touch Control.
ç Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (→ page 209)
# To scroll through displays or lists in the (→ page 202)
menu: swipe upwards or downwards on the
a Steering Pilot (→ page 209)
left-hand Touch Control.
# To call up the submenu or confirm the è ECO start/stop function
selection: press the left-hand Touch Control. ë HOLD function (→ page 212)
# To exit the submenu: press the back button _ Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
on the left. (→ page 136)
1 Outside temperature ð Maximum permissible speed exceeded
If you are browsing a submenu and you press (for certain countries only)
and hold the back button on the left, the menu 2 Drive program
bar appears. 3 Transmission position (→ page 171)
4 Time
5 Display section
% Vehicles with the instrument display in
the widescreen cockpit:the position of the
displays deviates from those displayed here.
Further displays in the multifunction display:
Z Gearshift recommendation (→ page 173)
ë Parking Pilot activated
258 Instrument Display and on-board computer

Adjusting the instrument lighting Menus and submenus R Engine oil level
Functions in the Service menu of the on-
board computer Calling up the Assistance graphic display
On-board computer: On-board computer:
, Service , Assistance

# To select the function: swipe upwards or % Vehicles with the instrument display in
downwards on the left-hand side of Touch the widescreen cockpit: when you have
Control. the design set to Progressive, you can view
# Press the left-hand Touch Control. the assistance graphic in the left-hand por‐
tion of the instrument display.
Functions in the Service menu:
The following displays are available from the
R Message memory (→ page 445) Assistance graphic menu:
R AdBlue: Adblue® range R Assistance graphic
R Tyre pressure: R Attention level (→ page 238)
- Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning # To switch between the displays: swipe
Turn brightness control 1 up or down. system (→ page 417)
# upwards or downwards on the left-hand side
The lighting of the instrument display and in - Checking the tyre pressure with the tyre of Touch Control.
the controls in the vehicle interior is adjus‐ pressure monitoring system (→ page 413)
ted. - Restarting the tyre pressure monitoring
system (→ page 413)
R ASSYST PLUS: call up the service due date
(→ page 372)
 Instrument Display and on-board computer 259

R Grey radar waves next to vehicle: Blind Spot amount of fuel left in the fuel tank, the dis‐
Assist activated play shows a vehicle being refuelled instead
R Green radar waves next to vehicle: Blind Spot of the range.
Assist actived R ECO display (→ page 168)
R Display of Distance Pilot DISTRONIC R Trip computer From start and From reset
(→ page 202) R Digital speedometer
% Vehicles with an instrument display in
Calling up displays in the Trip menu the widescreen cockpit: the digital speed‐
On-board computer: ometer only appears in the Classic or Sport
, Trip display setting.
% Vehicles with the instrument display in
the widescreen cockpit: when you have set
the progressive display setting, you can view
information on the journey in the Content
Status displays in the Assistance graphic: menu.
R é: ATTENTION ASSIST deactivated # To select a display: swipe upwards or down‐
R æ: Active Brake Assist deactivated wards on the left-hand Touch Control.
R Light lane markings: Active Lane Keeping Displays in the Trip menu:
Assist activated R Standard display
R Green lane markings: Active Lane Keeping R Range and current fuel consumption Example: standard display
Assist actived A recuperation display is also available for 1 Trip distance
certain engines. If there is only a small 2 Total distance recorder
260 Instrument Display and on-board computer

view for the instrument display Calling up navigation instructions in the on-
(→ page 256). board computer
You can reset the values of the following func‐ On-board computer:
tions: , Navigation
R Trip distance
R Trip computer "From start" and "From reset"
R ECO display

# To select the function to be reset: swipe

upwards or downwards on the left-hand
Example: trip computer Touch Control.
1 Total distance recorder # Press the left-hand Touch Control.
2 Driving time # Select Yes.
3 Average speed
4 Average fuel consumption
# Press the left-hand Touch Control.
If you press and hold the left-hand side of Touch Example: no change of direction announced
Control, the function will be reset immediately. 1 Distance to the next destination
Resetting values in the Trip menu of the on-
board computer 2 Estimated arrival time
3 Distance to the next change of direction
On-board computer: 4 Current road
, Trip

% The spelling may differ in the main menu dis‐

played. Therefore, observe the menu over‐
 Instrument Display and on-board computer 261

R New route... or Calculating route…: a new # Press the left-hand Touch Control.
route is calculated. Route guidance is started.
R Road not mapped: the road is unknown, e.g. If route guidance has already been activated,
newly built roads. a request will appear asking whether you
R No route: no route could be calculated to the wish to end the current route guidance.
selected destination. # Select Yes.
R Off map: the map for the current location is # Press the left-hand Touch Control.
not available. Route guidance is started.
R Area of destination reached: you have
Example: change of direction announced reached the area of destination.
1 Road to which the change of direction leads R O: you have reached the destination or an
2 Distance to the change of direction intermediate destination.
3 Change-of-direction symbol # To exit the menu: press the back button on
4 Recommended lane and new lane during a the left.
change of direction (white) Vehicles with the COMAND Online multime‐
5 Possible lane dia system: you can also start the navigation to
6 Lane not recommended (dark grey) one of the recent destinations in the Navigation
menu:
Further possible displays in the Navigation # Press the left-hand Touch Control.
menu:
# To select the destination: swipe upwards or
R Direction of travel: display of direction of
downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.
travel and road currently being travelled on.
262 Instrument Display and on-board computer

Selecting radio stations using the on-board # To select a radio station: swipe upwards or Playing back media using the on-board com‐
computer downwards on the left-hand Touch Control. puter
On-board computer: Selecting the frequency range or station pre‐ On-board computer:
, Radio set , Media
# Press the left-hand Touch Control.

# To select the frequency range/station

preset: swipe upwards or downwards on the
left-hand Touch Control.
# Press the left-hand Touch Control.

1 Frequency range 1 Media source

2 Station 2 Current track and track number
3 Name of track 3 Name of artist
4 Name of artist 4 Name of album
When you select a station in the presets, the # To change tracks in the active media
preset appears next to the station name. When source: swipe upwards or downwards on the
you select a saved station in the frequency left-hand side of Touch Control.
range, an asterisk appears next to the station
name.
 Instrument Display and on-board computer 263

% This is how to change the channel on the On-board computer: tions (dialled, received and missed calls) are dis‐
media source TV. , Telephone played in the Telephone menu.
# To select the telephone number: swipe
Changing the media source
& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐ upwards or downwards on the left-hand
# Press the left-hand Touch Control.
mation systems and communications Touch Control.
# To select a media source: swipe upwards equipment # Press the left-hand Touch Control.
or downwards on the left-hand side of Touch If there is only one telephone number
If you operate information and communica‐
Control. saved to an entry: the telephone number is
tions equipment integrated in the vehicle
# Press the left-hand Touch Control. when driving, you will be distracted from the selected.
traffic situation. This could also cause you to # If there are multiple telephone numbers
Dialling telephone numbers using the on- lose control of the vehicle. saved to an entry: swipe upwards or down‐
board computer # Only operate this equipment when the wards on the left-hand Touch Control to
traffic situation permits. select the desired telephone number.
Requirements:
# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the # Press the left-hand Touch Control.
R Mobile phone connected to the multimedia
system vehicle whilst paying attention to road The telephone number is dialled.
and traffic conditions and operate the The following displays may appear instead of the
equipment with the vehicle stationary. telephone numbers dialled:
R Please wait...: the application is starting.
When telephoning, you must observe the legal
requirements for the country in which you are When a Bluetooth® connection to the mobile
currently driving. phone is not established, the menu for
Vehicles with the COMAND Online multime‐ authorising and connecting a mobile phone is
dia system: the most recent telephone connec‐ displayed in the multimedia system
(→ page 318).
264 Instrument Display and on-board computer

R Updating data...: the call list is being upda‐ You can select the following display content: Progressive style: the selected display con‐
ted. R Right display: select contents for the right- tent appears on the left-hand side of the
R Importing contacts...: the contacts from the hand display content (Progressive style) instrument display.
mobile phone or from a storage medium are R Assist. graphic (Progressive style) Contents for right-hand display contents
imported. (Progressive style)
R Power meter: power meter (Progressive
Accepting/rejecting a call style) # Select Right display and press the left-hand
When you receive a call, a message appears in R Revs: rev counter (Classic and Sport styles) side of Touch Control.
the Head-up-Display Incoming call. # Swipe upwards or downwards on the left-
R Power meter: power meter (Classic and
# Swipe upwards or downwards on the left-
Sport styles) hand side of Touch Control to select display
hand Touch Control and select 6 (Accept) content.
R Date (Progressive style)
or ~ (Reject). # Press the left-hand Touch Control.
# Press the left-hand Touch Control. R Navigation The selected display content appears on the
R ECO display right-hand side of the instrument display.
The call may be accepted/rejected using the
R Consumption
6 or ~ buttons on the steering wheel.
# To select display content: swipe upwards Adjusting the head-up display settings in the
on-board computer
Setting display content or downwards on the left-hand side of Touch
Control. On-board computer:
On-board computer: # Press the left-hand Touch Control. , HUD
, Content
Classic and Sport style: the selected display The following head-up display settings can be
% This function is only available for vehicles contents are shown in the right-hand instru‐ adjusted:
with a widescreen cockpit. ment display.
R Position
R Brightness
 Instrument Display and on-board computer 265

R Display content Setting designs

# To select the setting: swipe upwards or On-board computer
downwards on the left-hand Touch Control. , Design
# Press the left-hand Touch Control. % This function is only available for vehicles
# To adjust the value: swipe upwards or with a widescreen cockpit.
downwards on the left-hand Touch Control. The following designs may be selected:
# Press the left-hand Touch Control. R Sport
R Classic
R Progressive

# To select a design: swipe upwards or down‐

wards on the left-hand Touch Control.
# Press the left-hand Touch Control.
The instrument display is shown in the selec‐
1 Currently selected setting ted design.
2 Digital speedometer
3 Traffic Sign Assist Head-up Display
4 Navigation displays
Function of the Head-up-Display
The head-up display projects information from
the navigation system and the driver assistance
system above the cockpit into the driver's field
of vision.
266 Instrument Display and on-board computer

Display elements R the positioning of the display image # Press button 1.

R light conditions
R wet road surfaces
R objects on the display cover
R polarisation in sunglasses

Switching the head-up display on/off

1 Navigation messages
2 Current speed
3 Detected instructions and traffic signs
4 Set speed in the driver assistance system
(e.g. cruise control)
When you receive a call, a message appears in
the Head-up-Display 6 Incoming call.
System limits
The visibility is influenced by the following condi‐
tions:
R seat position
 LINGUATRONIC 267

Operating safety from the traffic situation. This could also Operation
cause you to lose control of the vehicle. Operating the multifunction steering wheel
& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐ Only operate this equipment when the vehi‐
mation systems and communications cle is stationary. LINGUATRONIC is operational approximately
equipment thirty seconds after the ignition is switched on.
If you operate information and communica‐ For your own safety, always observe the follow‐
tions equipment integrated in the vehicle ing points when operating mobile communica‐
when driving, you will be distracted from the tions equipment and especially your voice con‐
traffic situation. This could also cause you to trol system:
lose control of the vehicle. R Observe the legal requirements for the coun‐
# Only operate this equipment when the try in which you are driving.
traffic situation permits. R While driving, only operate mobile communi‐
# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the cations equipment and your voice control
vehicle whilst paying attention to road system when the traffic conditions permit it.
and traffic conditions and operate the You may otherwise be distracted from the
equipment with the vehicle stationary. traffic conditions and cause an accident, 1 8 Switches the sound off/on (ends LIN‐
injuring yourself and others. GUATRONIC)
& WARNING Risk of distraction from oper‐ R Do not use the voice control system in an 2 ó Starts LINGUATRONIC
ating mobile communication equipment emergency as your voice can change and 3 6 Makes/accepts a call
while the vehicle is in motion your telephone call can be unnecessarily 4 ~ Rejects/ends a call (ends LINGUA‐
delayed. TRONIC)
If you operate mobile communication equip‐
R Familiarise yourself with the voice control 5 W Increases the volume
ment when driving, you will be distracted
system functions before starting the journey. 6 X Decreases the volume
268 LINGUATRONIC

Voice prompting R Text messages

# To start or continue a dialogue: press the R Navigation
ó button on the multifunction steering R Address book
wheel. R Radio
You can say a command after an acoustic
signal. R Audio (memory card, Media Interface, USB
and Bluetooth® audio)
# To correct an entry: say the Correction
command. R TV
# To select an entry from the selection list: R Vehicle
say the line number or the contents. 1 Global commands
# To browse the selection list: say the Con- Command types 2 Application-specific commands
tinue or Back command. A distinction is made between the following On the display next to the active application,
# To interrupt the dialogue: say the Pause command types: varying global commands and the corresponding
command. R Global commands can be said at any time application-specific commands are displayed on
# To cancel the dialogue: say the Cancel and regardless of the current application, an autocue. This makes entry easier and sup‐
command. e.g. the Navigate to, Call or Text message to ports interactive operation. The list can be scrol‐
commands. led or it can be operated by speech or the con‐
Operable functions R Application-specific commands are only troller/touchpad.
available for the active application.
You can use the LINGUATRONIC voice control Entering numbers
system to operate the following equipment
regardless of the features: Entering numbers:
R Telephone R The numbers allowed are zero to nine.
 LINGUATRONIC 269

R Telephone numbers can be entered as single Using LINGUATRONIC effectively R prevent loud noises, e.g. the blower, from
digits. interfering while you make an entry.
Audible help functions
R say the voice tag with the same intonation
Changing the language setting You receive information and help for: when creating voice tags.
R optimal operation: say the Help LINGUA-
You can change the language of LINGUATRONIC If an address book entry voice tag is not rec‐
TRONIC command ognised:
via the system language settings. If the set sys‐
tem language is not supported by LINGUA‐ R current application: press the ó button
R only create sensible address book entries in
TRONIC, English will be selected. on the multifunction steering wheel and say the system/mobile phone, e.g. surname and
LINGUATRONIC is available in the following lan‐ the Help command first name in the correct field.
guages: R continued dialogue: say the Help command R do not use any abbreviations, unnecessary
R German
during a voice dialogue spaces or special characters.
R specific system: call up the help command
R English If a station list entry is not recognised:
for the desired system, e.g. Help telephone
R French R say the Read out station list command.
R Italian
Speech quality improvement
R Dutch
If LINGUATRONIC does not understand you: Essential commands
R Spanish
R only operate LINGUATRONIC from the driv‐
Switch commands
er's seat. Switch commands can be used to open certain
R say the commands coherently and clearly, applications. The command selection can be
but do not exaggerate the words. used regardless of the application that is cur‐
rently active.
270 LINGUATRONIC

Command Function
Navigation To switch to navigation mode
Map To switch to map display
Address book To switch to address book
Telephone To switch to telephone mode
Text message To switch to text messages
Radio To switch to radio mode
TV To switch to TV mode
Media To switch to media mode
USB To switch to USB
Memory card To switch to memory card
Internet application <Name> To start a Mercedes-Benz online application. The application must be called up by touch once prior
to use.
Mercedes-Benz Apps To switch to Mercedes-Benz Apps
Connect To switch to Internet mode
 LINGUATRONIC 271

Command Function
Vehicle To switch to vehicle settings
System settings To switch to system settings

Navigation commands With the navigation commands, you can enter

POIs or conventional addresses as well as make
important navigation settings.

Command Function
Navigate to <Address/POI/Contact> Universal search for destinations of all types. A search is also performed in the address book con‐
tacts, in the navigation database and on the Internet (POIs). The order of the details, e.g. city, street
or house number, can be changed.
Address in <Country> Destination entry in a desired country, e.g. address in France
POI <POI> Destination entry for a POI, e.g. POI Brandenburg Gate. A search is also performed in the navigation
database and on the Internet.
POI online search <POI> To conduct a POI search on the Internet only
Navigate to contact <Name> Destination entry to a contact in the address book
272 LINGUATRONIC

Command Function
Enter country To enter a country/town/district/street/junction/house number/postcode
Enter town
Enter district
Enter street
Enter junction
Enter house number
Enter postcode
Nearest restaurant To search for nearby restaurants, parking spaces and filling stations
Nearest car park
Nearest rest area with toilets
Nearest filling station
Last destinations To select a destination from the list of last entered destinations
Alternative routes To switch route guidance to another route
Start route guidance To start route guidance after entering a valid destination
Cancel route guidance To cancel route guidance
 LINGUATRONIC 273

Command Function
Guidance instructions on To switch the route guidance voice output on/off
Guidance instructions off
Show traffic map To switch the traffic map on/off
Hide traffic map
Switch on POI symbols To switch the POI symbols display on the map on/off
Switch off POI symbols

Telephone commands You can use the telephone commands to make

phone calls or search through the address book.

Command Function
Call <Name> To make a phone call. All address book names are available.
Search for contact <Name> To search for and display a contact. All address book names are available.
Last phone number To display the last call
Redial number To select the last phone number dialled
274 LINGUATRONIC

Radio and TV commands Radio and TV commands can also be used when
the radio or TV application runs in the back‐
ground.

Command Function
Station <Name> To call up receivable or saved stations
<Frequency> Direct frequency entry
Next station To switch to the next available station
Previous station
Save station Station is saved in the station list
Show station list To display the names of all receivable stations
Read out station list To listen to the names of all receivable stations
Switch on traffic announcement To switch the traffic information service on/off
Switch off traffic announcement
Radio info on To switch the current station information on/off
Radio info off
 LINGUATRONIC 275

Media player commands Media player commands can also be used when
the media player runs in the background.

Command Function
Play <Track> The names of all available tracks are accepted during the search
Media search <Track> The names of all available tracks are accepted during the search
Show all albums Available albums, artists, composers, genres, tracks or playlists are searched for
Show all artists
Show all composers
Show all genres
Show all tracks
Show all playlists
Next track To select the next track
Previous track To select the previous track
Random track list on To switch the random track list on/off
Random track list off

Message commands Text messages can be created, edited and lis‐

tened to using the message commands.
276 LINGUATRONIC

Command Function
Text message to <Name> To create a message. All address book names are available.
Reply To reply to a message
Forward text message To forward a message

Vehicle commands You can use the vehicle commands to directly

call up the corresponding menus for the vehicle
settings.

Command Function
Ambient light To display ambient light settings
Display settings To show display settings
Assistance settings To display assistance settings
Scent To display fragrancing settings
Energy flow To display energy flow settings
Ionisation To display ionisation settings
Climate control To display climate control settings
 LINGUATRONIC 277

Command Function
Light To display light settings
Massage To display massage settings
Engine data To display engine data
Seats To display seat adjustment settings
Consumption To display the consumption
Visualisation To display visualisation
278 Multimedia system

Overview and operation 6 Button group: Avoid touching the display.

Overview of the multimedia system ß Switches navigation on Observe the notes on cleaning.
$ Switches on the radio
ÕSwitches to media mode Observe the notes on caring for the interior
% Activates telephone mode (→ page 385).
Ø Sets vehicle functions Automatic temperature-controlled switch-
7 Touchpad off feature: if the temperature is too high, the
8 Control knob brightness is initially reduced automatically. The
media display may then switch off completely for
Adjusts volume and switches the sound a while.
on/off
9 % If you are wearing polarised sunglasses, it
Button Ü
may be difficult to read the media display.
Switches multimedia system on/off
A Controller
Touch Control 4, Touchpad 7 and Controller
A are the central control elements.

1 Switches the sound on/off Notes on the media display

2 Decreases the volume
* NOTE Scratching of the display
3 Increases the volume
4 Touch Control The display has a highly sensitive, high-gloss
5 Media display surface. There is a risk of it becoming
scratched.
 Multimedia system 279

Central controls overview Touch Control # To call up the menu list/favourites: hold
Operating Touch Control button 2.
# To move the digital map: swipe in any
direction.
Setting the sensitivity
Multimedia system:
, System . w Input . Touch Control

sensitivity
# Select Fast, Medium or Slow.

1 Touch Control
2 Controller
3 Touchpad

# To select a menu item: swipe up, down, left

or right on Touch Control 1.
# Press Touch Control 1.
# To open a list: press Touch Control 1.
# To close a list: press the 2 button.
280 Multimedia system

Operating the controller # Turn 3 left or right.

# Slide 1 left or right.
# Slide 4 up or down.
# Slide 2 diagonally.
# Press 7 briefly or press and hold.

Touchpad
Switching the touchpad on/off
Requirement:
The vehicle is equipped with a controller.
Multimedia system:
, System . w Input

# Switch Touchpad on O or off ª.

1 Touchpad
Operating the touchpad 2 © button, calls up main functions and
1 % button, to return to the previous dis‐
favourites
play (press briefly), to call up the main func‐ Requirement:
tions and favourites (press and hold) 3 D button, calls up the menu of the most
For vehicles with a controller: the touchpad is
2 ò button, to call up main functions and recently active media source
switched on (→ page 280).
favourites 4 % button, returns to the previous display
3 Controller (press briefly), calls up the main functions
and favourites (press and hold)
Controller operating options:
 Multimedia system 281

You can navigate in menus and lists via touch- Handwriting recognition: switching the read- # 1 ß button: switches navigation on
sensitive surface 1 by using a single-finger aloud function on/off # 2 $ button: switches the radio on
swipe. Multimedia system:
, System . õ Audio
# 3 Õ button: switches the audio source
# To select the menu item: swipe up, down,
on
left or right. # Switch Read out handwriting recognition on
# 4 % button: switches telephone mode
# Press touchpad 1. O or off ª. on
# To open or close lists: swipe left or right. Handwriting recognition: selecting an input # 5 Ø button: calls up vehicle functions
# To move the digital map: swipe in any language
# Select B. Alternatively:
direction.
# When the basic menu of a main function is
# Select an input language.
Use the following functions with a two-finger shown, press the % button.
swipe:
# To select a main function: swipe left or
# To call up main functions and favourites: Main functions
right on the touchpad.
swipe down with two fingers. Calling up the main functions # Press the touchpad.
# To zoom in and out of the map: move two
fingers together or apart. Calling up lists and menus on the multimedia
system
Setting the sensitivity
Multimedia system: Calling up a list
, System . w Input # Call up a main function (→ page 281).

# Select Touchpad sensitivity. # To open a list: swipe left on the touchpad.

# Select Fast, Medium or Slow.

The list is opened.
282 Multimedia system

# To select a menu item: swipe up or down R delete a favourite Adding a favourite

on the touchpad. R restore all favourites settings Adding a pre-defined favourite
# Press the touchpad.
Calling up favourites
# Press the © button.
Favourites The main functions are displayed.
Overview of favourites # Navigate downwards once.
Favourites offer you quick access to frequently Leaving the Favourites menu
used applications. It is possible to create 20
# Press the © button.
favourites in total.
The following functions are available:
R add pre-defined favourites from the follow‐
ing categories:
- Navigation
- Entertainment
- Telephone
- Connect
- Vehicle # Press the © button.
The main functions are displayed.
- System settings
R add your own favourites
# Navigate downwards twice.
The Favourites menu appears.
R rename a favourite
R move a favourite
 Multimedia system 283

# Select New favourite. # Select Rename. # To delete: select Clear.

The categories are displayed. # Enter characters. # Select Yes.
# Select a category. # To confirm the entry: select ¡. # To restore all favourites: select Reset all.
The favourites are displayed. A prompt appears.
# Select a favourite. Moving a favourite
# Press the © button. # Select Yes.
# Add a favourite at the desired position. The main functions are displayed. The favourites will restore to factory settings.
If a favourite has already been added at this
# Navigate downwards once.
position, it will be overwritten.
# Select a favourite. Switching the sound on/off
Adding your own favourite (example)
# Navigate downwards once.
# Select Vehicle.
The Favourites menu appears.
# Select Full screen: Consumption.
# Select Move.
# Press and hold the © button until the
# Move the favourite to the desired position.
favourites are displayed. If a favourite has already been added at this
# Add a favourite at the desired position. position, it will be overwritten.
Renaming a favourite Deleting a favourite
# Press the © button. # Press the © button.
The main functions are displayed. The main functions are displayed.
# Navigate downwards once. # Navigate downwards once.

# Select a favourite. # Select a favourite.

# Navigate downwards once. # Navigate downwards once.

The Favourites menu appears. The Favourites menu appears.
284 Multimedia system

# To switch off: press control knob 1. Adjusting the volume The volume of the navigation announce‐
The 8 symbol appears in the status line. ment changes in accordance with the vol‐
You will also hear traffic announcements and ume of the current media source.
navigation announcements even when the R during a telephone call
sound is muted. # Alternatively: select System.
# To switch on: change the media source or # Select Audio.
adjust the volume.
# Select volume settings.
# Set the volume.

Entering characters
Using the character input function
The following functions are available:
R selecting a character in the character bar
R writing a character on the touchpad
# Turn control knob 1. Character input can be started with a control
The volume of the current radio or media and resumed with another.
source is set. You can set the volume of
# On the Touch Control and controller:
other sound sources separately.
select a character in the character bar.
Adjust this in the following situations:
Depending on the destination entered, the
R during a traffic announcement following is available:
R during a navigation announcement R the full set of characters
 Multimedia system 285

R characters which are useful for the cur‐ Character input using the controller Ä To switch to special characters and sym‐
rent input string bols.
Example: renaming a favourite
Other characters are greyed out. X To switch to upper-case or lower-case let‐
# On the touchpad: Select a character in the ters.
character bar. B To change the language.
or
v Handwriting To switch to character entry
# Write the characters on the touch-sensitive on the touchpad.
surface of the touchpad.
Handwriting recognition supports you by % The available editing functions depend on
means of character suggestions and a read- the editing task, the language set and the
aloud function. character level.
Characters can be entered using the following # To confirm the entry: select ¡.
methods: # Calling up the "Renaming a favourite" func‐ Example: entering a destination (navigation)
R using a keyword search for a track or artist tion (→ page 283). # Enter a POI or address (→ page 295).
R connecting the mobile phone to the multime‐ # To enter a character: turn 3, slide 4
dia system by entering the passkey and press the controller. Entering characters on the touchpad
R entering a phone number The character is entered in the input line. Requirements:
R entering a web address Use the following entry functions: The touchpad is switched on (→ page 280).
£ To delete a character: press the control‐ The entered or selected character should be
ler. read out: the handwriting recognition read-aloud
To delete an entry: press and hold the function is switched on (→ page 281).
controller until the entire entry is deleted.
286 Multimedia system

Example: renaming a favourite # To delete a character: swipe left when the display area comprises the left-hand or right-
cursor is located in the input line. hand third of the display.
# To confirm the entry: press the touchpad. # Select Additional display area.
# To finish character entry: swipe upwards. The following display content can be selected:
or R Dynamic
# Press the % button. R Navigation map
Example: entering a destination (navigation) R Consumption
# Enter a POI or address (→ page 295). R Time and date

Display brightness
# Calling up the "Renaming a favourite" func‐ System settings # Select Display brightness.
tion (→ page 283). Display # Select a brightness value.

# To enter a character: use your finger to Configuring display settings Switching the display off/on
write characters on the touchpad. Multimedia system: # Off: select Display off.
The character is entered in the input line. If , System . G Display and styles
different interpretations are possible, charac‐ # On: press a button, e.g. %.
ter suggestions are displayed. Designs
Display design
# To select a character suggestion: turn the # Select Design.
# Select Day/night design.
controller. # Select Sport, Classic or Progressive.
# Select Automatic, Day design or Night
# Resume character input.
Additional display area design.
# To enter a space: swipe right when the cur‐ Depending on the vehicle, various items of addi‐
sor is located in the input line. tional information can be shown. The additional
 Multimedia system 287

Time and date Setting summer time Multimedia system:

The Automatic Summer Time and Summer Time , System . Time and date . Time set-
Setting the time and date automatically
options cannot be selected in all countries. ting
Multimedia system:
, System . Time and date . Automatic Multimedia system: # Set the hours.
, System . Time and date
time setting # Navigate to the right to set the minutes.

The correct time is required for the following Automatically # Set the minutes.
functions: # Switch Automatic Summer Time on O or off # Confirm changes when exiting the menu.
R route guidance with time-dependent traffic ª.
guidance The date is set automatically via GPS.
Manually
R calculation of expected time of arrival
# Deactivate ª Automatic Summer Time.
Bluetooth®
# Activate O or deactivate ª the function. # Select Summer Time.
Bluetooth® settings
Setting the time zone # Select On or Off.
Bluetooth® technology is a standard for short-
Multimedia system:
Setting the time and date format range wireless data transfer up to approximately
, System . Time and date . Time zone:
Multimedia system: 10 m. You can use Bluetooth® to connect your
A list of countries is displayed. , System . Time and date . Set format mobile phone to the multimedia system and use
# Select a country #. the following functions, for example:
# Set the date and time format #.
Depending on the country, time zones are R hands-free system with access to the follow‐
displayed. Setting the time manually ing options:
# Select a time zone. Requirement: - contacts (→ page 322)
The time zone set is displayed after Time The Automatic time setting function is deactiva‐ - call lists (→ page 324)
zone:. ted or is not supported in a time zone. - text messages (→ page 324)
288 Multimedia system

R Internet connection (→ page 339) The Wi-Fi connection is established with a Multimedia system:
R listening to music via Bluetooth® audio Wi-Fi-enabled device, e.g. to the customer's , System . ö Connectivity

(→ page 356) mobile phone or tablet PC.

R multimedia system as a Wi-Fi hotspot Activating/deactivating Wi-Fi
R transferring business cards (vCards) into the # Switch Wi-Fi on O or off ª.
vehicle Using this function, a tablet PC or notebook
for example can be connected. If Wi-Fi is deactivated ª, communication via
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue‐ Wi-Fi to all devices is interrupted. This also
tooth Special Interest Group (SIG) Inc. To establish a connection, you can use the fol‐ means that a connection to the HERMES
lowing methods: communication module cannot be estab‐
% Internet connection via Bluetooth® is not
R WPS PIN lished. Functions such as dynamic route
available in all countries. guidance with Live Traffic Information are
The connection to a secure Wi-Fi network is then unavailable.
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth® made via a PIN.
Multimedia system: Connecting the multimedia system with a
R WPS PBC
, System . ö Connectivity device via Wi-Fi
The connection to a secure Wi-Fi network is This function is available if a HERMES communi‐
# Activate O or deactivate ª Bluetooth®. made by pressing a button (push button). cation module is not installed.
R security key
The type of connection established must be
Wi-Fi The connection to a secure Wi-Fi network is selected on the multimedia system and on the
Wi-Fi connection overview made via a security key. device to be connected.
You can use Wi-Fi to establish a connection with Setting up Wi-Fi % The connection procedure may differ
a Wi-Fi network and to access the Internet or depending on the device. Follow the instruc‐
any other network device. Requirement: tions that are shown in the display. Further
The following connection options are available: The device to be connected supports one of the information (see the manufacturer's operat‐
three means of connection described. ing instructions).
R Wi-Fi connection
 Multimedia system 289

# Select Internet settings. # Have the security key displayed on the device Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot
# Select Search for Wi-Fi networks. to be connected (see the manufacturer's Multimedia system:
operating instructions). , System . ö Connectivity
# Via WPS PIN: highlight a Wi-Fi network in
# Enter this security key on the multimedia sys‐
the list. Configuring the multimedia system as a Wi-
tem.
# Select ¥ Connect via WPS PIN. Fi hotspot
# Confirm the entry by pressing ¡.
The multimedia system generates an eight- The type of connection established depends on
digit PIN. % All devices support a security key as a the device to be connected. The function must
# Enter this PIN on the device to be connected. means of connection. be supported by the multimedia system and by
the device to be connected. The type of connec‐
# Confirm the entry. Device has already been connected tion established must be selected on the multi‐
# By pressing a button: highlight a Wi-Fi net‐ # To automatically connect: highlight a Wi-Fi media system and on the device to be connec‐
work in the list. network in the list. ted.
# Select ¥ Connect via WPS PBC. # Activate O ¥ Connect automatically. # Select Set up hotspot.

# Select "Connect via WPS PBC" in the options # To connect: highlight a Wi-Fi network in the # Highlight Connect device to vehicle hotspot.
on the device to be connected. list. # To generate a WPS PIN: select ¥ Con-
# Press the WPS button on the device to be # Select ¥ Connect. nect using WPS PIN generation.
connected. The connection is established again. These # Enter the PIN shown in the multimedia sys‐
# Select Continue in the multimedia system. functions are possible when the device has tem display on the device to be connected
already been connected to the Wi-Fi network. and confirm.
# Using a security key: highlight a Wi-Fi net‐
work in the list. # Connect via WPS pin: select ¥ Con-

# Select ¥ Connect using security key. nect using WPS PIN input.
# Select Enter WPS PIN.
290 Multimedia system

# Enter the PIN that is shown on the external # Select Generate security key. Multimedia system:
device's display on the multimedia system. A connection will be established with the , System . COMAND Touch
# Select Continue. newly created security key.
Connecting a new device
# To connect by pressing a button: select # To save a security key: select Save.
When a new security key is saved, all existing # Select Authorise a new device.
¥ Connect via WPS PBC.
Wi-Fi connections are then disconnected. If # Select Connect new device.
# Press the push button on the device to be the Wi-Fi connections are being re-estab‐ A security key is displayed.
connected. lished, the new security key must be entered. # Enter the security key in the external device.
# Select Continue.
The Please start COMAND Touch on your
# To connect via a security key: select Con- COMAND Touch device and follow the instructions. The App
nect device to vehicle hotspot. is available in the App Store. message
A security key is displayed. Authorising a COMAND Touch device
appears
# Select the vehicle from the device to be con‐ Requirements: Selecting an already connected device
nected. The vehicle is displayed with the R The COMAND Touch App is installed on the
SSID MB Hotspot XXXXX. external device (e.g. tablet) which is to be # Select Authorise a new device.
used as a Rear Seat Entertainment unit. The devices already connected are displayed.
# Enter the security key which is shown in the
R Wi-Fi is activated (→ page 288) and the mul‐ # Select Continue using connected devices.
multimedia system display on the device to
be connected. timedia system is configured as a Wi-Fi Hot‐ The Please start COMAND Touch on your
spot (→ page 289). device and follow the instructions. The App
# Confirm the entry.
is available in the App Store. message
To generate a new security key: appears
# Select Set up hotspot.
# Select Generate security key.
 Multimedia system 291

Activating/deactivating the COMAND Touch % If you are using Arabic map data, the text R protecting your personal data against unwan‐
child safety lock information can also be shown in Arabic on ted export with PIN protection.
Multimedia system: the navigation map. To do so, select ‫ العربية‬as
the language from the language list. Naviga‐ You can either use an SD card or a USB storage
, System . COMAND Touch
tion announcements are then also made in device as temporary storage.
Child safety lock Arabic. % Please note that the NTFS file system is not
# Switch Parental control on O or off ª. supported. The FAT32 file system is recom‐
The content displayed on the external device mended.
Setting the distance unit
can only be set on the multimedia system. Importing/exporting data
Multimedia system:
, System . Units
System language * NOTE Data loss
# Select km or mi.
Notes on the system language # Do not remove the data storage
# Switch Additional speedometer on O to dis‐ medium when data is being exported.
This function allows you to determine the lan‐
guage for the menu displays and the navigation play in the instrument cluster's multifunction
display. Mercedes-Benz is not liable for any loss of
announcements. The selected language affects data.
the characters available for entry. The navigation
announcements are not available in all lan‐ Data import and export Requirements:
guages. If a language is not available, the naviga‐ R The vehicle is stationary.
tion announcements will be in English. Data import/export function
R The ignition is switched on or the vehicle has
The following functions are possible:
Setting the system language been started.
Multimedia system: R transferring data from one system or vehicle
R The SD card is inserted (→ page 348) or the
, System . Language
to another system or vehicle.
USB device is connected (→ page 351).
R creating a backup copy of your personal data
# Set the language.
and loading it again.
292 Multimedia system

Multimedia system: Activating/deactivating PIN protection for User profile

, System . System backup data export
Selecting a user profile
Multimedia system:
# Select Import data or Export data. Multimedia system:
, System . System backup
, System . g Personalisation
Importing # To activate: activate PIN protection O.
# Select Guest or individual profile #.
# Select a data storage medium.
# Enter your four-digit PIN.
A prompt appears asking whether you really % Some settings from the user profile are only
# Enter your four-digit PIN again. loaded when the vehicle is stationary or
wish to overwrite the current data. If data
originates from another vehicle, this is recog‐ PIN protection is activated when both PINs when the ignition is switched on.
nised during data reading. match.
# To deactivate: deactivate PIN protection ª.
Creating a user profile
The multimedia system is restarted once the Multimedia system:
data has been imported. # Enter your four-digit PIN. , System . g Personalisation . Cre-
% Current vehicle settings can be edited after % If you have forgotten your PIN, a Mercedes- ate profile
the import. Benz service centre can deactivate your PIN
# Enter a name.
protection for you.
Exporting # Select a.
Alternatively: you can deactivate PIN protec‐
If PIN protection is activated, your PIN is reques‐
tion by resetting your personal data The user profile saves individual settings, e.g.:
ted.
(→ page 294). R system settings
# Enter your four-digit PIN.

# Select a data storage medium. R settings in the TV tuner's channel list

The data is exported. The data export may R navigation and traffic information
take several minutes.
The settings differ depending on the vehicle
equipment.
 Multimedia system 293

Importing/exporting user profiles # Export: select Export profiles to the server. Depending on the source, you can perform vari‐
User profiles are exported. ous updates:
Requirements:
R There is an Internet connection % Certain settings such as address book Software update
(→ page 339). entries or previous destinations from the
navigation system are not exported. Source of the Update type
R A Mercedes me account exists at http:// update
www.mercedes.me. User profile options
R The Personalisation service is activated. Multimedia system: Internet Navigation maps, sys‐
, System . g Personalisation tem updates
Multimedia system:
# Highlight a profile. External storage Navigation maps
, System . g Personalisation . Man-
# ¥ Select an option.
medium, e.g. USB
ual export/import stick
This function is not available in all countries. The following options are available:
R Rename Performing a software update
Only individual profiles can be imported or
exported. R Delete Requirement:
The individual profiles are always collectively R Reset An Internet connection is required for updates
imported or exported. which are obtained online (→ page 339).
% The guest profile cannot be deleted or
# Import: select Import profiles from the Multimedia system:
renamed.
server. , System . Software update

The The profile import overwrites the exist-

Software update Automatically
ing profiles. Do you want to continue? mes‐
sage appears. # Activate O the automatic software update.
Information on software updates
# Select Yes. The multimedia system provides a message Updates are performed.
User profiles are imported. when an update is available.
294 Multimedia system

The current status of the updates is dis‐ # Select Yes. Navigation

played. A prompt appears asking whether you wish
to reset. Switching navigation on
The automatic software update is not availa‐
ble in all countries. No selected: the process is cancelled. Multimedia system:
, Navigation
Manually # Select Yes.
# Deactivate ª the automatic software
The multimedia system is reset to factory
settings and restarted.
update.
# Select an update from the list and start the
update.
Activating the software update
# Restart the system.

Reset function
Multimedia system:
, System . Reset

The multimedia system is reset to the factory

settings.
Personal data is deleted, for example:
R station presets
# Alternatively: press the ß button.
The map appears and shows current vehicle
R connected mobile phones position 1.
 Multimedia system 295

% If a climate control setting is changed, a cli‐ or There are two available methods of destina‐
mate bar appears briefly. # Slide the controller to the right. tion entry:
R free search 2
Showing/hiding the navigation menu Destination entry R search step-by-step 3

Requirement: Entering a POI or address Method 1: free search

The map displays the current vehicle position. Multimedia system: # Enter a POI or address 2. The entries can
, Navigation . ¬ Destination be made in any order.
During destination entry, suggestions are
made by the multimedia system. A selection
of destinations appears in a list.
The following entries may be made, for exam‐
ple:
R city, street, house number
R street, city
R postcode
# To show: swipe left on the touchpad or R POI name
Touch Control. # Select Enter destination. R POI category, e.g. Petrol station
or The country in which the vehicle is located is R city, POI name
# Slide the controller to the left. set 1.
# To hide: swipe right on the touchpad or
Touch Control.
296 Multimedia system

Examples: % This function is useful for countries in which # If the top line of the character bar is highligh‐
R if you are searching for Königsstraße in several character sets are supported. An ted, navigate upwards.
Stuttgart, for example, you can enter example is Russia, which uses Cyrillic and # Select a destination in the list.
STUT and KÖN. Latin characters.
# To adopt a destination: select Adopt desti-
# To search online: select 6 ª ONLINE.
R if you are searching for a POI in the Uni‐ nation7.
ted Kingdom, for example, you can enter Once an Internet connection is established, a If there are several listings for a destination,
THE SHARD. list appears. It shows online destinations a list appears.
related to the previous entry.
To try both examples, the country setting # Select the destination.
must also be changed (Method 2). Online destinations are provided by the Inter‐ The destination address is shown.
net service provider.
# To switch to handwriting recognition: Method 2: search step-by-step
# Select the destination.
select 5. # Press the % button.
# Write characters on the touchpad. % Online search is not available in all coun‐
tries. or
# To switch to character selection: press the # If the top line of the character bar is highligh‐
% button. Requirements:
ted, navigate upwards.
or R You have a Mercedes me account.
The character bar is hidden. City or postcode
# Press the touchpad. R The service has been activated at a is highlighted. Additional entry fields, e.g. for
# To delete an entry: select 8 (if available). Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. POI, are available.
R Press briefly: deletes the last character Further information can be found at http:// # Select City or postcode.
entered or the last suggestion adopted. www.mercedes.me. The character bar appears.
R Press and hold: deletes the entire entry. # To call up the list: press the % button. # Enter a city or postcode.
# To set the language: select 4. During destination entry, suggestions are
or made by the multimedia system. A selection
# Select a language. of destinations appears in a list.
 Multimedia system 297

The address may be entered in various # To adopt a destination: select Adopt desti- R the direction of the linear distance to the
orders, e.g.: nation. POI (arrow) is displayed when searching
R City or postcode, Street, House no. If there are several listings for a destination, for the vehicle's current position
a distance-orientated list appears. # Select a POI.
A street intersection may be entered, if
available. # Select the destination. # Alternatively, to filter the display by spe‐
The destination address is shown. cial characters: enter a search entry in the
R Street, City or postcode
top line.
R POI, e.g. Petrol station, City or postcode Selecting a POI The results list shows relevant POIs.
Multimedia system:
% The functions described for the free search Example: if you enter Italy, POIs are shown:
, Navigation . ¬ Destination . POIs
may be used: R whose name includes the word Italy
# Select a category.
R switch to handwriting recognition
R which belong to the category Italian cui-
R switch to character selection or sine
# Select All categories.
R delete entry # Select ¡.
# Select a category. The first POI in the list is highlighted.
Entries in the POI field, for example, may
also be deleted with £. # Select a search position. # Select a POI.
R call up online search function (if availa‐ The special characters are displayed in a list.
The list is sorted by distance in ascending Setting the search position for the parking
ble) category, for example, during active route
order.
R call up a list guidance
The POIs show the following information:
# To change the country: select the country. # Select In the vicinity, Near destination or
R name of POI
# Enter a country. You only need to enter the Along the route.
R linear distance to the POI The list shows the located POIs or opens an
first character.
# Select a country in the list.
overview of the route.
298 Multimedia system

# Select a POI. # Alternatively, to filter the display by con‐ Selecting from the map
tacts: enter names or initials into the search Multimedia system:
Selecting the last destination field. , Navigation . Map menu
Multimedia system:
, Navigation . ¬ Destination . Previ-
# Select ¡. # Alternatively: if the map is displayed in full
The first contact in the list is highlighted. screen mode, press the Touch Control, con‐
ous destinations
# Select the contact. troller or touchpad.
# Select the destination.
The map menu appears.
The destination address is shown. Entering geo-coordinates
# Select "move map" in map menu
# Alternatively: if a favourite has been saved Multimedia system:
, Navigation . ¬ Destination . Geo-
3(→ page 311).
(→ page 307), select From global favourites.
# Swipe in any direction on the Touch Control
# Select a favourite. coordinates
or touchpad.
The destination address is shown. # Enter geo-coordinates as latitude and longi‐
tude coordinates in degrees, minutes and or
Selecting a contact seconds. # Slide the controller in any direction.

Requirement: The map shows the relevant position. The map moves in the corresponding direc‐
a mobile phone is connected to the multimedia # Confirm the entry.
tion under the crosshair. The more you move
system (→ page 318). your finger away from the middle on the
# To view or move a destination on the
touchpad, the faster the map moves.
Multimedia system: map: select Map. # Press the Touch Control, the controller or the
, Navigation . ¬ Destination . Con- # To calculate a route: select Start route touchpad.
tacts guidance. If several destinations are located around the
# Select the contact. # If a route has already been created, select
crosshair, a list shows the available POIs and
The relevant contact details are displayed. roads.
Start new route guidance or Set as inter-
# Select an address. mediate destination.
 Multimedia system 299

If a destination is located exactly on the # Alternatively, to filter the display by POI # Select Set as destination.
crosshair, the destination address is dis‐ category: swipe down on the touchpad. The intermediate destination is set.
played. or # Alternatively: select an intermediate destina‐
# Select a destination in the list. tion via ¬ Destination during route guid‐
# Slide the controller down. ance.
The destination address is shown.
# Select a POI category. # Select Enter destination.
Showing traffic messages for the vicinity of # User defined allows personal POI symbols to
the map # Select Set as next intermediate destination
be selected (→ page 313). after entering the destination.
# Select Traffic messages for the vicinity.
The map appears. Entering an intermediate destination Calculating a route with intermediate desti‐
# Swipe left or right on the touchpad. Requirement: nations
or A destination is entered. Requirement:
# Slide the controller to the left or right. Multimedia system: Enter the destination and at least one intermedi‐
The previous or next traffic incident is high‐ , Navigation . ¬ Destination . Inter- ate destination.
lighted on the map. Information on the traffic mediate destinations Multimedia system:
incident is displayed. , Navigation . ¬ Destination . Inter-
# Select Search for an intermediate destina-
Showing POIs in the vicinity of the map tion. mediate destinations
# Select Surrounding POIs. # Enter an intermediate destination. # Select Start new route guidance.
# Swipe left or right on the touchpad. The search results are displayed. The route is calculated with the set inter‐
or # Select an intermediate destination. mediate destinations.
# Slide the controller to the left or right. The address of the intermediate destination Editing intermediate destinations
The previous or next POI is highlighted on the appears.
map. The name or address is displayed. Requirement:
A destination is entered.
300 Multimedia system

Multimedia system: The Fuel tank reserve level Do you want to start Set as next intermediate destination: the
, Navigation . ¬ Destination . Inter- the search for filling stations? message is selected filling station is set as the next inter‐
mediate destinations shown. mediate destination. Route guidance begins.
# Select Yes.
Changing the order of the destinations If there are already four intermediate desti‐
The automatic filling station search begins. nations:
# Highlight the destination or intermediate des‐ The available filling stations along the route
# Select Yes in the prompt.
tination. or in the vicinity of the vehicle's current posi‐
tion are displayed. The selected filling station is entered into
# Select ¥ Move.
position 1 of the intermediate destinations
# Select the filling station.
# Move the intermediate destination to the menu. Intermediate destination 4 is deleted.
desired position. The address of the filling station is displayed. Route guidance begins.
# Press the Touch Control, the controller or the # Variant 1: if a route has not been calculated,

touchpad. select Start route guidance. Route

The selected filling station is set as the desti‐
Deleting a destination nation. Route guidance begins. Calculating a route
# Highlight the destination or intermediate des‐ # Variant 2: if a route has been calculated,
Requirement:
tination. select Start new route guidance or Set as The destination is entered. The destination
# Select ¥ Delete. next intermediate destination. address is shown.
Start new route guidance: the selected filling # Variant 1: if a route has not been calculated,
Starting an automatic filling station search station is set as a new destination. The previ‐
ous destinations and intermediate destina‐ select Start route guidance.
Requirements: The route to the destination is calculated.
The automatic filling station search is activated tions are deleted. Route guidance to the fill‐
ing station begins. The map shows the route. Route guidance
O (→ page 303). then begins.
Route guidance is active. The fuel level in the
fuel tank reaches the reserve fuel level.
 Multimedia system 301

# Variant 2: if a route has been calculated, Selecting a route type A route with a short driving distance is
select Start new route guidance or Set as Multimedia system: calculated.
next intermediate destination. , Navigation . À Route
Start new route guidance: the selected desti‐ Dynamic route can be switched on O or off
# Select Route settings. ª for these route types. If Dynamic route is
nation address is set as a new destination.
The previous destinations and intermediate # Select a route type. switched on, Ask before changing the route
destinations are deleted. Route guidance to A route has already been created: the route can be selected.
the new destination begins. is calculated on the basis of the new route The route types Dynamic route and Ask
Set as next intermediate destination: the type. before changing the route are not available in
selected destination address is set as the A route has not been created: the next route every country.
next intermediate destination. Route guid‐ is calculated on the basis of the new route R Dynamic route
ance begins. type. The route is calculated with the currently
R Eco route set route type.
Taking alternative routes into consideration
# Select an alternative route (→ page 303).
An economical route is calculated. The Traffic messages via Live Traffic Informa‐
journey time may be somewhat longer tion or FM RDS-TMC are taken into
Other menu functions than for quicker routes. account.
# To save the destination: select ¥ Store The symbol for the current vehicle posi‐ Live Traffic Information is not available in
in "Previous destinations". tion is displayed in green. all countries.
# To display on the map: select ¥ Map. R Fast route R Ask before changing the route
# To call a telephone number: select ¥ A route with a quick journey time is cal‐ A prompt appears when a new route is
Call. culated. detected with a shorter journey time
# To call up an Internet address: select R Short route based on traffic reports. You can con‐
tinue to use the current route or use the
¥ www (if available). dynamic route instead.
302 Multimedia system

Selecting route options # Select Payment in cash or Electronic billing The multimedia system announces the
Multimedia system: or Off. names of the roads that will follow the
, Navigation . À Route . Avoid The route takes into account roads that upcoming change of direction.
options require the payment of a usage fee (toll). This function is not available in all coun‐
If Off is selected, toll roads are not taken into tries and languages.
Avoiding areas account.
# Select Areas (→ page 314). Displaying destination information
These route options are not available in every
Avoiding motorways, ferries, motorail trains, Requirement:
country.
tunnels, unpaved roads A destination is entered. The route can also
The selected route options cannot always be include up to four intermediate destinations.
# Select O or deselect ª the avoid option. implemented. Therefore, a route may include a
Multimedia system:
ferry, for instance, even though the Ferries avoid
Using routes requiring a special toll sticker option is enabled. A message appears and you , Navigation . ¬ Destination
# Select Use vignette roads. will hear a corresponding message. # Select Intermediate destinations.
# Select O or deselect ª All or countries.
Selecting notifications The following information is displayed:
The route takes into account roads in the Multimedia system: R intermediate destinations and destination
selected countries which require you to pay a
, Naviga- R name, address
time-based fee (vignette). A vignette allows
for the use of a route network for a limited tion . Z Options . Announcements R remaining driving distance
time period. # Switch announcements on O or off ª.
R time of arrival
R Announce traffic warnings
Using toll roads
# Select Use toll roads.
This function is not available in all coun‐
tries.
R Announce street names
 Multimedia system 303

Selecting an alternative route Route guidance The route may differ from the ideal route due to
Multimedia system: the following:
Notes on route guidance
, Navigation . À Route R roadworks
Route guidance begins once a route has been
# Select Alternative route. calculated. R incomplete digital map data
The routes are displayed in accordance with The road and traffic rules and regulations always
the setting made in the route settings. Changing direction
have priority over multimedia system driving rec‐
The currently selected route is shown with a ommendations.
dark blue line. Driving recommendations are:
# Select an alternative route. R Navigation announcements
Switching the automatic filling station R Route guidance displays
search on/off R Lane recommendations
Multimedia system:
, Navigation . Z Options If you do not follow the navigation announce‐
ments or if you leave the calculated route, a new
# Switch Reserve fuel level on O or off ª.
route is calculated automatically.
Switched on O: when the fuel reserve level
Driving recommendations may differ from the
is reached, a prompt appears asking whether
actual road and traffic conditions if:
you want to start searching for filling sta‐
tions. R the route is diverted
R the direction of a one-way street has
changed
For this reason, you must always observe road There are three phases when changing direction:
and traffic rules and regulations during your R Preparation phase
journey.
304 Multimedia system

If there is enough time between the changes cle position symbol has reached the white
of direction, the multimedia system prepares change-of-direction point.
you for the upcoming change of direction. A When the change of direction is complete,
navigation announcement, e.g. "Prepare to the map appears in full-screen mode.
turn right", is issued.
The map appears in full-screen mode. % Changes of direction are also shown in the
Instrument Display.
R Announcement phase
The multimedia system announces the Lane recommendations
upcoming change of direction, e.g. by This display appears for multi-lane roads.
announcing "Turn right in 200 m". If the digital map contains the relevant data, the
The display is split into two parts. The map is multimedia system can display lane recommen‐
displayed on the left; on the right, there is a dations for the next two changes of direction.
detailed image of the junction or a 3D image
of the upcoming change of direction.
R Change-of-direction phase
1 Lanes not recommended
The multimedia system announces the immi‐
2 Recommended lane
nent change of direction with the announce‐
ment "Now turn right". 3 Approaching new lane
The display is split into two parts. R Lane not recommended 1
The vehicle has successfully changed direc‐ In this lane, you will not be able to complete
tion when the light-coloured bar on the right the next change of direction without chang‐
drops down to 0 metres and the current vehi‐ ing lane.
R Recommended lane 2
 Multimedia system 305

In this lane, you will be able to complete both Switching navigation announcements on/off % You can access and add this function as a
the next change of direction and the one favourite under Spoken driving recommenda-
after that. Requirements: tions on/off.
R a route has already been created
R Possible lane (grey arrow) Switching navigation announcements on/off
R route guidance is active
In this lane, you will only be able to complete during a phone call
the next change of direction. # To switch off: during a navigation announce‐ # Select System.
R Approaching new lane 3 ment, press the 8 button on the multi‐
# Select õ Audio.
function steering wheel.
During the change of direction, new lanes # Switch Driving recommendations during
may be added. or
phone call on O or off ª.
# Press the controller on the right beside the
% Lane recommendations can also be dis‐ touchpad. Adjusting the volume of navigation
played in the instrument display and in the The Spoken driving recommendations have announcements
head-up display. been deactivated. message appears.
# To switch on: display the navigation menu
Requirements:
Destination reached R a route has already been created
Once the destination is reached, you will see the (→ page 295).
chequered flag Í. Route guidance is finished. # Select Driving recommendation.
R route guidance is active

When an intermediate destination has been In the following situations, navigation announce‐ # Press the W or X button on the multi‐
reached, you will see the intermediate destina‐ ments are switched on automatically: function steering wheel during a navigation
tion flag with the number of your intermediate R the route is recalculated.
announcement.
destination Î. After this, route guidance is or
continued. R the multimedia system is switched off and
then on again. # Turn the controller on the right beside the
R the vehicle is restarted.
touchpad.
306 Multimedia system

% When you start the vehicle, the volume is set Multimedia system: % If the journey was interrupted for less than 2
to the lowest setting. , Navigation hours, route guidance continues automati‐
# Alternatively: select System. cally.
# Select Driving recommendation.
# Select õ Audio. The current navigation announcement is Multimedia system:
repeated. , Navigation . ¬ Destination
# Select Driving recommendation volume.

# Set the volume. % You can access and add this function as a # Select Continue route guidance.
favourite under Repeat spoken driving rec- The route is recalculated.
Switching audio fadeout on/off during navi‐ ommendation.
gation announcements Route guidance to an off-road destination
Cancelling route guidance Off-road destination: the destination is within
# Select System.
the digital map. However, the map contains no
# Select õ Audio.
Requirements: roads that lead to the destination.
R A route has already been created.
# Switch Audio fadeout during driving recom- You can enter off-road destinations on the map.
R Route guidance is active.
mendation on O or off ª. Route guidance guides you for as long as possi‐
Multimedia system: ble with navigation announcements and displays
Repeating navigation announcements on roads that are known to the multimedia sys‐
, Navigation . ¬ Destination
Requirements: tem.
# Select Cancel route guidance.
R a route has already been created Shortly before you reach the last known position
R route guidance is active Resuming route guidance on the map, you will hear the "Please follow the
direction arrow" announcement. The display
Requirements: shows a direction arrow and the linear distance
R a route has already been created to the destination.
R route guidance is interrupted
 Multimedia system 307

Route guidance from an off-road location to R a direction arrow showing the linear direction # Select a position on the map.
a destination to the POI A list appears if there are several map posi‐
Off-road position: the current vehicle position is tions.
located within the digital map on roads that are When the vehicle is back on a road known to the
multimedia system, route guidance continues as # Highlight a map position.
not available.
normal. # Select ¥ Store in "Previous destinations".
The following displays appear when route guid‐ The map position is saved to the "Last desti‐
ance begins: nations" memory.
Destination
R the Road not mapped message
Saving the current vehicle position Editing the last destinations
R a direction arrow showing the linear direction Multimedia system:
to the POI Multimedia system:
, Navigation . ¬ Destination . Previ-
, Navigation . Á Position
When the vehicle is back on a road known to the ous destinations
# Select Store position.
multimedia system, route guidance continues as # Highlight one of the last destinations.
normal. The current vehicle position is saved to the
"Last destinations" memory. # To save as a favourite: select ¥ Save as
Off-road status during route guidance global favourite.
Due to roadworks, for example, there may be dif‐ Storing a map position
Multimedia system: # To save as "Home" address: select ¥
ferences between the data on the digital map
and the actual course of the road. In such cases, , Navigation Save as "Home" address.
the multimedia system will temporarily be # To save as "Work" address: select ¥
The map is in full-screen mode.
unable to locate the vehicle's current position on Save as "Work" address.
# Press the Touch Control, the controller or the
the digital map. The vehicle is off-road. # To delete a single or all destinations:
touchpad.
The following displays appear when the vehicle select ¥ Delete or Delete all.
# Select "move map" 3 in the map menu
is off-road: A prompt appears.
(→ page 311).
R the Road not mapped message # Select Yes.
308 Multimedia system

# To display destination information: select Important information on Live Traffic Informa‐ R Registration is carried out at a Mercedes-
¥ Details. tion: Benz Service Centre on the Mercedes me
R Current traffic reports are received via the website.
Route guidance with current traffic reports Internet connection or via data roaming (for R If registration is not completed within this
selected European countries). time period, Live Traffic Information will be
Traffic information overview deactivated. If Live Traffic Information contin‐
R The traffic situation is updated at short, regu‐
% The services are not available in every coun‐ lar intervals. ues to be used after this period, e.g. after six
try. months, the remaining time for free usage is
R In selected European countries, the subscrip‐
Traffic reports can be received with the following 2 and a half years.
tion service is available free of charge for a
services: period of three years from the manufacturing Information on the vehicle's position is regularly
R Live Traffic Information date. sent to Daimler AG. The data is immediately ren‐
R FM RDS-TMC The status of the subscription can be dis‐ dered anonymous by Daimler AG and forwarded
played (→ page 309). to the traffic data provider. Using this data, traf‐
It is not possible to use both services simul‐ fic reports relevant to the vehicle's position are
taneously. Registering Live Traffic Information sent to the vehicle. The vehicle acts as a sensor
Live Traffic Information or FM RDS-TMC is R The service is initially activated for three for the flow of traffic and helps to improve the
displayed with a symbol. months upon vehicle handover. quality of the traffic reports.
% Hazard alerts can be received using the Car- R The service must be registered If you do not wish to transmit your vehicle posi‐
to-X service. (→ page 309): tion, you can have this service deactivated at a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
% There may be differences between the traffic - upon vehicle handover
reports received and the actual road and Useful information on FM RDS-TMC:
- within three months
traffic conditions. R This ensures the full, free usage period.
R A FM RDS-TMC radio station broadcasts traf‐
fic reports alongside the radio programme.
R FM RDS-TMC is not available in all countries.
 Multimedia system 309

Displaying subscription information # Enter and confirm dates or follow the instruc‐ # Call up the Mercedes me user account.
tions. # Switch to the Mercedes me connect online
Requirement:
R The vehicle is equipped with Live Traffic Registering on Mercedes me store via the linked vehicle.
Information. Live Traffic Information must be registered. Reg‐ # Extend the Live Traffic Information service.
istration is carried out at a Mercedes-Benz # Select the extension period.
Multimedia system: Service Centre.
, Navigation . Z Options # Add the product to the shopping basket.
Requirement: you have a user account on the
The subscription expiry date is automatically dis‐ Mercedes me website.
# Accept the general and specific terms of use.
played: Live Traffic Information remains activated for
# Create a user account with Mercedes me
the selected extension period. Activation
R one month before the expiry date. https://me.mercedes-benz.com. begins on the date of extension.
R one week before the expiry date. # A valid email address is required for this.
Displaying the traffic map
R on the expiry date. # Register the vehicle using the vehicle identifi‐
cation number (VIN). Requirements:
# To display manually: select Live Traffic Sub- R For Live Traffic Information: the vehicle is
# Have the vehicle linked to the Mercedes me
scription Info. equipped with a communication module fea‐
user account at a Mercedes-Benz Service
Depending on the status, one of the following Centre. The vehicle registration documents turing an activated, integrated SIM card.
messages appears: and a form of identification are required for When the vehicle is started, the communica‐
R The period of validity for the subscription this. tion module automatically establishes an
is displayed. # Accept the general and specific terms of use.
Internet connection. Traffic information is
R The subscription has expired. made available shortly afterwards.
Extending a subscription
# Select Extend subscription. Requirement: you have a user account on the
The website for extending the subscription is Mercedes me website.
called up.
310 Multimedia system

Multimedia system: R display for traffic delays on the route last‐ % The traffic delay is displayed for the current
, Navigation . Map menu ing at least one minute route. Traffic delays lasting one minute or
R warning message symbols: longer are taken into consideration.
# Alternatively: when the map is displayed in
full-screen mode, press the Touch Control, - d symbol Displaying details
the controller or the touchpad. - additional road safety note when # Display the traffic map (→ page 309).
The map menu appears. approaching a traffic incident, e.g. # Move the map (→ page 312).
# Select º. approaching tailback # Variant 1: when a traffic report symbol is
The traffic map can show the following infor‐ If the vehicle approaches a hazard under the crosshair, press the touchpad or
mation: spot on the route, a warning message the controller.
R traffic incidents, e.g.: is displayed on the map. A warning The traffic report details are displayed.
message may also be issued # Variant 2: press the touchpad or the control‐
- roadworks (→ page 311). ler.
- road blocks
Displaying traffic incidents # Select Traffic messages for the vicinity.
- warning messages Multimedia system: The map shows the traffic report symbols in
The symbols for traffic incidents are dis‐ , Navigation . Z Options . Map con- the vicinity.
played in colour (on the route) or grey (off tent Traffic report information is displayed in the
the route). # Activate O Traffic incidents.
status line:
R traffic flow information: Roadworks, road blocks, local area reports R traffic report symbol
- traffic jam (red line) (e.g. fog) and warning messages are dis‐ R reason for the traffic report, e.g. traffic
played. jam
- slow-moving traffic (yellow line)
Activating free flow and traffic delay R warning message (highlighted in red)
- free-flowing traffic (green line)
# Activate O Free Flow and Traffic delays.
 Multimedia system 311

# To select a traffic report symbol: select Map and compass The map and satellite images are shown in globe
Next or Previous. projection. This allows for a realistic map display
Map and compass overview
# Press on the touchpad or controller. in all map scales. The map uses elevation model‐
The traffic report details are displayed. ling.
In small map scales (20 m, 50 m), important
Issuing hazard alerts buildings are depicted realistically on the map in
Multimedia system: many cities; other buildings are shown as mod‐
, Naviga- els.
tion . Z Options . Announcements If online information is available, fuel prices and
# Activate O Announce traffic warnings. the availability of parking spaces in multi-storey
Warning messages are issued and approach‐ car parks are displayed, for example.
ing tailbacks which pose a risk are % Requirements:
announced.
R You have a Mercedes me account.
R The service has been activated at a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Further information can be found at http://
www.mercedes.me.
1 To set the map scale
2 To select the map orientation and map view
3 To move the map
4 To call up the navigation map
5 To call up the traffic map
312 Multimedia system

% Company logos displayed on the map are Vehicles for left-side traffic: the map always # Slide the controller in any direction.
trademarks of the respective companies and shows the currently selected map scale at The map moves in the corresponding direc‐
used solely for the purpose of indicating the the bottom right. tion under the crosshair. The more you move
locations of these companies. The use of # Swipe up or down on the Touch Control or your finger away from the middle on the
such logos on the map does not indicate the touchpad. touchpad, the faster the map moves.
approval of, support of or advertising by or
these companies for the navigation system Selecting the map orientation
itself.
# Move two fingers apart or together on the Multimedia system:
touchpad. , Navigation . Map menu
Setting the map scale or # Alternatively: when the map is displayed in
Multimedia system:
# Slide the controller up or down. full-screen mode, press the Touch Control,
, Navigation . Map menu
the controller or the touchpad.
# Alternatively: when the map is displayed in
Moving the map The map menu appears.
full-screen mode, press the Touch Control, Multimedia system:
# In map menu 2 , select N, 2D or
the controller or the touchpad. , Navigation . Map menu
3D(→ page 311).
The map menu appears. # Alternatively: when the map is displayed in R N The map is aligned in 2D and displayed
# Select "Set map scale" in map menu full-screen mode, press the Touch Control, so that north is up.
1(→ page 311). the controller or the touchpad. R 2D The map is aligned in 2D and dis‐
The map scale appears with the currently The map menu appears.
played in the direction of travel.
selected scale. # Select "move map" in map menu
R 3D: The map is aligned in 3D and dis‐
Vehicles for right-side traffic: the map always 3(→ page 311).
# Move your finger in any direction on the
played in the direction of travel.
shows the currently selected map scale at
the bottom left. Touch Control or touchpad.
or
 Multimedia system 313

Selecting POI symbols Selecting text information Displaying the next intersecting street
Multimedia system: Multimedia system: Multimedia system:
, Navigation . Z Options . Map con- , Navigation . Z Options . Text , Navigation . Z Options

tent information # Activate O or deactivate ª Next intersect-

POIs include filling stations and hotels, for exam‐ # Select the setting. ing street.
ple. These can be displayed as symbols on the Current street shows the street you are cur‐ The function is activated O: if route guid‐
map. Not all POIs are available everywhere. rently driving on at the bottom of the display. ance is not active, the name of the next inter‐
# Select POI symbols. When the map is moved, the street name, secting street is displayed on the top edge of
The # dot indicates the current setting. the POI name or the area name appears the screen.
Standard displays symbols of predefined cat‐ under the crosshair. Displaying traffic signs on the map
egories in the map. Geo-coordinates displays the following infor‐ Requirement:
User defined allows you to personally select mation:
The vehicle is equipped with Traffic Sign Assist.
the symbols for the available categories. R longitude and latitude
Multimedia system:
None switches the display off. R elevation , Navigation . Z Options
# Select the setting. The elevation shown may deviate from # Switch Traffic signs on O or off ª.
# User defined: select categories. the actual elevation.
If the function is switched on O you will see
The POI symbols of the selected categories R number of satellites from which a signal the traffic signs recognised by Traffic Sign
are displayed O or not displayed ª. can be received Assist.
When the map is moved, this information The following traffic signs are displayed:
does not appear.
R speed limitations
None switches the display off. R overtaking restrictions
314 Multimedia system

R traffic signs with a restriction indicated # Variant 2: select Address entry. # Select ¥ Edit.
by an additional sign (e.g. in wet condi‐ # Enter the address.
tions) Moving the area on the map
# Select Adopt destination. # Swipe in any direction on the Touch Control
Displaying the map version The map appears. or touchpad.
Multimedia system: # To display an area: press the Touch Control, or
, Navigation . Z Options the touchpad or the controller. # Slide the controller in any direction.
# Select Map version. A red rectangle appears. This designates the
area that should be avoided. Changing the size of the area
# Select Details.
# To change the size of the area: swipe up or # Press the Touch Control, the touchpad or the
% Information about new versions of the digital controller.
down on the Touch Control or the touchpad.
map can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz
or # Swipe up or down on the Touch Control or
service centre.
# Slide the controller up or down. the touchpad.
Avoiding an area or
The map scale is enlarged or reduced and
You can define areas along a route that you
changes the size of the area. # Slide the controller up or down.
would like to avoid. # To set the area: press the Touch Control, # Press the Touch Control, the touchpad or the
Avoiding a new area the controller or the touchpad. controller.
Multimedia system: The area is entered into the list.
Taking the area for the route into account
, Navigation . À Route . Avoid Changing an area # Avoid O or do not avoid ª an area in the
options . Areas Multimedia system: list.
# Select Avoid new area. , Navigation . À Route . Avoid Route guidance active: a new route is calcu‐
# Variant 1: select Using map. options . Areas lated.
# Move the map. # Highlight an area in the list.
 Multimedia system 315

No route has been created: the setting is car‐ conjunction with the most up-to-date map data. Map data
ried over to the next route guidance. Information about new versions of the digital Your vehicle is supplied with map data at the fac‐
The route can include an area that is to be map can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz tory. Depending on the country, map data for
avoided in the following cases: service centre. There you can receive updates to your region is either pre-installed or the map
the digital map. data is supplied on a data storage medium. You
R the destination is located in an area that
do not require an activation code for the map
is to be avoided Online map update data which is provided with your vehicle.
R there is no sensible alternative route % The online map update service is not availa‐ If the map data on your vehicle has been instal‐
ble in all countries. led at the factory and you wish to reinstall it, you
Deleting one or all areas
Multimedia system: The online map update service from Mercedes do not need to enter the activation code.
, Navigation . À Route . Avoid
me connect can be used to update map data. An activation code is required for purchased
options . Areas The update is performed: map data.
# Highlight an area in the list.
R for one region (automatic map update) The activation code:
# Select ¥ Delete or ¥ Delete all.
R for several or all regions (manual map R can be used in one vehicle
update) R is non-transferable
# Confirm the prompt with Yes.
One or all areas are deleted. The service must be activated at a Mercedes- R has six digits
Benz service centre in order to use automatic
Updating the map data updates. Please contact a Mercedes-Benz service centre
if you are experiencing the following problems:
Updating at the Mercedes-Benz service Further information on the online map update
http://www.mercedes.me. R the multimedia system does not accept the
centre
The digital maps generated by the map software activation code
Further information on updates http://
become outdated in the same way as conven‐ manuals.daimler.com/baix/cars/connectme/ R you have lost the activation code
tional road maps. Optimal route guidance can de_DE/index.html.
only be provided by the navigation system in
316 Multimedia system

Displaying the compass The number of satellites received is shown. % Requirements:

Multimedia system: R You have a Mercedes me account.
Displaying the satellite map
, Navigation . Á Position
Multimedia system: R The service has been activated at a
# Select Compass. , Navigation . Z Options . Map con- Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
The compass display shows the following tent Further information can be found at http://
information: Satellite maps can be displayed in map scales www.mercedes.me.
R the current direction of travel with bear‐ from 2 km.
ing (360 degree format) and compass # Switch Satellite map on O or off ª. Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual (navi‐
direction By doing so, satellite maps in map scales gation)
R longitude and latitude coordinates in from 2 km to 10 km can be switched off.
degrees, minutes and seconds Information on navigation
% Satellite maps for these map scales are not Multimedia system:
R height (rounded) above sea level available in all countries. , Navigation . Information on navigation
R number of GPS satellites from which a
Displaying weather information # Select a topic.
signal can be received Multimedia system:
Displaying Qibla , Navigation . Z Options . Map con-
Multimedia system: tent
, Navigation . Á Position
# Switch Weather information on O or off ª.
# Select Qibla (if available). When the function is switched on O, current
The arrow on the compass shows the direc‐ weather information is displayed on the navi‐
tion of prayer to Mecca in relation to the cur‐ gation map, e.g. temperature or cloud cover‐
rent direction of travel. This function is not age.
available in all countries. This function is not available in all countries.
 Multimedia system 317

Telephone 4 ¢ (telephone ready) or w (call active) Notes on telephony

Telephony 5 Contacts (→ page 322)
& WARNING Risk of distraction from oper‐
6 Call list - Device_name (→ page 324)
Telephone menu overview ating integrated communication equip‐
7 Text message (→ page 324) ment while the vehicle is in motion
8 Connect device (→ page 318)
If you operate communication equipment
9 Options integrated in the vehicle when driving, you
The Bluetooth® interface is available to you for will be distracted from the traffic situation.
telephony. The mobile phone is connected This could also cause you to lose control of
directly via the multimedia system. the vehicle.
# Only operate this equipment when the
You can also use the optionally available tele‐
phone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile) for traffic situation permits.
telephony. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the

Symbols 1 to 4 are not shown until after a vehicle whilst paying attention to road
mobile phone has been connected to the multi‐ and traffic conditions and operate the
media system. The symbols depend on your equipment with the vehicle stationary.
mobile phone and your mobile phone network
provider. & WARNING Risk of distraction from oper‐
If the mobile phone connected supports the ating mobile communication equipment
1 Bluetooth® device name of the currently MAP Bluetooth® profile (Message Access while the vehicle is in motion
connected mobile phone Profile), the i menu item is available. If you operate mobile communication equip‐
2 Mobile phone network provider ment when driving, you will be distracted
3 Signal strength of the mobile phone network from the traffic situation. This could also
cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
318 Multimedia system

Only operate this equipment when the vehi‐ Further information can be obtained from a R a mobile phone with "Twincard" is logged into
cle is stationary. Mercedes-Benz service centre or at: http:// the network with the second SIM card at the
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect. same time
You must observe the legal requirements for the HD Voice® Connecting a mobile phone (authorising)
country in which you are currently driving when R To improve voice quality, the multimedia sys‐
operating mobile communication equipment in Requirements:
tem supports telephone calls in HD Voice®.
the vehicle. Bluetooth® is activated on the mobile phone (see
R In order to use this function, the mobile the manufacturer's operating instructions).
Telephony is possible via:
phones and the mobile phone network pro‐
R the Bluetooth® interface vider of the person you are calling must sup‐ Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia sys‐
tem (→ page 288).
R the telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP port HD Voice®.
profile) Multimedia system:
Depending on the quality of the connection, the , Telephone . á Connect device - no
Bluetooth® profile overview voice quality may fluctuate.
device connected
Function The following situations can lead to the call
Bluetooth® profile Searching for a mobile phone
being disconnected while the vehicle is in
of the mobile phone
motion: # Select Connect new device.
PBAP (Phone Book Contacts are auto‐ R there is insufficient network coverage in the # Select Start search.
Access Profile) matically displayed in area The available mobile phones are displayed. If
the multimedia sys‐ R you move from one GSM or UMTS transmit‐ a new mobile phone is found, it is indicated
tem ter/receiver area (cell) into another and no by the á symbol.
MAP (Message Message functions communication channels are free
Access Profile) can be used R the SIM card used is not compatible with the
network available
 Multimedia system 319

Connecting a mobile phone (authorisation Disconnecting a mobile phone (de-authoris‐ Using the mobile phone with Near Field Com‐
using Secure Simple Pairing) ing) munication (NFC)
# Select the mobile phone. Multimedia system:
Requirements:
A code is displayed in the multimedia system , Telephone . á Connect device -
R NFC is activated on the mobile phone (see
and on the mobile phone. Mobile phone the manufacturer's operating instructions)
# If the codes match: confirm the code on # Select the mobile phone from the device list. R the mobile phone's screen is switched on
the mobile phone. # Select ¥. and unlocked (see the manufacturer's oper‐
Connecting a mobile phone (authorisation by # Select De-authorise.
ating instructions)
entering a passkey) # Select Yes. NFC enables short-range wireless data transfer.
# Select the Bluetooth® name of the mobile
phone. Switching mobile phones
# Choose a one to sixteen-digit number combi‐ Requirement:
nation as a passkey. The mobile phones are authorised (→ page 318).
# Multimedia system: enter the passkey and Multimedia system:
select a. , Telephone . á Connect device -
# Mobile phone: enter the passkey again and Mobile phone
confirm. # Select the mobile phone from the device list.
% Up to 15 mobile phones can be authorised % Only one mobile phone can be connected at
on the multimedia system. any one time. The connected mobile phone
All telephones are automatically reconnec‐ is displayed at the top of the list.
ted.
320 Multimedia system

# To switch mobile phones: lightly press the Multimedia system:

NFC area of the mobile phone (see the man‐ , Telephone . á Connect device -
ufacturer's operating instructions). Mobile phone
If the mobile phone has already been author‐
ised on the multimedia system, it is now con‐ This function ensures optimal language quality.
nected. # Highlight the mobile phone in the device list.

If the mobile phone is authorised on the mul‐ # Select ¥.

timedia system for the first time, it is connec‐ # Select Reception volume or Transmission
ted after confirming the mobile phone volume.
instructions (see the manufacturer's operat‐
# Set the volume.
ing instructions).
Further functions without having a mobile phone Further information on the recommended recep‐
authorised on the multimedia system: tion and transmission volume: http://
R transferring a contact or a business card, www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
e.g. for direct navigation to an entered Adjusting the call and ringtone volume
# To connect a mobile phone: open stowage address Multimedia system:
compartment cover 1. R transferring a URL to the enlarged view in the , System . õ Audio
# Lightly press NFC area 2 on the inside of multimedia system # Select Telephone speech volume or Phone
the cover. Setting the reception and transmission vol‐ ringtone volume.
The mobile phone is connected to the multi‐ ume # Set the volume.
media system.
Requirement:
A mobile phone is authorised (→ page 318).
 Multimedia system 321

Starting/stopping mobile phone voice recog‐ # Select Dial number. Conducting calls with several participants
nition The call is made.
Requirements:
Requirement: Accepting a call R there is an active call (→ page 321)
the mobile phone is connected to the multime‐ # Select Accept. R another call is being made
dia system (→ page 318).
Rejecting a call Switching between calls
Starting mobile phone voice recognition
# Select Reject. # Select call #.
# Press and hold the ó button on the multi‐
The selected call is active. The other call is
function steering wheel for more than one Ending a call on hold.
second. # Select =.
You can use mobile phone voice recognition. Activating or ending a call on hold
Activating functions during a call # Select Continue call or End call.
Stopping mobile phone voice recognition # To show all functions, navigate down.
# Press the 8 or ~ button on the multi‐
The following functions are available during a Conducting a conference call
function steering wheel. call: # Select Create conference call in the tele‐
R End call phone menu.
Calls The new participant is included in the confer‐
R Make additional call
ence call.
Telephone operation R Keyboard (show to send DTMF tones)
Multimedia system: Ending an active call
R Microphone off or Microphone on
, Telephone . ª Contacts # Select =.
R Private Mode (an active call in hands-free
Making a call mode is transferred over to the telephone) % On some mobile phones, the call on hold is
activated as soon as the active call is ended.
# Enter a number.
322 Multimedia system

Incoming call during an existing call (call R 3,000 entries are for permanently saved con‐ Manually
waiting) tacts. # Deactivate ª Call up contacts automati-

Requirement: R 3,000 for contacts loaded from the mobile cally.

There is an active call (→ page 321). phone. # Select Call up contacts.

If you receive a call while already in a call, a From the contacts menu, you can perform the Calling up contacts
message is displayed. An acoustic signal also following actions: Multimedia system:
sounds. R Telephone operation (→ page 323) , Telephone . ª Contacts
# Select Accept.
R Navigation (→ page 298)
The incoming call is active. The previous call The following options can be used to search for
R Writing messages (→ page 323) contacts:
is on hold.
# Select Reject. If a mobile phone is connected to the multimedia R search by initials

% This function and behaviour depends on your system (→ page 318) and automatic calling up R search by name
mobile phone network provider and the (→ page 322) is activated, the mobile phone's R search by phone number
mobile phone (see the manufacturer's oper‐ contacts are displayed in the address book.
# Enter characters into the search field.
ating instructions). Downloading mobile phone contacts A selection of possible contacts appears.
Multimedia system: Entering more characters into the search
Contacts , Telephone . Z Options field narrows down the number of possible
selections.
Information about the contacts menu Automatically
The contacts menu contains all contacts from # Select the contact.
# Activate O Call up contacts automatically.
existing data sources, e.g. mobile phone or A contact can contain the following details:
memory card. R phone numbers
It is possible to store up to 6,000 contacts: R navigation addresses
 Multimedia system 323

R geo-coordinates Overview of importing contacts as electronic Saving a mobile phone contact

business cards Multimedia system:
Editing the format of a contact's name
, Telephone . ª Contacts
Multimedia system: Source Requirements:
, Telephone . Z Options . Name # Call up a mobile phone contact ó
ò Memory card The SD memory card (→ page 322).
format is inserted.
# Select ¥.
The following options are available:
ò USB device The USB device is # Select Save in vehicle.
R Surname, first name inserted into the USB The contact saved in the multimedia system
R Surname First name port. is identified by the f symbol.
R First name Surname If the sending of
ñ Bluetooth® con‐ Calling a contact
# Select an option. nection vCards is supported Multimedia system:
via Bluetooth®, , Telephone . ª Contacts
Importing contacts into the contacts menu vCards can be
Via Z Options, you can import contacts into received on mobile # Enter characters into the search field.
the telephone book as electronic business cards phones or netbooks, # Select the contact.
from different sources. for example. # Select a telephone number.
Bluetooth® is activa‐ The number is dialled.
ted in the multimedia
system and on the Further options in the contacts menu
respective device Multimedia system:
(see the manufactur‐ , Telephone . ª Contacts

er's operating instruc‐ # Select ¥.

tions).
324 Multimedia system

The following options are available: # Select the contact. Making a call from the call list
R Contact details # Select ¥. Multimedia system:
, Telephone . ø Call list -
R Save in vehicle # Select Delete contact.
Device_name
R Delete contact # Select Yes.
# Select an entry.
Within contact details # Make the call.
# Select ¥. Call list
Call list overview Options in the call list
The following options are available:
If your mobile phone supports the PBAP Blue‐ Multimedia system:
R Call , Telephone . ø Call list -
tooth® profile, the call lists from the mobile
R Send text message Device_name
phone are displayed in the multimedia system.
R Save as global favourite When connecting the mobile phone, you may # Highlight the entry.
R Show website (when a web address is have to confirm the connection for the PBAP # Select ¥.
stored) Bluetooth® profile.
The following options are available:
R Navigate (when an address is stored) If your mobile phone does not support the PBAP
R Send text message
R Send DTMF tones (for a number with DTMF Bluetooth® profile, the multimedia system gener‐
ates its own call lists. These are not the same as R Open contact
tones)
the call lists in your mobile phone.
Deleting a contact Text messages
Multimedia system:
, Telephone . ª Contacts Notes on the text message functions
If the connected mobile phone supports the
You can delete contacts stored in the vehicle.
MAP Bluetooth® profile, the text message func‐
# Search for a contact. tions can be used on the multimedia system.
 Multimedia system 325

You can obtain further information about set‐ R New and unread messages # Select Write new text message.
tings and supported functions of Bluetooth®- R New messages Adding a recipient
capable mobile phones from a Mercedes-Benz R Off (The text messages are not displayed
service centre or at: http://www.mercedes- # Select Press to add recipient.
automatically.)
benz.com/connect # Select the contact.
# Select an option.
Some mobile phones require further settings Dictating text
after being connected to the multimedia system Reading text messages
# Select Press to dictate.
(see manufacturer's Owner's Manual). Multimedia system:
The App for the dictation function is loaded.
New messages are identified by the 1 symbol , Telephone . i Text message
in the multimedia system's display and an audi‐ If there was no prior Internet connection, a
ble signal. Reading a text message connection is now established.
# Select a text message. # To start the dictation function: press the con‐
R The multimedia system displays the 100
newest text messages. The message text is displayed. troller or touchpad.
Using the read-aloud function # Say your message.
R The ú symbol is displayed when the
mobile phone's message memory is full. The dictation ends automatically after you
# Highlight the text message. have finished speaking.
Configuring the text messages displayed # Select ¥.
After the voice message has been processed,
Multimedia system: # Select + Read aloud. it is shown as text.
, Telephone . Z Options . Call up The text message is read aloud.
messages Editing text
Composing and sending a text message # Select the word.
# Select ¥. Multimedia system:
A menu with the following options is shown: , Telephone . i Text message

R All messages # Navigate to the left twice.

326 Multimedia system

# To call up the correction menu: press the Calling a text message sender The Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre and the
controller or touchpad. Multimedia system: Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre are availa‐
The following options are available: , Telephone . i Text message ble for you around the clock.
R adjusting the capitalisation of words (if # Select a text message. The Info call button, the breakdown assistance
supported by the character set) button and the emergency call button can be
# Select ¥.
found on the overhead control panel of the vehi‐
R expanding the choice of words # Select Call sender. cle (→ page 327).
R deleting the selection
Deleting text messages You can also use the multimedia system to make
R recording a new dictation the call (→ page 327).
Multimedia system:
# To leave the menu: select Done. , Telephone . i Text message Please note that Mercedes me connect is a
Mercedes-Benz service. In emergencies, always
Sending text messages # Select ¥.
call the national emergency services first using
# Select Send text message. # Select Delete. the standard national emergency service phone
Replying to a text message numbers. In emergencies, you can also use the
Multimedia system: Mercedes me connect Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
(→ page 329).
, Telephone . i Text message
Notes on Mercedes me connect Further information on Mercedes me connect,
# Select a text message. Mercedes me connect provides the following the provided service scope and operation:
# Select ¥. services: http://manuals.daimler.com/baix/cars/
# Select Reply. R Breakdown management connectme/de_DE/index.html
R Appointment requests or similar
R Accident management
R Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
 Multimedia system 327

Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre Further information on Mercedes me connect,

using the multimedia system the provided service scope and operation is
available at: http://manuals.daimler.com/baix/
Requirements: cars/connectme/de_DE/index.html
In order to be able to use the Mercedes me con‐
nect service in the vehicle, the following is Making a call via the overhead control panel
required: Requirements:
R You have access to a GSM network. In order to be able to use the Mercedes me con‐
R The contract partner's GSM network cover‐ nect service in the vehicle, the following is
age is available in the respective region. required:
R The ignition must be switched on so that R You have access to a GSM network.
vehicle data can be transferred automati‐ R The contract partner's GSM network cover‐
cally. age is available in the respective region.
Multimedia system: R The ignition must be switched on so that
, Telephone . ª Contacts vehicle data can be transferred automati‐
cally. 1 Breakdown assistance call
# Call Mercedes me connect.
2 SOS button cover
After confirmation, the multimedia system
3 MB Info call
sends the required vehicle data.
4 SOS button
The data transfer is shown in the display.
Then, you can select a service and be con‐ # To make a breakdown assistance call:
nected to a specialist at the Mercedes-Benz press button 1.
Customer Centre. # To make an emergency call: press SOS
button cover 2 briefly to open.
328 Multimedia system

# Press and hold SOS button 4 for at least R other products and services from Mercedes- An emergency call is made to the Mercedes-
one second. Benz Benz emergency call centre after an accident:
# To make an MB Info call: press button 3. Data is transmitted during the connection to the R a voice connection is made to a contact per‐
Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre (→ page 329). son at the Mercedes-Benz emergency call
An emergency call can be initiated even if a centre.
breakdown assistance or MB Info call is active. Information on the breakdown assistance R if necessary, the contact person at the
This has priority over all other active calls. call Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre for‐
Calls via the overhead control panel are only A breakdown assistance call to the Mercedes- wards the call to Mercedes me connect acci‐
possible with an available mobile phone net‐ Benz Customer Centre has been initiated via the dent management.
work. overhead control panel (→ page 327) or the mul‐
timedia system (→ page 327). R if necessary, the vehicle will be towed to a
More information on Mercedes me connect and Mercedes-Benz service centre.
further services can be found at: http:// R A qualified Mercedes-Benz technician carries
www.mercedes.me out repairs on site and/or the vehicle will be Mercedes me connect service message
towed to the nearest Mercedes-Benz service If you have activated the maintenance manage‐
Information on the MB Info call centre. ment service, relevant vehicle data is transferred
An Info call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer automatically to the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Centre has been initiated via the overhead con‐ You may be charged for these services.
Centre. You will then receive individual recom‐
trol panel (→ page 327) or the multimedia sys‐ Data is transferred during the connection to the mendations regarding the maintenance of your
tem (→ page 327). Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre (→ page 329). vehicle.
You can find information on the following topics: Regardless of whether you have consented to
Information on Mercedes me connect acci‐
R activation of Mercedes me connect dent management the maintenance management service, the multi‐
R operating the vehicle The Mercedes me connect accident manage‐ media system reminds you after a certain
ment is an extension of the Mercedes-Benz amount of time that a service is due. A prompt
R nearest Mercedes-Benz service centre
emergency call system (→ page 329). appears asking if you would like to make an
appointment.
 Multimedia system 329

# To arrange a service appointment: select improve the processing of your request? mes‐ Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
Call. sage appears.
Notes on the Mercedes-Benz emergency call
After your confirmation, the vehicle data is # Select Yes. system
sent and a Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre The relevant vehicle data is sent automati‐ The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system only
employee deals with your appointment. The cally. functions in areas where mobile phone coverage
information is then sent to your desired
More information on Mercedes me: http:// is available from the relevant contract partner.
service outlet.
www.mercedes.me Insufficient network coverage from the relevant
This service outlet will then contact you contract partner may result in an emergency call
within 24 hours. Transferred data during a service call not being transmitted.
% If you select Call later after the service mes‐ In certain countries you must confirm the data The ignition must be switched on before an auto‐
sage appears, the message is hidden and transfer. matic emergency call can be made.
reappears after a certain period of time. Data transferred includes the following:
Overview of the Mercedes-Benz emergency
Consenting to the data transfer for Mercedes Overview of transferred data call system
me connect The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system can
Service call Transferred data
Requirement: help to decisively reduce the time between an
There is an active breakdown assistance or Info MB Info call R current vehicle accident and the arrival of emergency services
call on the multimedia system (→ page 327) or Breakdown assis‐ location at the site of the accident. It helps locate an
the overhead control panel (→ page 327). tance call R vehicle identifica‐ accident site in places that are difficult to
tion number access.
If the breakdown and Mercedes me connect
concierge services are not activated on R service code The emergency call can be made automatically
Mercedes me, the Do you want to transmit vehi- (→ page 330) or manually (→ page 331). Only
R selected data make emergency calls if you or others are in
cle data and the vehicle's position to the about the status need of rescue. Do not make an emergency call
Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre in order to of the vehicle
330 Multimedia system

in the event of a breakdown or a similar situa‐ dent, the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system If the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
tion. may automatically initiate an emergency call. cannot connect to the Mercedes-Benz emer‐
The emergency call has been made: gency call centre, the emergency call is automat‐
Messages in the multimedia system display: ically sent to the public emergency services call
SOS READY: emergency call available R a voice connection is made to the Mercedes-
centre.
SOS NOT READY: the ignition is not on or there Benz emergency call centre.
If no connection can be made to the public
is a malfunction with the emergency call system. R a message with accident data is transmitted
emergency services, a relevant message
During an active emergency call, G appears to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre. appears in the display.
in the display. The Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre # Dial the emergency call number 999 or 112
You can find more information on the regional can transmit the vehicle position data to one on your mobile phone.
availability of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call of the public emergency services call cen‐
tres. If an emergency call has been initiated:
system at: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/
R in certain situations additional data is trans‐ R remain in the vehicle, if the road and traffic
connect_ecall
mitted to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call conditions permit you to do so, until a voice
% If an emergency call is unavailable, a mes‐ connection is established with the emer‐
sage to this effect also appears in the multi‐ centre.
gency call centre operator.
function display of the instrument cluster. This allows measures for rescue, recovery or
towing to a Mercedes-Benz service centre to R on the basis of the call, the operator decides
Automatic emergency call be initiated quickly. whether it is necessary to deploy rescue
teams and/or the police to the accident site.
Requirements: If your vehicle is equipped with an SOS button in
R The ignition is switched on. R if no vehicle occupant answers, an ambu‐
the overhead control panel, it flashes until the lance is sent to the vehicle immediately.
R The starter battery has been sufficiently emergency call has been completed.
charged. It is not possible to immediately end an auto‐
If restraint systems such as airbags or seat belt matic emergency call.
tensioners have been activated after an acci‐
 Multimedia system 331

Manual emergency call This allows measures for rescue, recovery or R the last GPS position data on the route (a few
# If the vehicle has an SOS button in the over‐ towing to a Mercedes-Benz service centre to hundred metres before the incident)
head control panel: press and hold the but‐ be initiated quickly. R direction of travel
ton for at least one second.
If the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system R vehicle identification number
The emergency call has been made: cannot connect to the Mercedes-Benz emer‐ R the vehicle drive type
R a voice connection is made to the Mercedes- gency call centre, the emergency call is automat‐
ically sent to the public emergency services call R the estimated number of people in the vehi‐
Benz emergency call centre. cle
centre.
R remain in the vehicle, if the road and traffic R whether Mercedes me connect is available or
conditions permit you to do so, until a voice If no connection can be made to the public
emergency services, a relevant message not
connection is established with the emer‐
gency call centre operator. appears in the display. R whether the emergency call was initiated
# Dial the emergency call number 999 or 112
manually or automatically
R on the basis of the call, the operator decides
whether it is necessary to deploy rescue on your mobile phone. R the time of the accident
teams and/or the police to the accident site. Ending an unintentional emergency call R the language setting on the multimedia sys‐
R a message with accident data is transmitted tem
# Select ~ on the multifunction steering
to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre. wheel. For accident clarification purposes, the following
The Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre measures can be taken up to an hour after the
can transmit the vehicle position data to one Transmitted data with the Mercedes-Benz emergency call has been initiated:
of the public emergency services call cen‐ emergency call system
R the current vehicle position can be called up
tres. The following data is transmitted to the
R a voice connection to the vehicle occupants
R in certain situations additional data is trans‐ Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre:
can be established
mitted to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call R the vehicle's GPS position data
centre.
332 Multimedia system

% For Russia: various functions, e.g. receiving Telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP pro‐ Multimedia system:
traffic information, cannot be performed for file) , Telephone
up to two hours after sending an emergency
call. Fitting/removing the telephone module Connecting the telephone module
Starting/ending ERA-GLONASS test mode
(Russia)
Requirements:
R The starter battery has sufficient charge.
R The ignition is switched on.
R The vehicle has been stationary for at least
one minute.
# To start the test mode: press and hold the
~ button on the multifunction steering # To fit: Slide module 2 in the centre console # Select á Connect device - no device con-
wheel for at least five seconds. stowage compartment up into bracket 1 nected.
The test mode is started and automatically until it audibly engages.
ends after the language test has been per‐ # Select Connect MB SAP module.
formed.
# To remove: press release knob 3. # Press button 2.
To end the test mode manually: switch off
# Slide module 2 down and remove it.
# # As soon as indicator lamp 1 starts flashing
the ignition. Connecting, activating and deactivating the yellow, release the button.
The test mode is ended. telephone module # Select Start search and confirm.
Requirement: # Select OK.
The module is fitted (→ page 332).
 Multimedia system 333

Activating the telephone module # To insert a SIM card: insert SIM card 1 A list of mobile phones which are compatible
# Select á Connect device - Mobile phone. into the card slot with the contact surface with the telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP
facing down until it engages. profile) can be found at:
# Select Activate MB SAP module and confirm.
A Bluetooth® connection with a mobile http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect.
Disconnecting the telephone module phone is no longer possible.
Multimedia system:
# Select á Connect device - Mobile phone. # To remove a SIM card: press and release , Telephone
# Select ¥. SIM card 1.
The SIM card is pushed out slightly and can Searching for a mobile phone
# Select Disconnect MB SAP module.
then be removed. # á Connect device - no device connected
# Select Yes.
Establishing a connection between the # Select Connect new device.
Inserting/removing a SIM card mobile phone and telephone module # Select Connect SAP telephone and confirm.
Requirements: # Select Start search.
R The telephone module is fitted (→ page 332) Detected mobile phones are displayed.
and activated (→ page 332).
Authorising and connecting a mobile phone
R Terminate the active Bluetooth® connection
# Select the mobile phone.
of the mobile phone.
# Enter a random 16-digit PIN and confirm.
R Use the telephone module without the SIM
card. # Enter and confirm the same PIN on the
mobile phone.
Depending on the type, settings must also be
# If necessary, enter the SIM card PIN.
made on the mobile phone (see the manufactur‐
er's operating instructions).
334 Multimedia system

Observe the following notes: Multimedia system: Storing the SIM card PIN in the telephone
R a mobile phone which has already been , Telephone . á Connect device - module
authorised is automatically connected. Mobile phone Multimedia system:
, Telephone . á Connect device - no
R the multimedia system always searches for # Select the mobile phone on the SAP module
the last connected mobile phone. If this is device list. device connected . SIM Card
not available, the previously connected The mobile phone is searched for and con‐ # Select ¥.
mobile phone is searched for. nected if it is within Bluetooth® range and if # Switch Store PIN on O.
R only one mobile phone can be connected to Bluetooth® is activated.
the module at any one time. Telephone module settings
# Confirm the module's connection request on

Switching to the mobile phone on the tele‐ the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's Settings for using the telephone module with
phone module operating instructions). the mobile phone
# Where necessary, enter the SIM card PIN Num‐ Function
Requirement: into the multimedia system and confirm.
You can only switch to another authorised ber
mobile phone if you are not currently making a The currently connected mobile phone is indica‐ 00031 Activates caller ID transmission
call. ted by the # dot in the Bluetooth® phone list.
A maximum of 15 mobile phones can be author‐ 00030 Deactivates caller ID transmission
ised on the module. 00061 Activates data roaming
00060 Deactivates data roaming
00071 Activates network provider restric‐
tion
 Multimedia system 335

Transferring the phone book via the tele‐ R depending on the mobile phone, text mes‐
00070 Deactivates network provider
phone module sages are not directly visible and must first
restriction
The transfer takes place automatically once a be selected (see the manufacturer's operat‐
00081 Activates text message transfer connection has been established via Bluetooth®: ing instructions).
00080 Deactivates text message transfer R If the mobile phone supports the PBAP A list of mobile phones which are compatible
(Phone Book Access Profile), the system with the telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP
00082 Sets situation-related dimming of gives priority to loading phone book entries profile) can be found on the Internet at:
the indicator lamp from the phone memory. http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
00083 Does not change the brightness of R If there are no entries in the phone memory,
the phone book entries from the SIM card Deleting call lists in the telephone module
the indicator lamp Call lists are only available in the telephone mod‐
are imported.
Setting the ringtone for the telephone mod‐ ule if the connected mobile phone supports the
ule A list of compatible mobile phones can be found Bluetooth® PAP (Phonebook Access Profile) pro‐
Multimedia system: at: file.
, Telephone . á Connect device - http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect Deleting call lists
Mobile phone Notes on receiving text messages when Number Function
# Highlight a mobile phone. using the telephone module
Observe the following notes when using the tele‐ 0002 Call lists in the tele‐
# Select ¥.
phone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile): phone module are
# Select Ringtones. deleted
R it is only possible to access the text message
# Select a ringtone.
memory of the SIM card.
The ringtone is played.
R incoming text messages are saved on the
The settings are applied once you exit the
SIM card.
menu.
336 Multimedia system

Terminating the connection between the Charging a mobile phone via the telephone Resetting the telephone module to factory
mobile phone and the telephone module module settings
There are two ways of disconnecting the
mobile phone and module:
Automatic discon‐ Occurs after leaving
nection the reception range
Manual disconnec‐ Occurs by terminating
tion the Bluetooth® con‐
nection on the mobile
phone (see the manu‐
facturer's operating
instructions) # Slide and remove module cover 2. # Press and hold button 2 on the module.
# Connect the mobile phone using a data cable # As soon as indicator lamp 1 lights up
with USB port 1. orange, release button 2.
# Press button 2 again.

Apple CarPlay™
Overview of Apple CarPlay™
iPhone® functions can be used via the multime‐
dia system using Apple CarPlay™. It is operated
using the controller or the Siri® voice-operated
control system.
 Multimedia system 337

Only one mobile phone at a time can be connec‐ Multimedia system: Exiting Apple CarPlay™
ted via Apple CarPlay™ to the multimedia sys‐ , Connect . Apple CarPlay # Select Ú in Apple CarPlay™.
tem.
While using Apple CarPlay™, various functions of Setting automatic or manual start Calling up Apple CarPlay™ tone settings
the multimedia system, e.g. the navigation, are A message appears when connected for the first Multimedia system:
not available. time. , Connect . Apple CarPlay . Sound
# Automatic start: select Automatically. # Select the tone menu (→ page 370).
The availability of Apple CarPlay™ may vary
according to the country. Start automatically is activated O.
Ending Apple CarPlay™
The service provider is responsible for this appli‐ Apple CarPlay™ will now start immediately
Multimedia system:
cation and the services and content connected after the iPhone® is connected to the multi‐
, Connect . Apple CarPlay
to it. media system using a USB cable.
# Manual start: select Manually. # Select Disconnect.
Connecting an iPhone® via Apple CarPlay™ The connection is ended.
# Select the iPhone® in the device list.
Requirements: The mobile phone continues to be supplied
R Apple CarPlay™ can be used with Apple® Accepting/rejecting the data protection reg‐ with electricity.
operating system version iOS 8.3 or above. ulations or
A message with the data protection regulations
R The full range of functions for Apple Car‐ # Disconnect the connecting cable between
appears.
Play™ is only possible with an Internet con‐ the mobile phone and multimedia system.
# Select Accept and start.
nection. Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting
R The iPhone® is connected to the multimedia or the connecting cable only when the vehicle is
system via the USB port ç using a suita‐ # Select Reject and end. stationary.
ble cable (→ page 351). If you selected automatic start, you will have
to start Apple CarPlay™ manually the next
time you want to use it.
338 Multimedia system

Android Auto R The mobile phone supports Android Auto # Select Accept and start.
from Android 5.0. or
Android Auto overview
Mobile phone functions can be used with R The Android Auto App is installed on the # Select Reject and end.
Android Auto using the Android operating sys‐ mobile phone.
tem on the multimedia system. It is operated R In order to use the telephone functions, a Activating automatic start
using the controller or the voice-operated con‐ mobile phone must be connected to the mul‐ # Select Start automatically O.
trol system. timedia system via Bluetooth® (→ page 318). Starting manually
Only one mobile phone at a time can be connec‐ If there was no prior internet connection, this # Select the mobile phone from the device list.
ted via Android Auto® to the multimedia system. is established with the use of the mobile
While using Android Auto™, various functions of phone with Android Auto. Exiting Android Auto
the multimedia system, e.g. the navigation, are R The mobile phone is connected to the multi‐ # Press the ò button.
not available. media system via the USB port ç using a
suitable cable (→ page 351). Calling up the Android Auto tone settings
The availability of Android Auto® and Android Multimedia system:
Auto® Apps may vary according to the country. R The full range of functions for Android Auto is , Connect . Android Auto . Sound
The service provider is responsible for this appli‐ only possible with an Internet connection.
# Select the tone menu (→ page 370).
cation and the services and content connected Multimedia system:
to it. , Connect . Android Auto Ending Android Auto
Connecting a mobile phone via Android Auto Multimedia system:
# Select the mobile phone from the device list.
, Connect . Android Auto
Requirements: Accepting/rejecting the data protection reg‐ # Select Disconnect.
R The first activation of Android Auto on the ulations The connection is ended.
multimedia system must be carried out when A message with the data protection regulations
the vehicle is stationary for safety reasons. appears.
 Multimedia system 339

The mobile phone continues to be supplied To do this, and to assign several vehicles to the This data is only transferred while the navigation
with electricity. mobile phone, a vehicle ID is randomly gener‐ system is active in order to improve it (e.g. so it
or ated. can continue functioning when in a tunnel).
# Disconnect the connecting cable between This has no connection to the vehicle identifica‐ If you do not consent to vehicle data being trans‐
the mobile phone and multimedia system. tion number (VIN) and is deleted when the multi‐ ferred, you can deactivate the automatic start of
Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting media system is reset (→ page 294). Android Auto™ (→ page 338) or Apple CarPlay™
the connecting cable only when the vehicle is Driving status data: (→ page 337) and temporarily terminate the USB
stationary. connection between the mobile phone and the
R transmission position engaged
vehicle.
R distinction between parked, standstill, rolling
Transferred vehicle data when using Apple and driving
CarPlay™ and Android Auto R day/night mode of the instrument cluster
Online and Internet functions
Notes on transferred vehicle data Internet connection
The transfer of this data is used to alter how
When using Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay™, content is displayed to correspond to the driving Internet connection restrictions
certain vehicle data is transferred to the mobile situation.
phone. This enables you to get the best out of & WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
selected mobile phone services. Vehicle data is Position data:
mation systems and communications
not directly accessible. R co-ordinates equipment
System information: R speed
If you operate information and communica‐
R software release of the multimedia system R compass direction tions equipment integrated in the vehicle
R system ID (anonymised) R acceleration direction when driving, you will be distracted from the
traffic situation. This could also cause you to
The transfer of this data is used to optimise lose control of the vehicle.
communication between the vehicle and the
mobile phone.
340 Multimedia system

# Only operate this equipment when the The Internet functions can only be used to a limi‐ The Internet connection via Wi-Fi may be restric‐
traffic situation permits. ted degree whilst driving. ted or not function if:
# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the Internet connection via communication mod‐ R the mobile phone is switched off
vehicle whilst paying attention to road ule R mobile data use is deactivated on the mobile
and traffic conditions and operate the On vehicles with a built-in communication mod‐ phone
equipment with the vehicle stationary. ule, the Internet connection is established via an R the Wi-Fi function is deactivated on the multi‐
integrated SIM card. media system
You must observe the legal requirements for the If the data volume limit is reached, the availabil‐ R the Wi-Fi function is deactivated on the exter‐
country in which you are currently driving when ity of Mercedes me connect services is limited.
operating the multimedia system. nal device
The data volume must be purchased on
R Internet access via Wi-Fi is deactivated on
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, you can Mercedes me connect.
establish an Internet connection in the following the external device
ways: Setting up an Internet connection via Wi-Fi
Multimedia system:
R Vehicles with a communication module: Requirements: , System . ö Connectivity . Inter-
Internet use including Mercedes me connect R Activate the Wi-Fi function on the multimedia
net settings . Search for Wi-Fi networks
services and data roaming (→ page 340). system (→ page 288).
# Select network.
R Vehicles without a communication mod‐ R Activate the Wi-Fi function on the external
# Logging in to Wi-Fi network (→ page 288).
ule: device (see the manufacturer's operating
instructions). Setting up an Internet connection via Blue‐
- via Bluetooth® with a data-enabled
mobile phone (→ page 340) R Activate Internet access via Wi-Fi (see the tooth®
manufacturer's operating instructions).
- via Wi-Fi with a data-enabled mobile Requirements:
phone (→ page 340) R Connect a mobile phone to the multimedia
- via the telephone module with SAP system via Bluetooth® (→ page 318).
 Multimedia system 341

R If you use the telephone module for Internet R neither the mobile phone network nor the Bluetooth® connection via DUN
functions, you require a SIM card in the tele‐ mobile phone allow simultaneous use of a # Select the mobile phone.
phone module or a Bluetooth®-capable SAP phone and an Internet connection
# To select the predefined access data of
mobile phone. R the mobile phone has not been enabled for the mobile phone network provider: select
To connect via Bluetooth®, the mobile phone Internet access via Bluetooth® Predefined settings.
must support one of the following Bluetooth® If a mobile phone is connected to the multimedia A list of countries appears.
profiles: system for the first time via Bluetooth®, you will # Select the country of your mobile phone net‐
R DUN (Dial-Up Networking) be assisted through the process of setting up an work provider.
R PAN (Personal Area Network) Internet connection. The list of available providers appears.
The Internet connection can also be configured # Select your mobile phone network provider.
The Internet connection via Bluetooth® may be manually. When an overview of the provider settings
restricted or not function if: appears, make the necessary settings.
Further information can be obtained at http://
R the mobile phone is switched off www.mercedes-benz.com/connect or from a # Select Confirm settings.
R the mobile phone network coverage is insuf‐ Mercedes-Benz service centre. # To manually set the access data of the
ficient Multimedia system: mobile phone network provider: select
R mobile data use is deactivated on the mobile , System . ö Connectivity . Inter- Manual settings.
phone net settings An overview of the provider settings appears.
R the Bluetooth® function is switched off on # Set access data.
the multimedia system and the desired Bluetooth® connection via PAN # Select Confirm settings.
phone is to be connected via Bluetooth® # Select the mobile phone.

R the Bluetooth® function is switched off on

The Internet connection is established.
the mobile phone and the phone is to be con‐
nected via Bluetooth®
342 Multimedia system

% Set the access data in accordance with your # Select ¥. Cancelling Internet access permission for a
data package. Otherwise, additional costs # Select Change configuration. mobile phone
may occur. You can contact your mobile Multimedia system:
phone network provider to obtain the precise # Deactivate ª Automatic configuration. , System . ö Connectivity . Inter-
access data. # Select Configure settings using COMAND. net settings
Switching the Bluetooth® profile # Configure the Internet connection using pre‐ # Highlight a mobile phone.
set or manual access data (→ page 340)
# Select ¥.
Requirement:
The mobile phone supports the DUN and PAN Editing the access data # Select Delete configuration.
Bluetooth® profiles. Requirement: # Select Yes.
Multimedia system: The mobile phone supports the Bluetooth® DUN
profile. Displaying mobile phone details
, System . ö Connectivity . Inter-
Multimedia system:
net settings Multimedia system:
, System . ö Connectivity . Inter-
, System . ö Connectivity . Inter-
# To switch from DUN to PAN: select mobile net settings
phone. net settings
# Highlight a mobile phone.
# Select ¥. # Highlight a mobile phone.
# Select ¥.
# Select Change configuration. # Select ¥.
# Select Details.
# Activate O Automatic configuration. # Select Change configuration.

The Internet connection is automatically con‐ # For mobile phones with PAN and DUN: Establishing an Internet connection
figured using the PAN Bluetooth® profile. select Configure settings using COMAND. Multimedia system:
, Connect
# To switch from PAN to DUN: select mobile # Configure the Internet connection using pre‐
phone. set or manual access data (→ page 340) # For example, select z Browser.
 Multimedia system 343

% The multimedia system usually establishes Displaying the connection status % The available features are country-depend‐
the Internet connection automatically. If the Multimedia system: ent.
multimedia system is not connected to the , System . ö Connectivity Licence fees may be applicable.
Internet, the Internet connection is estab‐
lished when an Internet application is used.
# Select Internet status. Using Mercedes-Benz Apps voice control
% When connected via Wi-Fi or a Bluetooth® Requirements:
Connection status device, the approximate data volume trans‐ R Register to use Mercedes-Benz Apps.
mitted is displayed. The exact values can be R Confirm the general terms and conditions.
Overview of connection status requested from your mobile phone network
provider. R The o symbol indicates that a Mercedes-
Benz App can be used via voice control.
Mercedes-Benz Apps # Call up the Mercedes-Benz App
(→ page 343).
Calling up Mercedes-Benz Apps The basic menu for the App is displayed.
Requirements: # To use voice control: select o Language.
R Register to use Mercedes-Benz Apps.
# Say your question or command.
R Confirm the general terms and conditions.
% Voice control is not available in all countries
Multimedia system: and languages.
, Connect . Ú MB Apps
1 Display of existing connection and reception
field strength of the communication module # Select the App.

or of the connected Bluetooth® device Further Mercedes-Benz Apps and information

can be obtained at: http://apps.mercedes-
benz.com/apps/
344 Multimedia system

Web browser Overview of the web browser Calling up the web browser options
Multimedia system:
Calling up a website
, Con-
Multimedia system:
, Con- nect . z Browser . Z Options
nect . z Browser . z Enter URL The following functions are available:
# Entering a web address R Bookmarks

# To finish entry and call up a website: R Zoom

select ¬. R Browser settings
% Websites cannot be shown while the vehicle R Delete browser data
is in motion.
# Select an option.
1 URL entry
2
# Change the settings.
Web page, back
3 Web page, forwards Calling up the web browser settings
4 To refresh/stop Multimedia system:
5 , Con-
Options
6 To close the browser nect . z Browser . Z Options . Bro
wser settings
The following functions are available:
R Block popups
R Enable Javascript
R Enable cookies
 Multimedia system 345

R Smartscroll Setting Internet favourites Closing the browser

Multimedia system: Multimedia system:
# Switch the function on O or off ª. , Con- , Connect . z Browser
Deleting Internet history nect . z Browser . Z Options . Bo # Select å Close browser.
Multimedia system: okmarks
, Con-
nect . z Browser . Z Options . Del Selecting favourites Internet radio
ete browser data # Select bookmarks. Calling up the Internet radio
The following options are available: Creating favourites Requirements:
R All # Select Add new bookmark. R There is an account on http://
R Cache # Enter URL and name. www.mercedes.me.
# Select ¡.
R The Internet radio service is activated.
R Cookies
R The data volume is available.
R Entered URLs Editing favourites
R Form data Depending on the country, data volume may
# Select bookmarks.
need to be purchased.
# Select an option. # Select Edit.
R A fast Internet connection for data transmis‐
# Select Yes. # Enter URL and name. sion free of interference.
# Select ¡. The services are country-dependent.
Deleting favourites For more information, consult a Mercedes-
Benz service centre.
# Select Delete.

# Select Yes.
346 Multimedia system

Multimedia system: Internet radio overview Selecting and connecting to Internet radio
, Radio . Ý Internet radio stations
Multimedia system:
# Select TuneIn radio.
, Radio . Ý Internet radio . TuneIn
The Internet radio display appears. The last
station set starts playing. radio . è Search
% The connection quality depends on the local # Select a category.

mobile phone reception. # Select a station.

The connection is established automatically.
or
# Select Search.

# Enter the station name using the entry field.

% A relatively large volume of data can be

transmitted when using Internet radio.
Saving/deleting Internet radio stations as
favourites
1 Internet radio provider Multimedia system:
2 Selected category , Radio . Ý Internet radio . TuneIn
3 Display (if connected to private user radio
account) # Select a station.
4 Data rate
5 Current station is stored as a favourite
6 Additional information on the current station
 Multimedia system 347

# Press and hold the touchpad or controller Setting the Internet radio options traffic conditions. This could also cause you
until an audible signal sounds. Multimedia system: to lose control of the vehicle.
The ß symbol appears by the station , Radio . Ý Internet radio . TuneIn
# Only handle a data storage medium
name. radio . Z Options when the vehicle is stationary.
# Select ß Favourites. The following options are available:
The list of saved favourite stations appears. Permissible file systems:
R Select stream: select the stream quality.
or R FAT32
R Login to TuneIn account: login to your TuneIn
# Create an account for the online provider user account. R exFAT
(TuneIn radio) and then log in on the multi‐
R Log out of account: log out of your TuneIn R NTFS
media system.
Your favourites are imported to the multime‐ user account. Permissible data storage medium:
dia system. # Select an option. R SD card
Deleting favourites R USB storage device
# Select ß Favourites. Media R iPod/iPhone
# Select a station. Audio mode R MTP devices
# Press and hold the touchpad or controller R Bluetooth® audio equipment
Information on audio mode
until an audible signal sounds.
The ß symbol by the station name disap‐ % The multimedia system supports a total of
& WARNING Risk of distraction when han‐ up to 50,000 files.
pears. dling data storage medium
Supported formats:
If you handle a data storage medium while
R MP3
driving, your attention is diverted from the
R WMA
348 Multimedia system

R AAC formats Gracenote, the Gracenote logo and the lettering

R WAV (up to 16-bit resolution) are brands or registered brands of Gracenote,
Inc. in the USA and/or other countries.
R FLAC (up to 16-bit resolution)
R ALAC (up to 16-bit resolution) Notes on copyright
Audio files that you create or reproduce yourself
% Observe the following notes: for playback are generally subject to copyright
R Due to the large variety of available protection. In many countries, reproductions,
music files regarding encoders, sampling even for private use, are not permitted without
rates and bit rates, playback cannot the prior consent of the copyright holder. Make
always be guaranteed. sure that you know about the applicable copy‐
Produced under licence by Dolby Laboratories. right regulations and that you comply with these.
R Due to the wide range of USB devices Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks
available on the market, playback cannot of Dolby Laboratories. Activating media mode
be guaranteed for all USB devices. Multimedia system:
R Copy-protected music files or DRM , Media . à Devices
encrypted files cannot be played back. # Select the media source.
R MP3 players must support Media Trans‐ Playable music files are played back.
fer Protocol (MTP).
Inserting/removing an SD card

& DANGER Risk of fatal injury from swal‐

lowing SD cards
SD cards are small parts.
 Multimedia system 349

They could be swallowed and lead to chok‐ # Remove the SD memory card after use # Insert the SD memory card into the SD card
ing. and take it out of the vehicle. slot until it engages. The side with the con‐
tacts must face downwards.
# Keep SD cards out of the reach of chil‐
Multimedia system: Playable music files are played back.
dren.
, Media . à Devices . Memory card Removing
# Seek medical attention immediately if
an SD card has been swallowed. Inserting # Press the SD card.
The multimedia connection unit is located in the # Remove the SD card.
* NOTE Damage caused by high tempera‐ stowage compartment under the armrest.
tures
High temperatures can damage the SD mem‐
ory card.
350 Multimedia system

Overview of the audio mode

1 Active data storage medium 5 Search 9 Options

2 Album cover 6 Devices A Information on media (Owner's Manual)
3 Track, artist, album 7 Sound (tone settings)
4 Track number and number of tracks in the 8 Full screen (for video playback)
track list
 Multimedia system 351

Connecting USB devices Selecting a track # Select Normal track sequence.

Multimedia system: The current track list is played in the order it
* NOTE Damage caused by high tempera‐ , Media appears on the data storage medium.
tures # Select Random playback of the current track
Via the skip function
High temperatures can damage USB devices. list.
# To skip backwards or forwards to a track: The current track list is played in random
# Remove the USB device after use and
navigate up or down. order.
take it out of the vehicle.
Via the current track list # Select Random playback of the current
The multimedia connection unit is found in the # Select è. medium.
stowage compartment under the armrest and All tracks on the active data storage medium
# Select Current track list.
has two USB ports. Depending on the vehicle's are played in random order.
equipment, additional USB ports may be found # Select a track.
% The available playback options depend on
in the stowage compartment of the centre con‐ Selecting playback options the connected media source.
sole or rear folding compartment.
Multimedia system: Pause and playback function
# Connect the USB device to the USB port.
, Media . Z Options Multimedia system:
Playable music files are played back only if
, Media
the corresponding media display is activated. Playing back similar tracks
# Press the touchpad.
% Use the USB port identified by ç to use # Select Play similar tracks.
Apple CarPlay™ and Android Auto™. A track list with similar tracks is created and # To pause playback: select Ë.
played back. # To continue playback: select Ì.

Playback mode Fast forward/rewind

# Select Play mode. # Press the touchpad.

# Slide the controller to the left or right 1.

352 Multimedia system

Video mode % The multimedia system supports the follow‐ Due to the large variety of available video
ing formats: files regarding encoders, sampling rates and
Switching to video mode
R MPEG data transfer rates, playback cannot always
Multimedia system: be guaranteed.
, Media . à Devices R AVI, DivX, MKV
% Copy-protected video files or DRM (Digital
# Select a data storage medium. R MP4, M4V
Rights Management) encrypted files cannot
Playable video files are played back. R WMV be played back
 Multimedia system 353

Overview of video mode

1 Active data storage medium 5 Search 9 Options

2 Video playback 6 Devices A Information on media (Owner's Manual)
3 Title and scene 7 Sound (tone settings)
4 Track number and number of tracks in the 8 Full screen
track list
354 Multimedia system

Activating/deactivating full-screen mode Adjusting the brightness manually R Videos

Multimedia system: # Select Brightness. R Podcasts (Apple® devices)
, Media . à Devices
# Adjust the brightness. R Audiobooks (Apple® devices)
# Select a data storage medium.
Playable video files are played back. # Select a category.
Media search
# To activate full-screen mode: select # % The categories are available as soon as the
Full screen. Starting the media search entire media content has been read and ana‐
Multimedia system: lysed.
# To deactivate full-screen mode: press the
, Media . ª Search
touchpad.
Depending on the connected media sources and Media Interface
Changing video settings files, the following categories are listed:
Multimedia system: Information about the Media Interface
R Current track list Media Interface is a universal interface for the
, Media . Z Options . Video set-
R Keyword search connection of mobile audio equipment. The mul‐
tings timedia system has two USB ports. The USB
R Playlists
The following picture formats are available: ports are located in the stowage compartment
R Artists under the armrest.
R Automatic
R Albums
R 16:9 Supported devices
R Tracks
R 4:3 The Media Interface allows you to connect the
R Folder following data storage media:
R Zoom
R Music genres R iPod®
# Select the picture format. R Year
R iPhone®
R Composers
R MP3 player
 Multimedia system 355

R USB devices Switching to Media Interface # Select the media device.

Multimedia system: Playable music files are played back.
For details and a list of supported devices, visit
, Media . à Devices
our website at http://www.mercedes-
benz.com/connect. Follow the instructions in # Connect the data storage medium with the
the "Media Interface" section. USB port (→ page 351).
356 Multimedia system

Overview of Media Interface

1 Active data storage medium 5 Search 9 Options

2 Cover 6 Devices A Information on media (Owner's Manual)
3 Artist, title and album 7 Sound (tone settings)
4 Track number and number of tracks in the 8 Full screen
track list

Bluetooth® audio Information about Bluetooth® audio

 Multimedia system 357

Before using your Bluetooth® audio equipment

with the multimedia system for the first time,
you will need to authorise it (→ page 358).

Bluetooth® Audio overview

1 Active data storage medium 4 Search 7 Options

2 Cover 5 Devices 8 Owner's Manual
3 Artist, title and album 6 Tone settings
358 Multimedia system

Searching for and authorising the Bluetooth® # Select Start search. # Select Search from device.
audio equipment The multimedia system searches for Blue‐ # Start the authorisation on your Bluetooth®
tooth® audio equipment within range and audio equipment (see the manufacturer's
Requirements:
adds them to the Bluetooth® device list. operating instructions).
Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia sys‐
tem (→ page 288). # Select Bluetooth® audio equipment. A code is displayed on the multimedia sys‐
Authorisation starts. tem and on the mobile phone.
Check your Bluetooth® audio equipment for the
A code is displayed on the multimedia sys‐ # If the codes are identical, confirm on both
following (see the manufacturer's operating
instructions): tem and on the mobile phone. devices by pressing Yes.
After successful authorisation, the Blue‐
R the Bluetooth® audio equipment must sup‐ # Confirm on the Bluetooth® audio equipment
tooth® audio equipment is connected and
port the A2DP and AVRCP Bluetooth® audio if the codes are identical.
starts playing.
profiles After successful authorisation, the Blue‐
tooth® audio equipment is connected and With some Bluetooth® audio equipment, play‐
R the Bluetooth® function must be activated
starts playing. back must be initially started on the device itself
R the Bluetooth® audio equipment must be so that the multimedia system can play the
"visible" for other devices Selecting Bluetooth® audio equipment that audio files.
has already been authorised
Multimedia system: % Device-specific information on authorising
# Select ¥.
, Media . à Devices . á Blue- and connecting Bluetooth®-capable mobile
# Select Bluetooth® audio equipment. phones can be obtained at http://
tooth audio www.mercedes-benz.com/connect or from a
Establishing a connection from the Blue‐
Authorising new Bluetooth® audio equipment Mercedes-Benz service centre.
tooth® audio equipment
# Select ¥. The Bluetooth® device name of the multimedia
# Select Add new Bluetooth audio device. system is MB BLUETOOTH XXXXX.
 Multimedia system 359

Activating Bluetooth® audio If the mobile phone is authorised on the mul‐ Radio
Multimedia system: timedia system as Bluetooth® audio equip‐ Switching on the radio
, Media . à Devices ment for the first time, it is connected after
confirming the instructions for the mobile Multimedia system:
# Select á Bluetooth audio.
phone (see the manufacturer's operating , Radio
The multimedia system activates the connec‐ instructions).
ted Bluetooth® audio equipment. # Alternatively: press the $ button.
De-authorising (de-registering) Bluetooth® The radio display appears. You will hear the
Switching Bluetooth® audio equipment via audio equipment last station played on the last frequency
NFC Multimedia system: band selected.
Requirements: , Telephone . á Connect device -
Observe the notes on using NFC (→ page 319). Mobile phone
The Bluetooth® audio overview is displayed # Select Bluetooth® audio equipment.
(→ page 359). # Select ¥ De-authorise.
# Lightly press the NFC area on the mobile
# Select Yes.
phone (see the manufacturer's operating
instructions).
If the mobile phone has already been author‐
ised on the multimedia system as Bluetooth®
audio equipment, it is now connected.
360 Multimedia system

Radio overview

1 Active frequency band 4 Search/station list 7 Internet radio

2 Station name 5 Presets 8 Sound (tone settings)
3 Artist, title, album and radio text 6 Waveband 9 Options
 Multimedia system 361

Setting the frequency band Searching for radio stations using station # Select Delete highlighted station.
names or direct frequency entry Select Yes.
Multimedia system: #

, Radio . Þ Waveband Multimedia system: Moving stations:

, Radio . è . è
# Select a frequency band. # Highlight the preset entry and navigate to the
# Enter a station name or frequency. left.
Selecting a radio station # Select ¬. # Select Move highlighted station.
Results are displayed. # Select a preset.
Multimedia system:
# Select a station.
, Radio

# Navigate up or down.
Calling up a slide show (FM/DAB radio mode)
Storing radio stations
Multimedia system:
Calling up the radio station list Multimedia system: , Radio . Þ Waveband . FM/DAB
, Radio . ß Presets
radio stations
Multimedia system:
# Select Save current station.
, Radio . è

# Select a station.
Editing radio station presets
Multimedia system:
, Radio . ß Presets

Deleting stations:
# Highlight the preset entry and navigate to the
left.
362 Multimedia system

Slide show 1 displays additional information Tagging music tracks Setting the traffic information service vol‐
provided by the station as an image. This can ume increase
Multimedia system:
include logos, album covers, music tracks, pro‐
grammes, news or service information, for exam‐ , Radio . Z Options # Select Traffic announcements volume
ple. The additional information is shown in full- increase.
If radio stations provide the relevant information,
screen mode by selecting 2. this function allows you to transfer information # Select No increase or a value.
# To activate full-screen mode: select # on the music track currently playing to an
Full screen. Apple® device. You can then purchase the audio Activating/deactivating radio text
# To deactivate full-screen mode: select file from the iTunes Store®.
Multimedia system:
%. # Select Tag this song.
, Radio . Z Options . Display radio
The track information is saved.
text information
Frequency fix function # Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
Switching traffic announcements on/off
Multimedia system:
, Radio . Z Options . Frequency fix Multimedia system:
, System . õ Audio . Traffic
TV
#
announcements Information on TV mode
# Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
If the function is activated, the set frequency # Switch the function on O or off ª. Ubiquitous DTCP-MOST
is kept even if the reception is poor. or Copyright® 2015 Ubiquitous Corp.
# Hold the 8 button on the multifunction The TV tuner enables reception of digital chan‐
steering wheel. nels according to the following standards:
R DVB-T
R DVB-T2
 Multimedia system 363

In some countries, the standards may not be The TV tuner can receive programmes in Dolby TV reception may be impaired due to the follow‐
available, or may not be available in all areas. Digital Plus. ing factors:
A CA module (Conditional Access Module), R electronic devices being transported in the
which is not included in the scope of delivery, is vehicle
used to decrypt HD programmes according to R changing reception conditions while the vehi‐
the CI+ standard. In some countries, an addi‐ cle is in motion
tional smart card is required, which is inserted
into the CA module (see the manufacturer's Poor reception conditions can have the following
operating manual). effect:
The TV tuner is in the boot in the rear bag on the R the TV tuner switches to an alternative chan‐
right-hand side. The CA module is inserted into nel with better reception which is digitally
the TV tuner. broadcasting the same programme content
Produced under licence by Dolby Laboratories. R the TV tuner mutes the sound, freezes the
* NOTE Damage to the CA module and Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks screen or hides it. The t symbol appears
Smart Card of Dolby Laboratories. in the display.
The CA module is designed for use in the The TV tuner automatically sets the TV standard.
home. When used on the move, the CA mod‐ TV reception is dependent on the following fac‐ Switching to TV mode
ule may overheat in consistently high outside tors:
temperatures and may be damaged. Multimedia system:
R speed , Media . à Devices
# Make sure that the CA module is not
subject to high temperatures for exten‐ R characteristics of the selected TV channel # Select TV.
ded periods of time. The TV picture appears. If available, the
If the CA module is damaged, no channel and programme information is dis‐
encrypted channels can be received. played.
364 Multimedia system

If the vehicle is travelling faster than 5 km/h driver. If available, the channel and pro‐
the television picture is hidden from the gramme information is continuously dis‐
played.
TV mode overview

1 Active media source 3 Current programme with start and finish 4 Station lists
2 Channel name times 5 Presets
 Multimedia system 365

6 Devices 8 Sound
7 Streaming services 9 Full screen

Displays in the TV control menu Showing/hiding the TV menu Selecting TV channels from the channel list
Multimedia system:
The following information is displayed: Requirement: , Media . à Devi-
R current TV channel with ß symbol (if the The TV is shown in full screen.
channel has been saved as a favourite) ces . TV . ª Station lists
# To show: press the touchpad.
# Select TV channels.
R current programme with start and finish # Navigate to the left.
times # Select a TV channel.
# To hide: select Full screen in the list.
R FIX The TV tuner selects the channel from the
channel list. The control menu appears for
Channel fix, description of the function Selecting TV channels approximately twelve seconds.
(→ page 366)
Activating/deactivating channel fix Selecting TV channels from the control menu Searching for a TV channel
(→ page 366) Multimedia system: # Select TV channels.
, Media . à Devices . TV
R symbols, for example: # Select ª Search.
# Swipe up or down on the touchpad. # Select v on the touchpad.
p Teletext
The TV tuner sets the previous/next channel
z Audio languages available # Write characters on the touchpad.
from the channel list. The control menu
r Encrypted channel appears for eight seconds. # Select a TV channel.

Selecting a TV channel from the favourites

Requirement:
The TV channel has been saved in the favourites.
366 Multimedia system

Multimedia system: Displaying current programme information regions that overlap. It prevents frequent switch‐
, Media . à Devi- for the selected channel (EPG) ing back and forth between channels.
ces . TV . ß Favourites Multimedia system: The FIX indicator is displayed after the name of
, Media . à Devi- the TV channel.
# Select a TV channel.
ces . TV . Z Options
Selecting TV channels in the background The function is switched off
# Select Electronic Program Guide. Depending on reception quality, the TV tuner
Situation: EPG displays the following information (if automatically switches to an alternative channel
R the navigation system is active, for example available): with the same programme content but better
R TV mode is switched on in the background R broadcast times
reception. Using this function, the best possible
and the sound from the selected TV channel television picture can be found, regardless of the
R the names of the current and upcoming reception quality.
can be heard programmes
# Press the D button on the touchpad. # Select programme information and confirm.
Activating/deactivating channel fix
The media menu is called up. The details are displayed. Multimedia system:
, Media . à Devi-
# Navigate up or down. # To scroll: swipe up or down on the touch‐
The next or previous TV channel is selected. pad. ces . TV . Z Options
# Activate O or deactivate ª Station fix.
# To exit the detailed display: press the %
button. Activated: automatic switching of channels is
prevented. TV channels are indicated with
Channel fix FIX.
The function is switched on Deactivated: automatic switching is possible.
The channel is not changed. This is useful if, for
example, you drive the vehicle through reception
 Multimedia system 367

Channel list overview Quick-saving a TV channel Deleting stations

Multimedia system: # Highlight a channel in the favourites.
The TV tuner shows the current programme on
, Media . à Devices . TV
the digital TV channels or radio stations with # Select ¥ Delete highlighted station.
adequate reception in its own channel list. # In full-screen mode, press the touchpad for
# Select Yes.
The order of the channel lists is alphabetical or longer than three seconds.
country-specific. The current TV channel is stored in the Using a voice tag
favourites in the next available position. Multimedia system:
The TV tuner requires a short amount of time to
, Media . à Devi-
update the information. Storing TV channels
Multimedia system: ces . TV . ß Favourites
The channel lists show the following information:
, Media . à Devi- # Highlight a TV channel in the favourites.
R receivable channel names
R program title
ces . TV . ß Favourites # Select ¥ Voice tag .

# Select Save current station. # Alternatively: use a voice tag in the channel
The information is shown under the following The current channel is stored in the favour‐ list.
conditions: ites in the next available position.
R it is broadcast by the digital channel
Creating a voice tag
# Alternatively: highlight the channel in the
# Select Add.
R the reception conditions are adequate channel list and store as a favourite.
# Say a voice tag.
Moving channels in the favourites A message appears when the voice tag has
Favourites # Highlight a channel in the favourites. been created.
Overview of favourites # Select ¥ Move highlighted station.
Listening to a voice tag
You can create a total of 40 digital TV channel # Highlight the new position.
favourites. # Select Listen.
# Confirm the position.
368 Multimedia system

Deleting a voice tag If a symbol is not shown, the programme is # Select Show subtitles.
# Select Delete. either broadcast in mono or the transmission The subtitles are switched on O or off ª.
A message appears asking whether you want properties are unknown. # Select one of the available languages for the
to delete the voice tag for the TV channel. Subtitles subtitles.
# Select Yes. The language selected only applies to the
R The function is switched on:
current programme.
Subtitles are shown in the selected language
TV programme for the current programme (if available).
Teletext
Audio language and subtitles Setting the audio language
Multimedia system: Teletext overview
Audio language Teletext pages are located between page 100
, Media . à Devi-
R It is possible to choose between several and page 899.
audio languages when a programme is broad‐ ces . TV . Z Options
A dynamic teletext page consists of several sub‐
cast in multiple languages. # Select Audio/subtitles. pages.
R If, for example, English is set as the system # Select one of the available audio languages. Information on MHEG-5 digital teletext:
language and a TV channel is broadcasting in The audio language selected only applies to
this language, English is selected automati‐ R digital teletext is only available in some coun‐
the current programme. tries, e.g. the UK and New Zealand
cally.
R The programme transmission may be indica‐
Setting subtitles R interactive multimedia applications such as
ted with the following symbols: Multimedia system: weather forecasts, news reports and sport
, Media . à Devi- results are available
m Programme with audio explanations for
the visually impaired ces . TV . Z Options R it may take some time before all the pages
# Select Audio/subtitles. load
o Stereo broadcast
n Programme for the hard of hearing
 Multimedia system 369

Displaying teletext # Select Red, Green, Yellow or Blue. # Select the picture format.
Multimedia system: The data content is displayed.
, Media . à Devi- To enter numbers: select 123.
# HD programmes
ces . TV . p Teletext # Enter the numbers in quick succession. Inserting the CA module
# To call up the previous or next teletext # To return to the TV programme: select TV.
page: swipe upwards or downwards on the * NOTE Damage to the CA module and
touchpad. Smart Card
Picture settings
# To enter numbers: press and hold the
Picture settings overview The CA module is designed for use in the
touchpad. home. When used on the move, the CA mod‐
# Enter the numbers in quick succession. The following picture format settings are availa‐ ule may overheat in consistently high outside
# To select a subpage: swipe left or right on ble: temperatures and may be damaged.
the touchpad. R Automatic # Make sure that the CA module is not

% The subpage currently selected is marked by R 16:9 subject to high temperatures for exten‐
a blue symbol. R 4:3 ded periods of time.
If the CA module is damaged, no
# To return to the TV programme: press and R Zoom encrypted channels can be received.
hold the % button. The brightness is automatically set.
MHEG-5 digital teletext The TV tuner is in the boot in the rear bag on the
Selecting picture settings right-hand side.
# If the teletext is displayed, press and hold on Multimedia system: # If required (country-dependent): insert the
the touchpad. , Media . à Devi-
A colour selection bar appears. Smart Card into the CA module slot.
ces . TV . Z Options # Remove the protective cap from the TV tuner.
# Select Picture format. # Insert the CA module into the TV tuner slot.
370 Multimedia system

# Replace the protective cap on the TV tuner. Calling up the sound menu Burmester® surround sound system
When the CA module is inserted correctly, Multimedia system:
encrypted HD programmes can be received , Media . à Sound
Information about the Burmester® surround
according to CI+ standard. sound system
The following functions are available: The Burmester® surround sound system has a
If the CA module is not compatible, a fault
message appears. R Equaliser total output of 590 watts and is equipped with
R Balance and Fader 13 speakers. It is available for all functions in the
Calling up the CA module menu radio and media modes.
R Other sound settings
Multimedia system:
Calling up the sound menu in the
, Media . à Devi- # Select the sound menu. Burmester® surround sound system
ces . TV . Z Options Adjusting treble, mid and bass settings Multimedia system:
# Select CA module. Multimedia system: , Media . à Sound
# Select a menu option. , Media . à Sound . Equaliser
The following functions are available:
# Select Treble, Mid or Bass. R Equaliser
Sound # Change the settings. R Balance and Fader
Tone settings Adjusting the balance/fader R Surround sound

Information about the sound system Multimedia system: R Sound focus

The sound system has a total output of 100 , Media . à Sound . Balance and R Other sound settings
watts and is equipped with seven speakers. It is Fader
available for all functions in the radio and media # Select the sound menu.
# Adjust the balance and fader.
modes.
# To exit the menu: press the % button.
 Multimedia system 371

Adjusting the treble, mid and bass settings Adjusting the sound focus in the Burmester®
in the Burmester® surround sound system surround sound system
Multimedia system: Multimedia system:
, Media . à Sound . Equaliser , Media . à Sound . Sound focus

# Select Treble, Mid or Bass. # Adjust the focus.

# Change the settings.

Adjusting the balance/fader in the

Burmester® surround sound system
Multimedia system:
, Media . à Sound . Balance and

Fader
# Adjust the balance and fader.

# To exit the menu: press the % button.

Switching surround sound on/off in the

Burmester® surround sound system
Multimedia system:
, Media . à Sound . Surround

sound
# Switch the function on O or off ª.
372 Maintenance and care

ASSYST PLUS service interval display Make sure to observe the following further rela‐ need to be performed more often if the vehicle
ted subject: is operated under arduous conditions or
Function of the ASSYST PLUS service interval increased loads, for example:
display R Operating the on-board computer
(→ page 256). R regular city driving with frequent intermedi‐
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display in the ate stops.
instrument display provides information on the R if the vehicle is primarily used to travel short
remaining time or distance before the next Carrying out service work at regular inter‐
vals distances.
service due date.
R for frequent operation in mountainous terrain
You can hide this service message using the * NOTE Premature wear through failure to or on poor road surfaces.
back button on the left-hand side of the steering observe service due dates
wheel. R if the engine is often left idling for long peri‐
Service work which is not carried out at the ods.
You can obtain further information concerning
the servicing of your vehicle from a qualified right time or incompletely can lead to R in particularly dusty conditions and/or if air-
specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz increased wear and damage to the vehicle. recirculation mode is frequently used.
Service Centre. # Always observe the prescribed service
In these or similar operating conditions, have, for
intervals. example, the interior air filter, engine air filter,
Displaying the service due date # Always have the prescribed service engine oil and oil filter changed more frequently.
work carried out at a qualified specialist The tyres must be checked more frequently if
On-board computer: workshop. the vehicle is operated under increased loads.
, Service . ASSYST PLUS Further information can be obtained at a quali‐
The next service due date is displayed. fied specialist workshop.
Special service requirements
# To exit the display: press the back button
on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. The prescribed service interval is based on nor‐
mal operation of the vehicle. Service work will
 Maintenance and care 373

Battery disconnection periods The active bonnet is not available in all coun‐
tries.
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
can only calculate the service due date when Resetting the active bonnet
the battery is connected.
# Note down the service due date displayed in
& WARNING Danger of burns from hot
the instrument display before disconnecting component parts in the engine compart‐
the battery (→ page 372). ment
Certain component parts in the engine com‐
partment may be very hot, e.g. the engine,
Engine compartment the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. # With your hand flat, push down active bonnet
Active bonnet (pedestrian protection) 1 in the area around the hinges on both
Operation of the active bonnet (pedestrian # Let the engine cool down and only sides (arrows).
protection) touch the component parts described The engine bonnet must engage in position.
In certain accident situations, the risk of injury below: # If the active bonnet can be raised slightly at
to pedestrians can be reduced by the actuation the rear in the area of the hinges, repeat the
of the active bonnet. The rear area of the engine step until it engages correctly in position.
bonnet is raised by approximately 85 mm.
For the drive to the workshop, reset the trig‐
gered active bonnet yourself. If the active bonnet
has been triggered, pedestrian protection may
be limited.
A qualified specialist workshop must re-instate
the full functionality of the active bonnet.
374 Maintenance and care

Opening/closing the bonnet & WARNING Danger of burns when open‐ # Never touch the danger zone surround‐
ing the bonnet ing moving component parts, e.g. the
& WARNING Risk of accident due to driv‐ rotation area of the fan.
ing with the engine bonnet unlocked If you open the engine bonnet when the
engine has overheated or during a fire in the # Remove jewellery and watches.
An unlocked engine bonnet may open up engine compartment, you could come into # Keep items of clothing and hair away
when the vehicle is in motion and block your contact with hot gases or other escaping from moving parts.
view. operating fluids.
# Never unlock the engine bonnet when
# Before opening the bonnet, allow the & WARNING Risk of injury from touching
driving. engine to cool down. component parts under voltage
# Before every trip, ensure that the
# In the event of a fire in the engine com‐
engine bonnet is locked. The ignition system and the fuel injection
partment, keep the engine bonnet system work under high voltage. If you touch
closed and call the fire service. component parts which are under voltage,
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury you could receive an electric shock.
when opening and closing the engine & WARNING Risk of injury due to moving # Never touch components of the ignition
bonnet parts system or the fuel injection system
When opening or closing the engine bonnet, Certain components in the engine compart‐ when the ignition is switched on.
it may suddenly drop into the end position. ment may continue to move or suddenly
There is a risk of injury for anyone in the move again even after the ignition has been & WARNING Danger of burns from hot
engine bonnet's range of movement. switched off, e.g. the cooler fan. component parts in the engine compart‐
# Only open or close the engine bonnet Make sure of the following before performing ment
when there are no persons in the tasks in the engine compartment: Certain component parts in the engine com‐
engine bonnet's range of movement. # Switch the ignition off. partment may be very hot, e.g. the engine,
 Maintenance and care 375

the radiator and parts of the exhaust system.

# Let the engine cool down and only

touch the component parts described
below:

& WARNING Risk of injury from using the

windscreen wipers while the engine bon‐
net is open
When the engine bonnet is open, and the
windscreen wipers are set in motion, you can
be trapped by the wiper linkage.
# Always switch off the windscreen wip‐
ers and ignition before opening the
engine bonnet. # To open: pull lever 1 to release the bonnet. # Push bonnet catch 1 upwards and lift the
bonnet by approximately 40 cm.
# To close: lower the bonnet and let it fall from
a height of approximately 20 cm.
# If the bonnet can still be lifted slightly, open
the bonnet again and close it with a little
more force until it engages correctly.
376 Maintenance and care

Engine oil R Engine not at normal operating temperature # Slowly slide oil dipstick 1 into the guide
(e.g. the engine was only started briefly): 30 tube to the stop, and take it out again after
Checking the engine oil level using the oil
minutes. approximately three seconds.
dipstick
R Oil level is correct: oil level is between 2

& WARNING Danger of burns from hot and 3.

component parts in the engine compart‐ R Oil level too low: oil level is at 3 or
ment below.
R Oil level too high: oil level is above 2.
Certain component parts in the engine com‐
partment may be very hot, e.g. the engine, # If the oil level is too low, top up with 1 l of
the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. engine oil.
# If the oil level is too high, drain off excess
# Let the engine cool down and only engine oil. Consult a qualified specialist
touch the component parts described workshop.
below:
Checking the engine oil level using the on-
Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be board computer (E 220 d)
installed in the engine compartment in different The engine oil level is determined during driving.
locations. The oil level display is only available after a driv‐
ing time of up to 30 minutes and if the ignition is
Waiting time before checking the oil level: # Park the vehicle on a flat surface. switched on, depending on the driving profile.
R Engine at normal operating temperature: five # Remove oil dipstick 1 and wipe off. It is not possible to correctly measure the oil
minutes. level if:
R The vehicle is not level during the measuring
process.
 Maintenance and care 377

R The bonnet was previously opened. off the excess engine oil. Consult a qualified & WARNING Risk of fire and injury from
specialist workshop. engine oil
The engine must be restarted and the engine oil
level will be determined again during driving. # For engine oil level turn on ignition: switch on
the ignition to check the engine oil level. If engine oil comes into contact with hot
On-board computer: component parts in the engine compart‐
, Service . Engine oil level:
# Engine oil level System inoperative: sensor ment, it may ignite.
faulty or not connected. Consult a qualified # Make sure that no engine oil is spilled
You will see one of the following display specialist workshop.
next to the filler opening.
messages in the multifunction display: # Engine oil level System currently unavail.: # Allow the engine to cool off and thor‐
# Engine oil level Measuring now: measure‐ close the engine bonnet.
oughly clean the engine oil from compo‐
ment of the oil level is not yet possible. Topping up engine oil nent parts before starting the vehicle.
Repeat the request after a maximum of 30
minutes' driving. & WARNING Danger of burns from hot
# Engine oil level OK and the bar display for
* NOTE Engine damage caused by an
component parts in the engine compart‐ incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi‐
indicating the oil level in the multifunction ment tives
display is green and is between "min" and
"max": the oil level is correct. Certain component parts in the engine com‐ # Do not use engine oils or oil filters
partment may be very hot, e.g. the engine, which do not correspond to the specifi‐
# Engine oil level Add 1.0 l and the bar display
the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. cations explicitly prescribed for the
for indicating the oil level in the multifunction
display is orange and is below "min": top up service intervals.
with 1 l of engine oil.
# Let the engine cool down and only # Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in
touch the component parts described order to achieve longer change intervals
# Reduce engine oil level and the bar display
below: than prescribed.
for indicating the oil level in the multifunction
display is orange and is above "max": drain # Do not use additives.
378 Maintenance and care

# Follow the instructions in the service Checking the coolant level

interval display regarding the oil
change. & WARNING Danger of burns from hot
component parts in the engine compart‐
ment
* NOTE Damage caused by topping up too
much engine oil Certain component parts in the engine com‐
partment may be very hot, e.g. the engine,
Topping up too much engine oil can cause the radiator and parts of the exhaust system.
damage to the engine or the catalytic con‐
verter.
# Let the engine cool down and only
# Have excess engine oil siphoned off at
touch the component parts described
a qualified specialist workshop. below:

& WARNING Danger of burns from hot

coolant
# Turn cap 1 anti-clockwise and remove it.
The engine cooling system is pressurised,
# Top up the engine oil. particularly when the engine is warm. If you
# Replace cap 1 and turn it clockwise as far open the cap, you could be scalded by hot
as it will go. coolant spraying out.
# Check the oil level again (→ page 376). # Let the motor cool down before opening
the cap.
# When opening the cap, wear gloves and
protective eyewear.
 Maintenance and care 379

# Slowly turn the cap half a turn to allow # Slowly turn cap 1 anti-clockwise to relieve # Let the engine cool down and only
pressure to escape. overpressure. touch the component parts described
# Continue turning cap 1 anti-clockwise and below:
remove it.
The coolant level is correct: & WARNING Danger of burns when open‐
ing the engine bonnet
R If the engine is cold, up to marker bar 2
R If the engine is warm, up to 1.5 cm over If you open the engine bonnet when the
marker bar 2 engine has overheated or during a fire in the
engine compartment, you could come into
# If necessary, top up with coolant that has contact with hot gases or other escaping
been tested and approved by Mercedes- operating fluids.
Benz. # Before opening the engine bonnet,
R Further information on coolant (→ page 440) allow the engine to cool down.
# In the event of a fire in the engine com‐
Topping up the windscreen washer system partment, keep the engine bonnet
closed and call the fire service.
& WARNING Danger of burns from hot
component parts in the engine compart‐ & WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury due to
# Park the vehicle on a flat surface. ment windscreen washer concentrate
# Check the coolant temperature display in the
Certain component parts in the engine com‐ Windscreen washer concentrate is highly
instrument cluster.
partment may be very hot, e.g. the engine, flammable. It could ignite if it comes into
The coolant temperature must be below
the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. contact with hot engine component parts or
70 °C.
the exhaust system.
380 Maintenance and care

# Make sure that no windscreen washer Cleaning and care R The blower for the ventilation/heating is
concentrate spills out next to the filler switched off.
Information on washing the vehicle in a car
opening. wash R The windscreen wiper switch is in position 0.
R In car washes with a towing mechanism: neu‐
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to tral i is engaged.
reduced braking power after washing the R The key is at a distance of at least 3 m away
vehicle from the vehicle, otherwise the tailgate could
Braking efficiency is reduced after washing open unintentionally.
the vehicle. % If, after the car wash, you remove the wax
# After the vehicle has been washed, from the windscreen and wiper rubber, this
brake carefully while paying attention to will prevent smearing and reduce wiper
the traffic conditions until braking noise.
power has been fully restored.

To avoid damage to your vehicle when using a Information on using a high-pressure cleaner
car wash, ensure the following beforehand:
& WARNING Risk of an accident when
R Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and the HOLD
using high-pressure cleaners with circu‐
function are switched off. lar jet nozzles
R The 360° Camera or the reversing camera is
# Remove cap 1 by the tab. The water jet of a circular jet nozzle (dirt
switched off.
# Top up the washer fluid. grinder) can cause externally invisible dam‐
R The side windows and sliding sunroof are age to the tyres or chassis parts.
completely closed.
Components damaged in this way may unex‐
pectedly fail.
 Maintenance and care 381

# Do not use high-pressure cleaners with Maintain a distance of at least 70 cm Washing the vehicle by hand
circular jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. between the foil-covered parts of the vehicle
and the nozzle of the high pressure cleaner. Observe the legal requirements, e.g. in some
# Have damaged tyres or chassis parts Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle countries, washing by hand is only allowed at
replaced immediately. around whilst cleaning. specially equipped washing bays.
# Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car
To avoid damage to your vehicle, observe the fol‐ R Observe the information on the correct dis‐
tance in the equipment manufacturer's oper‐ shampoo.
lowing when using a high-pressure cleaner: # Wash the vehicle with lukewarm water using
ating instructions.
R Keep the key at least 3 m away from the a soft car sponge. When doing so, do not
vehicle. Otherwise the tailgate could open R Do not point the nozzle of the high-pressure
cleaner directly at sensitive parts such as expose the vehicle to direct sunlight.
unintentionally. # Carefully hose the vehicle off with water and
tyres, slits, electrical component parts, bat‐
R Maintain a distance of at least 30 cm to the dry using a chamois. Take care not to point
teries, light sources and ventilation slots.
vehicle. the water jet directly towards the air inlet
R Vehicles with decorative foil: parts of your grille.
vehicle are covered with a decorative foil.
382 Maintenance and care

Notes on paintwork/matt finish paintwork care

Observe the following information:

Information on cleaning and care Avoiding damage to the paintwork

Paint R Insect remains: soak with insect remover and rinse off the R Do not apply stickers, films etc.
treated areas afterwards. R Remove dirt immediately, where possible.
R Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off afterwards.
R Coolant, brake fluid, tree resins, oils, fuel and greases:
gently rub with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or
lighter fluid.
R Tar stains: use tar remover.
R Wax: use silicone remover.
Matt finish R The vehicle should preferably be washed by hand using a R Do not polish the vehicle and light-alloy wheels.
soft sponge, car shampoo and plenty of water. R Do not have your vehicle cleaned at an automatic car
R Only use care products recommended by Mercedes-Benz. wash too frequently and do not use wash programs which
finish with a hot wax vehicle treatment.
R Do not use paint cleaner, buffing or polishing products
such as a gloss preserver, e.g. wax.
R Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop.
 Maintenance and care 383

Notes on care of vehicle parts # Always switch off the windscreen wip‐ # Always be particularly careful around
ers and the ignition before cleaning the the tailpipe and the tailpipe trim.
& WARNING Risk of entrapment if the windscreen or wiper blades. # Allow the vehicle parts to cool down
windscreen wipers are switched on while
before you touch them.
the windscreen is being cleaned
& WARNING Risk of burns from tailpipes
If the windscreen wipers are set in motion and tailpipe trim
while you are cleaning the windscreen or
wiper blades, you can be trapped by the The tailpipe and tailpipe trim can become
wiper arm. very hot. If you come into contact with these
parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself.

Observe the following information:

Information on cleaning and care Avoiding vehicle damage

Wheels/rims Use water and acid-free wheel cleaners. R Do not use acidic wheel cleaners to remove brake dust.
This could damage wheel bolts and brake components.
R To avoid corrosion of the brake discs and brake linings,
drive the vehicle for a few minutes after cleaning before
parking it. The brake discs and brake linings warm up and
dried out.
Windows Clean the windows on the inside and outside using a damp Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products or cleaning agents
cloth and cleaning products recommended by Mercedes- containing solvents to clean the inside of the windows.
Benz.
384 Maintenance and care

Information on cleaning and care Avoiding vehicle damage

Wiper blades Fold out the wiper blades and clean them using a damp cloth. Do not clean the wiper blades too often.
Exterior lighting Clean the lens with a wet sponge and mild detergent, e.g. car Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable
shampoo. for plastic lenses.
AIRPANEL If the vehicle is very dusty or there are salt deposits in the When using a high-pressure water jet, maintain a minimum
AIRPANEL mechanics, the adjustment range of the shutters in distance of 30 cm.
the radiator trim may be restricted.
R Switch on the ignition, and the shutters open automati‐
cally after approximately 120 seconds.
R Clean the bearing points of the shutters with a high-pres‐
sure water jet.
Sensors Clean the sensors in the front and rear bumpers and in the When using a high-pressure water jet, maintain a minimum
radiator grille with a soft cloth and car shampoo. distance of 30 cm.
Reversing camera R Open the camera cover with the multimedia sys‐ Do not use a high-pressure water jet.
and 360° Camera tem(→ page 227) .
R Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean the camera lens.
 Maintenance and care 385

Information on cleaning and care Avoiding vehicle damage

Tailpipes Clean with cleaning agents recommended by Mercedes-Benz, Use acid-free cleaning agents.
particularly in the winter and after washing the vehicle.
Trailer hitch R Remove rust on the ball, e.g. with a wire brush. Do not clean the ball neck with solvents or a high-pressure
R Remove dirt with a lint-free cloth. cleaner.
R After cleaning, oil or grease the ball head lightly.
R Observe the cleaning instructions in the operating instruc‐
tions of the trailer hitch manufacturer.

Notes on care of the interior When the airbags are deployed, plastic parts & WARNING Risk of injury or death from
may break away. bleached seat belts
& WARNING Risk of injury from plastic
# Do not use any care or cleaning prod‐
parts breaking off after the use of sol‐ Bleaching or dyeing seat belts can severely
ucts containing solvents to clean the weaken them.
vent-based care products
cockpit.
Care and cleaning products containing sol‐ This can, for example, cause seat belts to
vents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to tear or fail in an accident.
become porous. # Never bleach or dye seat belts.
386 Maintenance and care

Observe the following information:

Information on cleaning and care Avoiding vehicle damage

Seat belts Clean with warm water and soap solution. R Do not use chemical cleaning agents.
R Do not dry seat belts by heating them to over 80 °C or
exposing them to direct sunlight.
Display Clean the surface carefully with a microfibre cloth and R Switch off the display and allow to cool.
TFT/LCD display cleaner. R Do not use any other cleaning products.
Plastic trim R Clean with a damp microfibre cloth. R Do not apply stickers, films etc.
R If the trim is very dirty: use a cleaning agent recommen‐ R Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sun cream to
ded by Mercedes-Benz. come in contact with the plastic trim.
Genuine wood/trim R Clean with a microfibre cloth. Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents, polishes or waxes.
elements R Black piano-lacquer look: clean with a damp cloth and
soap solution.
R If the trim is very dirty: use a cleaning agent recommen‐
ded by Mercedes-Benz.
Roof lining Clean with a brush or dry shampoo.
Carpet Use carpet and textile cleaning agents recommended by
Mercedes-Benz.
 Maintenance and care 387

Information on cleaning and care Avoiding vehicle damage

Genuine leather R Clean with a damp cloth and then wipe with a dry cloth. Do not allow the leather to become too damp.
seat covers R Leather care: use leather care agents that have been rec‐ Do not use a microfibre cloth.
ommended by Mercedes-Benz.
DINAMICA seat cov‐ Clean with a damp cloth. Do not use a microfibre cloth.
ers
Artificial leather Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soap solution. Do not use a microfibre cloth.
seat covers
Cloth seat covers Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soap solution and allow to
dry.
388 Breakdown assistance

Emergency # Open safety vest bag 1 and pull out the The requirements defined by the legal standard
safety vest. are only fulfilled if the safety vest is the correct
Removing the safety vest size and is fully closed.
% There are also safety vest compartments in
The safety vests are located in the safety vest the rear door stowage compartments in Replace the safety vest if:
compartments in the driver's and front which safety vests can be stowed. R it is damaged or dirt on the reflective strips
passenger door stowage compartments. can no longer be removed
R the maximum number of washes is exceeded
R the fluorescence of the safety vest has faded

Warning triangle
Removing the warning triangle

1 Maximum number of washes

2 Maximum wash temperature
3 Do not bleach
4 Do not iron
5 Do not use a laundry dryer
6 Do not dry-clean
# To remove: pull out safety vest bag 1 by
7 This is a class 2 vest
loop 2. # Remove warning triangle 1.
 Breakdown assistance 389

Setting up the warning triangle First-aid kit (soft sided) Removing the fire extinguisher

# Fold side reflectors 1 upwards to form a tri‐ # Left-hand drive vehicle: Pull tab 1
angle and attach at the top using press stud upwards.
2. # Right-hand drive vehicle: Pull tab 1 down‐
# Fold legs 3 down and out to the side. wards.
# Remove fire extinguisher 2.
First-aid kit (soft sided) 1 is in the load com‐
partment in the left-hand stowage net.
390 Breakdown assistance

Flat tyre In the event of a flat tyre, the following options total loss of pressure in one or more tyres. How‐
are available depending on your vehicle's equip‐ ever, the tyre affected must not show any clearly
Notes on flat tyres ment: visible damage.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to a flat R Vehicles with MOExtended tyres: it is pos‐ You can recognise MOExtended tyres by the
tyre sible to continue the journey for a short MOExtended marking which appears on the side
period of time. Make sure you observe the wall of the tyre.
A flat tyre severely affects the driving charac‐ notes on MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres) Vehicles with tyre pressure loss warning sys‐
teristics as well as the steering and braking (→ page 390). tem: MOExtended tyres may only be used in
of the vehicle. R Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: you can repair conjunction with an activated tyre pressure loss
Tyres without run-flat characteristics: the tyre so that it is possible to continue the warning system.
# Do not drive on with a flat tyre. journey for a short period of time. To do this, Vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring sys‐
# Change the flat tyre immediately with use the TIREFIT kit (→ page 392). tem: MOExtended tyres may only be used in
the emergency spare wheel or spare R Vehicles with a Mercedes-Benz emer‐ conjunction with an activated tyre pressure mon‐
wheel. Alternatively, consult a qualified gency call system: in the event of a flat itoring system.
specialist workshop. tyre, consult the Mercedes-Benz emergency If a pressure loss warning message appears in
call system Customer Assistance Centre. the multifunction display:
Tyres with run-flat characteristics: R Change the wheel (→ page 422). R Check the tyres for damage
# Observe the information and warning
% The emergency spare wheel is only available R If driving on, observe the following notes
notes on MOExtended tyres (run-flat
tyres). in certain countries.
& WARNING Risk of accident when driving
in run-flat mode
MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres)
When driving in run-flat mode, the handling
With MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres), you can characteristics are impaired. e.g. when cor‐
continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a
 Breakdown assistance 391

nering, when accelerating strongly and when Driving distance possible in limp-home mode
braking. after the pressure loss warning
# Do not exceed the maximum permissi‐ Load condition Driving distance pos‐
ble speed. sible in limp-home
# Avoid any abrupt steering and driving
mode
manoeuvres as well as driving over Partially laden 80 km
obstacles (kerbs, pot holes, off-road).
This applies, in particular, to a loaded Fully laden 30 km
vehicle.
# Stop driving in run-flat mode if you
R The driving distance possible in limp-home
mode may vary depending on the driving 1 Tyre inflation compressor
notice: style. 2 Tyre sealant bottle
R banging noise
R Maximum permissible speed 80 km/h. % You can find information on the power cate‐
R vehicle vibration
If a tyre has gone flat and cannot be replaced gory and/or electrical details on the back of
R smoke which smells like rubber the tyre inflation compressor.
with an MOExtended tyre, a standard tyre may
R continuous ESP® intervention be used as a temporary measure. R LK2 – 12 V/15A, 180 W, 0.8 kg
R cracks in tyre side walls
At a distance of approximately 1 m to the
# After driving in run-flat mode, have the TIREFIT kit storage location tyre inflation compressor and approximately
rims checked by a qualified specialist The TIREFIT kit is located under the load com‐ 1.6 m above the ground, the following sound
workshop with regard to their further partment floor. pressure levels apply:
use. R Sound power level LLA 74.8 dB (A)
# The defective tyre must be replaced in
every case.
392 Breakdown assistance

The tyre inflation compressor is mainte‐ R there are cuts or punctures in the tyre # If tyre sealant gets into your eyes, thor‐
nance-free. If there is a malfunction, please larger than those previously mentioned. oughly rinse them using clean water
contact a qualified specialist workshop. immediately.
R the wheel rim is damaged.
R you have driven at very low tyre pres‐ # If tyre sealant has been swallowed,
Using the TIREFIT kit sures or on a flat tyre. thoroughly rinse out your mouth imme‐
Have the following readily available: diately and drink plenty of water. Do not
# Do not drive on. induce vomiting and seek medical
R tyre sealant bottle # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. attention immediately.
R enclosed TIREFIT sticker # Change out of clothing which has come
R tyre inflation compressor & WARNING Risk of injury and poisoning into contact with tyre sealant immedi‐
from tyre sealant ately.
You can use TIREFIT tyre sealant to seal punctu‐
res of up to 4 mm, particularly those in the tyre Tyre sealant is hazardous to health and cau‐
# If an allergic reaction occurs, seek med‐
contact surface. You can use TIREFIT in outside ses irritation. Do not allow it to come into ical attention immediately.
temperatures down to -20 °C. contact with your skin, eyes or clothing, and
do not swallow it. Do not inhale any vapours. * NOTE Overheating due to the tyre infla‐
& WARNING Risk of accident when using Keep the tyre sealant away from children. tion compressor running too long
tyre sealant Observe the following if you come into con‐ # Do not run the tyre inflation compres‐
In the following situations, the tyre sealant is tact with the tyre sealant: sor for longer than ten minutes without
unable to provide sufficient breakdown assis‐ # Rinse off the tyre sealant from your skin interruption.
tance, as it is unable to seal the tyre prop‐ using water immediately.
erly: Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes on
the sticker on the tyre inflation compressor.
 Breakdown assistance 393

Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced every four

years at a qualified specialist workshop.
# Do not remove any foreign objects which
have penetrated the tyre.

# Remove the cap from valve 7 on the faulty

tyre.
# Screw filling hose 8 onto valve 7.
# Insert plug 4 into a 12 V socket in your
vehicle.
# Affix part 1 of the TIREFIT sticker to the # Pull plug 4 with the cable and hose 5 out # Switch the ignition on.
instrument cluster within the driver's field of
of the tyre inflation compressor housing.
vision. # Press on and off switch 3 on the tyre infla‐
# Push the plug of hose 5 into flange 6 of tion compressor.
# Affix part 2 of the TIREFIT sticker near the
tyre sealant bottle 1 until the plug engages. The tyre inflation compressor is switched on.
valve on the wheel with the defective tyre.
# Place tyre sealant bottle 1 head downwards The tyre is inflated. First, tyre sealant is pum‐
into recess 2 of the tyre inflation compres‐ ped into the tyre. The pressure may briefly
sor. rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).
394 Breakdown assistance

Do not switch off the tyre inflation compres‐ # Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approx‐ If, after ten minutes, a tyre pressure of
sor during this phase. imately 10 m. 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been achieved:
# Let the tyre inflation compressor run for a # Pump up the tyre again.
maximum of ten minutes. After a maximum of ten minutes the tyre & WARNING Risk of accident from driving
The tyre should then have attained a tyre pressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ with sealed tyres
pressure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ 29 psi). A tyre temporarily sealed with tyre sealant
29 psi). impairs handling characteristics and is not
& WARNING Risk of accident due to the suitable for higher speeds.
If tyre sealant leaks out, make sure you clean the specified tyre pressure not being ach‐
affected area as quickly as possible. It is prefera‐ # Adapt your driving style accordingly and
ieved drive carefully.
ble to use clean water.
If you get tyre sealant on your clothing, have it If the specified tyre pressure is not achieved # Do not exceed the specified maximum
cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethy‐ after the specified time, the tyre is too badly speed with a tyre that has been sealed
lene. damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the using tyre sealant.
tyre in this instance.
If, after ten minutes, a tyre pressure of Damaged tyres and a tyre pressure that is # Observe the maximum permissible speed for
200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been ach‐ too low can significantly impair braking and a tyre sealed with tyre sealant 80 km/h.
ieved: handling characteristics. # Affix the upper section of the TIREFIT sticker
# Switch off the tyre inflation compressor. # Do not drive on. to the instrument cluster where it will be eas‐
# Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. ily seen by the driver.
defective tyre.
* NOTE Staining from leaking tyre sealant
Please note that tyre sealant may leak out when
unscrewing the filling hose. After use, excess tyre sealant may leak out
from the filling hose.
 Breakdown assistance 395

# Therefore, place the filling hose in the & WARNING Risk of accident due to the
plastic bag that contained the TIREFIT specified tyre pressure not being ach‐
kit. ieved
If the specified tyre pressure is not achieved
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental after a brief drive, the tyre is too badly dam‐
pollution caused by environmentally irre‐ aged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre
sponsible disposal in this instance.
Tyre sealant contains pollutants. Damaged tyres and a tyre pressure that is
# Have the tyre sealant bottle disposed of too low can significantly impair braking and
professionally, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz handling characteristics. # To reduce the tyre pressure: press pres‐
service centre. # Do not drive on. sure release button 1 next to manometer
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 2.
# Switch off the tyre inflation compressor. # When the tyre pressure is correct, unscrew
# Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the Countries that have Mercedes-Benz the filling hose from the valve of the sealed
defective tyre. Service24h: a sticker with the phone number tyre.
# Stow the tyre sealant bottle, the tyre inflation can also be found in your vehicle, e.g. on the # Screw the valve cap onto the tyre valve of
compressor and the warning triangle. B‑pillar on the driver's side. the sealed tyre.
# Correct the tyre pressure if it is still at least
# Pull away immediately. # Pull the tyre sealant bottle out of the tyre
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the tyre pres‐ inflation compressor.
# Stop after driving for approximately ten sure table on the fuel filler flap for values.
minutes and check the tyre pressure using The filling hose stays on the tyre sealant bot‐
the tyre inflation compressor. # To increase the tyre pressure: switch on tle.
The tyre pressure must now be at least the tyre inflation compressor.
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).
396 Breakdown assistance

# Drive to the nearest qualified specialist work‐ # In the event of a short circuit or a simi‐ All vehicles except vehicles with a lithium-
shop and have the tyre, tyre sealant bottle lar incident, contact a qualified special‐ ion battery
and filling hose replaced there. ist workshop immediately.
& WARNING Risk of explosion due to elec‐
# Do not continue driving. trostatic charge
Battery (vehicle) # Always have work on the battery carried
out at a qualified specialist workshop. Electrostatic charge can cause sparks which
Notes on the 12 V battery may ignite the highly flammable gas mixture
R Further information on ABS (→ page 189) in the battery.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to
# To discharge any electrostatic charge
work carried out incorrectly on the bat‐ R Further information on ESP®(→ page 189)
tery that may have built up, touch the metal
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends vehicle body before handling the bat‐
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery that you only use batteries which have been tes‐ tery.
can, for example, lead to a short circuit. This ted and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-
can lead to function restrictions in safety-rel‐ Benz. These batteries provide increased impact The highly flammable gas mixture is created
evant systems, e.g. the lighting system, ABS protection to prevent vehicle occupants from while the battery is charging and during starting
(anti-lock braking system) or ESP® (Elec‐ suffering acid burns should the battery be dam‐ assistance.
tronic Stability Program). The operating aged in the event of an accident.
safety of your vehicle may be restricted. & WARNING Danger of chemical burns
You could lose control of the vehicle in the from the battery acid
following situations: Battery acid is caustic.
R when braking # Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or
R in the event of abrupt steering manoeu‐ clothing.
vres and/or when the vehicle's speed is # Do not lean over the battery.
not adapted to the road conditions
 Breakdown assistance 397

# Do not inhale battery gases. specialist workshop or to a collection Wear safety glasses.
# Keep children away from the battery. point for used batteries.
# Immediately rinse battery acid off thor‐ If you have to connect the 12 volt battery, con‐
oughly with plenty of clean water and tact a qualified specialist workshop. Keep children away.
seek medical attention immediately.
Comply with safety notes and take protective
All vehicles measures when handling batteries.
Risk of explosion Observe this Owner's Manual.
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage due to improper disposal of bat‐
teries
Fire, naked flames and smoking are
prohibited when handling the battery. If you do not intend to use the vehicle over an
Avoid creating sparks. extended period of time:
Batteries contain pollutants. It is R Activate standby mode, or
illegal to dispose of them with the household Electrolyte or battery acid is corro‐ R Connect the battery to a battery charger
rubbish. sive. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes approved by Mercedes-Benz, or
# or clothing. Wear suitable protective R Consult a qualified specialist workshop to
clothing, in particular gloves, an
disconnect the battery.
apron and a face mask. Immediately
Dispose of batteries in an rinse electrolyte or acid splashes off
environmentally responsible manner. with clean water. Consult a doctor if
Take discharged batteries to a qualified necessary.
398 Breakdown assistance

Starting assistance and charging the 12 V * NOTE Damaging the battery through # When giving starting assistance, always
battery overvoltage make sure that you only connect bat‐
Vehicles with a lithium-ion battery tery terminals with identical polarity.
When using a battery charger without a maxi‐
# When charging the battery and during start‐ mum charging voltage, the battery or the # During starting assistance, you must
ing assistance, always use the jump-start vehicle electronics may be damaged. observe the described order for con‐
connection point in the engine compartment. necting and disconnecting the jump
# Only use battery chargers with a maxi‐
lead.
mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
* NOTE Damage to the battery from over‐ # Do not connect or disconnect the bat‐
voltage tery clamps while the engine is running.
& WARNING Risk of explosion from hydro‐
When charging using a battery charger with‐ gen gas igniting
out a maximum charging voltage, the battery & WARNING Risk of explosion during
or the on-board electronics may be damaged. A battery generates hydrogen gas during the charging process and starting assistance
charging process. If there is a short circuit or
# Only use battery chargers with a maxi‐
sparks start to form, there is a danger of the During the charging process and starting
mum charging voltage of 14.4 V. hydrogen gas igniting. assistance, the battery may release an explo‐
sive gas mixture.
# Make sure that the positive terminal of
All other vehicles # Avoid fire, naked flames, creating
the connected battery does not come
# When charging the battery and during start‐
into contact with vehicle parts. sparks and smoking.
ing assistance, always use the jump-start # Make sure that there is sufficient venti‐
# Never place metal objects or tools on a
connection point in the engine compartment. lation during the charging process and
battery.
during starting assistance.
# When connecting and disconnecting the
# Do not lean over a battery.
battery, you must observe the descri‐
bed order for the battery clamps.
 Breakdown assistance 399

If the indicator/warning lamps in the instrument The service life of a battery that has been R The jump lead/charging cable must not
cluster do not light up at low temperatures, it is thawed may be dramatically shortened. come into contact with any parts which may
very likely that the discharged battery has fro‐ It is recommended that you have a thawed bat‐ move when the engine is running.
zen. tery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. R Always make sure that neither you nor the
All vehicles battery is electrostatically charged.
& WARNING Risk of explosion from a fro‐
zen battery R Keep away from fire and naked flames.
* NOTE Damage caused by numerous or R Do not lean over the battery.
A discharged battery may freeze at tempera‐ extended attempts to start the engine
tures slightly above or below freezing point. R When charging: only use battery chargers
Numerous or extended attempts to start the tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz and
During starting assistance or battery charg‐ engine may damage the catalytic converter read the battery charger's operating instruc‐
ing, battery gas may be released. due to non-combusted fuel. tions before charging the battery.
# Always thaw a frozen battery out first
# Avoid numerous and extended attempts
before charging it or performing start‐ Observe the additional following points during
to start the engine. starting assistance:
ing assistance.
Observe the following points during starting R Starting assistance may only be provided
* NOTE Shortening the service life of the assistance and when charging the battery: using batteries with a nominal voltage of 12
battery by charging the battery at low V.
R Only use undamaged jump leads/charging
temperatures cables with a sufficient cross-section and R The vehicles must not touch.

Charging the battery at very low tempera‐ insulated terminal clamps. R Petrol engine: Only accept starting assis‐
tures may shorten the service life of the bat‐ R Non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps tance if the engine and exhaust system are
tery and have a negative effect on starting. must not come into contact with other metal cold.
# Do not charge the battery at very low parts while the jump lead/charging cable is # Secure the vehicle by applying the electric
temperatures. connected to the battery/jump-start connec‐ parking brake.
tion point.
400 Breakdown assistance

# Automatic transmission: Shift the trans‐ # Slide cover 1 of positive clamp 2 on the consumer on your own vehicle, e.g. the rear
mission to position j. jump-starting connection point in the direc‐ window heater or lighting.
# Manual transmission: Shift into neutral. tion of the arrow.
# Connect positive clamp 2 on your vehicle to When the starting assistance/charging process
# Make sure that the ignition and all electrical is complete:
consumers are switched off. positive pole of donor battery using the jump
lead/charging cable. Always begin with posi‐ # First, remove the jump lead/charging cable
# Open the engine bonnet. tive clamp 2 on your own vehicle first. from earth point 3 and negative pole of the
# During the starting assistance proce‐ donor vehicle, then from positive clamp 2
dure: start the engine of the donor vehicle and positive pole of the donor vehicle. Begin
and run at idle speed. each time with the contacts on your own
vehicle first.
# Connect the negative pole of the donor vehi‐ # After removing the jump lead/charging
cle and earth point 3 of your own vehicle by
using the jump lead/charging cable. Begin cable, close cover 1 of positive clamp 2.
with the donor battery first. You can obtain further information on starting
# During starting assistance: start the assistance at any qualified specialist workshop.
engine of your own vehicle.
# During the charging process: start the Tow starting or towing away
charging process.
Permitted towing methods
# During starting assistance: let the engines
run for several minutes. Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your
vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than
# During starting assistance: before discon‐ towing it away.
necting the jump lead, switch on an electrical
 Breakdown assistance 401

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to tow‐

ing away incorrectly
# Observe the instructions and notes on
towing away.

Permitted towing methods

Both axles on the ground Front axle raised Rear axle raised
Vehicles with manual transmission Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h
Vehicles with automatic transmis‐ Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h No Yes if the steering wheel is fixed in
sion the centre position with a steering
wheel lock.
4MATIC vehicles Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h No No

Towing with a raised axle: towing should be Towing the vehicle with both axles on the # Observe the notes on the permitted towing
performed by a towing company. ground methods (→ page 400) (→ page 401).
402 Breakdown assistance

# Make sure that the battery is connected and # A towing speed of 50 km/h must not # Information on the permissible gross mass of
charged. be exceeded. the vehicle can be found on the vehicle iden‐
tification plate .
When the battery is discharged: # A towing distance of 50 km must not be
exceeded. # Vehicles with automatic transmission: do
R the engine cannot be started.
not open the driver's door or front passenger
R the electric parking brake cannot be released door, otherwise the automatic transmission
or applied. & WARNING Risk of accident when towing automatically shifts to position j.
R vehicles with automatic transmission: the
a vehicle which is too heavy # Fit the towing eye (→ page 405).
automatic transmission cannot be shifted to If the vehicle being tow-started or towed # Attach the tow bar.
position i or j. away is heavier than the permissible gross
mass, the following situations can occur:
% Vehicles with automatic transmission: if * NOTE Damage due to incorrect connec‐
R the towing eye may become detached. tion
the automatic transmission cannot be shif‐
ted to position i, transport the vehicle R the car/trailer combination may swerve
# Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to
(→ page 403). A towing vehicle with lifting or even overturn. the towing eyes.
equipment is required for vehicle transport. # If another vehicle is tow-started or
towed away, its weight must not exceed % You can also attach the tow bar to the trailer
* NOTE Damage due to towing away at the permissible gross mass of your own hitch.
excessively high speeds or over long dis‐ vehicle. # Deactivate the automatic locking mechanism
tances
(→ page 71).
The drivetrain could be damaged when tow‐ If a vehicle must be tow-started or towed away, # Do not activate the HOLD function.
ing at excessively high speeds or over long its weight must not exceed the permissible gross
# Deactivate tow-away protection (→ page 89).
distances. mass of the towing vehicle.
# Deactivate Active Brake Assist (→ page 198).
 Breakdown assistance 403

# Vehicles with automatic transmission: # Use a tow bar. # Vehicles with automatic transmission:
shift the automatic transmission to position shift the automatic transmission to position
i.
# Make sure that the steering wheel can i.
move freely, before towing the vehicle
# Vehicles with manual transmission: shift away. % Vehicles with automatic transmission:
to neutral i. the automatic transmission may be locked in
# Release the electric parking brake. * NOTE Damage due to excessive tractive position j in the event of damage to the
# Vehicles with manual transmission: power electrical system. To shift to i, provide the
switch on the ignition, otherwise the steering on-board electrical system with power
wheel locking may engage. If you pull away sharply, the tractive power (→ page 398).
may be too high and the vehicles could be # Vehicles with manual transmission: shift
& WARNING Risk of accident due to limi‐ damaged. to neutral.
ted safety-related functions during the # Pull away slowly and smoothly.
# Load the vehicle onto the transporter.
towing process
# Vehicles with automatic transmission:
Safety-related functions are limited or no lon‐ Loading the vehicle for transport shift the automatic transmission to position
ger available in the following situations: j.
# Observe the notes on towing away
R the ignition is switched off. # Vehicles with manual transmission:
(→ page 401).
R the brake system or power steering sys‐ engage first or reverse gear.
# Connect the tow bar to the towing eye to
tem is malfunctioning. # Use the electric parking brake to secure the
load the vehicle.
R the energy supply or the on-board electri‐ vehicle and prevent it from rolling away.
cal system is malfunctioning. % You can also attach the tow bar to the trailer # Only secure the vehicle by the wheels.
hitch.
When your vehicle is then towed away, signif‐
icantly more effort may be required to steer
and brake than is normally required.
404 Breakdown assistance

Vehicles with ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping * NOTE Damage to the vehicle from secur‐
# Make sure that the front and rear axles come
System PLUS) ing it incorrectly to rest on the same transport vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of accident when trans‐ # After loading, the vehicle must be * NOTE Damage to the drivetrain due to
porting vehicles with AIR BODY CON‐ secured on all four wheels. Otherwise, incorrect positioning
TROL the vehicle could be damaged.
# Do not position the vehicle above the
The reduced damping forces on the vehicle # A minimum distance of 20 cm upwards connection point of the transport vehi‐
being transported can cause the vehicle/ and 10 cm downwards must be kept to cle.
trailer combination to start to swing. the transport platform.
As a result, when transporting vehicles with Secure the vehicle on all four wheels after
AIR BODY CONTROL the vehicle/trailer com‐
# Towing eye storage location
loading.
bination may start to skid. Consequently, you
could lose control of your vehicle. 4MATIC vehicles/vehicles with automatic
There is a risk of accident and injury. transmission
# Load the vehicle correctly onto the
transporter.
# Secure the vehicle on all four wheels
with suitable tensioning straps.
# Do not exceed the maximum permissi‐
ble speed of 60 km/h when transport‐
ing.
Towing eye 1 is attached to the edge of the lug‐
gage compartment under the load compartment
floor.
 Breakdown assistance 405

Vehicles with folding bench seat: the towing Vehicles with a trailer hitch: vehicles with a Tow-starting the vehicle (emergency engine
eye is located under a cover. trailer hitch do not have a bracket at the back for start)
the towing eye. Connect the tow bar to the
trailer hitch. Vehicles with automatic transmission
Fitting the towing eye
% Make sure that cover 1 engages in the * NOTE Damage to the automatic trans‐
bumper when you remove the towing eye. mission due to tow-starting
* NOTE Damage due to incorrect use of The automatic transmission may be damaged
the towing eye in the process of tow-starting vehicles with
automatic transmission.
When a towing eye is used to recover a vehi‐
# Vehicles with automatic transmission
cle, the vehicle may be damaged in the proc‐
ess. must not be tow-started.
# Only use the towing eye to tow away or # Vehicles with automatic transmission must
tow start the vehicle. not be tow-started.
Vehicles with manual transmission
# Observe the notes on towing away
(→ page 401).
# If necessary, allow the engine and exhaust
system to cool down.
# Press the mark on cover 1 inwards and
# Switch the ignition on.
remove.
# Engage second gear.
# Screw in the towing eye clockwise to the
stop. # Release the electric parking brake.
406 Breakdown assistance

# Tow-start the vehicle while the clutch pedal This could result in a fire. # When the fuse box is open, make sure
is fully depressed. that no moisture can enter the fuse
# Always replace faulty fuses with speci‐
# Slowly release the clutch pedal. fied new fuses containing the correct box.
# Immediately shift to neutral if the engine amperage. # When closing the fuse box, make sure
starts. that the seal of the lid is positioned cor‐
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon * NOTE Damage caused by incorrect fuses rectly on the fuse box.
as possible, paying attention to road and traf‐
fic conditions. Incorrect fuses may cause damage to electri‐ If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
cal components or systems. cause traced and rectified at a qualified special‐
# Remove the tow bar. ist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service
# Only use Mercedes-Benz approved
# Remove the towing eye. fuses with the correct fuse rating. Centre.
# Have the vehicle checked at a qualified spe‐ Ensure the following before replacing a fuse:
cialist workshop. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the R The vehicle is secured against rolling away.
same rating, which you can recognise by the col‐
our and fuse rating. The fuse ratings are listed in R All electrical consumers are switched off.
Electrical fuses the fuse assignment diagram. R The ignition is switched off.
Notes on electrical fuses Fuse assignment diagram: on the fuse box in The electrical fuses are located in various fuse
the load compartment (→ page 408). boxes:
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to overloaded lines R Fuse box in the engine compartment on the
* NOTE Damage or malfunctions caused
by moisture driver's side (→ page 407)
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if
R Fuse box on the driver's side of the cockpit
you replace it with a fuse with a higher Moisture may cause damage to the electrical
amperage, the electric line could be overloa‐ (→ page 408)
system or cause it to malfunction.
ded.
 Breakdown assistance 407

R Fuse box in the front-passenger footwell # Always switch off the windscreen wip‐
(→ page 408) ers and ignition before opening the
R Fuse box in the load compartment on the engine bonnet.
right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed
in the direction of travel (→ page 408)

Fuse box in the engine compartment

Requirements:
Observe the notes on electrical fuses
(→ page 406).
Have the following readily available:
R A dry cloth
R A screwdriver

Opening # Remove any existing moisture from the fuse

box using a dry cloth.
& WARNING Risk of injury from using the # Loosen screws 4, remove fuse box lid 3
windscreen wipers while the engine bon‐ from the top.
net is open # Turn clip 2 on cover 1 a quarter-turn to
When the engine bonnet is open, and the the left. Closing
windscreen wipers are set in motion, you can # Check whether the seal is positioned cor‐
# Pull cover 1 upwards in the direction of the
be trapped by the wiper linkage. arrow. rectly in the lid.
408 Breakdown assistance

# Insert lid into the bracket at the rear of the

fuse box.
# Fold down lid of the fuse box and tighten
screws 4.
# Insert cover 1 on both sides and engage
safety clips .
# Close the engine bonnet.

Fuse box on the dashboard

# Fold cover 2 down in the direction of the
The fuse box is on the side of the dashboard
arrow.
under a cover.
# Contact a Mercedes-Benz service centre for
# Remove cover 1.
further information. The fuse assignment diagram is in a recess on
the side of the fuse box.
# Open cover 1 in the direction of the arrow
Fuse box in the front-passenger footwell and remove it.
Requirements
Observe the notes on electrical fuses Fuse box in the load compartment
(→ page 406).
Requirements:
Observe the notes on electrical fuses
(→ page 406).
# Fold down the side cover.
 Wheels and tyres 409

Noise or unusual handling characteristics & WARNING Risk of aquaplaning due to Carry out the following checks on all wheels reg‐
insufficient tyre tread ularly, at least once a month or as required, e.g.
While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises prior to a long journey or driving off-road:
and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pulling Insufficient tyre tread will result in reduced
to one side. This may indicate that the wheels or R Check the tyre pressure (→ page 410).
tyre grip. The tyre tread is no longer able to
tyres are damaged. If you suspect that a tyre is dissipate water. R Visual inspection of wheels and tyres for
defective, reduce your speed immediately. Stop damage.
the vehicle as soon as possible to check the This means that in heavy rain or slush the
risk of aquaplaning is increased, in particular R Check the valve caps.
wheels and tyres for damage. Hidden tyre dam‐
age could also be causing the unusual handling where speed is not adapted to suit the condi‐ The valves must be protected against mois‐
characteristics. If you find no signs of damage, tions. ture and dirt by the valve caps approved
have the tyres and wheels checked at a qualified If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, especially for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
specialist workshop. tyres may exhibit different levels of wear at R Visual check of the tread depth and the tyre
different locations on the tyre tread. contact surface across the entire width.
# Thus, you should regularly check the The minimum tread depth for summer tyres
Regular checking of wheels and tyres tread depth and the condition of the is 3 mm and for winter tyres 4 mm.
tread across the entire width of all
& WARNING Risk of accident from dam‐ tyres.
aged tyres Notes on snow chains
Minimum tread depth for:
Damaged tyres can cause tyre pressure loss.
R Summer tyres: 3 mm & WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐
As a result, you could lose control of your rect snow chain fitting
vehicle. R M+S tyres: 4 mm
# Check the tyres regularly for signs of
If you have fitted snow chains to the front
# For safety reasons, replace the tyres
damage and replace any damaged tyres wheels, the snow chains may drag against
before the legally prescribed limit for
immediately. the vehicle body or chassis components.
the minimum tread depth is reached.
410 Wheels and tyres

This could cause damage to the vehicle or R If snow chains are fitted, the maximum per‐ Tyre pressure
the tyres. missible speed is 50 km/h.
Notes on tyre pressure
# Never fit snow chains on the front R Vehicles with Parking Pilot: Do not use
wheels. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC if snow chains & WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf‐
are fitted. ficient or excessive tyre pressure
# Only fit snow chains on the rear wheels
in pairs. R Vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL: Only
Underinflated or overinflated tyres pose the
drive at raised vehicle level if snow chains following risks:
are fitted.
* NOTE Damage to the wheel trim from fit‐ R The tyres may burst, especially as the
ted snow chains % You can permanently limit the maximum load and vehicle speed increase.
vehicle speed for driving with winter tyres R The tyres may wear excessively and/or
If snow chains are fitted to steel wheels, the (→ page 202).
wheel trims can be damaged. unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre
# Remove the wheel trims of steel wheels
% You can deactivate ESP® to pull away traction.
before fitting snow chains. (→ page 193). This allows the wheels to spin, R The driving characteristics, as well as
achieving an increased driving force. steering and braking, may be greatly
R Snow chains are only permissible for certain impaired.
wheel/tyre combinations. You can obtain
information about this from a Mercedes-Benz
# Comply with the recommended tyre
Service Centre. pressure and check the tyre pressure of
all tyres including the spare wheel regu‐
R For safety reasons, only use snow chains that larly:
have been specifically approved for your
vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains
R at least once a month
with the same quality standard. R when the load changes
 Wheels and tyres 411

R before embarking on a longer journey # Check whether the wheel or valve has a 1.5 psi). Take this into account when checking
leak. the tyre pressure of warm tyres.
R if operating conditions change, e.g. off-
road driving # If you are unable to rectify the damage, Notes on trailer operation
contact a qualified specialist workshop. Always inflate the rear axle tyres to the recom‐
# Adjust the tyre pressure as necessary. mended tyre pressures on the tyre pressure
Information on the recommended tyre pressure table for increased load.
Driving with tyre pressure that is too high or too for the vehicle's factory-fitted tyres can be found
low can: on the tyre pressure table on the inside of the
R Shorten the service life of the tyres.
Tyre pressure table
fuel filler flap (→ page 411).
R Cause increased tyre damage. Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tyre The tyre pressure table is on the inside of the
R Adversely affect handling characteristics and pressure. The outer appearance of a tyre does fuel filler flap.
thus driving safety, e.g. due to aquaplaning. not permit any reliable conclusion about the tyre
pressure.
& WARNING Risk of accident from repea‐ Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring sys‐
ted tyre pressure drop tem: You can also check the tyre pressure using
If the tyre pressure drops repeatedly, the the on-board computer.
wheel, valve or tyre may be damaged. Only correct tyre pressures when the tyres are
Insufficient tyre pressure can cause the tyres cold. Conditions for cold tyres:
to burst. R The vehicle has been parked with the tyres
# Inspect the tyre for signs of foreign out of direct sunlight for at least three hours.
objects. R The vehicle has travelled less than 1.6 km.

A rise in the tyre temperature of 10 °C increases

the tyre pressure by approx. 10 kPa (0.1 bar,
412 Wheels and tyres

If the preceding tyre sizes are complemented by The tyre pressure appears in the multifunction
the + symbol, the tyre pressure information display (→ page 257).
following shows alternative tyre pressures. If there is a substantial pressure loss or if the
These tyre pressures may improve your vehicle's tyre temperature is excessive, a warning will be
ride comfort. Fuel consumption may then given:
increase slightly.
R Via display messages (→ page 481).
The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully
R Via the h warning lamp in the instrument
laden" are defined in the table for different num‐
bers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The cluster (→ page 516).
actual number of seats may differ from this. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tyre
Be sure to also observe the following further pressure to the recommended cold tyre pressure
related subjects: suitable for the operating situation. Set the tyre
R Notes on tyre pressure (→ page 410) pressure for cold tyres using a tyre pressure
gauge. Note that the correct tyre pressure for
the current operating situation must first be
Tyre pressure monitoring system taught-in to the tyre pressure monitoring sys‐
The tyre pressure table shows the recommended tem.
tyre pressure for all tyres approved for this vehi‐ Function of the tyre pressure monitoring sys‐
cle. The recommended tyre pressures apply for tem In most cases, the tyre pressure monitoring sys‐
cold tyres under various operating conditions, The system checks the tyre pressure of the tyres tem will automatically update the new reference
i.e. loading and/or speed of the vehicle. fitted to the vehicle by means of a tyre pressure values after you have changed the tyre pressure.
sensor. You can, however, also update the reference val‐
If one or more tyre sizes precede a tyre pres‐ ues by restarting the tyre pressure monitoring
sure, the tyre pressure information following is New tyre pressure sensors, e.g. in winter tyres,
are automatically taught-in the first time they are system manually (→ page 413).
only valid for those tyre sizes.
driven.
 Wheels and tyres 413

System limitations by pressure gauges are higher than those

The tyre pressure monitoring system does not shown by the on-board computer. In this
issue a warning: case, do not reduce the tyre pressure.
R If the tyre pressure is set incorrectly. Make sure you also observe the following related
subjects:
R If there is a sudden pressure loss caused, for
example, by a foreign object penetrating the R Notes on tyre pressure (→ page 410)
tyre. Restarting the tyre pressure monitoring sys‐
R If there is a malfunction caused by another tem
radio signal source.
Requirements:
Be sure to also observe the following further R Tyre pressures will be displayed after a few R The recommended tyre pressure is correctly
related subjects: minutes of driving set for the respective operating condition on
R Notes on tyre pressure (→ page 410)
R Tyre pressure monitor active: the teach-in each of the four wheels (→ page 410).
process of the system is not yet complete.
Checking the tyre pressure with the tyre The tyre pressures are already being moni‐ Restart the tyre pressure monitoring system in
pressure monitoring system tored. the following situations:
R The tyre pressure has changed.
Requirements: # Compare the tyre pressure with the recom‐
R The ignition is switched on. R The wheels or tyres have been changed or
mended tyre pressure for the current operat‐
ing condition (→ page 411). Observe the newly fitted.
On-board computer: notes on tyre temperature (→ page 410).
, Service . Tyre pressure
% The values displayed in the multifunction dis‐
One of the following displays appears: play may deviate from those of the tyre pres‐
R Current tyre pressure of each wheel: sure gauge as they refer to sea level. At high
altitudes, the tyre pressure values indicated
414 Wheels and tyres

On-board computer: Radio-type approval of the tyre pressure Country Radio equipment approval
, Service . Tyre pressure monitoring system number
# Swipe downwards on the Touch Control on Radio equipment approval numbers
the left-hand side of the steering wheel. Jordan Kingdom of Jordon Type approval
Country Radio equipment approval for Tyre Pressure sensor.
The Use current pressures as new reference number
values message is shown in the multifunction Manufacturer: Schrader Electron‐
display. Abu Dhabi TRA ics Ltd. Model: AG5SP4
# Press a to confirm the restart. REGISTERED NO: ER37156/15. Type Approval Number:
The Tyre press. monitor restarted message is TRC/LPD/2015/21
DEALER NO: DA0047074/10
shown in the multifunction display. Kingdom of Jordon Type approval
Current warning messages are deleted and Argentina AFTIC:H14788 for Tyre Pressure sensor.
the h yellow warning lamp goes out. Dubai TRA Manufacturer: Schrader Electron‐
After you have driven for a few minutes, the ics Ltd. Model: MFR
REGISTERED NO: ER37156/15.
system checks whether the current tyre pres‐ Type Approval Number:
sures are within the specified range. The cur‐ DEALER NO: DA0047074/10 TRC/LPD/2015/223
rent tyre pressures are then accepted as ref‐ European Hereby, Schrader Electronics
erence values and monitored. Malaysia RCDD/04A/0615/S(15-2095)
Union Ltd., declares that this TPMS is in
Be sure to also observe the following further compliance with the essential Morocco AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC
related subjects: requirements and other provi‐ Numero d'agrement :MR 10216
R Notes on tyre pressure (→ page 410) sions of directive 1999/5/EC. ANRT 2015
The declaration of conformity
may be consulted at emcteam@ Date d'agrement :18/3/2015
schrader.co.uk
 Wheels and tyres 415

Country Radio equipment approval Country Radio equipment approval Country Radio equipment approval
number number number
Mexico IFT:RCPSCAG15-0627 South Ukraine
IFT:RLVSCMF15-0959 Africa

Moldova
TA-2015/072 Approved Schrader Electronics цім
TA-2015/117 Approved стверджує, що обладнання
Радіопередавач моделі AG5SP4
Philip‐ системи контролю тиску в
pines шині автомобіля відповідає
вимогам Технічного
регламенту радіообладнання і
телекомунікаційного кінцевого
NTC (термінального) обладнання
Type Approved. (Постанова КМУ № 679 від 24
No:ESD-1510576CNTC червня 2009 р.) Декларація
відповідності знаходиться на
Serbia сайті Schrader Electronics та
надається за запитом на
електрону адресу emc‐
[email protected]
Singapore Complies with IDA Standards DA Schrader Electronics цім
105282 стверджує, що обладнання
416 Wheels and tyres

Country Radio equipment approval Brazil Vietnam

number
Радіопередавач моделі MFR
системи контролю тиску в
шині автомобіля відповідає
вимогам Технічного
регламенту радіообладнання і
телекомунікаційного кінцевого
(термінального) обладнання
(Постанова КМУ № 679 від 24
червня 2009 р.) Декларація
відповідності знаходиться на Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário,
сайті Schrader Electronics та isto é, não tem direito à proteção contra interfer‐ Tyre pressure loss warning system
надається за запитом на ência prejudicial, mesmo de estações do mesmo
електрону адресу emc‐ Function of the tyre pressure loss warning
tipo, e não pode causar interferência a sistemas system
[email protected] operando em caráter primário. The tyre pressure loss warning system warns the
United TRA driver by means of display messages when there
Arab Emi‐ REGISTERED NO :ER37156/15. is a severe tyre pressure loss.
rates After a change in tyre pressure, a wheel rotation
DEALER NO:DA0047074/10
or a wheel change, the tyre pressure loss warn‐
ing system has to be taught-in again by being
restarted (→ page 417).
 Wheels and tyres 417

The tyre pressure loss warning system does not Be sure to also observe the following further # Press a to begin the new start.
replace the need to regularly check the tyre related subjects: The Tyre pressure now OK? message is
pressures. R Display messages about the tyres shown in the multifunction display.
System limitations (→ page 481) # Select Yes.

The tyre pressure loss warning system does not R Notes on tyre pressure (→ page 410) # Press a to confirm the restart.

issue a warning: The Run Flat Indicator restarted message is

Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning
shown in the multifunction display.
R If the tyre pressure is set incorrectly. system
R If there is a sudden pressure loss caused, for
After you have driven for a few minutes, the
Requirements: tyre pressure loss warning system monitors
example, by a foreign object penetrating the R The recommended tyre pressure is correctly the set tyre pressures of all the tyres.
tyre. set for the respective operating condition on
R If the pressure loss in several tyres decrea‐
Make sure you also observe the following related
each of the four wheels (→ page 410).
subjects:
ses at the same rate.
On-board computer: R Notes on tyre pressure (→ page 410)
The tyre pressure loss warning system has a , Service . Tyre pressure
limited or delayed function:
The Run Flat Indicator active Restart with OK Wheel change
R When the road surface is poor, e.g. snow or message is shown in the multifunction display.
gravel. Notes on selecting, fitting and replacing
Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system in tyres
R When driving with snow chains. the following situations:
R When driving in a very sporty driving style R The tyre pressure has changed. You can ask for information regarding permitted
with high cornering speeds or sudden accel‐ wheel/tyre combinations at a Mercedes-Benz
R The wheels or tyres have been changed or Service Centre.
eration.
newly fitted.
R When towing a very heavy or large trailer.
R When driving with a high load.
418 Wheels and tyres

& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐ & WARNING Risk of injury through exceed‐ These tyres have been specially adapted for
rect dimensions of wheels and tyres ing the specified tyre load-bearing capa‐ use with the control systems, e.g. ABS or
If wheels and tyres of the wrong size are city or the permissible speed rating ESP®, and are marked as follows:
used, the wheel brakes or wheel suspension Exceeding the specified tyre load-bearing R MO = Mercedes-Benz Original
components may become damaged. capacity or the permissible speed rating may R MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
# Always replace wheels and tyres with lead to tyre damage and to the tyres burst‐ (run-flat tyres only for certain wheels)
those that fulfil the specifications of the ing. R MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer‐
original part. # Therefore, only use tyre types and sizes tain AMG tyres)
When replacing wheels, make sure to fit the approved for your vehicle model.
Certain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle
correct: # Observe the tyre load-bearing capacity
noise emissions or fuel consumption, may
R Designation rating and speed rating required for otherwise be adversely affected. In addition,
your vehicle. when driving with a load, tyre dimension var‐
R Type
iations could cause the tyres to come into
When replacing tyres, make sure to fit the * NOTE Damage to vehicle and tyres due contact with the body and axle components.
correct: to non-approved tyre types and sizes This could result in damage to the tyres or
R Designation the vehicle.
For safety reasons, only use wheels, tyres
R Manufacturer and accessories which have been approved Only use tyres, wheels or accessories tested
R Type for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
 Wheels and tyres 419

* NOTE Risk to driving safety from retrea‐ * NOTE Damage to electronic component Before purchasing and using non-approved
ded tyres parts from the use of tyre-fitting tools accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop
and enquire about:
Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor rec‐ Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring R Suitability
ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previ‐ system: electronic component parts are
R Legal stipulations
ous damage cannot always be detected on located in the wheel. Tyre-fitting tools should
retreaded tyres. not be applied in the area of the valve. R Factory recommendations
For this reason driving safety cannot be guar‐ The tools could damage the electronic com‐
anteed. ponent parts. & WARNING Risk of accident with high
performance tyres
# Do not use used tyres if you have no # Have the tyres changed at a qualified
information about their previous usage. specialist workshop only. The special tyre tread in combination with
the optimised tyre compound, means that
the risk of skidding or hydroplaning on wet
* NOTE Possible damage to wheels or * NOTE Damage to summer tyres at low roads is increased.
tyres when driving over obstacles ambient temperatures
In addition, the tyre grip is greatly reduced at
Large wheels have a lower tyre section width. Using summer tyres at very low ambient a low outside temperature and tyre running
The lower the tyre section width, the greater temperatures can cause cracks to form, temperature.
is the risk of damage to wheels or tyres when thereby damaging the tyres permanently. # Switch on the ESP® and adapt your
driving over obstacles. # At temperatures below 7 °C use M+S-
driving style accordingly.
# Avoid obstacles or drive particularly tyres.
# Use M+S tyres at outside temperatures
carefully.
Accessory parts that are not approved for your of less than 50 °F.
vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or that are not being
used correctly can impair operating safety.
420 Wheels and tyres

Observe the following when selecting, fitting and R Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring R When replacing with tyres that do not
replacing tyres: system: All fitted wheels must be equipped feature run-flat characteristics: Vehicles
R Country-specific requirements for tyre with functioning sensors for the tyre pres‐ with MOExtended tyres are not equipped
approval that define a specific tyre type for sure monitoring system. with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Equip the
your vehicle. R At temperatures below 7 °C, use winter tyres vehicle with a TIREFIT kit after replacing with
or all-season tyres marked M+S for all tyres that do not feature run-flat characteris‐
Furthermore, the use of certain tyre types in tics, e.g. winter tyres.
certain regions and areas of operation can wheels.
be highly beneficial. Winter tyres bearing the i snowflake For more information on wheels and tyres, con‐
R Only use tyres and wheels of the same type symbol in addition to the M+S marking pro‐ tact a qualified specialist workshop.
(summer tyres, winter tyres, MOExtended vide the best possible grip in wintry road Be sure to also observe the following further
tyres) and the same make. conditions. related subjects:
R Only fit wheels of the same size on one axle R For M+S tyres, only use tyres with the same R Notes on tyre pressure (→ page 410)
(left and right). tread.
R Tyre pressure table (→ page 411)
It is only permissible to fit a different wheel R Observe the maximum permissible speed for
R Notes on the emergency spare wheel
size in the event of a flat tyre in order to the M+S tyres fitted.
(→ page 427)
drive to the specialist workshop. If this is below the vehicle's maximum speed,
R Only fit tyres of the correct size onto the this must be indicated in an appropriate label
in the driver's field of vision. Notes on interchanging wheels
wheels.
R Do not make any modifications to the brake R Run in new tyres at moderate speeds for the
& WARNING Risk of injury through differ‐
system, the wheels or the tyres. first 100 km.
ent wheel sizes
The use of shims or brake dust shields is not R Replace the tyres after six years at the latest,
regardless of wear. Interchanging the front and rear wheels if the
permitted and may invalidate the vehicle's wheels or tyres have different dimensions
general operating permit.
 Wheels and tyres 421

may severely impair the driving characteris‐ It is imperative to observe the instructions and % The jack weighs approximately 3.4 kg.
tics. safety notes on "Wheel change" when doing so. The maximum load capacity of the jack can
be found on the sticker affixed to the jack.
The disk brakes or wheel suspension compo‐ The jack is maintenance-free. If there is a
nents may also be damaged. Notes on storing wheels
malfunction, please contact a qualified spe‐
# Rotate front and rear wheels only if the R After removing wheels, store them in a cool, cialist workshop.
wheels and tyres are of the same dry and preferably dark place. The tyre-change tool kit is in tool bag 1 under
dimensions. R Protect the tyres from contact with oil, the load compartment floor.
grease or fuel.
Interchanging the front and rear wheels if the
wheels or tyres have different dimensions can
render the general operating permit invalid. Overview of the tyre-change tool kit
The wear patterns on the front and rear wheels Apart from some country-specific variants, vehi‐
differ: cles are not equipped with a tyre-change tool kit.
R Front wheels wear more on the shoulder of For more information on which tyre-changing
the tyre tools are required and approved for performing a
R Rear wheels wear more in the centre of the
tyre change on your vehicle, consult a qualified
tyre specialist workshop.
Necessary tyre-changing tools may include, for
On vehicles with the same front and rear wheel example: 1 Tool bag
size, you can interchange the wheels every
R jack Tool bag 1 contains:
5000 to 10000 km, depending on the wear.
Ensure the direction of rotation is maintained for R chock R jack
the wheels. R wheel spanner R gloves
R centring pin R wheel spanner
422 Wheels and tyres

R centring pin Preparing the vehicle for a wheel change # Place chocks or other suitable items under
R folding wheel chock the front and rear of the wheel that is diago‐
Requirements: nally opposite the wheel you wish to change.
R ratchet for jack R The required tyre-change tool kit is available.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the tyre- # Remove the hub caps if necessary
Setting up the folding wheel chock (→ page 422).
change tool kit, consult a qualified specialist
workshop to find out about suitable tools. # Raise the vehicle (→ page 423).
R The vehicle is not on a slope.
R The vehicle is on solid, non-slippery and level Removing and fitting hub caps
ground. Requirements:
# Apply the electric parking brake manually. # The vehicle is prepared for a wheel change
# Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead (→ page 422).
position. Plastic hub cap
# Vehicles with manual transmission: # To remove: turn the centre cover of the hub
Engage first or reverse gear.
cap anti-clockwise and remove the hub cap.
# Vehicles with automatic transmission: # To fit: make sure that the centre cover of the
Shift into position j.
hub cap is turned anti-clockwise.
# Vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL: Set the # Position the hub cap and turn the centre
normal vehicle level (→ page 216).
cover clockwise until the hub cap engages
# Switch off the engine. physically and audibly.
# Make sure that the engine cannot be started.
 Wheels and tyres 423

Aluminium hub cap # Attach wheel spanner 3 to socket 2 and R The jack must be placed on a firm, flat and
tighten the hub cap clockwise. non-slip surface. If necessary, use a large,
Specified tightening torque: 25 Nm. load-bearing, non-slip underlay.
# Raise the vehicle (→ page 423). R The base of the jack must be positioned ver‐
tically under the jack support point.
Raising the vehicle when changing a wheel
Requirements:
R There are no persons in the vehicle.
R The vehicle is prepared for a wheel change
(→ page 422).
# To remove: position socket 2 on hub cap R The hub caps have been removed
1. (→ page 422).
% The socket can be found in the tyre-change Important notes on using the jack:
tool kit. R Only use the vehicle-specific jack that has Rules of conduct when the vehicle is raised:
# Position wheel spanner 3 on socket 2. been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz
to raise the vehicle. R Never place your hands or feet under the
# Using wheel spanner 3, turn hub cap 1
vehicle.
anti-clockwise and remove it. R The jack is only designed for raising and
R Do not lie under the vehicle.
# To fit: position hub cap 1 and turn until it is holding the vehicle for a short time while a
wheel is being changed and not for mainte‐ R Do not start the engine and do not release
completely flush with the wheel.
nance work under the vehicle. the parking brake.
# Position socket 2 on hub cap 1.
R Do not open or close any doors or the tail‐
gate.
424 Wheels and tyres

* NOTE Vehicle damage from the jack

If you do not position the jack correctly at
the appropriate jack support point of the
vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehi‐
cle raised.
# The jack is designed exclusively for
jacking up the vehicle at the jack sup‐
port points.

# Using the wheel spanner, loosen the wheel Position of jack support points # Take the ratchet ring spanner out of the tyre-
bolts on the wheel you wish to change by change tool kit and place it on the hexagon
about one full turn. Do not unscrew the & WARNING Risk of injury from incorrect nut of the jack so that the letters AUF are
screws completely. positioning of the jack visible.
If you do not position the jack correctly at
the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle,
the jack could tip with the vehicle raised.
# Only position the jack at the appropri‐
ate jacking point of the vehicle. The
base of the jack must be positioned ver‐
tically under the jacking point of the
vehicle.
 Wheels and tyres 425

Removing a wheel
Requirements:
R The vehicle is raised (→ page 423).

When changing a wheel, avoid applying any force

to the brake discs, since this could impair the
level of comfort when braking.

* NOTE Damage to threading from dirt on

wheel bolts
# Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on
# Screw centring pin 1 instead of the wheel
a dirty surface. bolt into the threading.
# Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.
# Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com‐ # Remove the wheel.
pletely. # Fit the new wheel (→ page 425).
# Position jack 2 at jack support point 1.
# Turn ratchet ring spanner 3 clockwise until Fitting a new wheel
jack 2 sits completely on jack support point
1 and the base of the jack lies evenly on Requirements:
the ground. R The wheel is removed (→ page 425).
# Continue to turn ratchet ring spanner 3
until the tyre is raised a maximum of 3 cm
off the ground.
# Loosen and remove the wheel (→ page 425).
426 Wheels and tyres

& WARNING Risk of accident from losing a # Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the cen‐ Lowering the vehicle after a wheel change
wheel tring pin and push it on.
Requirements:
Oiled, greased or damaged wheel bolt/wheel R The new wheel has been fitted (→ page 425).
& WARNING Risk of injury from tightening
nut threads or wheel hub/wheel mounting wheel bolts andnuts # Place the ratchet ring spanner onto the hexa‐
bolt threads can cause the wheel bolts/ gon nut of the jack so that the letters "AB"
wheel nuts to come loose. If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
are visible.
As a result, you could lose a wheel while driv‐ when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip.
# Only tighten wheel bolts or wheel nuts
# To lower the vehicle: turn the ratchet ring
ing. spanner of the jack anti-clockwise.
# Never oil or grease the threads.
when the vehicle is on the ground.
# In the event of damage to the threads, # For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom‐
contact a qualified specialist workshop mends that you only use wheel bolts which
immediately. have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehi‐
# Have the damaged wheel bolts or dam‐ cles, as well as for the wheel in question.
aged hub threads replaced. # Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-
# Do not continue driving. tight.
# Unscrew the centring pin.
# Observe the information on the choice of
tyres (→ page 417).
# Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-
tight.
For tyres with a specified direction of rotation, # Lower the vehicle(→ page 426). # Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise
an arrow on the side wall of the tyre indicates pattern in the sequence indicated (1 to 5).
the correct direction of rotation. Observe the Specified tightening torque: 150 Nm.
direction of rotation when fitting.
 Wheels and tyres 427

& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐ Be sure to also observe the following further # Only use an emergency spare wheel or
rect tightening torque related subjects: spare wheel of a different size briefly.
R Notes on tyre pressure (→ page 410)
The wheels could come loose if the wheel # Do not switch off ESP®.
bolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to the # >Have the emergency spare wheel or
prescribed torque. Emergency spare wheel spare wheel of a different size replaced
# Have the tightening torque checked Notes on the emergency spare wheel at the nearest qualified specialist work‐
immediately at a qualified specialist shop. The new wheel must have the
workshop after changing a wheel. & WARNING Risk of accident caused by correct dimensions.
incorrect wheel and tyre dimensions
# Check the tyre pressure of the newly moun‐ Check the tyre pressure of the emergency spare
ted wheel and adjust accordingly. The wheel or tyre size and the tyre type of wheel fitted. Correct the pressure as necessary.
the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel The maximum permissible speed with an emer‐
# Vehicles with tyre pressure loss warning
and the wheel to be replaced may differ. gency spare wheel fitted is 80 km/h.
system: restart the tyre pressure loss warn‐
Mounting an emergency spare wheel/spare
ing system (→ page 417). wheel may severely impair the driving char‐ Do not fit the emergency spare wheel with snow
Exception: if the new wheel is an emergency acteristics. chains.
spare wheel. Replace the emergency spare wheel after six
To prevent hazardous situations:
# Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring years at the latest, regardless of wear.
# Adapt your driving style accordingly and
system: restart the tyre pressure monitoring % Vehicles with a tyre pressure loss warn‐
system (→ page 413). drive carefully.
ing system: If an emergency spare wheel is
Exception: if the new wheel is an emergency # Never fit more than one emergency
fitted the tyre pressure loss warning system
spare wheel. spare wheel or spare wheel that differs cannot function reliably. Only restart the sys‐
in size. tem again when the emergency spare wheel
has been replaced with a new wheel.
428 Wheels and tyres

Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring # Detach the fastening straps.

system: If an emergency spare wheel is fit‐ # Unhook the retaining spring hooks of the fas‐
ted the tyre pressure monitoring system can‐ tening straps from the brackets.
not function reliably. Only restart the system
again when the emergency spare wheel has
# Remove the emergency spare wheel bag with
been replaced with a new wheel. the emergency spare wheel.
Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring # Open the emergency spare wheel bag and
system: For a few minutes after an emer‐ remove the emergency spare wheel.
gency spare wheel is fitted, the system may
still display the tyre pressure of the removed
wheel.
Be sure to also observe the following further
related subjects:
R Notes on tyre pressure (→ page 410)
R Tyre pressure table (→ page 411)

Removing the emergency spare wheel

The emergency spare wheel is secured in the
emergency spare wheel bag in the load compart‐
ment.
# Observe the information on mounting tyres
(→ page 417).
# Open the tailgate.
 Technical data 429

Notes on technical data # Always have work on the engine elec‐ & WARNING Risk of accident from incor‐
The technical data was determined in accord‐ tronics and related components carried rect operation of the RF transmitter
ance with EU Directives. The data stated only out at a qualified specialist workshop.
If you operate RF transmitters incorrectly in
applies to vehicles with standard equipment. You the vehicle, the electromagnetic radiation
can obtain further information from a Mercedes- could interfere with the on-board electronics,
Benz Service Centre. Two-way radios
e.g.:
Only for certain countries: you can find vehi‐ Notes on installing two-way radios R if the RF transmitter is not connected to
cle-specific vehicle data in the COC documents an exterior aerial
(CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These docu‐ & WARNING Risk of accident caused by
tampering with the RF transmitter R if the exterior aerial is not correctly
ments are delivered with your vehicle.
mounted or is not of low reflection
The electromagnetic radiation from RF trans‐
mitters may interfere with the vehicle elec‐ This could jeopardise the operating safety of
On-board electronics tronics if RF transmitters are tampered with the vehicle.
Notes on tampering with the engine elec‐ or not correctly retrofitted. # Have the low-reflection exterior aerial
tronics This could jeopardise the operating safety of fitted at a qualified specialist workshop.
the vehicle. # When operating RF transmitters in the
* NOTE Premature wear through improper
maintenance # You should have all work on electrical vehicle, always connect them to the
and electronic components carried out low-reflection exterior aerial.
Improper maintenance may cause vehicle at a qualified specialist workshop.
components to wear more quickly and the
vehicle's operating permit may be invalida‐
ted.
430 Technical data

* NOTE Invalidation of the operating per‐ On the rear wings, it is recommended that you
mit due to failure to comply with the position the aerial on the side of the vehicle
instructions for installation and use closest to the centre of the road.
Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road
The operating permit may be invalidated if Vehicles – EMC guidelines for installation of
the instructions for installation and use of RF aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equip‐
transmitters are not observed. ment) when retrofitting RF (radio frequency)
# Only use approved frequency bands. transmitters. Comply with the legal requirements
# Observe the maximum permissible out‐ for detachable parts.
put power in these frequency bands. If your vehicle has fittings for two-way radio
# Only use approved aerial positions. equipment, use the power supply or aerial con‐
nections intended for use with the basic wiring.
Be sure to observe the manufacturer's Supple‐
ments when installing.
Two-way radio transmission output
1 Front roof area The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the
2 Rear roof area base of the aerial must not exceed the values in
3 Rear wing the following table:

On vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof, fit‐

ting an aerial to the front or rear roof area is not
permitted.
 Technical data 431

Frequency band and maximum transmission The following can be used in the vehicle without Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine
output restrictions: number
Frequency band Maximum transmis‐ R RF transmitter with a maximum transmission
output of up to 100 mW Vehicle identification plate
sion output
R RF transmitters with transmitter frequencies
Short wave 100 W in the 380 - 410 MHz frequency band and a
3 - 54 MHz maximum transmission output of up to 2 W
(trunked radio system/Tetra)
4 m band 30 W
R Mobile phones (2G/3G/4G)
74 - 88 MHz
There are no restrictions when positioning the
2 m band 50 W aerial on the outside of the vehicle for the follow‐
144 - 174 MHz ing frequency bands:
Trunked radio sys‐ 10 W R Trunked radio system/Tetra
tem/Tetra R 70 cm band
380 - 460 MHz R 2G/3G/4G

70 cm band 35 W
420 - 450 MHz
Mobile communica‐ 10 W
tions (2G/3G/4G)
432 Technical data

6 Permissible front axle load (kg)

7 Permissible rear axle load (kg)
8 Paint code
% The data shown in the image is example
data.

Vehicle identification plate (example: Kuwait) Vehicle identification plate (example: all
1 Vehicle manufacturer other countries)
2 Place of manufacture 1 Vehicle manufacturer
3 Manufacturing date 2 EU type approval number (only for certain
4 Vehicle model countries)
5 VIN 3 VIN (vehicle identification number)
4 Permissible gross mass (kg)
5 Permissible gross mass of vehicle/trailer
combination (kg) (only for specific countries)
 Technical data 433

VIN in front of the right-hand front seat VIN on the lower edge of the windscreen Operating fluids
Notes on operating fluids

& WARNING Risk of injury from operating

fluids harmful to your health
Operating fluids may be poisonous and harm‐
ful to your health.
# Observe the text on the original con‐
tainers when using, storing or disposing
of operating fluids.
# Always store operating fluids sealed in
1 VIN (vehicle identification number)
their original containers.
The VIN on the lower edge of the windscreen is # Always keep children away from operat‐
only available in some countries. ing fluids.
Engine number
1 VIN (vehicle identification number) The engine number is stamped into the crank‐ + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
case. You can obtain further information from pollution caused by environmentally irre‐
2 Floor covering any qualified specialist workshop. sponsible disposal
# Dispose of operating fluids in an envi‐
ronmentally responsible manner.
434 Technical data

Operating fluids include the following: Further information on approved operating flu‐ # Keep children away from fuel.
R fuels ids:
R exhaust gas aftertreatment additives, e.g. R In the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for If you or other people come into contact with
operating fluids at http://bevo.mercedes- fuel, observe the following:
AdBlue®
benz.com (by entering the designation) # Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with
R lubricants
R At a qualified specialist workshop soap and water.
R coolant
# If fuel comes into contact with your
R brake fluid & WARNING ‑ Risk of fire or explosion eyes, immediately rinse them thor‐
R windscreen washer fluid caused by fuel oughly with clean water. Seek medical
R climate control system refrigerant Fuels are highly inflammable. attention immediately.
# You must avoid fire, naked flames, cre‐ # If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten‐
Only use products recommended by Mercedes- tion immediately. Do not induce vomit‐
Benz. Damage caused by using vehicle products ating sparks and smoking.
ing.
which have not been recommended is not cov‐ # Before refuelling, switch off the engine
# Change immediately out of clothing that
ered by the Mercedes-Benz guarantee, warranty and auxiliary heating if your vehicle is
or goodwill gestures. equipped with auxiliary heating. has come into contact with fuel.
You can identify operating fluids approved by
Mercedes-Benz by the following inscription on & WARNING Risk of injury from fuel Fuel
the containers: Fuels are poisonous and harmful to your Information on fuel grades for vehicles with
R MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) health a petrol engine
R MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51) # Do not swallow fuel or let it come into Observe the notes on operating fluids
contact with skin, eyes or clothing. (→ page 433).
# Do not inhale fuel vapour.
 Technical data 435

* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel E 200, E 250, E 400 4MATIC: Observe the Recommended fuel: the recommended octane
information on sulphur content on the informa‐ number for your vehicle can be found in the
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could tion table in the fuel filler flap: information table in the fuel filler flap
result in damage to the fuel system, the (→ page 175).
engine and the emission control system. As a temporary measure, if the recommended
# Only refuel using premium-grade unlea‐ fuel is not available, you may also use unleaded
ded fuel that conforms to EN 228, or an regular petrol with an octane number of at least:
equivalent specification. R E 250: 93 RON

Fuel of this specification may contain up to R All other models: 91 RON

10 % ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use This may reduce engine output and increase fuel
with E10 fuel. consumption.
Do not refuel using: Never refuel using petrol with a lower RON.
R Diesel
* NOTE Damage to the emission control Further information on fuel can be found:
R E85, E100
system caused by fuel with a too high R At a filling station
R Petrol containing methanol (M15, M30, sulphur content R At a qualified specialist workshop
M85, M100)
# Only use sulphur-free fuel (sulphur con‐ Information on additives in petrol
R Petrol with additives containing metal
tent ≤ 10 ppm). Observe the notes on operating fluids
If you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel: (→ page 433).
All other models: If the available fuel is not suf‐
# Do not switch the ignition on. ficiently low in sulphur, this can produce
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. unpleasant odours.
436 Technical data

* NOTE Damage caused by non-approved & WARNING Risk of fire through fuel mix‐ Do not use the following:
additives ture R petrol
Even small amounts of the wrong additive If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flash R marine diesel
may lead to malfunctions occurring. point of the fuel mixture is lower than that of R heating oil
# Only add cleaning additives recommen‐ pure diesel fuel.
R bio-diesel
ded by Mercedes-Benz to the fuel. While the engine is running, component
R vegetable oil
parts in the exhaust system may overheat
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use fuel unnoticed. R paraffin
brands that have additives. # Never refuel using petrol. R kerosene
The fuel grade available in some countries may # Never mix diesel fuel with petrol.
not be sufficient. Residue could build up in the Information on low outside temperatures
fuel injection system as a result. In this case, in Refuel your vehicle with as much winter diesel as
consultation with a Mercedes-Benz Service * NOTE Damage through wrong fuel
possible at the beginning of winter.
Centre, the fuel may be mixed with the cleaning Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could Before changing over to winter diesel, the fuel
additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz. result in damage to the fuel system, the tank should be empty, if possible. When refilling
Always observe the notes and mixing ratios engine and the emission control system. for the first time, keep the fuel level low, for
specified on the container. # Only refuel using diesel fuel that con‐ example at reserve level. The fuel tank can be fil‐
Information on fuel grades for vehicles with forms to European standard EN 590, or led as usual at the next refuelling.
a diesel engine an equivalent specification. Further information on fuel can be found:
# Vehicles with diesel particle filters:
General notes R At a filling station.
Observe the notes on operating fluids in countries outside the EU, only refuel
R At a qualified specialist workshop
(→ page 433). with low-sulphur Euro diesel with a sul‐
phur content of under 50 ppm.
 Technical data 437

Notes on fuel consumption R Vehicles that comply with or exceed the Adblue®
EURO 5 standard: Regulation (EC) No.
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Increased CO2 715/2007 Notes on AdBlue®
‑emissions due to increased fuel con‐ Observe the notes on operating fluids
Tank capacity and reserve fuel level (→ page 433).
sumption
The total capacity of the fuel tank may vary,
depending on the vehicle equipment. AdBlue® is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaust
Your vehicle's CO2 ‑emissions are directly
gas aftertreatment of diesel engines.
related to fuel consumption. Filling capacity
# You can minimise your vehicle's CO2 * NOTE Damage caused by diluting or mix‐
Model Total capacity
emissions by driving carefully and hav‐ ing additives with AdBlue®
ing your vehicle serviced regularly. E 400 4MATIC 66.0 l
Diluting or mixing additives with AdBlue® can
or destroy the BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreat‐
% Only for certain countries: you can find the
current consumption and emission values of 80.0 l ment system.
your vehicle in the COC documents (EU CER‐ All other models 50.0 l
# Only use AdBlue® in accordance with
TIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These docu‐ ISO 22241.
ments are delivered with your vehicle. or
# Do not use additives.
The consumption figures were determined, 66.0 l
# Do not dilute AdBlue®.
based on the currently applicable version of
the standard: Model Of which reserve
R Vehicles that comply with standards up fuel
to and including the EURO 4 standard: All models 7.0 l
EU Directive RL80/1268/EEC
438 Technical data

* NOTE Damage and malfunctions due to If AdBlue® has already crystallised, clean it
impurities in AdBlue® with a sponge and cold water.
Impurities in AdBlue® lead to:
When you open the AdBlue® tank, small
R Increased emissions values
amounts of ammonia vapour may escape. Do
R Damage to the catalytic converter not inhale any ammonia vapours that may be
R Engine damage released. Only fill the AdBlue® tank in well-venti‐
R BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment mal‐
lated areas.
functions AdBlue® filling capacity
# Avoid impurities in AdBlue®. Total capacity of AdBlue® tank * NOTE Engine damage caused by an
incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi‐
Model Total capacity tives
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Contamination
caused by AdBlue® All models 23.5 l # Do not use engine oils or oil filters
which do not correspond to the specifi‐
AdBlue® residues crystallise after a period of cations explicitly prescribed for the
time, and contaminate the surfaces with Engine oil service intervals.
which they come into contact.
Notes on engine oil # Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in
# Surfaces that have come into contact order to achieve longer change intervals
Observe the notes on operating fluids
with AdBlue® while refilling must be (→ page 433). than prescribed.
immediately rinsed with water, or # Do not use additives.
AdBlue® must be removed with a damp
cloth and cold water.
# Have the engine oil renewed at regular
intervals.
 Technical data 439

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval Replacement amount
oil change carried out at a qualified specialist Diesel engines MB-Freigabe or MB- Model Replacement
workshop. Approval amount
Only Mercedes-Benz approved engine oils may
be used in Mercedes-Benz engines. E 350 d 228.51, 229.31, E 200 7.0 l
Further information on engine oils and oil filters: 229.51, 229.52 E 250
R In the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for All other models 228.51, 229.31, E 200 4MATIC 6.5 l
operating fluids at http://bevo.mercedes- 229.51, 229.52,
229.71 E 400 4MATIC
benz.com (by entering the designation)
R At a qualified specialist workshop E 350 d 9.0 l
If the engine oils listed in the table are not avail‐
Petrol engines: For certain countries, different able, you may add a maximum of 1.0 l of the fol‐ All other models 6.3 l
engine oils can be used in conjunction with lowing engine oils once only:
reduced maintenance intervals. For more infor‐ R Petrol engines: MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval
mation, please contact a qualified specialist Notes on brake fluid
229.3 or ACEA A3/B3
workshop. R Diesel engines: MB-Freigabe or MB- Observe the notes on operating fluids
Quality and filling capacity of engine oil Approval 229.3, 229.5 or ACEA C3 (→ page 433).

MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval The following values refer to an oil change, & WARNING Risk of an accident due to
including the oil filter: vapour pockets forming in the brake sys‐
Petrol engines MB-Freigabe or MB-
Approval tem
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture
All models 229.5, 229.6 from the air. This lowers the boiling point of
440 Technical data

the brake fluid. If the boiling point is too low, & WARNING Risk of fire‑ and injury from Further information on coolant:
vapour pockets may form in the brake sys‐ antifreeze R In the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
tem when the brakes are applied hard. Operating Fluids 310.1, e.g. online at
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot
This impairs the braking effect. component parts in the engine compart‐ http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
# Have the brake fluid renewed at the ment, it may ignite. R At a qualified specialist workshop.
specified intervals. # Allow the engine to cool down before
you top up the antifreeze. * NOTE Overheating at high outside tem‐
Have the brake fluid regularly changed at a quali‐
# Make sure that no antifreeze spills out peratures
fied specialist workshop.
next to the filler opening.
Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz If an inappropriate coolant is used, the
# Thoroughly clean the antifreeze from
according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0. engine cooling system is not sufficiently pro‐
component parts before starting the tected against overheating and corrosion at
Further information on brake fluid: vehicle. high outside temperatures.
R In the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
# Always use an appropriate coolant.
Operating Fluids at http://bevo.mercedes- * NOTE Damage caused by incorrect cool‐
benz.com ant Have the coolant regularly changed at a qualified
R At a qualified specialist workshop specialist workshop.
# Only add coolant that has been pre‐
mixed with the required antifreeze pro‐ The proportion of corrosion inhibitor/ antifreeze
Coolant tection. concentrate in the engine cooling system should
Notes on coolant be:
Observe the notes on operating fluids R A minimum of 50% (antifreeze protection
(→ page 433). down to approximately -37 °C).
 Technical data 441

R A maximum of 55% (antifreeze protection # Only use windscreen washer fluids Vehicle data
down to -45 °C). which are also suitable for use on plas‐ Vehicle dimensions
tic surfaces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB
Notes on windscreen washer fluid WinterFit. The heights specified may vary as a result of the:
R tyres
Observe the notes on operating fluids
(→ page 433). * NOTE Blocked spray nozzles caused by R load
mixing windscreen washer fluids R condition of the suspension
& WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury due to # Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB Win‐ R optional equipment
windscreen washer concentrate terFit with other windscreen washer flu‐
Windscreen washer concentrate is highly ids.
flammable. It could ignite if it comes into
contact with hot engine component parts or Do not use distilled or de-ionised water as the fill
the exhaust system. level sensor may be triggered erroneously.
# Make sure that no windscreen washer Recommended windscreen washer fluid:
concentrate spills out next to the filler R Above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit
opening. R Below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit

* NOTE Damage to the exterior lighting For the correct mixing ratio refer to the informa‐
tion on the antifreeze reservoir.
due to unsuitable windscreen washer
fluid Mix the washer fluid with the windscreen washer
fluid all year round.
Unsuitable windscreen washer fluids may
damage the plastic surface of the exterior
lighting.
442 Technical data

Opening height E 220 d 4MATIC All-Terrain Weights and loads

Model 1 2 Head‐ Please note that for the specified vehicle data:
Opening room Vehicle height 1497 mm
R items of optional equipment increase the
height Wheelbase 2939 mm unladen weight and reduce the maximum
E 400 4MATIC 2061 mm 1937 mm payload.
All other models
R vehicle-specific weight information can be
E 200 4MATIC 2076 mm 1950 mm Vehicle length 4933 mm found on the vehicle identification plate .
E 220 d 4MATIC
Vehicle width including out‐ 2065 mm Roof load
E 220 d 4MATIC All- 2098 mm 1972 mm side mirrors All models
Terrain
Vehicle width excluding out‐ 1852 mm Maximum roof load 100 kg
All other models 2070 mm 1944 mm side mirrors
Vehicle dimensions Wheelbase 2939 mm
Trailer hitch
E 220 d 4MATIC All-Terrain Models Vehicle General notes on the trailer hitch
height
Vehicle length 4947 mm Not all models can be used to tow a trailer
E 400 4MATIC 1466 mm (→ page 247).
Vehicle width including out‐ 2065 mm
side mirrors E 200 4MATIC 1481 mm Modifications to the engine cooling system may
be necessary, depending on the vehicle model.
Vehicle width excluding out‐ 1861 mm E 220 d 4MATIC The retrofitting of a trailer hitch is only permissi‐
side mirrors All other models 1475 mm ble if a towing capacity is specified in your vehi‐
cle documents.
 Technical data 443

Further information on the trailer hitch can be Permissible towing capacity, braked (at a # The tongue weight must not be below
obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. minimum start-off gradeability of 12%) from 50 kg.
a standstill)
# Use a tongue weight that is as close as
Permissible towing capacity Model Manual Auto‐ possible to the maximum permissible
trans‐ matic tongue weight.
Permissible towing capacity, braked (at a mission trans‐
minimum start-off gradeability of 8% from a mission Tongue weight
standstill)
E 200 1500 kg 2100 kg Model Maximum tongue
Model Manual Auto‐ weight
trans‐ matic All other models — 2100 kg
mission trans‐ All models 84 kg
mission Permissible towing capacity, unbraked
E 200 1500 kg 2100 kg Model Permissible towing Permissible rear axle load during trailer
capacity, unbraked operation
All other models — 2100 kg
All models 750 kg Axle load
Model Axle load
Maximum tongue weight
E 200 4MATIC 1450 kg
* NOTE Damage caused by the trailer E 200, manual trans‐
coming loose mission
If the tongue weight used is too low, the E 200, automatic 1455 kg
trailer may come loose. transmission
444 Technical data

Model Axle load

E 250 1460 kg
E 200 d 1480 kg
E 350 d 1495 kg
E 400 4MATIC
E 220 d 4MATIC All- 1530 kg
Terrain
All other models 1485 kg
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 445

Display messages Please respond in accordance with the display Calling up stored display messages
messages and follow the additional notes in this On-board computer:
Introduction Owner's Manual. , Service . 1 message
Notes on display messages You can hide low-priority display messages by If there are no display messages, No messages
Display messages appear in the multifunction pressing the % button or the left-hand Touch appears in the multifunction display.
display. Control. The display messages are then stored in
# Scroll through the display messages by swip‐
Display messages with graphic symbols are sim‐ the message memory. Rectify the cause of a dis‐
play message as quickly as possible. ing upwards or downwards on Touch Control
plified in the Owner's Manual and may differ
on the left-hand side of the steering wheel.
from the symbols in the multifunction display. High-priority display messages cannot be hid‐
The multifunction display shows high-priority dis‐ # To exit the message memory: press the
den. The multifunction display shows these mes‐
play messages in red. Certain display messages sages continuously until the cause for the mes‐ % button.
are accompanied by a warning tone. sage has been rectified.
446 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Safety systems
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

!
* ABS and ESP® are temporarily unavailable.
Other driving and driving safety systems may also be faulty.

÷
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning
If ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning, the wheels could lock when braking and ESP® cannot carry out vehicle
stabilisation.
currently unavailable See
Owner's Manual The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance may
increase in an emergency braking situation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.
# Drive on carefully.

# Have ABS and ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h.
# If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 447

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

!
* ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.
Other driving and driving safety systems may also be faulty.

÷
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning
If ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning, the wheels could lock when braking and ESP® cannot carry out vehicle
stabilisation.
inoperative See Owner's
Manual The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance may
increase in an emergency braking situation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.
# Drive on carefully.

# Have ABS and ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Drive on carefully.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
448 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

÷
* ESP® is temporarily unavailable.
Other driving and driving safety systems may also be faulty.

currently unavailable See & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning

Owner's Manual
If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems
are switched off.
# Drive on carefully.

# Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h.
# If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 449

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

÷
* ESP® is malfunctioning.
Other driving and driving safety systems may also be faulty.
The brake system continues to operate normally. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situa‐
inoperative See Owner's tion.
Manual
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning
If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems
are switched off.
# Drive on carefully.

# Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Drive on carefully.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
450 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

T
* EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.
Other driving and driving safety systems may also be faulty.

!
& WARNING Risk of skidding if EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning
If EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning, the wheels can lock when braking and ESP® cannot carry out vehicle

÷
stabilisation.
The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance may
increase in an emergency braking situation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.
# Drive on carefully.
inoperative See Owner's
Manual # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Drive on carefully.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

!
* The red ! indicator lamp is lit.
You have attempted to release the electric parking brake with the ignition switched off.
# Switch the ignition on.
Turn on the ignition to
release the parking brake
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 451

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

!
* The red ! indicator lamp flashes.
The electric parking brake is applied while driving:
R A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled .
Release parking brake R You are performing emergency braking using the electric parking brake .

# Check that the conditions for automatic release of the electric parking brake are fulfilled.
# Release the electric parking brake manually.
452 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

!
* The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
To apply:
# Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
Parking brake See Owner's # Apply the electric parking brake manually .
Manual
If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake:
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
# Where necessary, also safeguard the parked vehicle against rolling away.
The yellow ! indicator lamp and the red ! indicator lamp are lit. The electric parking brake is malfunction‐
ing.
To release:
# Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.

# Release the electric parking brake manually .

or
# Release the electric parking brake automatically .
If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake:
# Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red ! indicator lamp is flashing. The electric parking brake is mal‐
functioning.
The electric parking brake could not be applied or released.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 453

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.

To apply:
# Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually .
To release:
# Apply and then release the electric parking brake manually.

If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake or the red ! indicator lamp continues to flash:
# Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
# Where necessary, also safeguard the parked vehicle against rolling away.
The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red ! indicator lamp flashes for approximately ten seconds after
the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then remains lit or goes out. The electric parking brake is
malfunctioning.
If the battery charge level is too low:
# Charge the battery.

To apply:
# Switch the ignition off.
The electric parking brake is applied automatically.
454 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

If you do not wish the electric parking brake to be applied, leave the ignition switched on, e.g. when washing the
vehicle in an automatic car wash or when having the vehicle towed away. Do not do this when having the vehicle
towed with the rear axle raised.
If the electric parking brake is not applied automatically:
# Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.

# Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually .

If it is still not possible to apply the electric parking brake:

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
# Where necessary, also safeguard the parked vehicle against rolling away.

To release:
# If the conditions for automatic release are fulfilled and the electric parking brake is not released automatically,
release the electric parking brake manually .

If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake:

# Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 455

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Brake immediately * Vehicles with manual transmission: a malfunction has occurred while the HOLD function was activated.
A tone may also sound at regular intervals. If you attempt to lock the vehicle, the tone becomes louder.
You cannot start the engine.
# Immediately depress the brake pedal firmly until the display message disappears.
You can restart the engine.

J
* There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level

Check brake fluid level If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Do not top up the brake fluid.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not
continue driving under any circumstances.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Do not top up the brake fluid.
456 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

#
* The brake linings have reached the wear limit.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Check brake pad wear

Active Brake Assist Func- * Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function, Evasive Steering
tions currently limited See Assist or PRE‑SAFE® PLUS are temporarily unavailable or only partially available.
Owner's Manual Vehicles without the Driving Assistance package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable.
The ambient conditions are outside the system borders .
# Drive on.
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system borders, the system will become available again.
# If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle while paying attention to road and traffic conditions
and restart the engine.
Active Brake Assist Func- * Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function, Evasive Steering
tions limited See Owner's Assist or PRE‑SAFE® PLUS is malfunctioning.
Manual Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is malfunctioning.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

PRE-SAFE inoperative See * PRE‑SAFE® functions are malfunctioning.

Owner's Manual # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 457

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

PRE-SAFE impulse side * Side PRE-SAFE® Impulse is malfunctioning or inoperative after having already been triggered.
inoperative See Owner's # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Manual
Radar sensors dirty See * The radar sensor system is malfunctioning. Possible causes:
Owner's Manual R soiling of the sensors
R heavy rain
R extended driving on inter-urban roads without moving traffic, e.g. in the desert

Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable.
When the causes no longer apply, driving systems and driving safety systems are available again.
If the display message does not disappear:
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

# Clean all sensors .

# Restart the engine.

458 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

6
* The restraint system is faulty (→ page 31).

& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the restraint system
Restraint sys. malfunction If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or
Consult workshop might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident. This may affect the seat belt tensioner or airbag, for
example.
# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Recognising a restraint system malfunction

R The restraint system warning lamp 6 does not light up when the ignition is switched on.
R The restraint system warning lamp 6 lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 459

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

6
* The corresponding restraint system is malfunctioning (→ page 31).

& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the restraint system
Example:Front left malfunc- If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or
tion Consult workshop might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident. This may affect the seat belt tensioner or airbag, for
example.
# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Recognising a restraint system malfunction

R The 6 restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the ignition is switched on.
R The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

6
* The corresponding window airbag is malfunctioning (→ page 36).

& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the window airbag
Example:Left windowbag The window airbag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident
malfunction Consult work- with high deceleration.
shop # Have the window airbag checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

460 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

G
* One or more main functions of the Mercedes me connect system is/are malfunctioning.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Inoperative
Front-passenger airbag dis- * The front passenger airbag is disabled, even though an adult or a person with a build corresponding to that of an
abled See Owner's Manual adult is seated on the front passenger seat. If additional forces are applied to the seat, the weight the system
detects may be too low.

& WARNING ‑ Risk of injury or even fatal injury when the front passenger airbag is disabled
If the front passenger airbag is disabled, It will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform
its intended protective function.
A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, espe‐
cially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard.
# Be aware of the status of the front passenger airbag both before and during the journey.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
# Check the status of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff .
# If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 461

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Front-passenger airbag * The front passenger airbag is enabled while the vehicle is in motion:
enabled See Owner's Man- R Even when a child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system weight threshold is located on the
ual front passenger seat.
R Even when the front passenger seat is not occupied.

The system may detect objects or forces that are adding to the weight applied to the seat.

& WARNING ‑ Risk of injury or even fatal injury from using a child restraint system when the front passenger
airbag is enabled
If you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the front passenger airbag is
enabled, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident.
The child could be struck by the airbag.
# Be aware of the status of the front passenger airbag both before and during the journey.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
# Check the status of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff .
# If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
462 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Driving systems
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

À
* ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or an increasing lack of concentration on the part of the driver
(→ page 238).
# If necessary, take a break.

ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a

break!

À
* ATTENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

ATTENTION ASSIST inoper-

ative

É
* Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected.

Vehicle rising

É
* The vehicle level is too low and the vehicle rises to the selected vehicle level.
# Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

Vehicle rising Please wait

 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 463

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

É
* The AIR BODY CONTROL function is restricted. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected.
# Drive in a manner appropriate for the current level, but do not exceed 80 km/h.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Malfunction See Owner's DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL is malfunctioning. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected.
Manual # Do not drive faster than 80 km/h.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

464 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

É
* You have pulled away although the vehicle level was too low.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
The vehicle rises to the selected vehicle level.
Stop vehicle Vehicle too # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
low
If the display message does not disappear and a warning tone also sounds, AIR BODY CONTROL is malfunctioning:
# Do not drive faster than 80 km/h and consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* NOTE The tyres of the front axle or the front wings could be damaged by large steering movements
# Avoid large steering movements while driving and listen for scraping sounds.
# If you hear scraping sounds, pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road and traffic con‐
ditions, and set a higher vehicle level if possible.
# Set a higher vehicle level .
Depending on the malfunction, the vehicle is raised.

É
* You are driving too fast for the selected vehicle level.
# In order to adjust the vehicle level, you must not drive faster than 80 km/h.

# In order to adjust the vehicle level during trailer operation, you must not drive faster than 30 km/h.
Please reduce speed
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 465

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

É
* Due to frequent level changes within a short space of time, the compressor first needs to cool down in order to set
the selected vehicle level.
# Drive on in a manner appropriate for the current level. Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance.

Compressor is cooling When the compressor has cooled down, the vehicle continues rising to the selected vehicle level.
* All-Terrain vehicles: the white display message notifies you not to drive faster than 35 km/h in the AT (AllTerrain)
max. speed 22 mph vehicle level.
If the display message is red, you are driving too fast for the AT (AllTerrain) vehicle level.
# Do not drive faster than 35 km/h in the AT (AllTerrain) vehicle level.

* All-Terrain vehicles: you are driving too fast for the selected vehicle level.
Please reduce speed # In order to adjust the vehicle level, you must not drive faster than 35 km/h.

# In order to adjust the vehicle level during trailer operation, you must not drive faster than 30 km/h.
466 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Active Lane Keeping Assist * Active Lane keeping Assist is temporarily unavailable.
currently unavailable See The ambient conditions are outside the system borders (→ page 244).
Owner's Manual Vehicles with Steering Pilot: the camera view may be restricted by the windscreen.
# Drive on.
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system borders, the system will become available again.

If the display message does not disappear on vehicles with Steering Pilot:
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
# Clean the windscreen.

Active Lane Keeping Assist * Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning.

inoperative # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Traffic Sign Assist Camera * The camera view is reduced. Possible causes:
view restricted See Own- R dirt on the windscreen in the camera's field of vision
er's Manual R heavy rain, snow or fog

Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable.
When the causes no longer apply, driving systems and driving safety systems are available again.
If the display message does not disappear:
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

# Clean the windscreen.

 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 467

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Active Lane Keeping Assist * Vehicles without Steering Pilot: the camera view is reduced.
Camera view restricted Possible causes:
See Owner's Manual R dirt on the windscreen in the camera's field of vision
R heavy rain, snow or fog

Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable.
When the causes no longer apply, driving systems and driving safety systems are available again.
If the display message does not disappear:
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

# Clean the windscreen.

Blind Spot Assist currently * Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable.

unavailable See Owner's The system borders have been reached (→ page 242).
Manual # Drive on.
When the causes no longer apply, the system will be available again.
or
# If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle while paying attention to road and traffic conditions
and restart the engine.
# If necessary, clean the rear bumper. If the bumper is extremely dirty, the sensors in the bumper may be mal‐
functioning.
468 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Active Blind Spot Assist * Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable.
currently unavailable See The system borders have been reached (→ page 242).
Owner's Manual # Drive on.
When the causes no longer apply, the system will be available again.
# If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle while paying attention to road and traffic conditions
and restart the engine.
Blind Spot Assist inopera- * Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.
tive # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Blind Spot Assist * Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.

inoperative # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Example:Parking Pilot Park- * The parking assistance systems of Parking Pilot were interrupted. You have opened the driver's door or touched the
ing cancelled steering wheel, for example.
# Steer and brake manually.

ë
* The HOLD function is deactivated because the vehicle is skidding or a condition for activation is not met.
# Reactivate the HOLD function later or check the activation conditions for the HOLD function .

Off
Distance Pilot available * Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is operational again and can be activated (→ page 205).
again
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 469

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Distance Pilot currently * Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is temporarily unavailable.
unavailable See Owner's The ambient conditions are outside the system borders (→ page 202).
Manual # Drive on.
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system borders, the system will become available again.
Distance Pilot inoperative * Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is malfunctioning.
Other driving and driving safety systems may also be faulty.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Steering Pilot currently * Steering Pilot is temporarily unavailable.

unavailable See Owner's The ambient conditions are outside the system borders (→ page 209).
Manual # Drive on.
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system borders, the system will become available again.
# If necessary, clean the windscreen in the camera's field of vision.

Steering Pilot inoperative * Steering Pilot is malfunctioning. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC remains available.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Limiter passive * If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown), the limiter is switched to passive mode
(→ page 200).

¯
* Cruise control cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fulfilled.
# Observe the activation conditions for cruise control .
--- mph
470 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Cruise control off * Cruise control has been deactivated.
If there is an additional warning tone, cruise control has been deactivated automatically (→ page 199).
Cruise control and Limiter * Cruise control and the limiter are malfunctioning.
inoperative # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Limiter inoperative * The limiter is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

È
* The limiter cannot be activated as not all activation conditions have been fulfilled.
# Observe the activation conditions of the limiter .
--- mph

Speed limit (winter tyres) * You have reached the stored maximum speed for winter tyres. It is not possible to exceed this speed.
XXX mph

ð
* The maximum permissible speed has been exceeded (only for certain countries).
# Drive more slowly.

Maximum speed exceeded

Traffic Sign Assist currently * Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily unavailable.
unavailable See Owner's # Drive on.
Manual When the causes no longer apply, the system will be available again.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 471

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Traffic Sign Assist inopera- * Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning.
tive # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Blind Spot Assist not availa- * When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, Blind Spot Assist is unavailable.
ble when towing a trailer # Press the left-hand Touch Control and confirm the display message.
See Owner's Manual
Active Blind Spot Assist * When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, Active Blind Spot Assist is unavailable.
not available when towing # Press the left-hand Touch Control and confirm the display message.
a trailer See Owner's Man-
ual
Cruise control inoperative * Cruise control is malfunctioning.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking Pilot Manoeuvring * Parking Pilot and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC are temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the
assistance limited See system borders (→ page 227). Beware of the entire vehicle surroundings.
Owner's Manual # As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system borders, the system will become available again.

Parking Pilot and * Parking Pilot and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC are malfunctioning.
PARKTRONIC inoperative # Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and restart the engine.
See Owner's Manual # If the display message continues to be displayed, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
472 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Engine
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Top up coolant See Own- * The coolant level is too low.
er’s Manual
* NOTE Engine damage due to insufficient coolant
# Avoid long journeys with insufficient coolant.
# Add coolant .

?
* The fan motor is faulty.
# Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive on to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that
the coolant temperature display remains below 120 °C.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 473

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

?
* The coolant is too hot.
# Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine.

Coolant Stop vehicle & WARNING Danger of burns when opening the bonnet
Switch engine off
If you open the engine bonnet when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you
could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids.
# Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.

# In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the engine bonnet closed and call the fire service.

# Wait until the engine has cooled down.

# Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed.
# Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive on to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that
the coolant temperature display remains below 120 °C.
474 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

#
* The battery is not being charged.

* NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving

See Owner's Manual # Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
# Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

#
* The battery is no longer being charged and the battery charge level is too low.

* NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving

Stop vehicle See Owner's # Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
Manual # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not
continue driving under any circumstances.
# Switch off the engine.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 475

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

#
* The battery charge level is too low.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not
continue driving under any circumstances.
Stop vehicle Leave engine # Start the engine.
running # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

4
* The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil

Check eng. oil lev. when # Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.
next refuelling
# Check the engine oil level when next refuelling.
Top up the engine oil (→ page 377).
Notes on engine oil (→ page 438).
476 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

4
* Display message only with certain engines:
The engine oil level is too low.

Engine oil level Stop vehi- * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil
cle Switch engine off # Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not
continue driving under any circumstances.
# Switch off the engine.
# Check the engine oil level.
Top up the engine oil (→ page 377).
Notes on engine oil (→ page 438).

4
* Display message only with certain engines:
The engine oil level is too high.

Engine oil level Reduce oil * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with excess engine oil
level # Avoid long journeys with excess engine oil.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately and have engine oil siphoned off.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 477

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

4
* Display message only with certain engines:
The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

Add 1 litre engine oil when * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil
next refuelling # Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.
# Check the engine oil level when next refuelling.
Top up the engine oil (→ page 377).
Notes on engine oil (→ page 438).

4
* Display message only with certain engines:
The engine oil pressure is too low.

Engine oil pressure Stop * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil pressure
Switch off engine # Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil pressure.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not
continue driving under any circumstances.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
478 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

5
* The electrical connection to the oil level sensor is interrupted or the oil level sensor is faulty.
The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Engine oil level cannot be
measured

Ø
* The AdBlue® level has fallen below the reserve range.
# Refill AdBlue® immediately .

Refill AdBlue See Owner’s

Manual

Ø
* The AdBlue® tank is empty. You can no longer start the engine.
# Top up at least 4.0 l of AdBlue® .

# Switch the ignition on.

Refill AdBlue Eng. start not You can restart the engine after approximately one minute.
possible

Ø
* The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Check AdBlue See Owner’s

Manual
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 479

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

8
* The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.
# Refuel.

Reserve fuel level

Ø
* The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Eng. start not possible in

XXX mi

¸
* Vehicles with a diesel engine: the engine air filter is dirty and must be replaced.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Replace air cleaner

Ø
* The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. You can no longer start the engine.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Eng. start not possible

480 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Ø
* The AdBlue® level is only sufficient for the displayed distance.
# Refill AdBlue® immediately .

% The message disappears after driving at a speed above 15 km/h for approximately one minute.
Refill AdBlue No start in
XXX mi

#
* The engine is off and the battery charge level is too low.
# Switch off electrical consumers that are not required.

# Leave the engine running for a few minutes, or drive for a longer distance.
Start engine See Owner's The battery charges.
Manual

!
* Vehicles with a diesel engine: the water in the fuel filter must be drained off.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Clean the fuel filter

 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 481

Tyres
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Tyre pressure Check tyres * The tyre pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss in pressure.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tyre pressure

Tyres with insufficient tyre pressure pose the following risks:
R The tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.
R The tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction.
R ‑ The driving characteristics, steering and braking may be greatly impaired.

You could then lose control of the vehicle.

# Observe the recommended tyre pressures.

# Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.

# Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

# Check the tyre pressure and the tyres.
# When the tyre pressure is correct, restart the tyre pressure loss warning system .

Check tyre pressures then * The tyre pressure loss warning system generated a display message and has not been restarted since.
restart Run Flat Indicator # When the tyre pressure is correct, restart the tyre pressure loss warning system .

Run Flat Indicator inopera- * The tyre pressure loss warning system is malfunctioning.
tive # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
482 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

h
* The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the tyre pressure difference between the wheels is too
great.
# Check the tyre pressure and add air, if necessary.

Rectify tyre pressure # When the tyre pressure is correct, restart the tyre pressure monitoring system .

h
* The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly. The wheel position is displayed.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tyre pressure

Check tyre(s) Tyres with insufficient tyre pressure pose the following risks:
R The tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.
R The tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction.
R ‑ The driving characteristics, steering and braking may be greatly impaired.

You could then lose control of the vehicle.

# Observe the recommended tyre pressures.

# Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.

# Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

# Check the tyre pressure and the tyres.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 483

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

h
* The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is displayed.

& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with a flat tyre

Warning tyre defect Flat tyres are dangerous in the following ways:
R The tyres can overheat and cause a fire.
R ‑ The driving characteristics, steering and braking may be greatly impaired.

You could then lose control of the vehicle.

# Do not drive with a flat tyre.
# Observe the notes on flat tyres.

Notes on flat tyres (→ page 390).

# Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

# Check the tyres.

Tyre press. monitor cur- * No signals can be received from the tyre pressure sensors due to strong radio signal source interference. The tyre
rently unavailable pressure monitoring system is temporarily unavailable.
# Drive on.
The tyre pressure monitoring system restarts automatically as soon as the cause has been rectified.
484 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

h
* There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor of one or more wheels. The pressure of the affected tyre is not
displayed.
# Have the faulty tyre pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

Wheel sensor(s) missing

Tyre press. monitor inoper- * The wheels fitted do not have suitable tyre pressure sensors. The tyre pressure monitoring system is deactivated.
ative No wheel sensors # Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors.

Tyre press. monitor inoper- * The tyre pressure monitoring system is faulty.
ative
& WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning
If the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning, it is not able to issue a warning if there is pressure
loss in one or more of the tyres.
Tyres with insufficient tyre pressure may, for example, affect the vehicle's handling characteristics, steering and
braking. ‑
# Have the tyre pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tyre(s) overheated * At least one tyre is overheated. The affected tyres are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the
tyres are displayed in yellow.
# Drive more slowly.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 485

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Tyre(s) overheated Reduce * At least one tyre is overheated.
speed
& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tyres
Overheated tyres may burst, particularly at high speeds.
# Reduce speed so that the tyres cool down.

# Reduce speed so that the tyres cool down.

Key
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Â
* The key needs to be replaced.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Replace key
486 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

,
* Vehicles with a digital vehicle key in the smartphone: only a few or no authorisations remain for starting the
engine.
# Make sure that the Internet connection is not limited by certain mobile phone settings.

Replace key See Owner's # Open the Mercedes me connect web App http://www.mercedes.me. and call up the "digital vehicle key in the
Manual smartphone" service.
# Deactivate the service first and then activate it again.

# If the display message still appears, contact the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (CAC).

Â
* The key battery is discharged.
# Change the battery .

Change key batteries

Â
* The key is currently undetected.
# Change the location of the key in the vehicle.

# If the key is still not recognised, start the engine with the key in the stowage compartment .
Key not detected (white
display message)
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 487

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Â
* The key detection function is malfunctioning.
# Change the location of the key in the vehicle.

# Start the vehicle with the key in the stowage compartment .

Place the key in the
marked space See Owner's
Manual

Â
* The key cannot be detected and may no longer be in the vehicle.
The key is no longer in the vehicle and you switch off the engine:
R You can no longer start the engine.
Key not detected (red dis‐ R You cannot centrally lock the vehicle.
play message)
# Ensure that the key is in the vehicle.

If the key detection function has a malfunction due to a strong radio signal source:
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
# Place the key in the stowage compartment for starting the engine with the key .
488 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Vehicle
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

j
* You retract or extend the ball neck.
Do not attempt to speed up, slow down or initiate the retracting or extending process using your hand, foot or other
aids. During the retracting or extending process, do not couple a trailer.
Trailer coupling extending… When the ball neck has reached an operational position, the display message disappears.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 489

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

j
* The trailer hitch is not operational.

& WARNING Risk of an accident if the ball neck is not locked

Check trailer hitch lock If the ball neck is not in the locked position, the trailer may come loose.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
# Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away.

# Initiate a new swivelling procedure and do not re-couple the trailer until the display message disappears.

# Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine.
# Uncouple the trailer and safeguard it against rolling away.
# Initiate a new swivelling procedure .
# When the display message disappears, couple up the trailer and drive on.

If the display message does not disappear, the trailer hitch is defective and the ball neck is not locked.
# Do not couple up the trailer. Drive on without the trailer. Pay attention to the reduced ground clearance due to
the unlocked ball neck.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Apply brake to deselect * You have attempted to shift the transmission out of position j and into another transmission position.
Park (P) position # Depress the brake pedal.
490 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

To shift out of P or N, * You have attempted to shift the transmission out of position j or i into another transmission position.
depress brake and start # Depress the brake pedal.
engine # Start the engine.

Risk of vehicle rolling * The driver's door is not fully closed and the transmission is in position k, i or h.
Driver door open and trans- # Shift the transmission to position j when you park the vehicle.
mission not in P
N permanently active Risk * While the vehicle is rolling or while you are driving, the transmission has been shifted to position i.
of vehicle rolling # Depress the brake pedal to stop and, when the vehicle is stationary, shift the transmission to position j.

# To continue your journey, shift the transmission to position h or k.

Only select Park (P) when * The transmission can only be shifted to position j when the vehicle is stationary.
vehicle is stationary
Without changing gear, * The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission position can no longer be shifted.
consult workshop # When the transmission is in position h, consult a qualified specialist workshop and do not shift the transmis‐
sion position.
# For all other transmission positions, park the vehicle safely.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 491

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

d
* You are leaving the vehicle when it is in a ready-to-drive state.
# When you leave the vehicle, switch off the ignition and take the key with you.

# If you do not leave the vehicle, switch off the electrical consumers, e.g. the seat heater. Otherwise, the 12‑volt
Vehicle is operational battery might discharge and it will then only be possible to start the vehicle using a donor battery (starting
Switch off the ignition assistance).
before exiting
Transmission Malfunction * The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission shifts to position i automatically.
Stop # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

# Switch the transmission to position j.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Reversing not poss. Con- * The transmission is malfunctioning. Reverse gear can no longer be engaged.
sult workshop # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Stop vehicle Leave engine * The transmission has overheated. Pulling away can be temporarily impaired or not possible.
running Wait Transmission # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not
cooling continue driving under any circumstances.
# Start the engine.

# Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

492 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Auxiliary battery malfunc- * The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being charged.
tion # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Until then, manually set the transmission to position j before you switch off the engine.

# Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.

Depress clutch fully to * You have attempted to start the engine without depressing the clutch pedal.
start engine # Depress the clutch pedal and then start the engine.
The engine has stalled while pulling away, e.g. because the clutch pedal was released too quickly.
# Depress the clutch pedal again.
The engine starts automatically.
# Slowly release the clutch pedal to pull away.

Clutch overheated Avoid * The clutch is under considerable load and is overheating.
pulling away for XX:XX mins Avoid frequent pulling away and driving at walking pace over longer distances.
# Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions and leave the engine running.
The clutch is cooled more quickly when the engine is running.
or
# If possible, continue driving at a steady speed and remove your foot from the clutch pedal. Do not ride the
clutch.
The clutch is cooled while driving.
When the clutch has cooled down, the display message disappears.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 493

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Air conditioning Malfunc- * Operation of the climate control system is temporarily restricted. Airflow and fresh air supply are set to automatic
tion See Owner's Manual mode.
# Have the climate control system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

_
* Vehicles with manual transmission: the electric steering lock was unable to unlock the steering.
# Switch the ignition off.

# To unlock the steering, move the steering wheel slightly to the left and right.
Before starting the engine, # Switch the ignition back on.
turn the steering wheel.

Ð
* Vehicles with manual transmission: the electric steering lock is malfunctioning. The steering may be locked by
the electric steering lock.

& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired

Steering malfunction See
Owner's Manual If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not
continue driving under any circumstances.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
494 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Let fresh air into the vehi- * The climate control system is malfunctioning.
cle interior! Air condition-
ing malf. Visit workshop & WARNING Risk of injury and accident due to an insufficient supply of fresh air
If the climate control system is malfunctioning, carbon dioxide levels may increase in the passenger compart‐
ment. Breathing in carbon dioxide may cause dizziness.
# Open the window to ensure that there is a sufficient supply of fresh air.

# Open the window to ensure that there is a sufficient supply of fresh air.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Ð
* The power assistance of the steering is malfunctioning. You may need to use more force to steer.
# Drive on carefully.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Steering malfunction Drive
carefully Visit workshop
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 495

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Ð
* The steering is malfunctioning. Steering capability is considerably impaired.

& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired

Steering malfunction Stop If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised.
immediately See Owner's # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
Manual Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not
continue driving under any circumstances.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Ð
* The power assistance of the steering is malfunctioning.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to altered steering characteristics

Steering malfunction If the power assistance of the steering fails partially or completely, you will need to use more force to steer.
Increased physical effort # If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully.
See Owner's Manual # Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

# If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully.

# Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
496 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

&
* The on-board electrical system voltage is too low.
The stationary heater has switched itself off.
# Drive a long distance until the battery has reached a sufficient charge level again.
inoperative Battery low

&
* There is too little fuel in the fuel tank. The stationary heater cannot be switched on.
# Refuel the vehicle.

inoperative Refuel vehicle

Active bonnet malfunction * The active bonnet (pedestrian protection) is malfunctioning or inoperative after having already been triggered.
See Owner's Manual # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

&
* The stationary heater is temporarily malfunctioning.
# When the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down, make up to four attempts to switch on
the stationary heater, waiting several minutes between each attempt.
inoperative See Owner's # If the stationary heater does not switch on, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Man.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 497

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

?
* The engine bonnet is open.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the engine bonnet unlocked
An unlocked engine bonnet may open up when the vehicle is in motion and block your view.
# Never unlock the engine bonnet when driving.
# Before every trip, ensure that the engine bonnet is locked.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.

# Close the engine bonnet.

C
* At least one door is open.
# Close all doors.
498 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

A
* The tailgate is open.

& WARNING Risk of exhaust gas poisoning

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the
vehicle interior if the tailgate is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion.
# Always switch off the engine before opening the tailgate.

# Never drive with the tailgate open.

# Close the tailgate.

_
* The corresponding seat backrest of the rear bench seat is not engaged.
# Fold the corresponding seat backrest back until it engages.

Example:Rear left seat

backrest not locked

¥
* The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum.
# Top up the washer fluid .

Top up washer fluid

 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 499

Lights
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

b
* The corresponding light source is defective.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Example:Left dipped beam or

# Check whether you are permitted to replace the light source yourself .
% LED light bulbs: the display message for the corresponding lamp only appears when all the light-emitting diodes
in the lamp have failed.

b
* The active light function is faulty.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Light System inoper-

ative

b
* The Intelligent Light System is faulty. The lighting system continues to function properly without the functions of
the Intelligent Light System.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Intelligent Light System

inoperative
500 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

b
* The exterior lighting is faulty.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Vehicles with a trailer hitch: a fuse may have blown.
Malfunction See Owner's # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
Manual # Check the fuses and replace them if necessary .

b
* The light sensor is faulty.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

AUTO lights inoperative

b
* You are leaving the vehicle and the lights are still switched on.
# Turn the light switch to the à position.

Switch off lights

b
* You are driving without dipped-beam headlamps.
# Turn the light switch to the L or à position.

Switch on headlamps
Adaptive Highbeam Assist * Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is faulty.
Plus inoperative # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 501

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Adaptive Highbeam Assist * Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is temporarily unavailable.
Plus currently unavailable The system borders have been reached (→ page 136).
See Owner's Manual # Drive on.
When the causes no longer apply, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus availa-
ble again display message appears.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist * The camera view is reduced. Possible causes:
Plus Camera view restric- R dirt on the windscreen in the camera's field of vision
ted See Owner's Manual R heavy rain, snow or fog

Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable.
When the causes no longer apply, driving systems and driving safety systems are available again.
If the display message does not disappear:
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

# Clean the windscreen.

Warning and indicator lamps iour is non-critical. These warning and indicator
lamps only indicate a malfunction if they light up
Overview of warning and indicator lamps or flash after the engine is started or during a
Some systems perform a self-test when the igni‐ journey.
tion is switched on. Some warning and indicator
lamps may briefly light up or flash. This behav‐
502 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Instrument display (standard) Progressive setting (widescreen cockpit) ü Seat belt is not fastened
(→ page 509)
J Brakes (red) (→ page 503)
! ABS malfunction (→ page 503)
÷ ESP®(→ page 503)
å ESP® OFF (→ page 503)
! Electric parking brake(→ page 503)
Ð Steering assistance malfunction
(→ page 511)
# Electrical fault (→ page 513)
Instrument display in the widescreen cockpit If you select the progressive display setting in
vehicles with a widescreen cockpit, the position 6 Restraint system (→ page 503)
of the indicator lamps in the instrument display ; Engine diagnosis (→ page 513)
changes. 8 Fuel reserve with fuel filler cap loca‐
Warning and indicator lamps: tion indicator (→ page 513)
L Dipped beam (→ page 131) ? Coolant too hot/cold (→ page 513)
T Standing lights (→ page 131) · Distance warning (→ page 510)
K Main beam (→ page 133) % Preglow
#! Turn signal light (→ page 133) h Tyre pressure monitoring system
R Rear fog light (→ page 131) (→ page 516)
j Trailer hitch is not operational or is
swivelling (→ page 511)
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 503

Safety systems
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

J
The yellow brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to a brake system malfunction

Brake system warning lamp If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may be impaired.
# Drive on carefully.
# Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Adjust your speed and continue to drive carefully, leaving a suitable distance to the vehicle in front.
# If the multifunction display shows a display message, please observe this.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
504 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

J
The red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
Possible causes:
R The brake force boosting is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected.
Brake system warning lamp R There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

& WARNING There is a risk of an accident if brake force boosting is malfunctioning

If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, the wheels may lock when braking. Braking characteristics may be
impaired. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do
not continue driving under any circumstances.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level

If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do
not continue driving under any circumstances.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Do not top up the brake fluid.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 505

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not
continue driving under any circumstances.
# Observe the messages in the multifunction display.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

!
The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ABS is malfunctioning.
If there is an additional acoustic warning signal, EBD is malfunctioning.
ABS warning lamp Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be faulty.

& WARNING There is risk of skidding if EBD or ABS is malfunctioning

If EBD or ABS is malfunctioning, the wheels could lock when braking
The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance may increase in
an emergency braking situation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.
# Drive on carefully.

# Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Drive on carefully.
# Observe the messages in the multifunction display.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
506 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

÷
The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.
ESP® is intervening .
# Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
ESP® warning lamp flashes

÷
The yellow ESP® warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ESP® is malfunctioning.
Other driving and driving safety systems may also be faulty.
ESP® warning lamp lights
up & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning
If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are
switched off.
# Drive on carefully.

# Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Drive on carefully.
# Observe the messages in the multifunction display.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 507

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

å
The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ESP® is deactivated.

ESP® OFF warning lamp & WARNING Risk of skidding when driving with ESP® deactivated
If ESP® is deactivated, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. The availability of further driving safety systems
is also limited.
# Drive on carefully.

# Only deactivate ESP® for as long as the situation requires.

If ESP® cannot be activated, ESP® is malfunctioning.

# Have ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
# Observe the notes on deactivating ESP® .
508 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

!
The red electric parking brake indicator lamp flashes or is lit. The yellow indicator lamp is also lit if the electric parking
brake malfunctions.
# Observe the messages in the multifunction display.

Red indicator lamp, electric

parking brake applied

!
Yellow electric parking
brake indicator lamp is mal‐
functioning
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 509

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

6
The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The restraint system is malfunctioning.

Restraint system warning & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the restraint system
lamp If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or might not
be triggered at all in the event of an accident. This may affect the seat belt tensioner or airbag, for example.
# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Drive on carefully.
# Observe the messages in the multifunction display.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Seat belt
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

7
The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after starting the engine.
In addition, an acoustic warning tone may sound.
The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts.
Seat belt warning lamp # Fasten your seat belt .
lights up
If you have placed objects on the front passenger seat, the warning lamp may remain lit.
510 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

7
The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent warning tone sounds.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt while the vehicle is in motion.
# Fasten your seat belt .
Seat belt warning lamp There are objects on the front passenger seat.
flashes # Remove the objects from the front passenger seat.

Driving systems
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

·
The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion.
The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected.
If there is an additional warning tone, you are approaching an obstacle at too high a speed.
Distance warning warning # Be prepared to brake immediately.
lamp
# Increase the distance.

Active Brake Assist .

 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 511

Vehicle
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

j
The red trailer hitch warning lamp is on.
The trailer hitch is not operational or swivels.

Trailer hitch warning lamp & WARNING Risk of an accident if the ball neck is not locked
If the ball neck is not in the locked position, the trailer may come loose.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do
not continue driving under any circumstances.
# Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away.

# Initiate a new swivelling procedure and do not re-couple the trailer until the display message disappears.

# Observe the messages in the multifunction display.

If the trailer hitch swivels:

# Wait until the ball neck has reached the operational position.
512 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Ð
The red power steering system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The power steering assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning.

Power steering system & WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired
warning lamp If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do
not continue driving under any circumstances.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Observe the messages in the multifunction display.

 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 513

Engine
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

;
The yellow engine diagnosis warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
A malfunction has occurred in the engine, the exhaust system or the fuel system.
The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be running in emergency operation mode.
Engine diagnosis warning # Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.
lamp Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank has been run dry.
# Start the engine three to four times after refuelling.
If the yellow engine diagnosis warning lamp goes out, emergency operation mode is cancelled. The vehicle need not
be checked.

#
The red electrical fault warning lamp is lit.
There is a fault in the electrics.
# Observe the messages in the multifunction display.
Electrical fault warning
lamp

8
The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.
# Refuel.
Fuel reserve warning lamp
514 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

?
The red coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
Possible causes:
R The temperature sensor is malfunctioning
Coolant warning lamp R The coolant level is too low
R The air supply to the radiator is obstructed
R The radiator fan is faulty

If there is an additional warning tone, the coolant temperature has exceeded 120 °C.

& WARNING Danger of burns when opening the bonnet

If you open the engine bonnet when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you
could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids.
# Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.

# In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the engine bonnet closed and call the fire service.

# Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. Do not con‐
tinue driving under any circumstances.
# Observe the messages in the multifunction display.

If the coolant temperature display is at the lower end of the temperature scale:
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 515

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Otherwise:
# Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.

# Check the coolant level .

# Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed.

# Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive on to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the
coolant temperature display remains below 120 °C.
516 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Tyres
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

h
The yellow tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.
The tyre pressure monitoring system has detected tyre pressure loss in at least one of the tyres.

Tyre pressure monitoring & WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tyre pressure
system warning lamp lights Tyres with insufficient tyre pressure pose the following risks:
up
R The tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.
R The tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction.
R ‑ The driving characteristics, steering and braking may be greatly impaired.

You could then lose control of the vehicle.

# Observe the recommended tyre pressures.
# Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.

# Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

# Check the tyre pressure and the tyres.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 517

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

h
The yellow tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one
minute and then remains lit.
The tyre pressure monitoring system is faulty.
Tyre pressure monitoring
system warning lamp & WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning
flashes If the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning, it is not able to issue a warning if there is pressure loss in
one or more of the tyres.
Tyres with insufficient tyre pressure may, for example, affect the vehicle's handling characteristics, steering and
braking. ‑
# Have the tyre pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

518 Index

1, 2, 3 ... Acoustic locking verification signal Active light function ................................ 134
Switching on/off ................................... 65 Adaptive brake lights .............................. 199
12 V socket
see Socket (12 V) Active Blind Spot Assist .......................... 242 Adaptive cruise control
Activating/deactivating ....................... 244 see Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
230 V socket ............................................ 127 Brake application ................................. 242
360° Camera ........................................... 224 Function/notes ................................... 242 Adaptive functions, MULTIBEAM LED
Assigning as a favourite ....................... 227 System limits ....................................... 242 see Intelligent Light System
Care .................................................... 383 Trailer operation .................................. 242 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
Function .............................................. 224 Active bonnet (pedestrian protection) .. 373 Activating/deactivating ....................... 137
Selecting a view .................................. 226 Operation ............................................ 373 Function .............................................. 136
Resetting ............................................. 373 AdBlue® .................................................... 437
A Additives ............................................. 437
Active Brake Assist ................................. 194
A/C function Function/notes .................................... 194 Filling capacity .................................... 438
Activating/deactivating (control Setting ................................................. 198 Low outside temperatures ................... 437
panel) ................................................... 151 Notes ................................................... 178
Activating/deactivating (multimedia Active Emergency Stop Assist ................ 210 Purity ................................................... 437
system) ................................................ 151 Active Lane Change Assist ..................... 210 Additional door lock .................................. 68
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ............. 189 Active Lane Keeping Assist .................... 244 Additives .................................................. 438
Acceleration Activating/deactivating ....................... 246 AdBlue® ............................................... 437
see Kickdown Function .............................................. 244 Engine oil ............................................ 438
Sensitivity (function/notes) ................. 247 Fuel ..................................................... 435
Access data Setting the sensitivity .......................... 247
Editing ................................................. 342 System limits ....................................... 244 Additives (engine oil)
Setting ................................................. 340 Trailer operation .................................. 244 see Additives
 Index 519

Additives (fuel) Air suspension Alarm

see Fuel see AIR BODY CONTROL see Panic alarm
Address book Air vents ................................................... 159 Alarm system
see Contacts Adjusting (front) .................................. 159 see Anti-theft protection
Adjusting the balance/fader Adjusting (rear) .................................... 159 Alternative route
Burmester® surround sound system .... 371 Glove box ............................................. 159 see Route
Adjusting the headlamp range ............... 132 Air vents Ambient lighting ...................................... 138
see Air vents
Adjusting the sound focus Android Auto ............................................ 338
Air-recirculation mode ............................ 152 Connecting a mobile phone ................. 338
Burmester® surround sound system .... 371
ADS PLUS damping system Airbag Ending ................................................. 338
see AIR BODY CONTROL Activation .............................................. 31 Overview ............................................. 338
Front airbag ........................................... 36 Tone settings ....................................... 338
Adverse weather light ............................. 136 Installation locations ............................. 36 Android Auto™
After-sales service centre Knee airbag ........................................... 36 Transferred vehicle data ...................... 339
see ASSYST PLUS Overview ............................................... 36
Protection .............................................. 37 Animals
AIR BODY CONTROL ................................. 214 Pets in the vehicle ................................. 63
Setting ................................................. 216 Reduced protection ............................... 38
Side impact airbag ................................ 36 Anti-lock braking system
Suspension .......................................... 214 see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Window airbag ....................................... 36
Air conditioning system Anti-theft alarm system
see Climate control Airbags
see Occupant safety Anti-theft protection .............................. 88
Air distribution ........................................ 149 Anti-theft protection ................................. 88
Airflow ...................................................... 149
Air freshener system Additional door lock .............................. 68
see Fragrance system AIRPANEL (Care) ...................................... 383
ATA (anti-theft alarm system) ................ 88
520 Index

Immobiliser ........................................... 88 ATA (anti-theft alarm system) Authorised workshop

Interior protection ................................. 89 Function ................................................ 88 see Qualified specialist workshop
Stopping the alarm (ATA) ....................... 88 Stopping the alarm ................................ 88 Automatic distance control
Tow-away protection ............................. 89 ATA (anti-theft alarm system) see Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
Anticipatory occupant protection ..... 43, 44 see Anti-theft protection Automatic driving lights ......................... 132
Apple CarPlay™ ....................................... 336 ATTENTION ASSIST ......................... 238, 239 Automatic engine start (ECO start/
Connecting an iPhone® ....................... 337 Activating/deactivating ....................... 239 stop function) .......................................... 166
Ending ................................................. 337 Function .............................................. 238
System limitations ............................... 238 Automatic engine stop (ECO start/
Overview ............................................. 336
stop function) .......................................... 166
Tone settings ....................................... 337 Attention assistant
Transferred vehicle data ...................... 339 see ATTENTION ASSIST Automatic front passenger airbag
Ashtray shutoff
Audio mode see Front passenger airbag shutoff
Front centre console ........................... 125 Activating media mode ........................ 348
Rear ..................................................... 125 Connecting USB devices ...................... 351 Automatic mirror folding function
Assistance graphic Copyright ............................................. 348 Activating/deactivating ....................... 147
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 258 Information .......................................... 347 Automatic transmission
Assistance systems Inserting/removing an SD card ........... 348 DIRECT SELECT lever ........................... 171
see Driving safety system Media search ....................................... 354 Drive program display .......................... 169
Overview ............................................. 350 Drive programs .................................... 168
ASSYST PLUS ........................................... 372 Pause and playback function ............... 351 DYNAMIC SELECT switch .................... 168
Battery disconnection periods ............. 373 Selecting a track .................................. 351 Engaging drive position ........................ 173
Displaying the service due date ........... 372 Selecting playback options .................. 351 Engaging reverse gear ......................... 172
Function/notes ................................... 372 Track list .............................................. 351 Kickdown ............................................. 174
Regular service work ........................... 372 Manual gearshifting ............................. 173
Special service requirements .............. 372
 Index 521

Selecting park position ........................ 172 Battery (vehicle) De-authorising (de-registering) the
Shifting to neutral ................................ 172 see Vehicle battery device .................................................. 359
Steering wheel gearshift paddles ......... 173 Belt ............................................................. 32 Information .......................................... 356
Transmission position display .............. 171 Overview ............................................. 357
Transmission positions ........................ 171 Bicycle rack Searching for and authorising the
Trailer operation .................................. 251 device .................................................. 358
Automatic transmission
see Selector lever Blind Spot Assist ..................................... 242 Switching device via NFC .................... 359
Activating/deactivating ....................... 244 Boot lid
Axle load Function/notes ................................... 242
Permissible .......................................... 431 see Tailgate
System limits ....................................... 242
Trailer operation .................................. 443 Boot load .................................................. 442
Blind Spot Assist
see Active Blind Spot Assist Brake Assist System
B see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Bag hook ................................................... 118 Blower
see Climate control Brake fluid
Ball neck Notes .................................................. 439
Extending/retracting ........................... 248 BlueTEC
see AdBlue® Brake force distribution
BAS (Brake Assist System) ..................... 189 EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu‐
Bluetooth® tion) ..................................................... 193
Battery
Activating/deactivating ....................... 288 Brakes
Key ........................................................ 66 Setting up an Internet connection ....... 340
Remote control (stationary heater) ...... 157 ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ........... 189
Settings ............................................... 287 Adaptive brake lights ........................... 199
Battery (vehicle) Switching profile (DUN/PAN) .............. 342
Charging .............................................. 398 BAS (Brake Assist System) .................. 189
Bluetooth® Audio Driving tips .......................................... 164
Notes .................................................. 396
Starting assistance .............................. 398 Activating ............................................ 359 EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu‐
tion) ..................................................... 193
522 Index

HOLD function ..................................... 212 Calling up the sound menu .................. 370 Making ................................................. 321
Limited braking effect (salt-treated Information .......................................... 370 Via the overhead control panel
roads) .................................................. 164 Switching the surround sound on/off (Mercedes me connect) ....................... 327
New/replaced brake linings/brake ............................................................. 371 Camera
discs .................................................... 164 Buttons see 360° Camera
Running-in notes .................................. 164 Steering wheel .................................... 255 see Reversing camera
Brakes Car wash
see Active Brake Assist C see Care
Braking assistance CA module (TV) ........................................ 370 Car wash (care) ....................................... 380
see BAS (Brake Assist System) Calling up a menu ................................ 370
Inserting .............................................. 369 Care .......................................................... 385
Breakdown ............................................... 390 AIRPANEL ............................................ 383
Assistance overview .............................. 18 Call list Car wash ............................................. 380
Tow-starting ........................................ 405 Making a call ....................................... 324 Carpet ................................................. 385
Towing away ........................................ 401 Options in the call list .......................... 324 Display ................................................ 385
Transporting the vehicle ...................... 403 Overview ............................................. 324 Exterior lighting ................................... 383
Wheel change ...................................... 422 Calling up the sound menu Genuine wood/trim elements ............. 385
Breakdown assistance call Burmester® surround sound system ... 370 High-pressure cleaner ......................... 380
see Service call Calls .......................................................... 321 Matt finish ........................................... 382
Breakdown management Accepting ............................................ 321 Paint .................................................... 382
see Service call Activating functions during a call ......... 321 Plastic trim .......................................... 385
Calls with several participants ............. 321 Reversing camera/360° Camera ........ 383
Burmester® surround sound system ..... 370 Roof lining ........................................... 385
Adjusting the balance/fader ................ 371 Declining ............................................. 321
Ending a call ........................................ 321 Seat belt .............................................. 385
Adjusting the sound focus ................... 371 Seat cover ........................................... 385
Adjusting treble, mid and bass ............ 371 Incoming call during an existing call .... 322
 Index 523

Sensors ............................................... 383 Child seat ................................................... 45 Chock

Tailpipes .............................................. 383 Attaching (notes) ................................... 52 see Wheel chock
Trailer hitch ......................................... 383 Folding bench seat suitable ................... 58 Cigarette lighter ...................................... 126
Washing by hand ................................. 381 Front passenger seat (notes) ................. 50
Wheels/rims ....................................... 383 Front passenger seat (rearward- City lighting ............................................. 136
Windows .............................................. 383 facing/forward-facing) ........................... 51 Cleaning
Wiper blades ....................................... 383 Front passenger seat (without airbag see Care
Carpet (Care) ........................................... 385 shutoff) .................................................. 51 Climate control ........................................ 149
ISOFIX/i-Size (fitting) ............................ 48 Activating/deactivating the A/C
Changing bulbs ........................................ 139 ISOFIX/i-Size (notes) ............................. 47
Dipped beam ....................................... 140 function (control panel) ........................ 151
Notes ..................................................... 45 Activating/deactivating the A/C
Fitting/removing cover (front wheel Recommended child restraint sys‐
arch) .................................................... 140 function (multimedia system) ............... 151
tems ...................................................... 59 Activating/deactivating the synchro‐
Main beam .......................................... 140 Seats suitable for belt-secured child
Notes ................................................... 139 nisation function (control panel) .......... 152
restraint systems ................................... 53 Activating/deactivating the synchro‐
Overview ............................................. 139 Seats suitable for i‑Size child
Turn signal light (front) ........................ 140 nisation function (multimedia sys‐
restraint systems ................................... 57 tem) ..................................................... 152
Changing hub caps ................................. 422 Seats suitable for ISOFIX child Adjusting the air vents ......................... 159
Channel tracking restraint systems ................................... 55 Air distribution settings ........................ 151
Setting ................................................. 362 Top Tether .............................................. 49 Air-recirculation mode ......................... 152
Charging Children Automatic control ................................ 151
Battery (vehicle) .................................. 398 Restraint systems .................................. 45 Climate style function .......................... 151
Chock Demisting the windows ....................... 152
Child safety lock Demisting the windscreen ................... 149
Rear door ............................................... 61 Storage location .................................. 421
Glove box air vent ................................ 159
Rear side windows ................................. 63
524 Index

Inserting/removing the flacon (fra‐ COMAND Online Making a call ....................................... 323
grance system) .................................... 153 see Multimedia system Name format ....................................... 323
ionisation ............................................. 153 COMAND Touch ....................................... 291 Options ................................................ 323
Note .................................................... 149 Authorising a device ............................ 290 Saving ................................................. 323
Rear air vents ...................................... 159 Child safety lock .................................. 291 Controller
Rear operating unit .............................. 149 Operating ............................................ 280
Residual heat ....................................... 152 COMAND Touch App
Setting the air distribution ................... 149 see COMAND Touch Convenience closing ................................. 81
Setting the airflow ............................... 149 Combination switch Convenience opening ................................ 81
Setting the climate style ...................... 151 see Turn signal light Coolant (engine)
Setting the fragrance system ............... 153 Combined luggage cover and net Level check .......................................... 378
Setting the temperature ...................... 149 Attaching to the rear seat backrest ...... 116 Notes .................................................. 440
Stationary heater/ventilation .............. 154 Installing/removing .............................. 116 Cooling
Switching on/off ................................. 150
Compass ................................................... 316 see Climate control
Switching the rear window heater
on/off ................................................. 149 Computer ................................................. 256 Copyright ................................................... 28
THERMATIC control panel .................... 149 Connection status Cornering light function .......................... 135
THERMOTRONIC control panel ............ 149 Displays ............................................... 343 Cover .......................................................... 79
Windscreen heater .............................. 154 Overview ............................................. 343
Climate style Cross Traffic Alert ................................... 237
Contacts ................................................... 322
Function ............................................... 151 Calling up ............................................ 322 Crosswind Assist
Setting ................................................. 151 Deleting ............................................... 324 Function/notes ................................... 193
Cockpit ......................................................... 6 Downloading (from mobile phone) ...... 322 Cruise control .......................................... 199
Overview ................................................. 6 Importing ............................................ 323 Activating ............................................ 200
Information .......................................... 322 Calling up a speed ............................... 200
 Index 525

Deactivating ........................................ 200 Data roaming Destination entry

Function .............................................. 199 Activating/deactivating (telephone see Intermediate destination
Lever ................................................... 200 module) ............................................... 334 Diagnostics connection ............................ 26
Requirements ...................................... 200 Declaration of Conformity
Selecting ............................................. 200 Diesel ....................................................... 436
Electromagnetic compatibility ............... 24
Setting a speed ................................... 200 Jack ....................................................... 24 Digital Owner's Manual ............................ 20
Storing a speed ................................... 200 TIREFIT kit ............................................. 25 Digital speedometer ............................... 259
System limits ....................................... 199 Wireless vehicle components ................ 24 Digital TV
Cup holder Designs see TV
see Cup holders Menu (on-board computer) .................. 265 Dipped beam
Cup holders .............................................. 123 Destination .............................................. 307 Activating/deactivating ....................... 131
Fitting/removing (centre console) ....... 123 Editing ................................................. 299 Changing bulbs .................................... 140
Rear ..................................................... 124 Editing the last destinations ................ 307 Setting ................................................. 137
Entering an intermediate destination .. 299 Setting for abroad (symmetrical) .......... 131
D Saving (current vehicle position) ......... 307 DIRECT SELECT lever ............................... 171
Dashboard Saving as global favourite .................... 307 Function ............................................... 171
see Cockpit Storing a map position ........................ 307
DIRECT SELECT selector lever
Dashboard lighting .................................. 258 Destination entry ............................ 295, 297 Engaging drive position ........................ 173
Data acquisition Entering a POI or address .................... 295 Engaging park position automatically .. 172
Vehicle ................................................... 27 Entering geo-coordinates .................... 298 Engaging reverse gear ......................... 172
Last destinations ................................. 298 Selecting park position ........................ 172
Data import/export Selecting a contact ............................. 298
Function/notes ................................... 291 Shifting to neutral ................................ 172
Selecting a POI .................................... 297
Importing/exporting ............................ 291 Selecting from the map ....................... 298 Display
PIN protection for data export ............. 292 Care .................................................... 385
526 Index

Display (multimedia system) Active Brake Assist Functions cur‐ 4Add 1 litre engine oil when next
Settings ............................................... 286 rently limited See Owner's Manual ...... 456 refuelling ............................................. 477
Display (on-board computer) .................. 257 Active Brake Assist Functions limited Air conditioning Malfunction See
Display content See Owner's Manual ........................... 456 Owner's Manual .................................. 493
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 264
Active Lane Keeping Assist Camera Apply brake to deselect Park (P)
Display message ..................................... 445
view restricted See Owner's Manual ... 467 position ............................................... 489
Calling up (on-board computer) ........... 445
Notes .................................................. 445 Active Lane Keeping Assist currently ÀATTENTION ASSIST inoperative ... 462
Display messages unavailable See Owner's Manual ......... 466 ÀATTENTION ASSIST: Take a
? ........................................... 472, 497 Active Lane Keeping Assist inopera‐ break! .................................................. 462
A ................................................... 498 tive ...................................................... 466 bAUTO lights inoperative ............... 500
C ................................................... 497 bActive Light System inoperative .. 499 Auxiliary battery malfunction .............. 492
¯ .................................................... 469 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Cam‐ _Before starting the engine, turn
Active Blind Spot Assist currently era view restricted See Owner's the steering wheel. .............................. 493
unavailable See Owner's Manual ......... 468 Manual ................................................ 501 Blind Spot Assist currently unavaila‐
Active Blind Spot Assist inoperative .... 468 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cur‐ ble See Owner's Manual ...................... 467
Active Blind Spot Assist not available rently unavailable See Owner's Man‐ Blind Spot Assist inoperative ............... 468
when towing a trailer See Owner's ual ....................................................... 501 Blind Spot Assist not available when
Manual ................................................. 471 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus inop‐ towing a trailer See Owner's Manual ... 471
Active bonnet malfunction See Own‐ erative ................................................. 500 Brake immediately ............................... 455
er's Manual ......................................... 496 ÂChange key batteries .................. 486
 Index 527

ØCheck AdBlue See Owner’s ÷currently unavailable See Own‐ bExample: Left dipped beam ........ 499
Manual ................................................. 478 er's Manual ......................................... 448 6Example: Left windowbag mal‐
JCheck brake fluid level ................ 455 Depress clutch fully to start engine ..... 492 function Consult workshop ................. 459
4Check eng. oil lev. when next Distance Pilot available again .............. 468 Example: Parking Pilot Parking can‐
refuelling ............................................. 475 Distance Pilot currently unavailable celled ................................................. 468
jCheck trailer hitch lock ............... 489 See Owner's Manual ........................... 469 _Example: Rear left seat back‐
hCheck tyre(s) ............................... 482 Distance Pilot inoperative .................... 469 rest not locked ................................... 498
!Clean the fuel filter ..................... 480 È .................................................... 470 Front-passenger airbag disabled See
Clutch overheated Avoid pulling away ØEng. start not possible in XXX Owner's Manual .................................. 460
for XX:XX mins .................................... 492 mi ........................................................ 479 Front-passenger airbag enabled See
ÉCompressor is cooling ................ 465 ØEng. start not possible ................ 479 Owner's Manual ................................... 461
?Coolant Stop vehicle Switch 5Engine oil level cannot be !inoperative See Owner's Man‐
engine off ............................................ 473 measured ............................................ 478 ual ....................................................... 447
Cruise control and Limiter inopera‐ 4Engine oil level Reduce oil level ... 476 ÷inoperative See Owner's Man‐
tive ...................................................... 470 4Engine oil level Stop vehicle ual ....................................................... 449
Cruise control inoperative .................... 471 Switch engine off ................................. 476 Tinoperative See Owner's Man‐
Cruise control off ................................ 470 4Engine oil pressure Stop Switch ual ....................................................... 450
!currently unavailable See Own‐ off engine ............................................ 477 GInoperative .................................. 460
er's Manual ......................................... 446 6Example: Front left malfunction bIntelligent Light System inoper‐
Consult workshop .............................. 459 ative .................................................... 499
528 Index

ÂKey not detected (red display !Parking brake See Owner's ØRefill AdBlue No start in XXX mi
message) ............................................. 487 Manual ................................................ 452 ............................................................. 480
ÂKey not detected (white display Parking Pilot and PARKTRONIC inop‐ ØRefill AdBlue See Owner’s Man‐
message) ............................................. 486 erative See Owner's Manual ................ 471 ual ....................................................... 478
Let fresh air into the vehicle interior! Parking Pilot Manoeuvring assis‐ !Release parking brake ................. 451
Air conditioning malf. Visit workshop .. 494 tance limited See Owner's Manual ...... 471 ¸Replace air cleaner ...................... 479
Limiter inoperative .............................. 470 ÂPlace the key in the marked ,Replace key See Owner's Man‐
Limiter passive .................................... 469 space See Owner's Manual ................. 487 ual ....................................................... 486
bMalfunction See Owner's Man‐ Please reduce speed ........................... 465 ÂReplace key ................................. 485
ual ....................................................... 500 ÉPlease reduce speed ................... 464 8Reserve fuel level ........................ 479
ÉMalfunction See Owner's Man‐ PRE-SAFE impulse side inoperative 6Restraint sys. malfunction Con‐
ual ....................................................... 463 See Owner's Manual ........................... 457 sult workshop ...................................... 458
max. speed 22 mph ............................. 465 PRE-SAFE inoperative See Owner's Reversing not poss. Consult work‐
ðMaximum speed exceeded .......... 470 Manual ................................................ 456 shop .................................................... 491
N permanently active Risk of vehicle Radar sensors dirty See Owner's Risk of vehicle rolling Driver door
rolling .................................................. 490 Manual ................................................ 457 open and transmission not in P ........... 490
ëOff ............................................... 468 hRectify tyre pressure ................... 482 #See Owner's Manual .................... 474
Only select Park (P) when vehicle is ØRefill AdBlue Eng. start not pos‐ Speed limit (winter tyres) XXX mph ..... 470
stationary ............................................ 490 sible ..................................................... 478 #Start engine See Owner's Man‐
ual ....................................................... 480
 Index 529

ÐSteering malfunction Drive To shift out of P or N, depress brake Tyre(s) overheated Reduce speed ........ 485
carefully Visit workshop ...................... 494 and start engine .................................. 490 dVehicle is operational Switch
ÐSteering malfunction Increased Top up coolant See Owner’s Manual .... 472 off the ignition before exiting ............... 491
physical effort See Owner's Manual .... 495 ¥Top up washer fluid ..................... 498 ÉVehicle rising Please wait ............ 462
ÐSteering malfunction See Own‐ Traffic Sign Assist Camera view ÉVehicle rising ............................... 462
er's Manual ......................................... 493 restricted See Owner's Manual ........... 466 hWarning tyre defect ..................... 483
ÐSteering malfunction Stop Traffic Sign Assist currently unavaila‐ hWheel sensor(s) missing ............. 484
immediately See Owner's Manual ....... 495 ble See Owner's Manual ...................... 470 Without changing gear, consult work‐
Steering Pilot currently unavailable Traffic Sign Assist inoperative .............. 471 shop .................................................... 490
See Owner's Manual ........................... 469 jTrailer coupling extending… ......... 488 Distance control
Steering Pilot inoperative .................... 469 Transmission Malfunction Stop ............ 491 see Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
Stop vehicle Leave engine running !Turn on the ignition to release Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ...................... 202
Wait Transmission cooling ................... 491 the parking brake ................................ 450 Activating ............................................ 205
Activation conditions ........................... 205
#Stop vehicle Leave engine run‐ Tyre press. monitor currently unavail‐
Calling up a speed ............................... 205
ning ..................................................... 475 able ..................................................... 483 Deactivating ........................................ 205
#Stop vehicle See Owner's Man‐ Tyre press. monitor inoperative ........... 484 Function .............................................. 202
ual ........................................................ 474 Tyre press. monitor inoperative No Lever ................................................... 205
Selecting ............................................. 205
ÉStop vehicle Vehicle too low ........ 464 wheel sensors ..................................... 484 Setting a speed ................................... 205
bSwitch off lights .......................... 500 Tyre pressure Check tyres ................... 481 Storing a speed ................................... 205
bSwitch on headlamps .................. 500 Tyre(s) overheated ............................... 484 System limits ....................................... 202
530 Index

Distance recorder ................................... 259 Driving abroad see Active Blind Spot Assist
DISTRONIC Symmetrical dipped beam ................... 131 see Active Lane Keeping Assist
see Distance Pilot DISTRONIC Driving light see AIR BODY CONTROL
see Automatic driving lights see ATTENTION ASSIST
Door see Blind Spot Assist
Additional door lock .............................. 68 Driving safety system ............................. 188 see Cruise control
Locking (emergency key) ....................... 72 ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ........... 189 see Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
Opening (from inside) ............................ 68 Active Brake Assist .............................. 194 see DRIVE PILOT
Unlocking (emergency key) .................... 72 Adaptive brake lights ........................... 199 see Driving safety system
Unlocking (from inside) ......................... 68 BAS (Brake Assist System) .................. 189 see HOLD function
Door EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu‐ see Limiter
see Locking/unlocking tion) ..................................................... 193 see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) see Parking Pilot
Door control panel ..................................... 16
Crosswind Assist ................................. 193 see Remote Parking Pilot
Drive Away Assist .................................... 236 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) see Reversing camera
DRIVE PILOT ............................................. 209 trailer stabilisation ............................... 193 see Speed Limit Pilot
Function .............................................. 209 Overview ............................................. 188 see Steering Pilot
Drive position Radar sensors ..................................... 188 see Traffic Sign Assist
Selecting .............................................. 173 Responsibility ...................................... 188 Driving tips
Drive program display ............................. 169 Driving safety system Driving abroad (symmetrical dipped
see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) beam) .................................................. 131
Drive programs ........................................ 168 General driving tips ............................. 164
Driving system
Driver's seat DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL .................. 214 Running-in notes .................................. 164
see Seat Drowsiness detection
Driving system
see 360° Camera see ATTENTION ASSIST
 Index 531

Drowsiness warning Easy exit feature Electric parking brake

see ATTENTION ASSIST Operation/notes ................................. 106 see Parking
DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL Setting ................................................. 107 Electrical fuses
Suspension .......................................... 214 EASY-PACK load-securing kit .................. 119 see Fuses
Dynamic handling control system Notes ................................................... 119 Electromagnetic compatibility
see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Tensioning the luggage holder ............. 120 Declaration of Conformity ..................... 24
Tensioning the telescopic rod .............. 121
Dynamic multicontour seat Electronic Stability Program
Setting ................................................... 98 EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu‐ see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
tion)
DYNAMIC SELECT Function/notes ................................... 193 Electronics ............................................... 429
Configuring drive program I ................. 169 Emergency
Displaying engine data ........................ 169 ECO display
Function .............................................. 168 Assistance overview .............................. 18
Displaying vehicle data ........................ 169 Fire extinguisher .................................. 389
Drive program display .......................... 169 Resetting ............................................. 260
First-aid kit (soft sided) ....................... 389
Drive programs .................................... 168 ECO start/stop function ................. 166, 167 Removing the warning triangle ............ 388
Function .............................................. 168 Automatic engine start ........................ 166 Safety vest .......................................... 388
Operating (DYNAMIC SELECT switch) Automatic engine stop ......................... 166 Setting up the warning triangle ........... 389
............................................................. 169 Operation ............................................ 166
Switching off/on ................................. 167 Emergency braking ................................. 187
E Electric parking brake ..... 184, 185, 186, 187 Emergency call system
E10 ............................................................ 434 Applying automatically ........................ 184 see Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
Easy entry feature Applying or releasing manually ............ 186 Emergency engine start ......................... 405
Operation/notes ................................. 106 Emergency braking .............................. 187 Emergency key
Setting ................................................. 107 Releasing automatically ....................... 185 Locking a door ....................................... 72
Unlocking a door ................................... 72
532 Index

Emergency key element Opening/closing .................................. 374 ESC (Electronic Stability Control)
Inserting/removing ............................... 66 Resetting (active bonnet) ..................... 373 see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Unlocking the tailgate ............................ 78 Engine data ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ...... 189
Emergency operation mode Displaying ............................................ 169 Crosswind Assist ................................. 193
Starting vehicle ................................... 163 Engine electronics Function/notes ................................... 189
Emergency spare wheel Notes .................................................. 429 Switching on/off ................................. 193
Notes ................................................... 427 Engine number ........................................ 431 Trailer stabilisation .............................. 193
Removing ............................................ 428 EU type approval number ....................... 431
Engine oil ................................................. 377
Emergency spare wheel Additives ............................................. 438 Exterior lighting
see Spare wheel Checking the oil level using the oil Care .................................................... 383
see Wheel change dipstick ................................................ 376 Exterior lighting
Energy consumption Checking the oil level using the on- see Lights
Key ........................................................ 65 board computer ................................... 376
Engine Filling capacity .................................... 439 F
ECO start/stop function ...................... 166 MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval ............... 439
Fatigue warning
Engine number .................................... 431 Topping up ........................................... 377
see ATTENTION ASSIST
Starting (emergency operation Entering characters
mode) .................................................. 163 Fault message
Function/notes ................................... 284
Starting (mobile phone) ....................... 162 On the touchpad ................................. 285 see Display message
Starting (start/stop button) ................. 162 Using the controller ............................. 285 Favourites
Starting assistance .............................. 398 ERA-GLONASS test mode Adding ................................................. 282
Switching off (start/stop button) ........ 180 Starting/ending .................................. 332 Calling up ............................................ 282
Engine bonnet Deleting ............................................... 283
Function (active bonnet) ...................... 373 Moving ................................................ 283
 Index 533

Overview ............................................. 282 Folding back ........................................ 104 Front passenger seat
Renaming ............................................ 283 Folding out .......................................... 102 Adjusting from the driver's seat ............ 94
Filling station search Notes ................................................... 101 Front passenger seat
Starting an automatic filling station Suitable child restraint systems ............ 58 see Seat
search ................................................. 300 Fragrance Fuel ........................................................... 435
Switching the automatic filling sta‐ see Fragrance system Additives ............................................. 435
tion search on/off ............................... 303 Fragrance system .................................... 153 Consumption ....................................... 437
Fire extinguisher ..................................... 389 Inserting/removing the flacon ............. 153 Diesel .................................................. 436
First-aid kit (soft sided) .......................... 389 Setting ................................................. 153 E10 ...................................................... 434
Frequencies Low outside temperatures ................... 436
Flacon Petrol ................................................... 434
Inserting/removing ............................. 153 Mobile phone ...................................... 430
Two-way radio ...................................... 430 Quality (diesel) .................................... 436
Flat tyre Quality (petrol) .................................... 434
MOExtended tyres ............................... 390 Frequency band Refuelling ............................................. 175
Notes .................................................. 390 Selecting (on-board computer) ............ 262 Reserve fuel level ................................ 437
TIREFIT kit ........................................... 392 Front airbag ............................................... 36 Sulphur content ................................... 434
Wheel change ...................................... 422 Front passenger airbag shutoff ............... 39 Tank capacity ...................................... 437
Flat tyre PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp ..... 41 Fuel consumption
see Breakdown Points to remember when the front On-board computer ............................. 259
Floor mat .................................................. 130 passenger seat is occupied ................... 39 Function seat
Status display ........................................ 41 see Door control panel
Fog light (extended range) ...................... 135 System self-test ..................................... 41
Folding bench seat .................................. 101 Fuse insert
Front passenger airbag shutoff see Fuses
Fitting and removing the seat cush‐ see Occupant safety
ion ....................................................... 103
534 Index

Fuses ........................................................ 406 Glove box Head-up display

Assignment diagram ............................ 406 Air vent ................................................ 159 Adjusting brightness (on-board com‐
Before changing .................................. 406 Locking/unlocking ............................... 110 puter) .................................................. 264
Fuse box in the engine compartment .. 407 Gross mass .............................................. 431 Adjusting display elements (on-board
Fuse box in the front-passenger foot‐ computer) ............................................ 264
well ...................................................... 408 H Function .............................................. 265
Fuse box in the load compartment ...... 408 Menu (on-board computer) .................. 264
Fuse box on the dashboard ................. 408 Handbrake Setting the position (on-board com‐
Notes .................................................. 406 see Electric parking brake puter) .................................................. 264
Handling characteristics (unusual) ....... 409 Switching on/off ................................. 266
G HANDS-FREE ACCESS ................................ 76 Using the memory function ................. 107
Garage door opener HANDS-FREE ACCESS Head-up display
Clearing the memory ........................... 184 see Opening the tailgate using your foot see Menu (on-board computer)
Opening or closing the garage door ..... 183 Head-up display menu
Programming buttons .......................... 181 Hands-free system .................................... 69
see On-board computer
Radio equipment approval number ...... 184 Hazard warning lights ............................. 134
Headlamp flashing .................................. 133
Resolving problems ............................. 183 HD programmes
Synchronising the rolling code ............ 182 see CA module (TV) Heating
Gearshift paddles see Climate control
Head restraint ........................................... 95
see Steering wheel gearshift paddles Front (adjusting manually) ..................... 95 High-pressure cleaner (care) ................. 380
Gearshift recommendation ............. 170, 173 Front (luxury head restraint) .................. 96 Hill start assist ........................................ 212
Genuine parts ............................................ 22 Rear (adjusting) ..................................... 97 HOLD function ......................................... 212
Rear (lowering from the front) ............... 97 Activating/deactivating ....................... 212
Genuine wood (Care) .............................. 385 Rear (removing/fitting) .......................... 97 Function/notes .................................... 212
Glide mode ............................................... 174
 Index 535

I Instrument cluster .................................. 501 Interior lighting ........................................ 138

Instrument cluster Ambient lighting .................................. 138
i-Size child seat attachment Setting ................................................. 138
Seats suitable for attaching ................... 57 see Instrument display
Switch-off delay time ........................... 139
i-Size child seat securing system Instrument display .................................. 254
Adjusting the lighting .......................... 258 Interior lighting
Fitting .................................................... 48 see Interior lighting
Notes ..................................................... 47 Function/notes ................................... 254
Overview (standard) .............................. 10 see Lighting
Identification plate see Lights
Overview (widescreen) .......................... 10
Engine ................................................. 431 Warning/indicator lamps ..................... 501 Interior protection
Vehicle ................................................. 431 Function ................................................ 89
Instrument display
Ignition Switching on/off ................................... 89
see Display (on-board computer)
Switching on (start/stop button) ......... 161 see Instrument cluster Intermediate destination ........................ 299
Ignition key ................................................ 64 Instrument lighting ................................. 258 Calculating a route with intermediate
Immobiliser ................................................ 88 destinations ........................................ 299
Instrument lighting Editing ................................................. 299
Implied warranty see Dashboard lighting Entering ............................................... 299
Vehicle ................................................... 27 Intelligent Light System .......................... 134 Starting an automatic filling station
Inattentiveness assistant Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus ........... 136 search ................................................. 300
see ATTENTION ASSIST Adverse weather light .......................... 136 Internet
Indicator lamp City lighting ......................................... 136 Deleting favourites .............................. 345
see Warning/indicator lamps Cornering light ..................................... 135 Deleting history ................................... 345
Individual drive program Fog light (extended range) ................... 135 Setting favourites ................................ 345
Configuring .......................................... 169 Motorway mode ................................... 135
Overview ............................................. 134 Internet connection
Selecting ............................................. 169 Cancelling permission ......................... 342
Switching on/off ................................. 136
536 Index

Connection status ............................... 343 Ionisation ................................................. 153 Problem ................................................. 67

Displaying the connection status ........ 343 iPhone® Unlocking setting .................................. 65
Editing the access data ....................... 342 see Apple CarPlay™ Key
Establishing ......................................... 342 see Ignition key
Mobile phone details ........................... 342 ISOFIX child seat attachment
Seats suitable for attaching ................... 55 see Locking
Restrictions ......................................... 339 see Vehicle key
Setting access data ............................. 340 ISOFIX child seat securing system
Setting up ............................................ 340 KEYLESS-GO
Fitting .................................................... 48
Notes ..................................................... 47 Locking the vehicle ................................ 70
Switching Bluetooth® profile (DUN/
Problem ................................................. 71
PAN) .................................................... 342
J Unlocking setting .................................. 65
Via Bluetooth® ..................................... 340 Unlocking the vehicle ............................ 70
Via communication module ................. 340 Jack
Via Wi-Fi .............................................. 340 Kickdown .................................................. 174
Declaration of Conformity ..................... 24
Using ................................................... 174
Internet radio Storage location .................................. 421
Calling up ............................................ 345 Knee airbag ................................................ 36
Jump-start connection ............................ 398
Deleting stations ................................. 346
Logging in ............................................ 347 L
K
Logging out ......................................... 347 Laden ........................................................ 118
Overview ............................................. 346 Key .............................................................. 64
Bag hook .............................................. 118
Saving stations .................................... 346 Battery .................................................. 66
Roof rack ............................................. 122
Selecting and connecting to a station Emergency key element ........................ 66
Stowage space underneath the load
............................................................. 346 Energy consumption .............................. 65
compartment floor ............................... 121
Selecting stream ................................. 347 Key ring attachment .............................. 66
Tie-down eyes ...................................... 118
Setting options .................................... 347 Overview ............................................... 64
Panic alarm ........................................... 65 Laden
Terms of use ........................................ 347 see EASY-PACK load-securing kit
 Index 537

Lamp Adjusting the instrument lighting ........ 258 Limiter ...................................................... 199
see Interior lighting Adverse weather light .......................... 136 Activating ............................................ 200
Lamp (instrument display) Automatic driving lights ....................... 132 Calling up a speed ............................... 200
see Warning/indicator lamps Changing bulbs .................................... 139 Deactivating ........................................ 200
City lighting ......................................... 136 Function .............................................. 199
Lane Keeping Assist Combination switch ............................. 133 Lever ................................................... 200
see Active Lane Keeping Assist Cornering light function ....................... 135 Passive mode ...................................... 199
Language Dipped beam ....................................... 131 Permanent setting ............................... 202
Notes ................................................... 291 Driving abroad ..................................... 131 Requirements ...................................... 200
Setting ................................................. 291 Fog light (extended range) ................... 135 Selecting ............................................. 200
Last destinations Hazard warning lights .......................... 134 Setting a speed ................................... 200
Selecting ............................................. 298 Headlamp flashing ............................... 133 Storing a speed ................................... 200
LED light Headlamp range .................................. 132 System limits ....................................... 199
Intelligent Light System ....................... 134 Limiting speed
see Intelligent Light System
Light switch ......................................... 131 see Limiter
Level control system Main beam ........................................... 133
see AIR BODY CONTROL Motorway mode ................................... 135 Limiting the opening angle (tailgate) ...... 77
Light switch Parking lights ....................................... 131 LINGUATRONIC ........................................ 267
Overview .............................................. 131 Rear fog light ....................................... 132 Application-specific command ............ 268
Lighting .................................................... 138 Responsibility for lighting systems ....... 131 Audible help functions ......................... 269
Setting the dipped beam ..................... 137 Command types .................................. 268
Lighting Setting the surround lighting ............... 138 Entering numbers ................................ 268
see Lights Standing lights ..................................... 131 Global command ................................. 268
Lights ................................................ 131, 138 Turn signal light ................................... 133 Improving speech quality .................... 269
Active light function ............................. 134 Language setting ................................. 269
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus ........... 136 Media player commands ...................... 275
538 Index

Message commands ............................ 275 Lowering Avoiding an area .................................. 314

Multifunction steering wheel (operat‐ Vehicle ................................................ 426 Avoiding an area (deleting) .................. 315
ing) ...................................................... 267 Lubricant additives Avoiding an area (overview) ................. 314
Navigation commands ......................... 271 see Additives Displaying Qibla ................................... 316
Operable functions .............................. 268 Displaying the compass ....................... 316
Operating safety .................................. 267 Luggage Displaying the map version .................. 314
Radio commands ................................. 274 Securing .............................................. 108 Displaying the next intersecting
Switch commands ............................... 269 Lumbar support street ................................................... 313
Telephone commands .......................... 273 see Lumbar support (4-way) Displaying the satellite map ................. 316
Text message commands .................... 275 Lumbar support (4-way) ........................... 95 Displaying the traffic map ................... 309
TV commands ...................................... 274 Displaying traffic signs ......................... 313
Vehicle commands .............................. 276 M Displaying weather information ........... 316
Voice prompting .................................. 268 Map data ............................................. 315
Main beam Moving ................................................. 312
Live Traffic Information Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus ........... 136
Displaying subscription information .... 309 Overview .............................................. 311
Changing bulbs .................................... 140 Selecting POI symbols ......................... 313
Registering on Mercedes me ............... 309 Switching on/off ................................. 133 Selecting text information .................... 313
Load compartment cover Maintenance Selecting the map orientation .............. 312
Extending/retracting ........................... 115 see ASSYST PLUS Setting the map scale .......................... 312
Notes ................................................... 115 Updating .............................................. 315
Malfunction
Loading guidelines .................................. 108 Restraint system .................................... 31 Map and compass
Loads Manual transmission Overview .............................................. 311
Securing .............................................. 108 Operating the gearshift lever ............... 170 Massage programmes
Locking ....................................................... 64 Map ............................................ 309, 311, 312 Overview ............................................... 98
Locking/unlocking ........................ 68, 69, 73 Avoiding (changing) an area ................. 314 Selecting the front seats ..................... 100
 Index 539

Massage settings Media source Trip ...................................................... 259

Resetting ............................................. 100 Selecting (on-board computer) ............ 262 Mercedes me connect
Matt finish (cleaning instructions) ........ 382 Memory function Accident management ........................ 328
Maximum speed Head-up Display — Calling up saved Breakdown assistance call .................. 328
see Limiter settings ................................................ 107 Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Head-up Display — Saving settings ...... 107 Centre using the multimedia system ... 327
MB Info call Operating ............................................. 107 Consenting to the transfer of data ...... 329
see Service call Outside mirror — Calling up saved Making a call via the overhead con‐
Mecca ....................................................... 316 settings ................................................ 107 trol panel ............................................. 327
Media Outside mirror — Saving settings ......... 107 MB Info call ......................................... 328
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 262 Seat — Calling up saved settings .......... 107 Notes .................................................. 326
Searching ............................................ 354 Seat — Saving settings ......................... 107 Service message ................................. 328
Steering wheel — Calling up saved Transmitted data ................................. 329
Media display
settings ................................................ 107 Mercedes-Benz Apps
Notes ................................................... 278 Steering wheel — Saving settings ......... 107 Calling up ............................................ 343
Media Interface
Menu (on-board computer) .................... 264 Using voice control .............................. 343
Information .......................................... 354
Assistance graphic .............................. 258 Mercedes-Benz emergency call sys‐
Overview ............................................. 356
Content ............................................... 264 tem ........................................................... 329
Switching on ....................................... 355
Designs ............................................... 265 Automatic emergency call ................... 330
Media mode Media .................................................. 262 Manual emergency call ........................ 331
Activating ............................................ 348 Navigation ........................................... 260 Notes .................................................. 329
Media playback Overview ............................................. 256 Overview ............................................. 329
Operating (on-board computer) ........... 262 Radio ................................................... 262 Starting/ending ERA-GLONASS test
Media search Service ................................................ 258 mode ................................................... 332
Starting ............................................... 354 Telephone ............................................ 263 Transmitted data ................................. 331
540 Index

Mercedes-Benz service centre Mobile phone voice recognition Restoring the factory settings ............. 294
see Qualified specialist workshop Starting ................................................ 321 Switching the sound on/off ................ 283
Message (multifunction display) Stopping .............................................. 321
see Display message Model type ............................................... 431 N
Message memory .................................... 445 MOExtended tyres .................................. 390 Navigation
Activating ............................................ 294
Messages Motorway mode ....................................... 135 Calling up the Digital Owner's Man‐
see Text messages MULTIBEAM LED ual ........................................................ 316
Mirrors see Intelligent Light System Commands (LINGUATRONIC) ............... 271
see Outside mirrors Multifunction display (on-board com‐ Menu (on-board computer) .................. 260
Mobile phone ................................... 263, 430 puter) ........................................................ 257 Showing/hiding the menu ................... 295
Authorising (Remote Parking Pilot) ...... 236 Updating the map data ........................ 315
Multifunction steering wheel
Cancelling permission for Internet Overview of buttons ............................ 255 Navigation
connection .......................................... 342 see Destination
Frequencies ......................................... 430 Multifunction steering wheel see Destination entry
Locking the vehicle ................................ 69 see Steering wheel see Map
Starting the vehicle ............................. 162 Multimedia system ......................... 278, 286 see Route
Transmission output (maximum) ......... 430 Activating/deactivating standby see Route guidance
Unlocking the vehicle ............................ 69 mode ................................................... 187 see Traffic information
Wireless charging ................................ 129 Adjusting the volume ........................... 284 Navigation announcements ................... 305
Mobile phone Calling up lists and menus ................... 281 Activating/deactivating ....................... 305
see Hands-free system Central controls ................................... 279 Adjusting the volume ........................... 305
see Locking/unlocking Configuring display settings ................ 286 Repeating ............................................ 306
see Mobile phone Main functions ..................................... 281 Switching audio fadeout on/off .......... 305
see Telephone Overview ............................................. 278 Switching on/off during a phone call .. 305
 Index 541

Navigation messages Odometer On-board electronics

On-board computer ............................. 260 see Total distance recorder Engine electronics ............................... 429
Near Field Communication Oil Notes .................................................. 429
Starting the vehicle (mobile phone) ..... 162 see Engine oil Two-way radios .................................... 429
Near Field Communication (NFC) ........... 319 On-board computer ................................. 264 On-board electronics
Connecting the mobile phone to the Assistance graphic menu .................... 258 see Electronics
multimedia system ............................... 319 Displaying the service due date ........... 372 see Technical data
Switching Bluetooth® audio equip‐ Media menu ........................................ 262 Opening the tailgate using your foot ....... 76
ment .................................................... 359 Menu content ...................................... 264 Operating fluids
Switching mobile phones ..................... 319 Menu designs ...................................... 265 AdBlue® ............................................... 437
Neutral Menus ................................................. 256 Additives (fuel) .................................... 435
Selecting .............................................. 172 Multifunction display ........................... 257 Brake fluid ........................................... 439
Navigation menu ................................. 260 Coolant (engine) .................................. 440
NFC Operating ............................................ 256
see Near Field Communication (NFC) Engine oil ............................................ 438
Radio menu ......................................... 262 Fuel (diesel) ......................................... 436
Noise Service menu ...................................... 258 Fuel (petrol) ......................................... 434
Wheels and tyres ................................. 409 Telephone menu .................................. 263 Notes .................................................. 433
Trip menu ............................................ 259 Windscreen washer fluid ...................... 441
O On-board computer Operating safety
Occupant safety .......... 30, 32, 36, 39, 43, 44 see Computer Declaration of Conformity (electro‐
Pets in the vehicle ................................. 63 see Operating system magnetic compatibility) ......................... 24
Occupant safety On-board diagnostics interface Declaration of conformity (jack) ............ 24
see Child seat see Diagnostics connection Declaration of conformity (TIREFIT kit) .. 25
542 Index

Declaration of conformity (wireless Panic alarm ................................................ 65 Parking Pilot ............................................ 227
vehicle components) ............................. 24 Activating/deactivating ......................... 65 Cross Traffic Alert ............................... 237
Information ............................................ 23 Panorama sliding sunroof Drive Away Assist ................................ 236
Operating system .................................... 256 see Sliding sunroof Exiting a parking space ....................... 230
Function .............................................. 227
Outside mirrors ....................... 144, 145, 146 Park position Manoeuvring assistance ...................... 238
Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) .............. 145 Selecting .............................................. 172 Parking ................................................ 229
Automatic mirror folding function ........ 147 Selecting automatically ........................ 172 System limits ....................................... 227
Folding in/out ..................................... 144 Parking ..................................................... 184
Parking position ................................... 146 Parking Pilot
Setting ................................................. 144 Parking aid see Remote Parking Pilot
Using the memory function ................. 107 see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Parking position
see Remote Parking Pilot Outside mirrors ................................... 146
Overhead control panel ............................ 14
Making calls (Mercedes me connect) Parking Assist PARKTRONIC ................... 218 Passenger outside mirror — storing
............................................................. 327 Activating ............................................ 220 using the memory button .................... 146
Adjusting warning tones ...................... 220 Parking up ................................................ 187
Owner's Manual Function ............................................... 218
Vehicle equipment ................................. 23 Side impact protection ......................... 219 Pedestrian protection
Owner's Manual (digital) .......................... 20 Switching off ....................................... 220 see Active bonnet (pedestrian protection)
System limitations ............................... 218 Perfume
P Parking assistance systems see Fragrance system
Paint (cleaning instructions) .................. 382 see Parking Pilot Perfume vial
Paint code ................................................ 431 Parking brake see Fragrance system
Panel heating see Electric parking brake
Setting ................................................. 101 Parking lights ........................................... 131
 Index 543

Period out of use POI symbols Reversing measures .............................. 44

Activating/deactivating standby Custom ................................................ 313 PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occu‐
mode ................................................... 187 Power supply pant protection plus)
Permissible axle load .............................. 431 Switching on (start/stop button) ......... 161 see Anticipatory occupant protection
Permissible gross mass .......................... 431 PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant see Occupant safety
Permitted towing methods ..................... 400 protection) Preventative occupant protection sys‐
Function ................................................ 43 tem ............................................................. 43
Personalisation
PRE-SAFE® Sound ................................. 43 Programme information
see User profile
Reversing measures .............................. 44 TV channel .......................................... 366
Petrol ........................................................ 434
PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant Protection of the environment
Pets in the vehicle ..................................... 63 protection) Notes ..................................................... 21
Phone book see Anticipatory occupant protection Returning an end-of-life vehicle ............. 21
see Contacts see Occupant safety
Picture formats see Preventative occupant protection system Q
see Video mode PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side Qibla .......................................................... 316
Picture settings Activation .............................................. 31 QR code
see Video mode Function ................................................ 44 Rescue card ........................................... 27
PIN protection for data export ............... 292 PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side Qualified specialist workshop ................. 26
Plastic trim (Care) ................................... 385 see Anticipatory occupant protection
see Occupant safety R
Playback options
Selecting .............................................. 351 PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occu‐ Radar sensors .......................................... 188
pant protection plus)
Function ................................................ 44 Radiator shutters
see AIRPANEL (Care)
544 Index

Radio Radio stations Rear-view mirror

Activating ............................................ 359 Selecting (on-board computer) ............ 262 see Outside mirrors
Activating/deactivating radio text ....... 362 Rain-closing feature Recycling
Calling up a slide show ........................ 361 Sliding sunroof ...................................... 85 see Take-back of end-of-life vehicles
Calling up the station list ..................... 361
Commands (LINGUATRONIC) ............... 274 Raising Reducing agent
Deleting stations .................................. 361 Vehicle ................................................ 423 see AdBlue®
Direct frequency entry ......................... 361 Range Refuelling
Displaying information ......................... 362 Displaying ............................................ 259 Refuelling the vehicle ........................... 175
Editing station presets ......................... 361 Reading lamp Topping up AdBlue® ............................. 178
Frequency fix ....................................... 362 see Interior lighting Registration
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 262 Vehicle ................................................... 27
Rear door (child safety lock) ..................... 61
Moving stations ................................... 361
Overview ............................................. 360 Rear fog light ........................................... 132 Remote control (stationary heater)
Searching for stations .......................... 361 Rear seat Displays ............................................... 157
Setting a station .................................. 361 see Seat Problems ............................................. 158
Setting station tracking ....................... 362 Replacing the battery .......................... 157
Rear seat belt Setting ................................................. 156
Setting the frequency band .................. 361 Status display ........................................ 36
Setting the traffic information Remote Parking Pilot .............................. 232
service volume increase ...................... 362 Rear seat belt status display .................... 36 Authorising a mobile phone ................. 236
Storing stations ................................... 361 Rear window Function/notes ................................... 232
Switching traffic announcements Replacing the wiper blades .................. 144 Operating ............................................ 233
on/off ................................................. 362 Rear window heater ................................ 149 System limitations ............................... 232
Tagging music tracks ........................... 362 Replacing a bulb
To display radio text ............................ 362 Rear window wipers
Switching on/off .................................. 141 see Changing bulbs
 Index 545

Rescue card ............................................... 27 Care .................................................... 383 Switching the automatic filling sta‐
Reserve Function .............................................. 221 tion search on/off ............................... 303
Fuel ..................................................... 437 Opening the camera cover .................. 227 With intermediate destinations ........... 299
Switching automatic mode on/off ...... 226 Route guidance ....................................... 303
Reset function (multimedia system) ..... 294
RF transmitters Cancelling ........................................... 306
Restoring (factory settings) see Two-way radios Changing direction .............................. 303
see Reset function (multimedia system) Continuing ........................................... 306
Rims (Care) .............................................. 383
Restraint system Destination reached ............................ 305
Children ................................................. 45 Roll away protection From an off-road location .................... 307
Function in an accident ......................... 31 see HOLD function Lane recommendations ....................... 304
Functionality .......................................... 31 Roller sunblind Notes .................................................. 303
Malfunction ........................................... 31 Side windows ........................................ 79 Off-road ............................................... 307
Protection .............................................. 30 Roller sunblind To an off-road destination ................... 306
Reduced protection ............................... 30 see Cover Route guidance
System self-test ..................................... 31 see Navigation announcements
Warning lamp ......................................... 31 Roof lining (care) ..................................... 385
Roof load .................................................. 442 Run-flat characteristics
Restraint system MOExtended tyres ............................... 390
see Occupant safety Roof rack .................................................. 122
Running-in notes ...................................... 164
Returning an end-of-life vehicle Route ................................................ 300, 303
Protection of the environment ............... 21 Calculating .......................................... 300 S
Reverse gear Displaying destination information ...... 302
Selecting a type ................................... 301 Safety
Selecting .............................................. 172 see Child seat
Selecting an alternative route ............. 303
Reversing camera .................................... 221 Selecting notifications ......................... 302 Safety net
Assigning as a favourite ....................... 227 Selecting options ................................ 302 Attaching ............................................. 117
546 Index

Safety systems Seat Seat belts ................................................... 36

see Driving safety system see Folding bench seat Reduced protection ............................... 33
Safety vest ............................................... 388 see Head restraint Warning lamp ........................................ 36
Satellite map ............................................ 316 Seat belt Seat cover (Care) ..................................... 385
Activating/deactivating seat belt Seat heater
SD card adjustment ............................................ 36
Inserting/removing ............................. 348 Switching on/off ................................. 100
Adjusting the height .............................. 35
Seat ..................................................... 91, 111 Care .................................................... 385 Seat settings
4-way lumbar support ........................... 95 Fastening ............................................... 35 Configuring ............................................ 97
Adjusting (electrically) ........................... 94 Protection .............................................. 32 Seat ventilation
Adjusting (manually and electrically) ..... 91 Rear seat belt status display ................. 36 Switching on/off ................................. 101
Adjusting (Seat Comfort) ....................... 93 Releasing ............................................... 35 Selecting a gear
Adjusting the seat backrest angle Seat belt adjustment (function) ............. 35 see Shifting gears
(rear) .................................................... 113 Seat belt
Backrest (rear) folding forwards ........... 111 Selecting a POI
see Belt see Destination entry
Backrest (rear) locking ......................... 113 see Occupant safety
Correct driver's seat position ................ 90 Selector lever ........................................... 171
Dynamic multicontour seat ................... 98 Seat belt adjustment
Activating/deactivating ......................... 36 Selector lever
Folding the backrest (rear) back .......... 112 see DIRECT SELECT lever
Massage programme overview .............. 98 Function ................................................ 35
Seat belt tensioners Sensors (Care) ......................................... 383
Panel heating ....................................... 101
Resetting the settings .......................... 100 Activation .............................................. 31 Service
Selecting a massage programme ........ 100 Seat belt warning Menu (on-board computer) .................. 258
Setting options ...................................... 16 see Seat belts Service
Using the memory function ................. 107 see ASSYST PLUS
 Index 547

Service call .............................................. 328 Side windows Smartphone

Breakdown assistance call .................. 328 Child safety lock in the rear ................... 63 see Android Auto
MB Info call ......................................... 328 Closing .................................................. 79 see Apple CarPlay™
Service centre Closing with the key ............................... 81 see Telephone
see Qualified specialist workshop Convenience closing .............................. 81 Snow chains ............................................ 409
Convenience opening ............................ 81
Service interval display Opening ................................................. 79 Snow chains
see ASSYST PLUS Opening with the key ............................. 81 see Skid chains
Setting a speed Problem ................................................. 82 Socket (12 V) ............................................ 126
see Cruise control Roller sunblind ...................................... 79 Front centre console ........................... 126
Setting summer time .............................. 287 Side windows Load compartment .............................. 128
see Window lifter Rear passenger compartment ............. 126
Setting the date format .......................... 287
see Windows Socket (230 V)
Setting the distance unit ........................ 291 Rear ..................................................... 127
Ski/snowboard bag ................................. 114
Setting the map scale Software update
see Map Skid chains .............................................. 409
Information .......................................... 293
Setting up a hotspot (Wi-Fi) ................... 289 Sliding sunroof .......................................... 83 Performing .......................................... 293
Automatic features ................................ 85
Shifting gears ........................................... 173 Closing .................................................. 83 Sound
Gearshift recommendation .......... 170, 173 Closing with the key ............................... 81 PRE-SAFE® Sound ................................. 43
Manual ................................................. 173 Opening ................................................. 83 Sound
Short text messages Opening with the key ............................. 81 see Burmester® surround sound system
see Text messages Problem ................................................. 86 see Tone settings
Side impact airbag .................................... 36 Rain-closing feature ............................... 85 Spare wheel ............................................. 427
Side impact protection ............................ 219 Spectacles compartment ........................ 110
548 Index

Speech dialogue system Starting the engine Steering Pilot ........................................... 209
see LINGUATRONIC see Vehicle Active Emergency Stop Assist .............. 210
Speed limit for winter tyres Starting-off aid Active Lane Change Assist ................... 210
Setting ................................................. 202 see Hill start assist Function .............................................. 209
Switching on/off ................................. 212
Speed Limit Pilot ............................. 202, 241 Station System limits ....................................... 209
Display ................................................ 202 Deleting ............................................... 361
Setting ................................................. 241 Direct frequency entry ......................... 361 Steering wheel ........................................ 255
Frequency fix ....................................... 362 Adjusting (electrically) ......................... 105
Speedometer Adjusting (manually) ............................ 104
Digital .................................................. 259 Moving ................................................. 361
Searching ............................................ 361 Buttons ................................................ 255
Standby mode Setting ................................................. 361 Steering wheel heater .......................... 106
Activating/deactivating ....................... 187 Storing ................................................. 361 Using the memory function ................. 107
Function .............................................. 187 Steering wheel gearshift paddles .......... 173
Station list
Standing lights ......................................... 131 Calling up ............................................. 361 Steering wheel heater
Start/Stop button Station presets Switching on/off ................................. 106
Starting vehicle ................................... 162 Editing ................................................. 361 Stopping the alarm (ATA) .......................... 88
Switching off the vehicle ..................... 180
Switching on the power supply or Stationary heater/ventilation Stowage areas
ignition ................................................. 161 Displays (remote control) ..................... 157 see Laden
Problems (remote control) ................... 158 see Stowage compartment
Start/stop function Setting (using the multimedia sys‐
see ECO start/stop function Stowage compartment ........................... 109
tem) ..................................................... 156 Armrest ............................................... 109
Starting assistance ................................. 398 Setting (via remote control) ................. 156 Centre console .................................... 109
Starting assistance Switching on/off (via control panel) .... 154 Door .................................................... 109
see Jump-start connection Glove box ............................................. 109
 Index 549

Rear armrest ........................................ 110 Switch-off delay time Limiting the opening angle .................... 77
Spectacles compartment ..................... 110 Interior ................................................. 139 Opening ................................................. 73
Stowage compartments Switching residual heat on/off .............. 152 Opening dimensions ............................ 441
see Laden Unlocking (emergency key) .................... 78
Switching the surround sound on/off
see Stowage compartment Burmester® surround sound system .... 371 Tailgate
Stowage space underneath the load see Locking/unlocking
Synchronisation function
compartment floor .................................. 121 Activating/deactivating (control Tailpipes (Care) ........................................ 383
Sulphur content ...................................... 434 panel) .................................................. 152 Take-back of end-of-life vehicles .............. 21
Sun visor Activating/deactivating (multimedia Tank capacity
Operating ............................................. 147 system) ................................................ 152 AdBlue® ............................................... 438
Surround lighting System settings Fuel ..................................................... 437
Setting ................................................. 138 Language ............................................. 291 Reserve (fuel) ...................................... 437
Notes on language selection ................ 291 Technical data ......................................... 429
Surround View
Reset function (multimedia system) .... 294 Axle load (trailer operation) ................. 443
see 360° Camera Setting the distance unit ...................... 291
Suspension Information .......................................... 429
Software update .................................. 293 Notes (trailer hitch) ............................. 442
Damping characteristics ...................... 214 System settings
DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL .................. 214 Tongue weight ..................................... 443
see Multimedia system Towing weight (towing a trailer) ........... 443
Setting the suspension level ................ 216
Tyre pressure monitoring system ......... 414
Suspension T Vehicle identification plate .................. 431
see AIR BODY CONTROL
Tailgate ....................................................... 73 Telephone ................................................. 317
Suspension level Closing ................................................... 74 Activating functions during a call ......... 321
Setting ................................................. 216 Emergency release from the inside ........ 78 Authorising a mobile phone (Remote
HANDS-FREE ACCESS ........................... 76 Parking Pilot) ....................................... 236
550 Index

Call and ringtone volume ..................... 320 Telephone Storing the SIM card PIN ..................... 334
Calls with several participants ............. 321 see Mobile phone Switching mobile phones .................... 334
Commands (LINGUATRONIC) .............. 273 Telephone module Transferring the phone book ............... 335
Connecting a mobile phone (Near Activating/deactivating ....................... 332 Telephone number
Field Communication (NFC)) ................ 319 Activating/deactivating caller ID Dialling (on-board computer) ............... 263
Connecting a mobile phone (Pass‐ transmission ........................................ 334
key) ...................................................... 318 Telephone operation
Activating/deactivating data roam‐ see Calls
Connecting a mobile phone (Secure ing ....................................................... 334
Simple Pairing) ..................................... 318 Activating/deactivating network pro‐ Teletext
Disconnecting the mobile phone ......... 319 vider restriction ................................... 334 Displaying ............................................ 369
Incoming call during an existing call .... 322 Activating/deactivating text mes‐ Overview ............................................. 368
Locking the vehicle (mobile phone) ....... 69 sage transfer ....................................... 334 Television
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 263 Adjusting the brightness ..................... 334 see TV
Mobile phone voice recognition ........... 321 Charging a mobile phone .................... 336 Temperature ............................................ 149
Notes ................................................... 317 Connecting .......................................... 332
Reception and transmission volume .... 320 Text messages ......................................... 324
Deleting call lists ................................. 335
Starting the vehicle (mobile phone) ..... 162 Disconnecting ..................................... 336 Activating/deactivating transferring
Switching mobile phones ..................... 319 Establishing a connection to the (telephone module) ............................. 334
Switching mobile phones (Near Field mobile phone ...................................... 333 Calling a sender .................................. 326
Communication (NFC)) ........................ 319 Fitting/removing ................................. 332 Commands (LINGUATRONIC) .............. 275
Telephone menu overview .................... 317 Inserting/removing a SIM card ........... 333 Composing .......................................... 325
Telephone operation ............................ 321 Notes on receiving text messages ....... 335 Configuring the text messages dis‐
Unlocking the vehicle (mobile phone) .... 69 Resetting to factory settings ............... 336 played .................................................. 325
Using Near Field Communication Setting the ringtone ............................ 335 Deleting ............................................... 326
(NFC) ................................................... 319 Settings ............................................... 334 Notes ................................................... 324
Wireless charging (mobile phone) ........ 129 Read-aloud function ............................ 325
 Index 551

Reading ............................................... 325 Tongue weight ......................................... 443 Extending/retracting the ball neck ...... 248
Replying .............................................. 326 Tool Towing away ............................................. 401
Sending ............................................... 325 see Vehicle tool kit Towing eye
Through-loading feature Top Tether .................................................. 49 Fitting .................................................. 405
see Seat Storage location .................................. 404
Total distance recorder ........................... 259
Tie-down eyes ........................................... 118 Displaying ............................................ 259 Towing methods ...................................... 400
Time Touch Control Track
Manual time setting ............................. 287 On-board computer ............................. 256 Selecting (audio mode) ........................ 351
Setting summer time ........................... 287 Operating ............................................ 279
Setting the time and date automati‐ Traffic announcements
Setting the sensitivity .......................... 279 Activating/deactivating ....................... 362
cally ..................................................... 287
Setting the time zone .......................... 287 Touchpad Traffic announcements volume
Setting the time/date format .............. 287 Operating ............................................ 280 increase
Reading the handwriting recognition Setting ................................................. 362
TIREFIT kit ................................................ 391 aloud ................................................... 281
Declaration of Conformity ..................... 25 Selecting an input language ................. 281 Traffic information .................................. 308
Storage location .................................. 391 Setting the sensitivity .......................... 281 Displaying the traffic map ................... 309
Using ................................................... 392 Switching on/off ................................. 280 Displaying traffic incidents .................. 310
TIREFIT kit Issuing hazard alerts ............................ 311
Tow-away protection Overview ............................................. 308
see Tyre pressure Function ................................................ 89
Tone settings ........................................... 370 Switching on/off ................................... 89 Traffic map
Adjusting the balance/fader ............... 370 see Map
Tow-starting ............................................. 405
Adjusting treble, mid and bass ............ 370 Traffic Sign Assist ................................... 239
Calling up the sound menu .................. 370 Towing a trailer Function/notes ................................... 239
Information .......................................... 370 Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer ......... 249 Setting ................................................. 241
552 Index

System limits ....................................... 239 Transporting Commands (LINGUATRONIC) ............... 274

Trailer hitch Vehicle ................................................ 403 Displaying teletext ............................... 369
Axle load ............................................. 443 Trim element (Care) ................................ 385 Displays in the TV control menu .......... 365
Bicycle rack ......................................... 251 Function/notes (audio language,
Trip subtitles) ............................................. 368
Care .................................................... 383 Menu (on-board computer) .................. 259
Extending/retracting the ball neck ...... 248 Information .......................................... 362
General notes ...................................... 442 Trip computer Inserting the CA module ...................... 369
Notes ................................................... 247 Displaying ............................................ 259 Overview ............................................. 364
Power socket ....................................... 247 Resetting ............................................. 260 Picture settings ................................... 369
Tongue weight ..................................... 443 Trip distance Picture settings overview .................... 369
Displaying ............................................ 259 Setting subtitles .................................. 368
Trailer operation Setting the audio language .................. 368
Active Blind Spot Assist ....................... 242 Resetting ............................................. 260
Showing/hiding the TV menu .............. 365
Active Lane Keeping Assist .................. 244 Trip distance
Teletext overview ................................. 368
Bicycle rack ......................................... 251 see Distance recorder
Notes ................................................... 247 see Trip meter TV channel
Power socket ....................................... 247 Activating/deactivating channel fix ..... 366
Trip meter ................................................ 259
Channel fix .......................................... 366
Trailer stabilisation Turn signal indicator Channel list overview ........................... 367
Function/notes ................................... 193 see Turn signal light EPG (electronic programme guide) ...... 366
Trailer tow hitch Turn signal light ....................................... 133 Overview of favourites ......................... 367
Towing weight ..................................... 443 Changing bulbs (front) ......................... 140 Quick save ........................................... 367
Transferred vehicle data Switching on/off ................................. 133 Selecting from the channel list ............ 365
Android Auto™ .................................... 339 Selecting from the control menu ......... 365
TV .............................................................. 274
Apple CarPlay™ ................................... 339 Selecting from the favourites .............. 365
Activating ............................................ 363
Selecting in the background ................ 366
Transmission position display ................ 171 Calling up the menu (CA module) ........ 370
 Index 553

Storing ................................................. 367 Tyre pressure table ............................... 411 Replacing ............................................. 417
Using a voice tag ................................. 367 Tyre pressure loss warning system Restarting the tyre pressure loss
Two-way radio telephone Function ............................................... 416 warning system .................................... 417
see Mobile phone Restarting ............................................ 417 Restarting the tyre pressure monitor‐
ing system ........................................... 413
Two-way radios ........................................ 429 Tyre pressure monitoring system Selection .............................................. 417
Frequencies ......................................... 430 Checking the tyre pressures ................ 413 Snow chains ........................................ 409
Notes on installation ........................... 429 Function ............................................... 412 Storing ................................................. 421
Transmission output (maximum) ......... 430 Restarting ............................................ 413 TIREFIT kit ........................................... 392
Type approval number (EU) .................... 431 Technical data ...................................... 414 Tyre pressure (Notes) ........................... 410
Types of commands (LINGUATRONIC) ... 268 Tyre pressure table .................................. 411 Tyre pressure loss warning system
Tyre tread ................................................. 409 (function) ............................................. 416
Tyre inflation compressor Tyre pressure monitoring system
see TIREFIT kit Tyre-change tool kit
(function) ............................................. 412
Tyre pressure ........................................... 392 Overview .............................................. 421 Tyre pressure table ............................... 411
Checking (tyre pressure monitoring Tyres Tyre(s) ................................................. 409
system) ................................................ 413 Changing ............................................. 422 Unusual handling characteristics ........ 409
Notes ................................................... 410 Changing hub caps .............................. 422
Restarting the tyre pressure loss Checking the tyre pressure (tyre U
warning system .................................... 417 pressure monitoring system) ............... 413 Units of measurement
Restarting the tyre pressure monitor‐ Fitting .................................................. 425
Setting ................................................. 291
ing system ........................................... 413 Flat tyre ............................................... 390
Tyre pressure loss warning system MOExtended tyres ............................... 390 Unlocking setting ...................................... 65
(function) ............................................. 416 Noise ................................................... 409 USB devices
Tyre pressure monitoring system Notes on fitting .................................... 417 Connecting .......................................... 351
(function) ............................................. 412 Removing ............................................ 425
554 Index

User profile .............................................. 292 Raising ................................................ 423 Vehicle identification number
Creating .............................................. 292 Registration ........................................... 27 see VIN
Importing/exporting ........................... 293 Starting (emergency operation Vehicle identification plate
Options ................................................ 293 mode) .................................................. 163 EU type approval number .................... 431
Selecting ............................................. 292 Starting (mobile phone) ....................... 162 Paint code ........................................... 431
Starting (start/stop button) ................. 162 Permissible axle load ........................... 431
V Switching off (start/stop button) ........ 180 Permissible gross mass ....................... 431
Vehicle .............................................. 162, 163 Unlocking (from inside) ......................... 69 VIN ...................................................... 431
Activating/deactivating standby Unlocking (KEYLESS-GO) ....................... 70
Unlocking (mobile phone) ...................... 69 Vehicle identification plate
mode ................................................... 187 see Model type
Commands (LINGUATRONIC) ............... 276 Ventilating (convenience opening) ......... 81
Vehicle Vehicle key ................................................. 64
Correct use ........................................... 27
Data acquisition .................................... 27 see Locking/unlocking Vehicle key
Diagnostics connection ......................... 26 Vehicle battery ........................................ 396 see Key
Equipment ............................................. 23 Vehicle data Vehicle maintenance
Implied warranty .................................... 27 see ASSYST PLUS
Boot load ............................................. 442
Locking (automatically) .......................... 71 Vehicle tool kit ......................................... 391
Displaying ............................................ 169
Locking (emergency key) ....................... 71 TIREFIT kit ........................................... 391
Roof load ............................................. 442
Locking (from inside) ............................. 69 Towing eye .......................................... 404
Vehicle height ...................................... 441
Locking (KEYLESS-GO) .......................... 70
Vehicle length ...................................... 441 Ventilating
Locking (mobile phone) ......................... 69
Vehicle width ....................................... 441 Convenience opening ............................ 81
Lowering ............................................. 426
Wheelbase ........................................... 441
Parking up ........................................... 187 Ventilation
QR code rescue card ............................. 27 Vehicle dimensions ................................. 441 see Climate control
Qualified specialist workshop ................ 26
 Index 555

Vents Warning triangle 7Seat belt warning lamp flashes .... 510
see Air vents Removing ............................................ 388 7Seat belt warning lamp lights
Video mode .............................................. 354 Setting up ............................................ 389
up ........................................................ 509
Activating ............................................ 352 Warning/indicator lamp
Activating/deactivating full-screen jTrailer hitch warning lamp ............ 511
!ABS warning lamp ....................... 505
mode ................................................... 354 hTyre pressure monitoring sys‐
JBrake system warning lamp
Overview ............................................. 353 tem warning lamp flashes .................... 517
Settings ............................................... 354 ...................................................... 503, 504
?Coolant warning lamp .................. 514 hTyre pressure monitoring sys‐
VIN ............................................................ 431 tem warning lamp lights up .................. 516
Identification plate ............................... 431 ·Distance warning warning lamp ... 510
Seat ..................................................... 431 !Yellow electric parking brake
#Electrical fault warning lamp ........ 513
Windscreen .......................................... 431 indicator lamp is malfunctioning ......... 508
;Engine diagnosis warning lamp .... 513
Visibility Warning/indicator lamps ....................... 501
åESP® OFF warning lamp .............. 507
Demisting the windows ....................... 152 Instrument display (overview) ................ 10
Windscreen heater .............................. 154 ÷ESP® warning lamp flashes ......... 506 Overview .............................................. 501
Voice control system ÷ESP® warning lamp lights up ....... 506 PASSENGER AIR BAG ............................. 41
see LINGUATRONIC 8Fuel reserve warning lamp ........... 513 Warranty .................................................... 27
ÐPower steering system warning Washer fluid
W see Windscreen washer fluid
lamp ..................................................... 512
Warning lamp Washing by hand (care) .......................... 381
see Warning/indicator lamps !Red indicator lamp, electric
parking brake applied .......................... 508 Weather information ............................... 316
Warning system
see Anti-theft protection 6Restraint system warning lamp ... 509 Web browser
Calling up a website ............................ 344
556 Index

Calling up options ............................... 344 Checking the tyre pressure (tyre Wi-Fi
Calling up settings ............................... 344 pressure monitoring system) ............... 413 Overview ............................................. 288
Closing ................................................ 345 Fitting .................................................. 425 Setting ................................................. 288
Deleting Internet favourites ................. 345 Flat tyre ............................................... 390 Setting up a hotspot ............................ 289
Deleting Internet history ...................... 345 MOExtended tyres ............................... 390 Setting up an Internet connection ....... 340
Overview ............................................. 344 Noise ................................................... 409 Window airbag ........................................... 36
Setting Internet favourites ................... 345 Notes on fitting .................................... 417
Removing ............................................ 425 Window lifter ............................................. 79
Website
Calling up ............................................ 344 Replacing ............................................. 417 Windows .................................................... 79
Restarting the tyre pressure loss Closing .................................................. 79
Wheel change .......................................... 427 warning system .................................... 417 Opening ................................................. 79
Fitting a new wheel ............................. 425 Restarting the tyre pressure monitor‐
Lowering the vehicle ........................... 426 Windows (Care) ....................................... 383
ing system ........................................... 413
Preparation ......................................... 422 Rotating ............................................... 420 Windscreen ...................................... 142, 149
Raising the vehicle .............................. 423 Selection .............................................. 417 Demisting ............................................ 149
Removing a wheel ............................... 425 Snow chains ........................................ 409 Infrared reflective ................................ 147
Removing/fitting hub caps .................. 422 Storing ................................................. 421 Replacing the wiper blades .................. 142
Wheel chock ............................................ 421 TIREFIT kit ........................................... 392 Windscreen
Wheel rotation ......................................... 420 Tyre pressure (Notes) ........................... 410 see Windscreen
Tyre pressure loss warning system Windscreen heater .................................. 154
Wheels (function) ............................................. 416
Care .................................................... 383 Tyre pressure monitoring system Windscreen heating
Changing ............................................. 422 (function) ............................................. 412 see Windscreen heater
Changing hub caps .............................. 422 Tyre pressure table ............................... 411 Windscreen washer fluid ........................ 441
Checking ............................................. 409 Unusual handling characteristics ........ 409 Notes ................................................... 441
 Index 557

Windscreen washer system

Topping up ........................................... 379
Windscreen wipers
Replacing the wiper blades .................. 142
Switching on/off .................................. 141
Winter operation
Snow chains ........................................ 409
Winter tyres
Setting the permanent speed limit ...... 202
Wiper blades
Care .................................................... 383
Changing ............................................. 142
Wireless charging
Function/notes ................................... 128
Mobile phone ....................................... 129
Wireless vehicle components
Declaration of Conformity ..................... 24
Workout programme
Overview ............................................... 98
Workshop
see Qualified specialist workshop